ffilrreirg nf
Wihttltr
GREEK LESSONS
PART I. THE GREEK IN ENGLISH PART II. THE GREEK OF XENOPHON
BY
THOMAS DWIGHT GOODELL, PH.D.
ASSISTANT PROFESSOR IN YALE UNIVERSITY
NEW YORK
HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY 1892
COPYRIGHT, 1886, 1889, 1892,
BY
HENRY HOLT & CO.
GIFT
TYPOGRAPHY BY J. S. CUSHING & Co., BOSTON,
PREFACE.
THE two parts of this book, though divided in date of publication by an interval of nearly six years, were planned each for the other, and form together a consistent whole. The Greek in English may still be obtained in separate form, and in the preface of that edition will be found a fuller account of what it aims to accomplish for those who do not intend to carry Greek farther. For one who does intend to continue the study there are obvious advantages in beginning with that part of the language which appears in English. It is easier to get a start in the grammar, if the memory is not forced at the same time to struggle with a vocabulary wholly strange; any study is more interesting, if we see from the beginning its practical use; and even those who may give up the subject at the end of the first term will have no reason to regret as wasted a single hour given to Greek. It is a great gain if the first weeks of a study can thus be made immediately fruitful.
In Part I. the main stress is laid on the relations between Greek and English words, and the grammatical outline includes only the commonest and most regular declensions, and only the present indicative and infinitive of verbs. Con- traction is left untouched, to be taken up with contract verbs, where it is learned most easily. This temporary ignoring of contraction, and the almost complete restriction of the vocabulary to words that appear in English, give a non- Attic
iii
IV PBEFACE.
and unliterary look to the exercises. But in any case uncon- tr acted forms must precede the contracted ; and how much of literary style is there in the disconnected extracts that are usually put before the beginner ? All that can be asked of such exercises at first is that they shall furnish drill in the elements of grammar, be correct, and be no more dreary than is inevitable.
In Part II. the leading idea is, in the words of Professor Gildersleeve, "early contact with the language in mass." But not too early, lest the student be bewildered by the multitude of new and apparently unrelated facts confronting him in every sentence. The aim is to prepare the way adequately, but to shorten the road so far as it can be with safety, by concentrating attention upon groups of essentials, leaving what is less urgent until it presents itself in Xeno- phon. Hence the regular verb in its most common varieties is first presented in the indicative, infinitive, and participles, without which connected discourse is impossible. The order of presentation is so chosen as to enable the pupil to conquer the difficulties in small detachments. Hence also the most common differences of idiom between the two languages are introduced early. The aorist tense, the middle voice, the particles, a word-order differing from that of both English and Latin, — these and like features convey so much of the spirit of the language that they cannot too early become familiar in their simpler uses. The exercises gradually approach the character of connected passages from Xeno- phon, until the Anabasis is begun. From this point refer- ences are made to the two leading Grammars, and the remaining inflections and principles of syntax are introduced in great part through such references. Thus the book
PREFACE. V
changes by degrees from an elementary Grammar with exer- cises to an annotated edition of an author, while at the same time introducing to the larger Grammar. In this way the long step from disconnected exercises to Xenophon is taken almost imperceptibly; and meantime what was first learned as partially isolated groups of facts is slowly put together into a grammatical system, that it may the better be retained for use in reading.
As regards vocabulary, both parts together contain, besides proper names, about 865 Greek words. Of these about 275 furnish one or more English words apiece, as explained in Part I. ; while 610 appear in the first three chapters of the Anabasis. Of the 93 proper names also, all but four are found in the same three chapters, and therefore could not be omitted. Altogether it is believed that, without omit- ting anything that is needed, this book makes less demand upon the beginner than any other course leading to the same point of progress. The large amount of space given to explanation does not increase the amount to be learned. Average classes can easily finish both parts in one year.
The maker of a book like this is bound to show that he has learned from his predecessors. Those acquainted with this branch of school literature will recognize that there is little here that is new. In trying to solve certain definite pedagogical problems the best light within reach has been sought during many years of preparatory and college teach- ing. Among those who have helped me directly, especial thanks are due to Mr. F. S. Morrison, of the Hartford High School, who did me the great favor of reading the manu- script critically in an early state ; to my colleagues, Professor Seymour and Professor Clapp, who have given many valu-
VI PREFACE.
able suggestions ; and to Professor Goodwin, whose kindness enabled me to make the references to the 1892 edition of his Grammar, printing at the same time with this. The assist- ance of Mrs. Goodell also, by counsel and criticism as well as otherwise, has been such as to call for public acknowledg- ment.
YALE UNIVERSITY^ July, 1892.
CONTENTS.
I. THE GREEK IN ENGLISH.
PAGE
INTRODUCTION. Why every one should know some- thing of Greek • • . . . . • 1
Writing, Pronunciation, Transliteration . . ,7 The Article . ....... 14
Nouns : First or A-Declension . . . . . 16
O- Verbs : Present Indicative and Infinitive Active . 22 A-Declension : Second Class of Feminines ... 26
A-Declension: Masculines 29
O- Declension : Masculines and Feminines . . .33
O- Declension : Neuters 39
Additional A- and O-Stems . . . . . .43
Adjectives of the Vowel Declension . . . . 48
O- Verbs : Present Indicative and Infinitive Middle and
Passive . 56
Consonant Declension : Stems in -*- and -y- . . 63 Consonant Declension : Stems in -T-, -£-,-#- . .68
Consonant Declension : Stems in -v- and -p- 74
Consonant Declension : Neuter Stems in -ar- and -cos
HoXvs ,. . .79
Consonant Declension : Stems in -t- and -cv. AWO/JOI 86
Mt-Verbs : Ti%u and AiSoyu 93
Mi-Verbs : lon^u and Kcpawv/u . . . . 100 The Verb 4>iy/u : the Adjective Has . . . » 106
vii
Viil CONTENTS.
II. THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
PAGE
Present, Imperfect, and Aorist Tenses . . .116
The Middle Voice . . 129
The Future System 137
First Passive System . . . . . . .138
First Perfect System . 144
Perfect Middle System 148
The Mt- Aorist . . . . . . . .149
The Infinitive Mode . * > . . . .156
The Participle . . .... . . .159
Contract Verbs . . . . , ... . . . 176
Liquid Verbs . . . ... . .192
Second Passive System 194
Second Aorist . .200
Second Perfect 203
Comparison of Adjectives 204
Classification of Consonants 212
Mute Themes 215
Anabasis I., 1, 1-2 226
The Subjunctive Mode 229
Anabasis L, 1, 3-4 240
The Optative Mode 244
Anabasis L, 1, 5-7 253
The Imperative Mode 257
Anabasis L, 1, 8-11 267
Anabasis I., 2 . .275
Formation of Words 292
Anabasis L, 3 299
Greek-English Vocabulary 319
English-Greek Vocabulary 355
Index of Derivatives 365
PART I. THE GKEEK IN ENGLISH.
THE GREEK IN ENGLISH.
INTRODUCTION.
WHY EVERY ONE SHOULD KNOW SOMETHING OF GREEK.
EVERY person who begins this book is supposed to have already studied Latin a little. Now before going very far in the study of Latin, every student must have begun to notice that a great many Latin words looked like English words. Not exactly like English words, perhaps ; and of course it was found that many more Latin words were quite unlike English, and were rather hard to remember because their forms were new and strange. And yet it was plain that rex, reg-is, was somewhat like reg-al ; and miles, milit-is, like milit-ary ; virgo, virgin-is, like virgin; animal like animal; stella like con- stella-tion ; agricola like agricul-ture ; and a great many other resemblances of the same kind ap- peared as the study continued. In cases like these, too, the English words not only look and sound like the Latin words, but there is plainly some connection in meaning also. For instance,
2 T3L G^EEtf IN ENGLISH.
agriculture is th;3 v/ork of agricolae, farmers ; a constellation is made up of a number of stellae, stars ; templum means temple ; virtuous means having virtus, virtue ; " my paternal house " means the house of my father, pater : and so on. Of course such a great number of resemblances in both form and meaning of words could not possi- bly be accidental. There must be some reasonable explanation ; and the most natural one is that one language inherited or borrowed words from the other. As Latin is some centuries older than English, plainly English must be the borrower in this case. And now, on tracing back the history of our tongue a few centuries, we see beyond question that our explanation is the true one : that there was a time when the people who spoke English — and espe- cially those who wrote English — felt a need of more words, and that they took the words they wanted, in great part, directly from Latin.
One might ask, Why did these people go to the Latin rather than to any other language to borrow words ? Or, indeed, why did they not make their new words out of the stock which English already had, by putting together the old words in new com- binations? For that was the way in which the Germans, for instance, and the Greeks, and the Romans to some extent, made the new words which they wanted. To answer such questions fully would take too much time, and might not be easy; but a part of the reasons can be quickly given.
INTRODUCTION. 3
England had been conquered by the Normans, who spoke a form of French. Although the con- querors could not compel the mass of the people to learn French, yet they were strong enough in numbers and influence to bring into English a great many French words. The English lan- guage, then, at the time we speak of, had become mixed, as the people had; and the new part of the language, like the new part of the people, was French. Now French is mainly derived from Latin — is a sort of corrupted or changed form of Latin : and everybody was used to that kind of Latin words in every-day speech. This circumr stance would of itself naturally open the door a little way for other Latin words. "
Then again the old Latin was at that time a sort of common tongue for all educated people. Everybody who studied at all studied Latin ; everybody who could read at all read Latin ; books were generally written in Latin all over Europe as well as in England. As Latin, then, was so gen- erally understood, a speaker or writer, if he wanted a new or more dignified word, might very natu- rally help himself to a Latin one. This went on until our language, especially the part of it used in serious and thoughtful speech and writing, is quite largely borrowed from the language of the Romans ; and besides, the custom of thus borrow- ing and forming new words has become firmly fixed, and the process is still going on. And this is one great reason why the study of Latin in
4 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH.
school is so necessary. No one can know English well without knowing something about Latin. Every one who begins the study of this book can already partly see, from his or her own experience, the truth of this statement.
And with Greek the case is pretty much the same. Some Greek words have come into English through Latin. For the Romans learned much of their civilization from the Greeks. The very alphabet was taught them by the Greeks, whose literature the Romans translated and imitated ; and along with every art or science partly or wholly learned from Greece — such as painting, sculpture, geometry, medicine, architecture - there came into the language a larger or smaller number of Greek words connected with that branch of knowledge. These words, then, were a part of the Latin language, and were taken thence into English as readily as other Latin words.
Besides this, for several hundred years now Greek and Latin have been studied together a great deal. This was natural, because the civili- zation which our ancestors learned from the Ro- mans was so largely, as was just said, Greek in its origin. People saw that it was worth while to go back to the source, and become acquainted at first hand with the works of that remarkable people with whom the progress of the modern world began. Hence, after the custom of borrowing Greek words through Latin was once fixed, it seemed quite nat-
INTRODUCTION. 5
ural to take a step farther and borrow from the Greek directly. This step was made all the easier because new compounds and derivatives were not freely made in Latin, but in Greek they were made with the greatest freedom. Thus it came about that if Latin could not give just the word desired, nor Greek either, two Greek words would be put together into a new word that no Greek ever heard of. Many of our scientific terms, like thermometer and telephone, are of this last sort.
In all these ways, then, Greek words have come over into English ; and however much we might wish to get them out, we cannot do it. In fact new ones are all the while being brought iri, and our need for new words will probably continue for a long time to be supplied largely from Greek. The only thing for us to do is to learn these words as soon as we can, if we wish to understand what thinking people are talking about. With some of them we make a partial acquaintance pretty early. Arithmetic, geography, poetry, music, telephone, type, dialogue — these all came from Greek ; and all readers of this page have some idea of what these words mean. But one has a better idea of their meaning if he knows also what the Greek words mean. Besides, it is very interesting to follow words back to their origin — to know, for instance, just what is the original meaning of helio- trope, acrostic, George, tropic, crystal, and a host of other words, even though one may have already a pretty good notion of their present significance,
6- THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH.
And then, as one comes to read more, and tries to find out what wise people are thinking, and all sorts of people are talking about, scores of less familiar words taken from Greek present them- selves — some among them not very short — which one must understand clearly in order to know at all what the writer's thought is.
Thus it becomes necessary to learn something of Greek, if we wish to thoroughly know one impor- tant part of our own language. In order to grasp the thoughts which are expressed by some of these words of Greek origin, and in order to tell them to others, we must learn enough of Greek to be- come familiar with those words.
1]
ALPHABET.
I. WRITING, PRONUNCIATION, TRANSLITERA- TIONS
ALPHABET.
1. Greek is written with the following twenty- four letters :
|
Form |
Name. |
Sound. |
||
|
A |
a |
d\<f>a |
alpha |
a in father |
|
B |
/3 |
ftrJTa |
beta |
b |
|
r |
1- |
ryCLLLLU |
% gamma |
ffmgo |
|
A |
8 |
Se'Xra |
delta |
d |
|
E |
€ |
€^T\ |
bv epsilon |
e in met |
|
Z |
t> |
gfjra |
zeta |
dz or z |
|
H |
•n - |
TITO, |
eta |
e in prey |
|
e |
e # |
Brjra |
theta |
th in thin |
|
i |
I |
Icora |
iota |
i in machine |
|
K |
K |
KaTTTT |
a kappa |
k |
|
A |
\ |
Xa/A/8 |
Sa lambda |
I |
|
M |
/* |
^ |
mu |
m |
1 Sufficient explanation — and that often means a great deal of explanation — should always be given in class before the pupils are required to learn a lesson. The alphabet must of course be memorized at the beginning. For the rest of this chapter it will be enough to read it over in class with explanatory comments (a process which may require two or three recitation hours), and then go on to Chapter II. Abun- dant opportunity for practice in writing, pronunciation, and transliteration will be furnished by the declensions and exercises.
THE GREEK IN ENGLISH.
[2-
Form.
N
a o n p
2 T
v
e
o
7T
P O- 9
T
V
Name.
vv nu
%l xi
o filfcpdv omicron
irl pi
pa) rho
(riy/jLa sigma
rav tau
•^LT
fl O)
upsilon
phi chi psi omega
Sound.
n x o in obey
P r
s in see
t
French u
German u
ph
German ch
ps
o in no
a. At the end of a word 5 is written ; elsewhere, a-.
2. In ancient times only the capitals were used ; but as writers tried to make the letters in the easiest way, they gradually changed the capitals to the smaller forms, and now both are used. It was said in the Introduction that the Romans learned the alphabet (a\c/>a /S^ra, or A B C) from the Greeks. This occurred at a time when some of the capitals had slightly different forms from those here given ; and our alphabet was borrowed from the Latin, with some changes. Hence many of our letters are like the Greek, but not all.
a. By marking in the list and writing out a few times those Greek letters which are unlike the English equivalents, the pupil can memorize them without much difficulty. Copy- ing out the Greek names of the letters in Greek characters will also be useful. Observe that the Greek name of each
5] PRONUNCIATION. 9
letter begins with the sound of that letter. Observe also the force of our word delta from the shape of the capital letter, and how it happens that the phrase " alpha and omega" means the beginning and the end, and that iota means a r< /•</ small quantity. (Jot is a corrupted form of iota.)
3. Every letter (except i subscript ; see 5, 6) is sounded : there are no silent letters.
4. Of the vowels, e and o are always short in quantity — that is, were pronounced by the Greeks in less time than the long vowels; 77 and co are always long — that is, had more time given them in pronunciation. The others, a, i, v, are some- times long and sometimes short. In this book the long a, I, v will be printed with a straight mark over the letter ; short a, i, v will be left unmarked.
5. The diphthongs (Si-00oy7<M double sounds; see 96, 1) are
(ll, €1, Ot, dl', 6V, Of,
a, j7, p, VL.
a. Originally the sounds of the diphthongs were made by simply pronouncing the separate vowels closely together, in one syllable. But some of the diphthongs are not usually sounded so now. We may pronounce
ai like i in fine, av like ow in now,
ei like ei in rein,1 €v like eu in feud,
01 like oi in oil, ov like ou in you,
vi like we.
a, rjy q> are pronounced like a, w, a>, as if t were not there.
1 Many, however, pronounce ct like ei in height,
10 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [6—
b. This silent i, written below the other letter, is called i subscript (Latin sub-scriptus, written below). When the first vowel of a diphthong containing i subscript is written as a capital, L is written on the line : HIAHI = *£lt,8$ = cJSf;.
6. The consonants are pronounced like the corre- sponding English consonants, with two or three exceptions, as follows :
a. Gamma (7) before K, 7, ^, or £ is sounded like n in anger, ink, and is represented by n in English words from the Greek : ay/cvpa (Latin an- cora), anchor. When sounded in this way, 7 is called 7 nasal (Latin nasus, nose), because all the breath used in making the sound comes out through the nose. For the same reason p and v are called nasals.
b. Chi (^) is now pronounced like German eh, and English has no corresponding sound. It is between the sound of Jc and that of h. One should begin by pronouncing it as h, and gradually learn to roughen the sound sufficiently.
c. Zeta (£) is pronounced like dz.
BREATHINGS.
7. With every initial vowel is written one or the other of two marks called breathings. The rough breathing (f) is pronounced like our h ; the smooth breathing (') is not pronounced at all, but merely shows that the vowel to which it belongs has no h sound before it. These breathings are written over a small vowel, but at the left of a
9] BREATHINGS. — SYLLABLES. —ACCENT. 11
capital: &pd (Latin hora) season, "OfjLTjpo? Homer. Initial p also has the rough breathing: prjr&p (rhetor*) a public speaker. Double p is sometimes written pp, and is represented by rrh in English : Kardppov? catarrh.
a. A diphthong takes the breathing over the second vowel: avros self. But t, subscript does not take the breathing : "Ai&rjs Hades, wSi; song.
SYLLABLES.
8. Every vowel or diphthong, with or without one or more consonants, makes a separate syllable : v-yt-€i-a health. The last syllable of a word is called the ultima ; the next to the last, the penult ; the syllable before the penult, the antepenult.
ACCENT.
9. The accented syllable in Greek is always marked, and for this purpose three sighs, called accents, are used. These are : the acute accent,
the circumflex accent, * TO> the grave accent,
These different accents mark differences in the ancient Greek pronunciation, but all are now commonly pronounced alike.
a. These accents are written over the vowel of the accented syllable ; they are written over the second vowel of a diph- thong, unless the second vowel is t subscript. If the vowel has a breathing also, the acute and the grave are placed at the right of the breathing ; the circumflex is placed above the breathing : o /u*pov, of, o>. If the accented vowel is a cap- ital, the accent, as well as the breathing, stands just before it : "
12 THE GHEES: IN ENGLISH. [10—
10. a. The acute accent can stand only on one of the last three syllables ; the circumflex can stand only on one of the last two syllables, and only on a long vowel or diphthong.
NOTE. — When a vowel has the circumflex accent, there- fore, it must be long, and the mark of length will be omitted in this book.
b. If the ultima has a long vowel or diphthong, the acute cannot stand on the antepenult nor the circumflex on the penult.
11. The general rules of accent, accordingly, are :
(1) A word with short vowel in the ultima, if accented
a. on the antepenult, has the acute: Statra.
b. on a short vowel in the penult, has the acute : LOTTOS.
c. on a long vowel or diphthong in the penult, has the cir- cumflex : yXcucr(ra.
d. on the ultima, has the acute : 0eog.
(2) A word with a long vowel or diphthong in the ultima, if accented
a. on the penult, has the acute : o-o<£id, yAwcrcn/s.
b. on the ultima, sometimes has the acute and sometimes the circumflex : <£a>vry, <^>(ov^5.
12. Final -at and -ot, although long, have the effect of short vowels on the accent of the penult and antepenult :
13. An acute on the ultima changes to the grave when fol- lowed by another word in connected discourse : ryv, but rrjv This is almost the only use of the grave accent.
TRANSLITERATION.
14. Transferring words from a foreign alphabet into our own — respelling them in our own letters — is called transliterating them (Latin trans, across, and liter a, letter). The natural way of doing this would seem to be simple. And for the most part the transliteration of Greek words into
141 TRANSLITERATION. 13
'«
English is in fact simple ; but a few points need especial notice.
In the Introduction it was said that some Greek words have come into English through Latin, hav- ing been first borrowed by the Latins. Nearly all these words had been Latinized, that is, sufficiently changed in form to seem at home among other Latin words, before they were Anglicized or taken into English. Thus a fashion was set, as we might say, to be observed by any later comers from Greek into English. Again, not only were Greek and Latin studied together, but for a long time Greek was studied only through Latin. The Greek gram- mars were written in Latin, and in Greek vocabu- laries and dictionaries the definitions were given in Latin. Thus the fashion of treating borrowed Greek words as the Romans did — that is, of Latin- izing them — was firmly established. At present this custom is not so closely followed with new words ; but generally, in tracing out connections between Greek and English, we are obliged to notice what changes are due to this Latinizing process. All these changes will be fully illus- trated, later, in connection with the derivatives in which they are found ; but for convenience the following are summed up here :
a. Zeta (f), though pronounced dz, is repre- sented by z.
b. Kappa (K) is usually represented by <?, which in Latin had the sound of our &, although in later borrowings the more natural k is often used.
14 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [15—
-*
c. Upsilon (u), if not part of a diphthong, is represented by y. When the Romans did most of their borrowing, v had a sound between that of i in machine and u in rule (nearly the sound of French u or German #), and that sound had no represen- tative in the Latin alphabet. Therefore the Latins transferred the Greek letter itself, and T is the origin of our letter Y. Of course the sound of our y is very different ; and after spelling the word in the Latin way, we pronounce it in the English way.
d. Chi (^) is represented by ch, which, however, we generally pronounce in English like Jc.
e. The diphthong ai is represented by ae, which in Latin had nearly the same sound with ai.
f. The diphthong ei, usually becomes i, sometimes e ; for in the Roman period the pronunciation of €4 changed from that of Latin e to that of Latin i.
ff. The diphthong OL becomes oe, which in Latin had nearly the same sound as 01. To represent better our own pronunciation, this oe is often changed to e.
h. The diphthong ov becomes u in words that have come through Latin, and ou in words taken from Greek directly.
i. Iota subscript is omitted in transliteration.
Jc. It was mentioned above (7) that p becomes rh, and pp becomes rrh.
II. THE ARTICLE.
15. In Greek, as in Latin, nouns, pronouns, ad- jectives, and verbs are inflected; that is, their
18]
THE ARTICLE.
15
forms are varied according to their relations to other words in the sentence. For example, leav- ing other parts of speech till later, nouns or sub- stantives are declined to denote case and number; and adjectives, including the article 6, 17, TO ?//«', are declined to denote gender also.
16. Greek has
a. Three genders: masculine, feminine, and neuter.
b. Three numbers : the singular for one object, the plural for more than one, the dual for two.
c. Five cases : the nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, and vocative.
17. The definite article 6, 17, TO the is declined in three genders and numbers, and in all the cases but the vocative. As the article may be used with any noun, it will be best to take this up before the nouns. It is declined as follows :
18.
|
M. |
F. |
N. |
|
|
Sing. Nom. Gen. |
i o TOO |
• |
TO TOO |
|
Dat. Ace. |
Tft) TOV |
#» T1JV |
TCO TO |
|
Dual N. A. |
TO) |
Tft) |
TO) |
|
G. D. |
rOLV |
rolv |
rolv |
|
Plu. Nom. |
ol |
at |
rd |
|
Gen. |
T&V |
T&V |
ra>v |
|
Dat. |
T019 , |
rat? |
TOtS |
|
Ace. |
TOU9 |
£ |
rd |
16 THE &REEK IN ENGLISH. [19—
19. The forms 6, ^, 01, at (with a few other words of one syllable) have no accent of their own, but lean forward upon the following word, and hence are called proclitics (jrpo for- ward and /cAii/co lean). The article the in English, unless emphasized, is a proclitic, as are many other words. Thus when we say, " The boy has a jack-knife; he whittles," the, a, and he have no separate accent, but lean forward on the following words, very much as Greek proclitics do.
It will assist in remembering the forms to note that all genitives and datives have the circumflex, and that all other forms (except the proclitics) have the acute. In the dual number, which was not much used, the nominative and accusative of all genders are alike, and also the genitive and dative of all genders.
NOTE. — From this point on, unremitting practice is neces- sary both in writing and in reciting paradigms. In preparing these the pupil should first copy out a small group of forms (say the singular only, or even less), taking especial pains about the written accent and pronouncing each form aloud; then should close the book and write the same group from memory. Next let him compare his work with the printed forms, correct all mistakes, and try again; and so on, until the work can be written correctly from memory. Then let him take another group of forms, not so large but that one or two trials will enable him to master it; finally let the whole paradigm be taken together. The first attempts may perhaps be discouraging, because the alphabet, though really differing so little from our own, is unfamiliar. But a few days of careful practice will make a vast difference, and soon an entire paradigm can be mastered at one trial.
III. NOUNS: FIRST OK A-DECLENSION.
20, The stem of a noun is that part to which the case-endings are added in declension. Noun-stems (and also adjective-stems) are classified according
23] NOUNS: FIRST OR A-DECLENSION. 17
as they end in (1) a, (2) o, (3) a consonant or i or v. These three classes of stems are declined in three slightly different ways, named from the last letter of the stem:
The A- Declension, or First Declension.
The O- Declension, or Second Declension.
The Consonant-Declension, or Third Declension.
21. All stems ending in -a- belong to the a-declen- sion. The feminines have no case-ending in the nominative singular. The following are examples:
22. i) (o>pa-) 1) (#ea-)
season sight head
Sing. Nom. $ &pd Gen. T?}? a>pds
Dat. rrj &pd Oed K€(j>a\fj
Ace. rrjv &pd-v Qid-v
Voc. & &pd Oed
Dual N. A.V. TO) &pd Bed tce<f>a\a
G. D. roiv oypaiv 0eaiv K€<f>a\aw
Plu. Nom. al &pai 0eai
Gen. TWV wpwv
Dat. rat? &pai<;
Ace. r«9 &pd$ 0eds
Voc. w oipat ^eat
a. For the accent of TTJV, TO>, ras, see 13. For <5p<u, see 12 and 11, (1) c. (In wpotv and wpcus, cu is not final.)
b. With the vocative the interjection & 0 is often, though not always, used. It should not usually be translated.
23. All words of the a-declension are declined
18 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [24—
alike in the dual and plural. In the singular all feminines originally had -a in the nominative, and were declined like &pd. But in many words this -a has been shortened in the nominative, accusa- tive, and vocative, singular. Hence there are two classes of feminines. In this section we take up only the
24. First Class of Feminines. — These have a long vowel, a or 77, in the last syllable throughout the singular.
a. Long a is retained after e, L, or p ; otherwise it is changed to 77 throughout the singular.
Accent of Nouns.
25. The accent of a noun remains, in all the forms, on the same syllable as in the nominative singular, or as near that syllable as the general rules of accent (10, 11, 12) allow.
26. An accented ultima in general takes the acute ; but
27. In the genitive and dative of all numbers a long ultima, if accented, takes the circumflex.
28. Further, in the a-declension only, the genitive plural always has the circumflex on the last syllable.
a. This is because the stem-vowel -d and the ending -cov were contracted to one syllable, so that -dcov became -on/.
29. Vocabulary.1
r) afc/jitf, -779 summit, prime (acme).
'Y] fiordvn, -779 grass, herb (botan-y).
1 It will assist in learning the vocabularies to read over carefully, in connection with each one, the corresponding section of Notes on Derivatives, at the end of each chapter; those notes, however, should not be required to be learned until after the preceding Exercises have been translated.
SO] NOUNS: FIRST OR A-DECLENSION. 19
77 777, 7%, 777, 7771; earth, land (geography).
ypdffxo I write (geo-graph-y).
eV,1 prep. w. dat. only, in.
eya* I have.
77 77/877, -775 youth (Hebe, goddess of youth).
77 6edt -£9 sight, show (thea-tre).
77 tce<t>a\ij, -779 head (cephal-ic).
iraKiVj adv., again, back (palinode).
7re/H, prep. w. gen., about, concerning.
ri, pron., what?
77 (u^rfy -779 song, ode.
77 &pd, -£9 season, appointed time (hour).
30. Exercises.
I. Translate into English.
1. T7}9 &5S779.2 2. eV XT} 777. 3. rals ftordvais T779 7779. 4. TT)I/ /Bordvrjv €%co. 5. fce<f)a\r)v e^o). 6. T63 ypd(f>(t) ;4 7. rt ypdcfxi) irepl r&v f3orav£)v ; 8. Trept rr}9 7^79 ypd<f)(i) (ge-o-graph-y). 9. Trepl TWI/ wpwv ypd<f)a) (hor-o-graph-y). 10. eV TT} 77/877 T779
7779.
II. Translate into Greek.
1. In the prime of youth. 2. I write songs in the season of youth. 3. I write about the season of the herbs. 4. I write the song again (palin-ode). 5. What have I in my (Greek idiom in the) head
1 Proclitic : see 19.
2 Unless other directions are given, the cases may be trans- lated as in Latin.
8 Tt never changes its acute accent to the grave.
4 The mark of interrogation in Greek is like our semicolon.
20 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [31—
(en-cephal-on) ? 6. I write an ode about the show.
31. Notes on Derivatives.1
1. Hints have been given as to a few English derivatives from words in the above vocabulary. For instance, acme comes to us with only the change of K to c (see 14, 5), and its meaning is about the same as that of ateptf.
2. Botan-ist and botan-ic remind one at once of botan-y, and usually we need not stop to mention more than one member of a family in which the family resemblance is so plain. We shall see later that the endings -ic and -1st are themselves of Greek origin, -ic making adjectives and -1st making nouns
1 The entire class should have ready access to at least one unabridged English dictionary, as the Imperial, Webster's or Worcester's. Before leaving a chapter all English deriva- tives — the words partly or wholly in full-face type — should be looked up, and the connection between their present mean- ings and the Greek originals clearly understood. In many cases this connection is explained in this book ; but often it is only hinted at and left to be brought out in class. This course has been followed because a little independent work on the part of the scholar, constantly directed and aided by suggestions and questions from the teacher, is the best possible method of arousing interest and fixing indelibly in the pupil's mind just those facts which it is the object of this book to teach. To repeat, then, constant use of the dictionary, with constant help and questioning on the part of the teacher, must on no account be neglected.
With some classes it may be thought best to omit, until review, a few derivatives whose connection with their primi- tives is not easily made clear,
31] NOUNS: FIRST OB A-DECLENSION. 21
that denote persons (see 78, 11, and 86, 11). We shall also find that often, as in botan-y, the final vowel of a Greek stem is dropped off, for ease of pronunciation, in derivatives or compounds.
3. Ge-, meaning earth or land, appears in several words, such as ge-o-logy (see 50, II., 5), ge-o-metry (see 57, 4), apo-gee (see 57, 1). The -0- in ge-o- graphy, geology, horography, seems to have no busi- ness there ; yet we shall find that the same sylla- ble has been put between the two parts of a large number of compounds, in which it has no more meaning than a hyphen. (See 51, 1.)
4. Oraph-ite is a substance used in pencils for writing, the syllable -ite being our remnant of an ending which denotes merely a vague connection. (Compare dynam-ite, 94.) Oraph-ic, in some of its uses, goes back to another meaning of ypd<f>co, namely, draw or paint. We shall meet the syl- lable -graph- frequently. For -gram, see 91, 4.
5. En-cephal-on, a more learned and scientific name for brain, shows the change of K to c, and shows also the form cephal- which tce<f>a\ij takes in several scientific words, such as cephal-ic, pertain- ing to the head, a-cephal-ous f see 60, 3, i), headless, cephal-algia (see 110, 2), headache.
6. HaXip appears in palin-drome (see 51, 3), palin- genesis (see 96, 3), and palim-psest. In palim-psest (jra\i^^(Trov) the m takes the place of n for ease of pronunciation before a jt?-sound ; the second part is from a verb, i/rao>, meaning to rub. Parch- ment was costly, and hence was often used a second
22 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [32—
time, the old writing being rubbed off again ; but this process still left faint traces of the older writ- ing, and some very valuable ancient books have been recovered from palimpsests.
7. Several rather common words contain cJSr; as one element; such are mel-ody (see 100, 8), par-ody (see 46, 5), pros-ody, and rhaps-ody ; and also, with a change which obscures the form of oJS^, trag-edy (rpaywSld, Latin tragoedia), and com-edy (fccojiJLcp&id, Latin comoedia). The significance of the first part of rhaps-ody, trag-edy, and com-edy is uncertain.
8. From &pa was taken the Latin hora; and from hora, through a French form, is derived the English hour. Then directly from Greek we have (with the inserted hyphen-like -0-) hor-o-loge (see 51, 5, a), hor-o-scope (see 74, 9), hor-o-meter (see 57, 4).
IV. fl- VERBS: PRESENT INDICATIVE AND
INFINITIVE ACTIVE. 32. Present Indicative Active.
Sing. 1 ypd(f)co I write
2 rypdfais you write
3 ypdfat, he (she, if) writes
Dual 2 ypd^erov you (two) write
3 rypd<f)€Tov they (two) write
Plu. 1 ypdfofjLev we write
2 .ypd<j>€T6 you write
3 ypd<j>ov(Ti, they write
Present Infinitive Active, to write
35] H- VERBS. 23
33. Most Greek verbs are conjugated in the present tense like ypd<f>ci), and are called, from the ending of the first form, co-verbs. Besides the singular and plural they have a second and third person dual, but no first person dual.
a. The accent of the verb, with but few exceptions, stands as far from the end of the word as possible ; that is, on the penult, if the ultima has a long vowel or diphthong, otherwise on the antepenult, if there is an antepenult.
34. Vocabulary.
d/cova) hear (acon-stic).
e5, adv., well (en-phony).
17 UTTO/PUZ, -a? history, story.
fjMvOdvco (root /-uifl) learn (math-ematics).
TI fjLrj%ainj, -% machine (mechanic).
ou, ov/c, ov%,1 adv., not.
17 (TXO\IJI -779 (1) leisure, (2) school.
o-^oXafo) (fr. <TXO\IJ) have leisure.
TT/X*, adv., at a distance, far (tele-phono).
77 </>o)i^7, -779 sound, voice (tele-phone).
(f)coveci) (fr. $0)1/17) sound (phon-ograph). hand (chir-ography).
35. Exercises. I. Translate into English. 1. T?7 iurixavy2 TTJ\€ rrjv (fxDvrjv (tele-phone)
1 Proclitic (see 19). The form ov is used before a consonant, OVK before a smooth breathing, ov\ before a rough breathing.
2 Translate, By means of, etc. The dative is used in Greek, like the Latin ablative, to denote means or cause.
24 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [36—
dfcovo/Jiev. 2. TI fMj%avr) ra? <£eom9 ypdfai (phono- graph). 3. ev rfj cr%o\fi rj %elp ypdfaiv (chir-0- graphy) pavOdvei. 4. ov cr^oXafe^? ev rrj 5. TI o)Sr) ev (frcoveei (eu-phony). 6. ov d/coveiv TTJV i(7TOpidv* 7. TL /JLavOdvere irepl 8. al cJSai ou^: ev (j>coveov<ri,.
II. Translate into Greek.
1. The machine writes at-a-distance (tele-graph). 2. They have-leisure in youth. 3. What are you writing? 4. What do you hear? 5. They are writing the history (histori-o-graph-er) of the ma- chines. 6. They have herbs. 7. We are writing the sounds (phon-o-graphy). 8. We hear songs in the season of the herbs. 9. Are you learning the song again ?
36. Notes on Derivatives.
1. Acoustic, pertaining to hearing, is a clipped form of d/covo-rifcd?, an adjective with an ending which we shall meet frequently. The addition of an -s gives the noun acoustics, the science of sounds, as heard.
2. The adverb ev appears in the form eu-, with the force of well, easy, good, in a considerable number of words besides eu-phony. (See 51, 5, a ; 60, 1.)
3. Story is merely a corrupted form of history, but has come to have a slightly different meaning. We speak of such forms as corrupted (literally spoiled), because at first the change was simply a
36] fl- VERBS. 25
mistake, or blunder, due to carelessness or igno- rance; but after a while the new form became common, accepted by every one, and general good usage makes a word entirely respectable and cor- rect. These slight changes of form, followed often by a variation of meaning, are no small part of the growth and development of a language, and the process is all the time going on.
4. Mrjxavij also is represented by two different forms. First it became in Latin machina; this became machine in French, from which the word was taken into English. Then more directly from Greek we have mechan-ic (/t^aw/to?), mechan-ism, with various derivatives and compounds.
5. A special meaning of tr^oX?; was leisure de- voted to study; this gave the Latin schola, from which we get schol-ar (Latin scholar is) and the corrupted form school Scholastic (o-^oXao-r^o?), is from cr;£oXafa>. Again, from o-^oX?/ is derived (with a changed but clearly related meaning) cr-)(o\iov an explanation, comment, scholium. Scholium has the Latinized ending, ~um for -oi/. Finally, from o-^oX/oi/ is derived scholiast (o-^oXmo-r^?), a commentator, especially one of those otherwise unknown commentators whose explanations are found on the margins of old Greek and Latin manuscripts.
6. Phonetics (from <f>cov>fy is the science of spoken sounds, or the sounds of the human voice, and is thus to be distinguished from acoustics (see 36, 1). Phonetic (<£&> 1/77x1*09), is the corresponding adjective.
26
THE GREEK IN ENGLISH.
[37-
V. A-DECLENSION : SECOND CLASS OP FEMININES.
37.
77
•) V
ball
77
tongue
rr
r<f)aipa
Sing. Nom. 77
Gen. T Dat. Ace.
Voc. &
Dual N. A.V. TOO afyaipd
G. D. TO£I> a<palpaiv
Plu. Nom. at
Gen. TWI> Dat. Ace.
Voc. &> crcfralpcu
mode of life Siaira
Bialry
Staira-v
Slaira
Siaird Siairaiv
<yXwo"(7a6 §laiTai SICUTWV
Siairai
38. The Second Class of Feminines of the a- declension shorten long a of the stem to short a in the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular only. In all other respects these nouns are like those of the First Class (see 22, 23, 24, a, 25-28).
a. In all the nouns of this class the accent is recessive, that is, stands as far from the end as the general rules of accent allow.
39. Vocabulary.
j 7\(S<7era (or y\a)TTC(,), -779 77 §latTay -779 77 /jiovcra, -779 77 jAovo-i/ctj, -779
(1) ^ (2) j (glossa-ry).
mode of life (diet). Muse.
music,
41] A-DECLENSION : SECOND CLASS. 27
make (poet). 77 a(f)aipa, -d? ball, sphere.
77 vyteia, -d? health, good health (Hygeia).
-d9 she-goat (chimaera).
40. Exercises. I. Translate into English.
1. "E^owrt <r<f)alpav. 2. 77 ^i/jLaipa rrjv fjiov<rt,/cr)v d/covei. 3. al /Jiova-ai fjiovcri/crjv 7roi€ov<ri. 4. ri €<m(y)1 (is) 77 Siaira TT}? xifjialpd? ; 5. 17 777 ec <r<f>aipa. 6. at' /Z-OVOYU ou fJLavOdvov(Ti ra? a>So9> oiSe (wor) at ;£//Aat/>at TO? a58a9. 7. vyieiav e'xop.ev ev ij/3y.
n. Translate into Greek.
1. The she-goat by her (Greek idiom 6y £fo; compare 35, I., 1) mode-of-life has good-health. 2. We are learning about the mode-of-life of the muses. 3. We hear the language of the muse. 4. They are writing music. 5. The language sounds well. 6. He is making a ball. 7. Do you hear the music of the spheres ?
41. Notes on Derivatives.
1. rXwrra appears, in the sense of language, in poly-glot (poly- means many; see 91, 12). In later Greek yX&oraa came to mean an obsolete or foreign
1 After €<m and also after any word ending in -o-t, v is often added, whether the next word begins with a vowel or with a consonant. This is called v movable.
28 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [41—
word, requiring explanation, and then an explana- tion given for such a word. In this sense we have the form gloss, and the derivative glossary. The name <y\u>TTL$, from y\a)rra, was given (probably from the resemblance in shape) to the mouthpiece of a musical instrument like our clarinet; and Greek physicians applied the same term to the narrow upper end of the windpipe or larynx (see 76) ; the latter is the meaning of glottis.
2. The muses were goddesses of literature and the arts, and everything over which they presided was included under ^OVO-IKI'I. Later, /jLovo-ifcrj was restricted to the art of music, as we understand that term.
3. Henri-sphere has for its first part rj^i-, a Greek prefix meaning half, related to the Latin prefix semi-, and never used as a separate word. Hemi- forms part of many English scientific terms. In sphere and its derivatives, ae, the Latin equivalent of ai>, has been replaced with e. The change was made because the letter e represents more simply the sound which was given to ae in the English pronunciation of Latin. So in diet from Slaira, and in chimera.
4. 'Tyleia was personified as a goddess of health, Hygeia, the English word representing the later shortened Greek form. From the same word we have hygiene and hygienic.
5. The chimaera was a fabulous fire-spouting monster, with a goat's body, a lion's head, and a serpent's tail. Hence the word is often used for
43]
k-LECLENSlON : MASCULINES.
29
any imaginary object of fear. It is usually spelled chimera, e taking the place of ae, as in sphere and diet. The adjective chimerical often does not imply fear, but only that the thing is fanciful and improbable or impossible.
42.
VI. A-DECLENSION : MASCULINES.
o (tcpiTd-) 6 (ySopea-) o (TroXrra-)
|
judge |
north-wind |
citizen |
||
|
Sing. Nom. |
r 0 |
tcpt,Ttj-<: |
fioped-s |
7ToX*T17-9 |
|
Gen. |
TOV |
KplTOV |
ftop4ov |
TroXfrou |
|
Dat. |
T$3 |
/CplTTj |
fioped |
TToXtTT) |
|
Ace. |
TO V |
Kpt,Tl')-V |
Poped- v |
7TOX/T77-J/ |
|
Voc. |
& |
/CplTO, |
ftoped |
TToXtra |
|
DualN.A.V. |
TO) |
Kptra |
TroX^ra |
|
|
G.D. |
TOIV |
/cptTaiv |
TToXfTOlV |
|
|
Plu. Nom. |
01 |
tepiTat |
TroXZrat |
|
|
Gen. |
T&V |
KplT&V |
TroXZrwj/ |
|
|
Dat. |
rofc |
KpiTals |
TroXfrais |
|
|
Ace. |
\ |
KpiTas |
7ToXtT(Z9 |
|
|
Voc. |
0 |
KpiTai |
TTOXtTttt |
43. Masculines of the a-declension are like the f eminines, except in the following particulars :
a. They take the case-ending -9 in the nomina- tive singular.
b. The genitive singular ends in -ov.
c. Nouns in -TT/<? have in the vocative singu- lar -rd.
30 THE GKEEK lit ENGLISH.
44. Vocabulary.
Pd\\a> throw.
6 /3opea9, -ot> north-wind (Boreas).
6 &e<T7roT?79, -ou1 master, owner of slaves (despot). Kpivw judge.
o Kpirris, -ov judge (critic).
•jrapd, prep. w. dat., at the side of, beside (£3X&-ffrapK). Trapa- ySaXXca compare (literally, throw beside).
( poet (literally, maker, from
O 7T0497T779, -OV , N J
( 7TOL60)).
rj Trapa- /3oX?;, -979 comparison, illustration, parable. 6 7ro\tT?79, -ou citizen (polit-ics).
ep, prep. w. ace., beyond (bypeY-criticafy.
outdo, excel (literally, throw be- ' v J '
f r >o A / « i excess, extravagance (literally, rj v7T€p-fio\r), -779 ] , .. ^ i. i. i
( over-shooting), hyperbole.
45. Exercises. I. Translate into English. 1. CH ^el/o roi) TToXtrov /3a\\ei rrjv
2. Tra/m r^ cJS?} ypd<f)o/ji€v (para-graph)
3. o Sec77TOT7;9 oi or^oXa£ei ftd\\€iv rrjv
4. T^I> 7?}^ a-fyaipa 7rapa/3d\\o/Jiev. 5. <w
oi^: dfcoveis rrjv rov Kpurov (frcovijv ; 6. ot iroKlrai OVK atcovovcri rrjv 7rapa/3o\rjv. 7. ra> Kpira rypdfarov
7T€pl T^9 TCOZ/ 7TO\2TO)V V7Tep^O\^. 8. Tt UTTep TOZ^
ftopedv (hyper-borean) eVrt (is, Latin es^) ;
1 ACOTTOTT;? draws the accent back in the vocative singular :
46] A-DECLENSION : MASCULINES. 31
n. Translate into Greek.
1. The citizens are throwing ball again. 2. The master compares the head of the poet to a ball. 3. Have we a master ? 4. Citizens, you hear the voice of the judges. 5. We do not judge the citizens. 6. They throw the ball beyond the master. 7. We are comparing the judges. 8. Citizen, you are learning the language of the poets.
46. Notes on Derivatives.
1. From the root of tcpivco and Kpnris is derived the adjective tcpinicos capable of judging, which gives us critic, critical, criticise, criticism ; also tcpi- Trjptov criterion, and Kpia^ judgment, trial, which gives us crisis.
2. From TroXtrrj? we have not only politics, po- litical, politic ; but also (through TroXrre/o, -a? ad- ministration, form of government) polity, policy, and the still farther shortened police.
3. The derivatives of ySaXXw show the original form of the root with one X, and often with a changed to o, as in 7rapaj3o\ij and i/TrepySoX?;. In parable the o, even, has been dropped, but the adjective parabolical is nearer to the Greek form. Another compound of /3aXXa> is &a-/3aXXa> slander, in which the force of the separate parts is not very clear. From Sia-fidXXco come SiafioXij slander and Smy8oXo<? slanderer. This latter was used especially as a title of Satan, and has been corrupted into devil; but, as with parabolical, the
32 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [46—
adjective diabolical was taken more directly from the Greek form.
4. Poet, poetry, and poesy come to us through the Latin forms poeta and poesis, which have lost the i of the original Greek form. In Greek itself, however, Troiea) and its derivatives were often written and pronounced 7roeo>, etc., without i.
5. In a par-ody (jraptoSla, from Trapd and cJS^ ; see 29 and 31, 7) the words of some writing are altered just enough to give them a laughable turn, while they still remind one of the original. Thus in reading the parody one seems to hear the origi- nal, usually a poem, sounding beside it. Para- graph was used at first to denote a mark or note written beside the page, in the margin. Now it denotes especially the sign ^[, used to denote a break in the composition, and the beginning of a new line farther than usual from the margin ; and, finally, the word stands for a section or division thus begun. Para- is an element in many scien- tific words.
6. The preposition virep has the meaning beyond in a few English derivatives; thus hyper-borean, literally beyond the north-wind, and so in the ex- treme north. Secondly, in a number of derivatives the element hyper- denotes an extreme degree, or too much, of something, as in hyper-critical. (Com- pare with this the related Latin word super-, as in super-natural, super-sensitive.)
49] O -DECLENSION : MASCULINES. 33
VII. O-DECLENSION: MASCULINES AND FEMININES.
47. 6 (ai/0/Ht>7TO-) O (/Z1700-) f) (680-)
man tale road
Sing. Nom. avOpayrro-s i*v0o-<; oSo'-?
Gen. dvOpcoTTOv p,v9ov 6Sov
ACC. aV0pQ)7TO-V JJLV00-1' 6S6-V
VOC. aV0p(O7T€ fAV0€ 6Se
Dual N. A. V. dv0pd)7ra) /JLV0Q) 68(0
G. D. dv0p(iyjrotv pv0oiv oSolv
Plu. N. V. dv0pc&7rot, fiv0OL oSoi
Gen. CtV0p(t)7TG)V U,vO(i)V OuWV
Dat. dv0pa)7rois
Ace. dv0p(t)7rov$
48. All stems of the second declension end in o. Masculines and feminines x are declined alike.
a. The rules for the accent of nouns, given in 25-27, apply to all declensions.
49. Vocabulary.
6 avOpoyrros, -ov man (anthropo-logy). 6 $/o5, -ov life (bio-graphy).
yt,yvd)<TKQ) perceive, learn to know (Gno-stic).
read (originally know again,
ava-ywvotxr/ca) . .
( re-cognize).
6 &po//,o9, -of a running, race (palm-drome).
1 The number of feminine -o- stems is not large, and only one, 68os, is used in The Greek in English.
34 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [50—
icai and.
( (1) order. (2) ornament, (3) the
Of 1 • 77X N
( universe, world (cosmos). /coo- flea) adorn (cosmetic).
\eyco speak, tell.
< ^ i s? ( (1) word, (2) £aZ&, discourse,
o \0709, -ou (fr. ) v ' \ y ':
~/\ \ (o) account, description (an-
\67G>) I ^ i \
V thropo-logy).
o /jivOos, -ov tale, legend, myth.
f r^/ ^ ( roac?, t^av (odo-meter ; see meter,
7? OS09, -OV ' ^
o/?acD s^e (cosm-orama).
o <f)i\os, -ov friend (phil-anthropy).
6 xpovos, -ov time (chrono-logy).
50. Exercises. I. Translate into English.
1. Ol Trotrjral &)Sa9 TroieovGi. 2. TOV ftiov rov pd(j)o/jL€v (bio-graphy) . 3. <j)l\os <ypdcf)€i, <j)cova)v \d<yov (phon-o-log^y) KOI rwv /juvOcov \6yov (mytho-logy). 4. ^1X09 av0pd)7rcov (phil-anthrop-ist) io-TOpidv <ypd(f>€i. 5. 77 y\a)(rcra TOV Kpirov ev \6yei.
6. dva<yLyva)O'Ko/jL€v r?}9 ^1)^9 \6<yov (psych-o-logy) .
7. o 7roXtT7;9 ov ry(,<yva)crK€L rbv %p6vov. 8. opdeTe TOV $pd/jiov ev TTJ oSco ; 9. TO^ /JLV()OV<; TWV dvayiyvd)CTK€T€ €V Trj a"^o\f). 10. e^ei o
(3d meaning) yjrv^v ; l 11. €v \eyei Trepl TOV (say his) <f)i\ov.
1 Certain ancient thinkers believed that it has.
51] O-DECLJ-:\>1<>\ : MA >r r LINES. 35
II. Translate into Greek.
1. A citizen of the world (cosmo-polite) is read- ing an account of the times (chrono-logy). 2. The poets speak and we hear. 3. They are reading the tale of the chimera. 4. We hear the words of friends. 5. They read an account of life (bio- logy) and an account of the earth (ge-o-logy ; see 31, 3). 6. The poet is making an ode about the soul. 7. The poets adorn the legends and write poems (^Troujfiara). 8. The life adorns the man. 9. Do you see a man beside the road? 10. He is speaking about the race of a man and a she-goat.
51. Notes on Derivatives.
1. In bio-graphy, bio-logy, cosmo-polite, and chrono- logy, it is plain that the letter o- at the end of the first part of the compound belongs to the stem of that part, — ftio-, KOOTAO-, ^povo-. The number of compounds in which the first member was an o- stem was very large, so large that the a- came to be carelessly regarded as a mere device for con- necting the two parts of any compound. Hence the -0- was often inserted in other cases, where it is only a sort of spoken hyphen, connecting the two members, although the first member may have ended originally in a- or a consonant. (See 31, 3.)
2. The root of yiyvd^a-KO) is 71/0- or 71x0-, related to our word know, in which the k was formerly pronounced. From this root was
36 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [51—
"knowing" whence our word Gnostic. An ancient religious sect were called Gnostics, because they- claimed to be particularly " knowing " on certain subjects. (For agnostic see 60, 3, 5.) Gnome is also a derivative of yiryvcticrKG) ; certain imaginary beings were so called because they were supposed to know where mineral treasures were hidden in the earth.
3. Apo'yu<o9 appears in palin-dBome (see 31, 6), and dromedary, which comes to us through a late Latin form dromedarius, -edarius being a combina- tion of derivative endings.
4. KocryLto? appears in English in two meanings, which at first sight seem not very closely con- nected. First, from the meaning ornament, we get, through /coo-peco and KOO-JJ^TIKO^ the word cos- metic. Secondly, the visible universe was called Koa-fio^ as being an orderly, well-arranged system ; and in this sense we have cosmos, from which cos- mic and cosmical naturally follow. In cosmo-polite, cosmo-politan the first part, instead of including the entire universe, is restricted to the various coun- tries of the earth. So in cosm-orama, of which the second part is from opda).
5. a. The syllable -log-, representing Xo'yo? in the sense of discourse, account, description, appears in many names of sciences, like those in the Exer- cises. In fact this element, preceded by an -o-, is so familiar that there has even been formed from it the separate word ology, used most often in the plural as a rather humorous name for the sciences.
51] O-DECLENSION : MASCULINES. 37
Eu-logy (see 36, 2) is good talk, a speaking well, about one ; that is, praise. Eu-logium is a longer form of the same word ; eu-logize is the correspond- ing verb. A pro-logue (TT/DO before, Latin pro) is something spoken before, as an introduction to a poem or play. (Compare epilogue, 68, 6.) A hor- o-loge (&pd, see 31, 8) is an instrument which tells the time. Further, Xoyo? signifies that power of the mind which is exhibited in speech, namely, reason. From \6yos in this sense we have logic (\oyiKrf), the science of reasoning.
b. The preposition avd, up or along, has taken on a variety of meanings, the connection of which is not so plain as might be wished. Like Latin re- (seen in re-pel, re-novate, re-new) it signifies back and again. Thus from dva-ypd<f)co write back or again, we have ana-gram, a word or phrase formed by re-writing in a different order, or transposing, the letters of another word or phrase. So ana- chron-ism is a transposition or confusion of the time (^ovo?) of events. In dva-yiy wvo- /ceo the preposi- tion has the force of again, and likewise in ana- baptist, one who holds that those baptized in infancy should be re-baptized when older (/3a7rrt£co bap- tize). Then in two or three phrases avd was used in the sense of according to ; one of these was ova \dyov, in which \6<yo<; also has a highly specialized sense, that of reckoning or ratio. From this phrase was formed the adjective dvdXoyos analogous, ap- plied to things which are to each other according to a certain ratio, or which are alike in their rela-
38 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [51—
tions or circumstances. The neuter form dvaXoyov gives us analogon or analogue, an analogous word or thing ; analogy (avdXo^La) is the relation between analogous things.
The prefix ana- is found in many scientific terms, and should not be confused with negative an-, for which see 60, 3, b.
c. The preposition /card down is also much used in composition with meaning more or less changed. Thus /card-\o<yos a telling down, as it were, that is list, cata-logue; cata-comb (/CV/JL/STJ, -779, something hollow^), underground passages where the dead were deposited.
6. Philo-, phil-, and -phile are the representatives of </>/Xo9, as in phil-anthropy, love of mankind, phil- harmonic (dpfjiovid harmony), philter ($l\rpov love- charm, or means of producing love), pnilo-Turkish, Turco-phile, Slavo-phile, phil-hellenic (r/E\\rjv a GrreeK), and others. Philo-logy is etymologically fondness for words or for language ; hence the study of words or of language, or in a. larger sense, the study of literature and all that is expressed in language.
7. XpoVo9 gives us chronic, applied to diseases that have lasted a long time, and chronicle, a narra- tive of events in the order of time.
8. Psychic (^£^#09) is our adjective from tyv'Xr). Psych-o-logy is the science which treats of the nature and powers of the soul.
54]
O- DECLENSION : NEUTERS.
39
VIII. O-DECLENSION: NEUTERS.
52.
TO (/I6TpO-)
measure
/JL€TpO-V
perpov
TO (07C777TTpO-)
staff
TO
TOV
(T/cijTrrpov
TO
&
TO) TOW
\ TO,
TO)V
/Ji€TpO-V fJL€TpO-V
jJ,€TpQ) /JLCTpOLV
fJL€Tpa
(T/crjTTTpa
TO, /jLerpa
9 O)
Sing. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc.
DualN.A.V. G.D.
Plu. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Voc.
53. Neuters of this declension differs from mas- culines only in the nominative, accusative, and voca- tive, singular and plural. In the singular these cases take the case-ending -v : in the plural they change the stem-vowel -o to -a. (Compare Latin metrum, metrd.*)
54. Vocabulary.
a-Tro, prep. w. gen. only, from, away from (apo-logy). TO SevSpov, -of tree (rhodo-dendron).
Sid, prep. w. gen., through (dia-meter).
eXe^/prep.w.gen.only, out of, from (Latin ex).
1 Proclitic (see 19) ; CK is used before a consonant, e£ before a vowel,
40 THE GBEEK IN ENGLISH. [55—
TO epyov, -ov work (en-erg-y)
1 he (she, it) is.
1 they are.
6 ^X*o9, -ov sun (helio-trope).
TO Oedrpov, -ov theatre (p lace of seeing, 6 ea).
TO Oeppbv, -ov heat (therm-al).
TO fjuerpov, -ov measure (meter, metr-ic). TO opyavov-ov (related j imtrument ( }
to epyov) )
7repi, prep. w. gen., about, concerning.
w. ace., around (peri-meter).
TO pobov, -ov rose (rhodo-dendron).
TO o-KrjTrrpoVy -ov staff, sceptre.
TpeTTQ) turn. 6 T/OO'TTO?, -ov (f r. T/oe7r&)), a turn (trope).
55. The verb-forms eon and eio-t, with a few other words, are enclitics (from cv and K\tva) lean) ; that is, they usually have no accent of their own, but lean on the preceding word. As to accents in this connection we have the following rules :
a. The word before an enclitic, (1) If it has the acute on the ultima, does not change the acute to the grave : Trot^TT/s eon. (2) If it has the circumflex on the penult, or the acute on the antepenult, it takes also an acute on the ultima : <r<t>cupd €<m, opyavov ccrrt.
6. An enclitic of two syllables takes an acute on the ultima, if the preceding word has an acute on the penult : poSov ecrrt.
56. ^Exercises. I. Translate into English. 1. ?O avdp&TTo? €%€i poSa airo SevSpov (rhodo-
1 See 40, 1., 4, with note.
56] O- DECLENSION : NEUTERS. 41
dendron) . 2. 6 ev rcS Oearpw^- avOpwrros
rpov. 3. ri ean TO perpov rfjs 6Sov Sia (dia-meter)
TOV rj\lOV KOI TO /JiCTpOV T?}? oSoV 7T€pl (peri-Od) TO V
rj\iov (peri-helion) ; 4. e/c TOV opydvov yiyvd^aicofiev TO TOV Oepfjiov fierpov (thermo-meter). 5. o Kpt,Tr)<s Tp&irei TTJV (say his) fce<f)a\r]v CLTTO TOV rj\iov. 6. €K TOV ftlov T^]V -^rv^v av0p(t)7TOV ryiyvcocr/cofjiev. 7. rot'9
T/3O7TOU9 TT)? 6SoV OV% 6pa€T€. 8. OL TTOirjTai €iO~L
<f)i\oi. 9. ol <f)l\oi elorl TroirjTai. 10. ov Trj\€ CLTTO TOV Oearpov SevSpov etrrt. 11. ol <f)i\oi Kocr^eovcn pdSoi? Trjv TOV TTOtrjTov K€<f>a\rjv. 12. rt TTOLCCI TO
II. Translate into Greek.
1. You do not perceive the measure of the time (chrono-meter). 2. We see roses in the theatres. 3. The man makes a road around the earth (peri- gee). 4. The earth is far from the sun (aph- elion 2). 5. In work (energy), not in talk, is the way of the soul's health. 6. [There] is a tree beside the road. 7. On the tree is a rose. 8. The sun makes the rose. 9. I see the helio-trope (TO ff^io-TpoTnov) and the roses. 10. What is the measure of the staff? 11. The sun adorns the earth with roses. 12. The heat of the sun turns back the citizen from the road.
1 Such a phrase standing between the article and its noun modifies the noun.
2 Before the rough breathing OLTTO may lose its final vowel, and then takes the form dd>'.
42 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [57—
57. Notes on Derivatives.
1. Apology (a7ro-Ao7/a, from O/TTO and ^0705) is literally a talking off, with which are connected apologize and apologetic. Apo-logue, though of the same derivation exactly, has a curiously different meaning. Usage often proves stronger than ety- mology in fixing the significance of words. Apo- gee has 777 for its second part.
2. Di-orama is from Si-opdco (from Sid and o/oa&>) to see through. (Compare cosmorama, 51, 4, and panorama, 110, 11.)
3. Exodus (€£-0809) is from e£ and 0809, with Latinized ending -us. Meth-od (/-ie#-oSo9) also con- tains a fragment of 0809 ; the first part is the prep- osition fierd, which with the accusative means after. As a?™ before the rough breathing becomes «</>', so //-era becomes pe6\ Method, then, is primarily a way after, or a going after, something ; hence an inquiry, then the systematic way of making an in- quiry or investigation.
4. The name George is our corruption of Tewp- 7^09, which goes back finally to an older form of 777 and the root of epyov, and so means earth-worker, titter of the soil. In forming the compound, a pe- culiar change of vowels has taken place. A similar change has taken place in geo-metry (^yecofjuerpla), land-measuring; for the Greek science of geometry was used originally for measuring land. For hor- o-meter (also containing perpov) compare 31, 8.
5. From ^\609 come various scientific terms,
58] ADDITIONAL A- AND O- STEMS. 43
such as heliacal, connected with the sun, and helio- meter, originally an instrument for measuring the diameter of the sun.
6. Along with the theatre must be placed amphi- theatre. The preposition apfyi around, about, is related to Latin ambo, both. In composition it often means (1) on both sides, (2) double. The latter is the force of amphi- in amphi-theatre, and also in amphi-bious (yS/o?), having a double life, that is, in the water and in air.
7. The tropic is the apparent turning-pl&cQ of the sun. Trophy is a corrupted form of rpoTraiov, related to rpoVo?. At the place where the enemy turned in flight during a battle, the Greeks piled up, or fastened on a tree, part of the armor taken from the enemy. This remained as a memorial of victory. (For variation of e of rpeTro) to o of rpo- 7T09 compare /3aXAo>, 46, 3.)
IX. ADDITIONAL A- AND O- STEMS. 58. Vocabulary.
-ou messenger (angel).
report, announce.
6 aSe\<£o9, -ou brother (Adelphi).
o au\o9, -oO pipe (hydr-aul-ic).
eVt, prep. w. ace., to (after verbs of motion).
6 0eo9, -ou1 a god, God (theo-logy).
6 J/7T7T09, -ou horse (hippo-drome).
1 The vocative singular of 0cos is like the nominative. Compare Latin deus, vocative deus.
44
THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH.
[59—
o /cpv<TTa\\os, -ov
, "OV
TO fjiovcrelov, -ov
fr. /jLovaa) 6 TrapdSeiaos, -ov 6 TroXe/409, -ov o TroTa/Jids, -ov
ice (crystal).
circle (cycle, cyclone).
form (morph-ology).
house of the muses, museum.
park (paradise).
war (polemics).
river (hippo-potamus).
send.
send away.
envoy, ambassador (apostle).
letter (epistle).
art, skill (techn-ology).
place (topo-graphy).
water (hydr-aulics).
fear (hydrophob-ia).
59. ^Exercises. I. Translate into English.
1. To v&cop pel (flows) Sia rov av\ov (hydr-aulic, hydr-aulics). 2. opday rov ITTTTOV eV rcS Trora/tft) (hippo-potamus). 3. ol aSeX</>ol <f>i\oi,1 (Phil-adelphia) ela-f. 4. <£/Xo9 VTTTTCOV (Phil-ip, <3>/A,fc7r7ro9) Trepl rwv TOTTCOV ypdfat, (topo-graphy) rw^2 ev rq> TrapaSeto-q). 5. o TTorayLto? pel eV KVK\G) (en-cycl-ical) Trepl TO liovcrelov. 6. o /3oped$ iroieei /cpvcrTa\\ov eV rot?
1 The article is omitted with a predicate noun ; thus we can often distinguish the subject from the predicate noun when they stand side by side, as here.
2 The repetition of rwv shows that ev ro> TrapaSctW belongs
tO TO7TODV.
6 a7TO-(7ToXo9, -OV
rj €Tri-crTO\r}y -7)9 97 rexyr], -779
O T07T09, -OV
TO vSoOp
6 >0^09, "OV
60] ADDITIONAL A- AND Q-STEMS. 45
Trora/iofc. 7. o ayyeXo? opdei TTJV rov 6eov /j,op<f)7Jv.
8. ol 6eol &TiX\,ovo~i(y) dyj€\ov<; eirl
9. ol aSe\cf)ol (AdelpM) p,av6dvovo-i(v)
CTK6LV Ta? €7Tl<TTO\aS TO)V dTTOO'TOXwV. 10. Ol a-TTO-
<7TO\oi €7ricrTO\r)V jpa^ovai roS Kptrfj. 11. o 0oy8o9 rov /cpvo-Ta\\ov rpeTrei p,€ (me) diro rov TOTTOU. 12. ol deol e^ovcrt rrjv (frcovrjv ical rrjv fJLOp<f>r)V dv0pa)7rct)v (anthropo-morphic). 13. ol aTrocrroXo^ ay<y€\\ovo-i
TOU?
II. Translate into Greek.
1. The horses in the park are learning the art of war. 2. The messengers announce war. 3. He turns the horse in a circle around the park beyond the museum. 4. The water in the pipes is from the river. 5. The horses perceive the fear of the master. 6. We are reading an account of the arts (techn-o-logy). 7. Fear in war does not adorn the citizens. 8. You do not see the forms of the gods. 9. Have you letters from the brothers of the am- bassador? 10. The arts adorn the life of men. 11. The letter reports the ambassador's words about war. 12. The heat of the sun sends-away ice from the rivers. 13. Do you see instruments of war in the museums? 14. The brothers per- ceive the skill of the citizens in war. 15. The am- bassador's friend is in the messenger's place.
60, Notes on Derivatives.
1. As was said before (36, 2), the adverb ev often has in composition the meaning good. From
46 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [60—
ev and a7<yeXo9 was formed the noun ev-a<y<ye\i,ov good tidings, which is also the meaning of our Saxon word gospel. In Latin this became evan- gelium, the sound of the combination of Greek letters eva- being best represented to the Roman ear by eva-, pronounced in the Roman way. Evan- gelium gave us evangel, evangelical, evangelize, etc., pronounced in our English way, which causes the first syllable to sound very different from the Greek eS.
2. Philadelphia is usually translated brotherly love ; the verb c^Xeeo, from <£/Xo9, is the common word signifying to love.
3. a. Theology is the science which treats of the nature of God, and his relation to his works. The- ist and theism are formed from 0eo?, as deist and deism from Latin deus.
b. A-theist has for its first element the syllable a- (which takes the form av- before a vowel), called alpha privative (Latin privo, to take away). This syllable has the force of not which in- and un- have in such words as in-active and un-known; in fact av- is the original form, related to our negative in- (from Latin) and un-, and might more fitly be called negative av-. Accordingly a-theist means not- theist. So from pop^rf we have a-morphous, literally shape-less; from vS&p, an-hydrous av-vSpo$ water-less; and from gnostic (see 51, 2), a-gnostic. Care is sometimes necessary in order to distinguish this an- followed by -a- from the preposition ana- (see 51, 5, i).
60] ADDITIONAL A- AND O- STEMS. 47
c. Apo-theosis is formed directly from deify, which goes back to CLTTO and #609. Theo-dore (0eo-Sw/309 gift of Grod) has for its second part Swpov, -ov, gift. Poly-theism (see 91, 12) is a belief in many gods.
4. Hippo-drome, from LTTTTOS and 8po//,o?, literally horse-race, is mostly used of a place for a horse- race.
5. In bi-cycle, the syllable bi- is a Latin prefix meaning double. (For tricycle see 82, 8.)
6. Morpheus (from popfyrf) was the god of dreams (literally the shaper or fashioner) and hence the god of sleep. From Morpheus in this latter sense we have morphine. In meta-morphosis (from //,era- fjiop(f)6co trans-form) the preposition //-era,. as is often the case, denotes a change. So also in met-em- psychosis (/xer-e/i-i/ru^oct) from /xera, eV, and ^t^*?), the doctrine that the soul, after the death of the body which it inhabits, is reborn into another. Anthropo-morph-ism (avOpvTros) is the representa- tion of God in the form or with the character of man.
7. Apo-stle is another instance of a word which has lost the o- of the Greek original, while its ad- jective apo-stolic has retained the vowel. (Com- pare parable and parabolic, devil and diabolic, 46, 3.) Epistle and epi-stol-ary are another similar pair. (With the variation of e to o in the derivatives of <TT€\Xa) compare the variation of a to o in the de- rivatives of ySaXXw, 46, 3. See also 57, 7.)
8. Te%i>77 gives us technical, pertaining to an art
48 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [61—
or trade ; technique (through, the French), the technical or material part of an art, as distinguished from the intellectual and imaginative part, as in music or painting ; techn-o-logy, a description of the arts ; also poly-technic (see 91, 12).
9. "YScop generally appears in English as hydr-. Examples are hydra (a portentous water-serpent on which grew two new heads for every one cut off), hydr-ant, hydr-o-meter (//,er/x>j/), hydr-o-graphy, hydr- o-phobia (<£o/3o9).
X. ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION.
61. These adjectives follow the second declen- sion in the masculine and neuter, and the first de- clension in the feminine. Thus the nominative singular ends in -09, -a (or -?;), -ov (Latin -us, -a, -urn).
O " "\T A f A f J f
Gr. (TOfyoV (TO^ij^ (7O(f>OV
\-s • (7O(pCt) (TOfpfJ (7O(D(t)
-cV. (TOCDOI/ (TO&TIV (TOCpOlS
Vi / i / • /
. O"O(p€ GTOCbll (TO(pOl/
Dual N. A. V. crochet) cro(f)a <70<f)(b
G-pi I ^ I « f «
• -L'. (TOCpOiV (TOtpCLlV (TOCDOLV
Plu. N. V. (70(£>Oi (TO(f)al (TO<pd
-U. (TO(pOl$ (TOchai^ O"O(pOfc9
At / i ^ JL '
• ^0(1)01/9 ^O(DCi9 ^O(Z)Ct
04] ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 49
other.
|
Sing. N. |
ere/909 |
erepd |
erepov |
|
G. |
erepov |
erepd? |
erepov |
|
D. |
erepa) |
erepd |
erepa) |
|
A. |
ere/ooi/ |
erepdv |
erepov |
|
V. |
erepe |
erepd |
erepov |
|
Dual N.A.V. |
ere/oft) |
erepd |
erepco |
|
G.D. |
erepoLv |
erepaw |
erepoiv |
|
Phi. N.V. |
erepoi |
erepai |
erepa |
|
G. |
erep&V |
erepcov |
erepwv |
|
D. |
erepois |
erepais |
ere/Dot? |
|
A. |
erepovs |
erepdv |
erepa |
62. The feminine singular always has a long vowel throughout ; long -d is retained after e, i, or p; otherwise it is changed to -77, as in the first class of feminine nouns. (See 24, a.)
a. In the nominative and genitive plural the feminine fol- lows the accent of the masculine.
63. Rule. As in Latin, the adjective must agree with its noun in gender, number, and case.
64. The relative pronoun, 09, %, o who, is declined
as follows.
Sing. Flu.
Nff rf ff f/ f/ tf
09 rj o 01 ai a
G. ov
ov
D. cS £
ov
Dual N. A. G.D.
OU9
&
olv
a
50 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [65—
65, Rule. The relative pronoun agrees with its antecedent in gender, number, and person, but takes the case required by the construction of its own clause.
66. Vocabulary.
dyaOds, -77, -dv good (Agatha).
dvTi, prep. w. gen., instead of. TO aaTpov, -ov star (astr-al).
!-self; myself, himself, itself, etc. (auto-biography); pre- ceded by the article, same. TO Pi/3\iov, -ov book (Bible).
Sofceco think.
77 Sdga, -779 (fr. So/ee&>), opinion (ortho-dox). €7rt, prep. w. dat., upon (compare 58 eV&). erepo9, -a, ~ov other (hetero-dox).
/ea/eo9, -77, -ov bad (caco-phony).
6 Xi#o9, -ov stone (litho-graph).
alone, only, only one (mono-
-77, -ov N
gram).
deal out, distribute (Nemesis). 6 v6/j,os?-ov(fi:.v€fjiG)), law (metro-nome).
!(1) straight, (2) upright, (3) right (as opposed to wrong') (ortho-dox).
1 The neuter nominative and accusative singular of avros is avro ; otherwise the word is declined like o-o<£os, "but has no vocative form.
2 Nojuo? means, first, what is dealt out to one, and so what is held in use and possession ; hence the meanings custom, usage, and finally law. For change of e to o compare 60, 7.
67] ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 51
09, r\y o who, that, which.
7rco\ea) sell.
6 fiij3Xio-7rd)\r}<;, -ov book-seller, biblio-pole.
c-0009, -i], -dv wise (theo-soph).
77 vofyid, -09 wisdom (Sophia).
67. Exercises. I. Translate into English.
1. 'O KpiTr)$ ypdfai dyaffov j3i/3\lov Trepl TWV v6/jiQ)v. 2. o TToirjrr)? avTos ypdfai, (auto-graph) TOV (his) /3lov (auto-bio-graphy). 3. ol iroKlrai 01 rou9 vop,ovs avrol Troieovaw, avrovo/Jiol (auto- nomous) eiai. 4. ov a"%o\d£o/Jb€v eVl \l0<p TOV vopov ypdfaiv (litho-graph). 5. 6 a7roo-roXo9 e%e^ eVt- r;^ fj dyj€\\€i rrjv Sogav rwv TroXlT&v. 6. eV avOdvovGiv dyada y8t/3X/a dva<yiyva)(TK€i,v avrl /ca/cwv /3^/3\t&)i/. 7. 6 \i0os pr)<yvv<TL (breaks)
TOV KpV<7TO\,\OV CTTi Tft) TTOTa/Aft). 8. TO9 TCt)V (TO<f>O)V * So^a9 7T6/51 TO)V d(7TpCi)V /JL(lV0dvO/JL€V €K /3l/3\l(0V.
9. 6pa€T€ TOV €T€pov aSe\(f)ov TOV d<y<ye\ov. 10. ol (To<f>ol KOI al (T0(f>al TO avTo (the same thing) \e<y overt, (tauto-logy). 11. ri So/ce€T€ avTol Trepl TOV /3i/3\lov ;
12. ®eo9 dyaOa vepet, TOI$ dyaOol? /cal
13. ol opOol pdvot, ev dvayiryvcocr/covo'i, TOU9 cv
1/6//-OI/9. 14. ov/c e%ofjt,€v TOL>9
II. Translate into Greek.
1. Not booksellers alone sell (mono-poly) books. 2. The wise and good man's opinion is right
1 The adjective may be used alone as a noun, as in Latin.
52 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [68—
(ortho-dox). 3. Bad citizens do not make wise laws. 4. I see a friend of wisdom (philo-soph-er) who has a bad horse to sell. 5. [They] are l bad citizens who make war in the land. 6. The sun distributes heat. 7. The bookseller's only brother is throwing stones. 8. The poets tell (\eyova-i) a legend about the two (Svo) ways of life. 9. We are ourselves reading a book about the laws of the stars (astronomy). 10. We perceive the wis- dom of God in the stars. 11. The citizens make laws, which they write on stone. 12. They are reading the books which they have. 13. The law alone is master of the upright citizen. 14. Others have the same law.
68. Notes on Derivatives.
1. As a preposition avri means instead of; but its original force was rather facing, opposite to, opposed to, and this last is its common meaning in composition, both in Greek and in English. Thus an anti-periodic (Tre/n-oSo?) medicine is one against a periodical disease (as quinine for fever and ague). The word avri-^wva (</>o>z^), an adjective in the neuter plural, denoted a form of church music in which one choir or part of a choir responds to another. This became in late Latin antifona (retaining the Greek accent), which being taken into English became (through the forms ant&fne, ant^vne, antSmne, dntemn, dntem)
1 An enclitic (55) should not begin a sentence,
68] ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 53
anthem, taking on a slightly extended meaning. Finally anti-phone was reintroduced in the original sense. The Anti-nomians (1/0^09) denied, it was said, that they were bound by the moral law. Anti-nomy is an opposition or contradiction of laws. In fact anti- has been so fully naturalized that it is now used freely as a prefix, whether the rest of the word is Greek or not.
2. So far as derivation goes, we should expect astro-logy to have the meaning which is really given to astro-nomy (1/0/409). But here, as often happens, use and association — one might say, the company which the word has kept — have given a certain twist to the original force of astro-logy, so that it is now the name for a false, astro-nomy for a true, science of the stars. Another form of acrrpov is acrnjp; this gives us aster, and asterisk (do-repla/cos*) is a diminutive of the same word.
3. a. A people that has the right of using or making its own laws is called auto-nomous, and auto-nomy is the right itself. Auto-maton and auto- matic also contain avros. The second element is from a Greek root pa- to desire, or will; hence auto-maton is etymologically acting by one's own will, and so self-acting. The word is especially used of machines.
b. With the article before it auro? signifies the same ; TO avrd, often run together into ravro, signifies, therefore, the same thing. Hence ravro- \oyid tauto-logy.
54 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [68—
4. A biblio-graphy is a description or list of the books on a particular subject. Other compounds of ftcffXiov are biblio-mania ^avia madness), and biblio-phile (</>/Xo?).
5. Hetero-dox is usually contrasted with ortho- dox. In para-dbx the first element is irapd; but the preposition here means, not beside, but against, contrary to. Ao£<z also signifies the good opinion which others have of one, and so fame, glory. This is the force of dox- in dox-o-logy.
6. Epi-graphy is the branch of philology (see 51, 6) which deals with inscriptions cut on stone, of which there are thousands in Greek and Latin alone. Epi-gram (eiri^pa^fjba) meant originally such an inscription ; but as these were usually short and often in verse, the word came to be used for a short, pithy poem, or saying. The epi- glottis (see 41, 1) is just over the glottis. In all these epi- has the meaning given in the vocabu- lary (66) ; in ep-ode («&£) and epi-logue (con- trasted with prologue ; see 51, 5, a) it indicates something added on at the end. Further, rj^epa is the Greek word for day ; before the rough breath- ing €7rl loses the final vowel and becomes e$'; thus is formed etjyrjfiepk diary or day-book, whence eph-emeris. 'Ec/y^te/oo? eph-emeral is the adjective, signifying lasting for a day.
7. Ka/eo? appears in caco-phony, the opposite of en-phony (see 35, I., 5) ; in caco-doxy, the opposite of orthodoxy (see 68, 5); and in caco-graphy, the opposite of ortho-graphy (see 68, 11).
68] ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 55
8. Lithol-ogy is another of the "ologies" — the science which treats of stones or rocks.
9. Moiw is represented by mono-, with the force of one, or single, in a great many English words. Common examples are mono-gram; mono-graph, a treatise on a single subject, usually of a limited nature ; mon-ody, a mournful poem (oJS?;) express- ing one person's grief; mono-theism (#eo?), belief in one God ; mono-logne, a speech uttered by one person, contrasted with dialogue (see 105, 2), and not quite the same as soli-loquy (from Latin solus and loquor) ; mono-lith (X^os), a large column or statue of a single block of stone ; mono-mania {pavia 68, 4) madness on one subject only ; mono- tone (o roVo9 tone, from TCWCD strain) ; mono-metallist (TO fj,6Ta\\ov originally a mine, then metal) one who holds that one metal only, gold, should be used as the standard of value, whereas a fo-metallist (compare W-cycle 60, 5) believes that both gold and silver should be used as a double standard ; mono- syllable (see 110, 8) ; mono-phthong, a single vowel sound (o 0^07709 sound) contrasted with di-phthong (for di- see 96, 1). Monad is also from /u,oVo9, a derivative of the same sort with decad (see Se/ta9, 80). Further, from fjudvos were derived /jiovd%co to live alone and /jLova%6$ single, solitary. The latter has been corrupted to monk; from /jiovd£co we have mon-astery {fjLovadrripiov, -of) and monastic (/Aovaa-Ti/cos). The early monks lived alone, hence the name. Monachism has retained the -a- of
56 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [69—
10. Metro-nome might be rendered law-giver of the measure ^erpov and ^0/409) ; it is the name of an instrument for keeping the time in music. From the same verb ve/juco are derived VO/JLOS law (§ee 66 and foot-note to 1/0/^09) and 1/0/^09 pasture (one meaning of ve^a is graze or pasture} ; vopa- Se9 was a term applied to tribes who moved from pasture to pasture feeding their herds. Hence our word nomad. Ne/-fcecr£9 (originally distribution) denoted indignation at undue or too great good fortune ; this indignation on the part of the gods was personified as a goddess, who repaired such inequality by humbling those who were too proud in prosperity, especially when such haughtiness led to impiety or crime ; hence our word nemesis, retribution, divine vengeance.
11. Ortho-graphy is right writing ; ortho-epy is right pronunciation (TO CTTOS a word).
12. A theo-sophist (#609 and 0-0^09) is one who believes that superhuman knowledge may be at- tained by direct intercourse with God and superior spirits ; theo-soph is sometimes used in the same sense, and theo-sophy is the belief or doctrine of theosophists. (For sophist, etc., see 74, 10.)
XL H-VERBS: PRESENT INDICATIVE AND INFINITIVE MIDDLE AND PASSIVE.
69. The passive voice represents the subject as acted upon, while the active voice represents the subject as acting. There is also in Greek a middle
71] fl- VERBS: MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 57
voice which represents the subject as acting either upon, or with reference to, itself. But in the pres- ent tense the passive and middle have the same endings, and often are to be distinguished only by the connection in which the words are found. In this book, only the one word <f>aiv(o show will be used in the middle voice ; all other forms with these endings may be understood as passive, or else as deponent (see 71).
70. Pres. Ind. Middle. Passive.
S. 1 (^aivo-^at I show myself, appear am shown
2 fyaivei you show yourself are shown
3 <f>a[ve-Tat, he shows himself is shown
Du. 2 fyaive-a-Oov you two show yourselves are shown 3 fyawe-a-Bov they two show themselves are shown
PI. 1 <j>aivo-iJie6a we show ourselves are shown
2 (fxiive-aOe you show yourselves are shown
3 (fraivo-vrat, they show themselves are shown
Pres. Inf. <f>alve-cT0cu to show one's self to be shown
71. Deponent verbs, as in Latin, are such as have the passive (middle) form, but are active in meaning, as a-fceTrrofjiai, view. The inflection is exactly like that of fyalvopai, but the translation is of course active.
58
THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH.
[72—
72, Vocabulary.
ay co lead.
6 ay coy 6<t, -ov (fr. ayco), leader, guide (dem-agogue).
the people, the free citizens, the commons (dem-agogue).
true, real, genuine (etymo-
-OV
-?;, -ov
-rj, -ov1 , -a, -ov -a, -ov
(H/C09, -OV OL/C6CO
-a, -ov
(7K€7TTOfJLCU, dep.,
o CT/COTTO?, -ov (fr.
equal (iso-thermal). long, large (macron). small, little (micro-scope). house (oeco-nomy). inhabit, dwell in. older, elder (presbyter). examine, view (skeptic).
watcher, lookout (micro-scope). overseer, guardian (episcop-al). be clever, or wise (sophist).
under.
show (dia-phan-ous). show one's self, appear (phenomenon).
73. Exercises. I. Translate into English. 1. fO rov SIJ/JLOV dycoyo? (dem-agogue) ov opdofjuev
1 Followed by the dative.
2 The ending -rcpos, -d, -ov is equivalent to the English -er, denoting the comparative degree,
0 e7T6-0-/C07r09, -OV
(rocftl^ofjLcu (fr. 0-0^)09), dep., i?ro, prep. w. dat.,
73] £1- VERBS: MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 59
OVK dyaOos 7roXiT?79 earl. 2. ol TroXirai dyovrai
€7rl 7r6\€/jLOV. 3. fMKpOS X/009 /3d\\€TCU 67Tt fACLfCpOV
(to a long distance). 4. fj ryfj virep rov ftopeav (see 46, 6) OVK olfceerai. 5. Oeo? ecrnv eVar/toTTo? rov fiaxpov Koa/juov (macro-cosm)1 /cal rov [uicpov Koa-fjiov (micro-cosm) . 6. ol €7rio-/co7roi ra? oSou?. 7. o 7rp€cr/3vT€pos aSeX</>O9 cr /cal €^€L fti[3>\ia ev rcS oil/cay. 8. o €TV/J,OS
ervpovs \dyov<$. 9. ot ayyeXoi <f>aivovcri TW r^z; roi) KpiTov €7no-To\r)v. 10. 97 oliceo^evr] (inhabited) <yf) pa/cpa eart. 11. rt VTTO TO> \i0q) earl ; 12. TO Oeppov r&v acrTpwv OVK 'iaov ea"rl rc3 depute (iso-thermal) rov rj\lov. 13. Trpeo-ftvrepov d&€\<f>ov e^o), 09 dyaObv TOTTOV e^ei ev rcS ffearpa). 14. e^e^ o &7/-&09 opOovs dycoyovs ; 15. frrot e^Vtz/ o/
II. Translate into Greek.
1. The star itself is not small. 2. To learn-to- know the true opinions of the people is the work of a wise man. 3. The seasons are equal. 4. The skill of the overseer himself is not equal to the skill of the little bookseller. 5. He is examining the little stones which are in the road. 6. True overseers show themselves wise.2 7. There is water under the house. 8. The laws of the people are (being) written in books. 9. I am writing a
1 In contrast with the mind of man, the micro -cosm or little world, the larger universe was called macro -cosm.
2 A predicate adjective belonging to the subject must agree with it in gender, number, and case.
60 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [74—
long letter. 10. An upright leader of the people speaks true words. 11. In the long time of ice we do not see roses. 12. They examine the little circles which you are making on the ice. 13. The leader of the people is-clever, but (aXXa) does not show himself wise.
74. Notes on Derivatives.
1. An epi-demic disease is one prevailing among the people (eVl rcS S^w). Demotic, belonging to the people, is often contrasted with hieratic (see 96, 6).
2. To erv/jiov was the Greek term for the literal sense of a word ; hence we have etymon, the primi- tive from which a word is derived, and etymo-logy.
3. From ?cro9 %p6vo<$ equal time we have iso- chronous, lasting an equal time; from laov Oep/jiov equal heat, iso-therm, an iso-thermal line, or line passing through places of which the average tem- perature is equal; and from Icrov fjierpov equal meas- ure, iso-metric. Iso-sceles has for its second element TO cr/eeXo9, -609 a leg.
4. The mark of length over a vowel is a macron. The macro-meter measures objects a long way off. Macro- occurs in other scientific terms, like macro- cephalous (/eec^aX?;).
5. MZ/epo9 is seen in micro-scope (CT/COTTO?), micro- meter, micro-cephalous, micro-nesia ($ 1^0-09 an island^).
6. Eco-nomy (formerly spelled oeconomy ; see 14, #) is from ol/co-vo/jiia, which goes back to oZ/eo? and
although the changes of meaning seem
74] fl-TEEBS. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 61
strange at first sight. oZ/eo? is not only house, but also the estate orfarm which belonged to the house; and one meaning of i/e/i<«, the primitive of vo/j,o$ (see 66 and note 2), is to manage. An oi/co-v6fjio$ was a manager of a house or an estate ; hence ol/co- vopia came to signify, not only management, but also good management, of property. This, then, is the proper meaning of economy.
7. In ol/ceo/jievr}, the present passive (middle) participle of olfceco, the vowels eo were contracted to ou; 77 olfcovfjiewrj, with <yf) understood, was a term for the entire inhabited world. Accordingly an oecumenical council is one assembled from all lands.
8. Priest is corrupted from presbyter. (An in- termediate form is prester.)
9. Skeptic or sceptic (cr/eeTTT^os), from cr/eeTrro/xaj, meant originally one who is inclined to examine into statements, not accepting them without such examination. The root also takes the form O-/COTT- in ovtoTTo?, which means not only watcher, but also the thing watched, namely, the mark aimed at. Hence the original meaning of scope is aim, or pur- pose. From this are derived the other uses of the word. Among compounds of O-KOTTO? in the sense of watcher, along with micro-scope (see 74, 5) we have tele-scope (r^Xe) and hor-o-scope, a view or de- scription of the position of the planets at the hour (wpa; see 31, 8) of one's birth; for astrologers held that one's whole life could be foretold from such a horoscope. The syllable is even put with
62 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. f^—
some words not from Greek, as in spectro-wope, from Latin spectrum. 'ETTI-O-KOTTOS gave the Lajin episcopus and our epi-scopal, epi-scopacy ; bishop is a corrupted form of eW-ovcoTro? (in old English bis- cop, Us ceo p).
10. From ao^i^ofjiai is derived crofaa-Tijs sophist. The sophists were teachers of eloquence, philoso- phy, and politics; and as many of them were skilled in a wordy and showy, but false, mode of argument, the entire class got a bad name. Hence the implication of dishonesty, or of an endeavor to deceive, in our words sophistry, sophism, sophistical. To sophisticate is primarily to give one the quali- ties of a sophist ; from this follow sophisticated and unsophisticated.
11. The root of <$>aivw is <j>av-, or <£a-. Phase
, phantasm (^az/rao-^a), phantasy or fantasy , fantastic (originally phantastic), phan- tom, epiphany (eTri-fydveio) — all these have mean- ings closely connected with that of appearance. Fancy is a shortened form of fantasy. Em-phasis (e/40a<7£9, ez> and <£a6V&>),~ starting from nearly the same sense of an appearing, took on the meanings declaration, significance, and finally special signifi- cance or force in an expression. Emphatic is the adjective. Diaphanous (&a-(£a*»?9) signifies letting things show through. Finally, fyaivopevos, -77, -ov appearing is the present middle participle, declined like ayaOfa. The neuter ^aivo^evov phaenomenon, or phenomenon, signifies, therefore, that which ap- pears.
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
63
XII. CONSONANT DECLENSION: STEMS IN -*- AND -7-.
75. To the Third or Consonant Declension be- long nouns whose stems end in (1) a consonant or (2) in i or v. Masculines and feminines are declined alike.
77
ladder
|
Sing. N. |
K\i/JLa% |
|
G. |
Khf/JLa/C-OS |
|
D. |
/cXtfjiafc-L |
|
A. |
/c\£/jiaK-a |
|
V. |
K\i/jiaj; |
|
Dual N.A.V. |
K\£/jia/c-€ |
|
G.D. |
K\lp,dic-oiv |
|
Plu. N.V. |
/c\f/jiatc-€s |
|
G. |
K\lfJidK-Q)V |
|
D. |
KtdfJba^i |
|
A. |
K\£/JLaK-as |
|
flesh |
throat |
|
o-dpl; ^ |
\dpvyt; |
|
crap/c-o? |
\dpvyy-os |
|
aapK-i |
\dpvyy-i |
|
adpK-a |
\dpvyy-a |
|
crap!; |
\dpvyg |
|
crdpK-e |
\dpvyy-e |
|
(rap/c-oiv |
\apvyy-on |
\dpvryy-es
crap/c-wv
crapgi
crdpK-a?
a. The ending of the nominative singular is -9, which unites with a preceding K or 7 (or ^) to form -£. The ending of the dative plural is -<™, and the same combination takes place.
I. Monosyllabic stems of the consonant declension accent the case-ending in the genitive and dative of all numbers: the long syllables -otv and -o>v take the circumflex.
64
THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH.
[76
y dep., -ov
-r, -ov
, -ov
O
6 \dpvyf;, -7709
-OV
, dep., ^ dep.,
7T/}(MT09, -^, -OV
crTe/3609, -«, -ov avv, prep. w. dat.,
TV7TTO)
6 TU7T09, -OV
t -,
V7ro-/cptvouai, dep.,
<paye2v, infinitive, o ^^0-69, -ov
76. Vocabulary.
perceive (aesth-etic).
number.
count (arithmetic).
naked, bare.
exercise.
gymnasium (place for exercise).
ladder (climax).
throat, larynx.
imitator (mime).
imitate.
shall see (syn-op-sis).
first (proto-type).
flesh (sarc-ophagus).
firm, solid (stereo-type).
with (syn-opsis).
strike.
( type (originally, what is caused \ by a blow).
(1) answer, (2) play a part on ^ '7 v J r * *
trie stage.
actor (hypo-crite, hypo-crisy). to eat (sarco-phag-us). gold (chrys-alis).
77. Exercises. I. Translate into English.
1 Future of 6pao>, but from a different root, OTT-, and the future suffix -o-o- or -o-e- ; inflected like the present middle (passive), ctyo/x,ai, OI/KI, o^erat, etc.
77] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 65
2. dvOpWTToi el<riv o? jjbavOdvovcn rrjv crdpKa av- OpwTTcov (frayelv (anthropo-phagons, anthropo-phagi).
3. Ol \lOot, V7TO TO) O/LKG) (TT€p€Ol elcTl. 4. OV/C Ol-
cr6dvecr6e rrjv <nepeav (rdp/ca ra)V av6 ptoTrwv o? ev rofc ryvfjivacriois yv/jLvd^ovrai, ; 5. rc3 opydvq) rov rov vTTOKpirov \dpvyya <T/c€7rT€Tai, (laryng-0-scope) . 6.» 6 OVCOTTO? alcrOdvercn, TO Trpwrov do-rpov. 7. a7a- vTTO/cpiras ev rcS Oearpa) o^Jro/Jieda^ OL rou? rou dycoyovs ev pJifJieovTai. 8. o ^pvcrbs OVK dya- 66$ can (frayeiv. 9. ou/c 6'^re^ ra darpa <rvv ro3 10. TVTrreiv erepov? KCLKOV ecrn. 11. o api6- TTO\IT&V 60-09 eVrl ra> dpiOfjiq) r&v
12. ot eTrlcrfcoTTOi, dpiOpeova't, rov eV r^ oSc3
13. oyjrofjieda rov /M/cpbv OLKOV bv o VTTOfcpirrjs ol/ceet, ;
14. oliceei, ev ray Trpcora) OIKM vTrep rbv rpoirov rrjs
6Bov.
II. Translate into Greek.
1. With the actor is an elder .brother. 2. The ladder strikes the bookseller on the head. 3. They will see a man who writes letters with (dat. of means) types (typo-graphy). 4. Wise actors show art. 5. The throats of the horses are long. 6. The overseers will see the solid types (stereo-type). 7. We perceive solid gold in the stone. 8. We see men who do not have flesh to eat. 9. Actors exercise their tongues (in Greek the tongues) and throats. 10. To exercise the muscles (plural of 0-dpQ well is the way of health. 11. We shall see the messenger on a bare horse. 12. With the messengers are guides. 13. The first actor is a good imitator of others' voices. 14. To count the
66 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [78—
little stones in the river requires (in Greek is of) a long time.
78. Notes on Derivatives.
1. From av- privative (see 60, 3, 6) and the root of aiaOdvopai we have an-aesthetic, making in-sen- sible, and an-aesthesia, the condition of insensibility produced by an anaesthetic. The word aesthetic (al- adrjTiKos*), which originally meant merely capable of perceiving, has been narrowed down to the meaning capable of perceiving beauty, or pertaining to beauty; hence aesthetics, the science of beauty or taste.
2. The connection between the meanings of 71^1/09 and <yv/jLvd£co is due to the fact that the Greek boys and men trained, in the gymnastic schools, quite naked. Of course gymnic, gymnast, gymnastic are all from the same primitive.
3. K\ljjLaKTijp is the round of a ladder ; hence climateric, one of the successive stages of develop- ment, and hence a critical time of life.
4. Mimic and mimetic (/u/^r^o?), as well as mime, are from /iu//,o9, /M/jLeopaL. Panto-mime has for its first element vra? (see 110, 11).
5. The root of 0^0 fiat is OTT-, which appears in optic, optics, Aut-opsy (auro?) is self-seeing, seeing for one's self.
6. The sarc-o-phagus was so named because it was originally made of a kind of limestone which quickly consumed the flesh of a corpse ; then the name was given to any stone coffin. From adp% was also derived the verb crap/cdfa to tear the flesh, as dogs do. From this we have sarcasm
78] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 67
7. The stereo-type plate is a solid piece of metal, as distinguished from the separate types. The stere-opticon (crrepeo?, OTT-) throws on the screen an image which appears solid ; the stereo-scope, by the arrangement of its lenses, causes the picture to look like a solid object.
8. 2vv in English derivatives takes the forms syn-, sym-, syl-, or sy-, according to the nature of the following letter, and has the general meaning of together. Thus, we have syn-opsis (OTT-), a col- lective view (adjective syn-optic) ; syn-od (dSo?) a meeting ; syn-agogue (crvv-aycoyrj ; dyco), place of religious assembly among the Jews ; syn-chronous, agreeing in time (%/ooz>o9) ; syn-chronism ; sym-metry, correspondence in measure ^erpoii) ; symphony (c/>ft>z>?7), a form of orchestral music; syl-logism (Xo7o? in the sense of reason; see 51, 5, a, end), a form of reasoning. Systole (cru-o-ToX?; ; avv and cTTe'XX&>) is a sending together, that is, contraction. It is contrasted with dia-stole (S^a-cn-oX?;), in which Sid has the force of apart, Latin dis-; thus dia-stole is the relaxation of the muscles of the heart, which alternates with the sy-stole. The same force of Sid is seen in dia-critical, distinguishing (see 46, 1), and dia-gnosis (<yi<yv(i)crfca)*), the determination of a disease by noting its distinguishing marks.
9. The various significations of type can all be traced back to that of something produced by a blow. For instance, the image or other device on a coin was made by a blow upon the die under which the disk of metal had been placed. Thus TUTTO? and
68 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [79—
type get the meaning of stamp, image, and next that of character or kind. Among compounds and derivatives are typical, proto-type (jirp&ros), phono- type (a printed character representing a sound, (frcovify, auto-type (avro^, helio-type (rpuo9), the two latter being arbitrarily used to denote varieties of permanent photographs.
10. From xpvcros we obtain chrysalis (from its color), chryso-lite (\lOo$), chrys-anthemum (avdefjiov, -ov flower ; compare avOos, 98), chrys-elephantine (e\e<l)dvTivos from e'Xe<£a9, -avros elephant, and then ivory). In some of the finest Greek statues the flesh parts were of ivory and the rest of gold ; this kind of work is called chrys-elephantine.
11. We have already had occasion to notice many words from Greek which end in -ic, repre- senting the Greek adjective ending -IKO? ; as, in this section, aesthetic, optic, typic, etc. This sylla- ble -ic is so common and familiar that it is added to many words not derived from Greek.
XIII. CONSONANT DECLENSION: STEMS IN
5\ /5
79.
TO (</>&)T-) O (TToS-) 6, f] (opvlO-)
light foot bird
Sing. N. <£(W9 7TOU9 opvl<$
(jr. <l)Ct)T"09 7TOO-09 OpVi(/"0^
\JU u)(t)T"i 7rOO~l> OpViU"L
A. <£(W9 7r6S-a opvlv
V. <£(W9 7TOU9 8pvl$
80] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 69
Dual N. A.V. 0(wr-e -rro'S-e opvlO-e
G. D. <f)(i)T-Ol,V TToS-OlV OpVtO-OlV
Plu. N.V. <f)a)T-a TroS-e? opvW-es
G. <f)COT-Q)V TToS-COV 6pvf0-O)V
D. <j)a)(7L Trocrl opvlai
A. <f)0)T-a TroS-a? opvlO-as
a. As in the o-declension, the accusative and vocative of neuters in the consonant declension are like the nominative. Before -5 or -o-^, the stem- consonant r, S, or 6 is dropped. The nominative Trow? is irregular. The ending of the accusative singular of masculines and feminines is -a; but opvls usually has opvlv.
b. For the accent of monosyllabic stems see 75, b. But the genitive dual and plural of <£ois do not follow this rule.
80. Vocabulary.
(be first, hence) (1) begin, (2) rule. -779 (1) beginning, (2) government.
-a, -ov ancient (archaeo-logy). rywvid, -a9 corner, angle (deca-gon).
Se/ca (indeclinable) ten (deca-gon). 77 Se/ea?, -aSo9 company of ten, decad (decade). a (indecl.) seven (hept-archy).
7j, -ov seventh. TI ey88o/^a9, -aSo9 week, seven days (hebdomadal). e'£a>, adv. w. gen., outside (exo-tic).
), adv. w. gen., inside, within (eso-teric).
-ai, -a in plural, few (olig-archy). 6, f) 8pvl$, -^09 bird (ornith-ology).
70 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [81—
6, r) Trolly TrcuSds1 child.
Trai&evco educate (treat as a child).
„( child-leader, teacher, paed-agogue ov< , N
( (or ped-agogue).
7ro8o9 foot (anti-podes). three (tri-cycle). (f>epa) bear, carry (Latin fero).
TO 0«9, 0o>T09 light (photo -graph).
81. Hlxercises. I. Translate into English.
1. f/Q-7rov (where) o\i<yoi, dvffpcoTroi ap%ovo-i, rov BtffjLov? evravOd (there) ecmv o\i<yap%ia (oligarchy). 2. $e/ca opvlOes <yvfjbvd%ov<n, row \dpwyyas ev <ya>vla rov 7rapa&el<rov. 3. eTrra /Al/cpol TratSe? e^w rov TrapaSelcrov aKovov<ri r&v opirfdcov? 4. cro(f)ol aycoyol TOW TralBa? TraiSevovai,. 5. eVo) TOU vaviov elal rpeis Se/caSe? avOpcoTrcov. 6. e^ofjbev ev To3 oiK(p e?TTa /3fy8X/a r&v ap^aicov TTOL^T^V. 7. TO <^)ft)9 TOT) rj\iov rrj\€ (paiverai. 8. ez/ TT} €7ri(7TO\rj<; dvayiyvaxTKO/jiev rbv 9. @eo? /Aoi/o9 fipxei (nion-arch) TWZ^ avOpco- KOI TWV a<TTpa)v. 10. 97 777 <j>ep€i SevBpa /cal TO SevSpov (frepei poSa. 11. ou/c ap%aioi,s 12. rj K\la Se/ca
1 Vocative Trat. In accent Trat? is like c^co? (see 79, and 6).
2 Verbs of beginning and ruling, like apx0^ govern the geni- tive instead of the accusative.
3 Verbs of hearing and perceiving, like dfcovo) and at<r0avo/A<u, take the genitive more commonly than the accusative.
4 Ace. of extent, as in Latin.
82] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 71
fjia/cpa Ian. 13. rpefc e/3So/4a8e9 eia\ pa/epos %p6vo<> rofc TraiaL 14. 6 TraiSaycoyo? e^ei fu/cpov irepl T&v ap%ato)v
II. Translate into Greek. 1. The stone has ten corners (deca-gon). 2. The government of the few is bad. 3. With the first bird we see seven other birds. 4. The seventh bird, the [one] on the ladder, is an overseer, who is educating the first bird. 5. [He] who begins war is not wise. 6. The sun shows its light to the earth. 7. The feet of the children are in the river. 8. What is the opinion of the ancients about the government of the few ? 9. The actors are leading horses which carry solid gold. 10. In a few weeks we shall see messengers who bear letters. 11. Within the house are three men who rule the people. 12. In the seventh house beyond the corner of the park dwells a man who reads few books. 13. An elder brother bears the child through the river.
82, Notes on Derivatives.
1. a. Both meanings of ap^a) (which are evi- dently nearly related) are well represented in English. Thus, archaeo-logy (ap^ato9) is an account of ancient things; archaic (apxalicos, -77, 6v) and archaism also refer to ancient things, but with a slightly different shade of meaning ; arche-type (ap^e-TUTTo?) was originally that which is first struck off or first moulded as a model or example.
72 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [82—
b. Again, an-archy (avap^id; av- privative, see 60, 3, 0) is no-rule; mon-archy {pov-apyia) is the rule of one; hept-archy, the rule of seven; dec-archy, the rule of ten. A patri-arch is a clan-ruler (rj irarpia clan, from Trarrip, Latin pater, father) ; archives (TO ap^elov, government house), the place where government records are kept, or the records themselves. Finally, the prefix arch- or archi- in arch-angel, arch-bishop, archi-episcopal, archi-tect (o re/crow builder), etc., is also from ap%co, and has come to be used in the sense of chief or leader, with many words not from Greek, such as arch- duke, arch-thief, etc. When used with words not from Greek, or with words, like bishop, so thor- oughly Anglicized that the Greek origin is ob- scured, the ch of arch- is pronounced as in child; in words directly from Greek ch is pronounced like k.
2. Tcovld appears in goni-o-meter (//,er/ooz>), and gives the syllable -gon, angle, in dia-gon-al (Sm), poly-gon (see 91, 12), tri-gon-o-metry (TO rpl-ycovov tri-angle — the first syllable being the stem of rpeis — and fjierpov), hex-a-gon (eg-d-ycovov ; e% six, with an -a- which seems to have been inserted from analogy).
3. Ae/ca appears in deca-logue, and in many names of metric weights and measures, such as deca-gram (see 91, 4), deca-meter.
4. From the stem of e/38o^a9 we have hebdom- adal, a clumsy word for weekly.
5. An exotic plant is one from outside (e^&)),
82] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 73
foreign. Esoteric (eW) doctrines are, so to speak, the " inside," or secret, doctrines, contrasted with the exoteric, or outside, public, doctrines, which may be imparted to everybody.
6. Hat? takes the forms -paed- and -ped-; the latter syllable must not be confounded with ped in derivatives of Latin pes, pedis, foot. A ped-o- baptist is one who believes in child-baptism (/3a?r- TL^CO baptize'). Ortho-ped-y is child straightening (op66<i), curing children's deformities. From TrcuSeta education (7r<uSeu&>) we obtain en-cyclo- paedia and cyclo-paedia (eV and KVK\O<$).
7. The nominative TTOU? appears in poly-pus, many-footed (see 91, 12), which is also shortened to poly-p. The stem-form -pod- is seen in chir-o- pod-ist (%e/p), a healer of hands and feet, and tri- pod (rpels), and in numerous scientific words like cephal-o-pod (/ce^aX?;). Finally, anti-pode has been formed as the singular of anti-pod-es (avri), and thus has final e.
8. Tpefc is also seen in tri-logy, a series of three connected plays, and in tri-cycle (/cu/cXo9).
9. Peri-phery (jrepL and </>ep&>) is the exact equivalent, etymologically, of circum-ference, from Latin circum and fero ; but the latter is used only of circles and spheres, while the former is used of other figures. The root of fyepa) takes also the form <f>op-. A meta-phor (/zera-^o/oo) is, in a cer- tain sense, a trans-fer (Latin trans and fero) of meaning; as when a soldier is called a lion to denote that he is brave, the word lion contains a meta-phor.
74
THE GREEK IN ENGLISH.
[83-
V
divinity
etccov
orator prjrcop
10. Phos-phorus (</>&>9-<£o/909) signifies light-bearer. The stem <f>cor- is found in phot-o-graph (ypd<f>a) means to draw or paint as well as to write ; com- pare graphic, 31, 4), phot-o-sphere (a-fyalpa) the burning gas which envelopes the sun ; photo- meter, an instrument for measuring the quantity of light ; phot-o-litho-graph (X/009), a print from a stone on which the picture has been printed by photography.
XIV. CONSONANT DECLENSION: STEMS IN
-V- AND -p-.
83.
c
Sing. N.
G.
D.
A.
V. Dual N.A.V.
G.D. Plu. N.V.
G.
D.
A.
a. Stems in -v- and -p- omit the nominative end- ing -9, and lengthen a preceding e or o to rj or a*. Observe that the long vowel is retained in the vocative singular if accented, otherwise not. In the dative plural v before -<n is dropped.
&u>oz/-69
el/cdv-i ei/cdv-a el/ccov
el/COV-6
eiicov-oiv eltcov-es eiicov-wv eiKocn
prjrop-a
pfjrop
prjTop-e
prjrop-es prjrop-cov
ptfrop-cri,
? /
84]
CONSONANT DECLENSION.
75
84.
o aycov, <ya)vo$ i,, dep.,
avr
and a<y.), dep., o dvT-aycomcmjs, -ov 6 dtfp, depot; 6 a#\O9, -of TO a6\QVy -ov 6 affhrjTtjs, -ov 6 Sal/jLwv, -01/09 fj elictov, -o'z/09 6/377/1,09, -?;, -ov o /cavd)V, -01/09
Vocabulary.
contest (agony). struggle, engage in a contest (agonize).
struggle against (ant-agonize).
ant-agonist, air.
athletic game, prize. athlete.
divinity, spirit (demon). image, statue (icon-oclasm). solitary, lonely (erem-ite). measuring-rod, rule (canon). break (icono-clasm). ship (nausea). sailor (nant-ical). fire (pyr-otechnics). orator (rhetor). pointed stake, scratch.
mark (engraved or stamped on something. Character) .
85. Exercises. I. Translate into English. 1. 'H <y\a)(7o-a rov ptfropo? ap^et, rov
1 From ayo) : (1) a gathering, (2) a gathering for athletic contests, (3) contest.
r) vavs
o vavrr)?, -ov
TO
o prjrcop, -0^009
-#09
76 THE GREEK: IN ENGLISH. [85—
2. o\l<yoi, d6\rjral dff\a (frepovcriv e/c TMV dycovcov.
3. ev Tofc dya)(7iv dyo)vi^ovTat ol dd\rjTal <yv/jivoi.1
4. o Trafc Troieei Trvp ev ycovia TOV oi/cov. 5. ^apdcr- <rei Trjv el/cova TOV rwv vavr&v Oeov, /cal K\dei rov rov SpvlGo? TroBa. 6. ov /ca/co$ irals ecm ; 7. r)
TOV %pvcrov TCOV dd\rjTc*)V <f>epei. 8. opvlv ev TW aepi. 9. dyaffov Salfjiova €%€i 009 (as)
€7Tl(7K07rOV. 10. O TOV VTTOKpiTOV dvTa<ytoVi(TTri<$
K\dei ro9 ap^aid^ eiicovas (icon-o-clast) rwv Oe&v. 11. opdo) KpirrjV 6p0bv, 09 o\tyovs 0/Xou9 e^et, /cal <$>aiv6TCU, eprjfjios. 12. 6 eiricricoTros /jLa/cpbv Kavova /cal opdet rot'9 /Jil/cpovs Tral&as 01 €7rl TOO /cpv- ela-L 13. o/ 7ra£Se9 TVTTTOVO-I, TOV ad\rjTtjv.
II. Translate into Greek.
1. The child bears [away] the first prize. 2. Through the air are borne the voices of birds. 3. In the air are good spirits who are guardians of men. 4. Small marks appear on the gold.
5. The statues in the park appear lonely. 6. The athlete has a measuring-rod seven feet 2 long. 7. The orator is an antagonist of a sailor in the first contest of the season. 8. The measuring-rod makes a long mark on the head of the ancient mariner. 9. Little children break the ice with stones. 10. The fire is seen afar. 11. We are reading the tale of the ancient mariner. 12. A wise orator by a few words leads the people. 13. Shall we see a contest of athletes under the
1 This was the Greek custom. 2 Accusative of extent.
$6] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 77
tree? 14. The fear of God is the beginning of wisdom.
86. Notes on Derivatives.
1. Agony (ay&vid, another form for aywv) is prop- erly struggle, then the pain of struggle in a contest, but has come to include any severe pain or anguish. From dywvi£oij,ai, is formed aycDVicrr^ contestant; this with Trpwro? gives prot-agonist, first contestant, used especially of the leading actor in a Greek play.
2. Aer-o-naut is an air-sailor; aer-o-lite, a stone which falls from the air. As aer was taken from Greek into Latin, some of our derivatives have Latin endings or are compounded with Latin words. Such are aer-zW, aer-ate, aer-iform. Air has been ^further changed by coming through French.
3. Daemon, or demon, now denotes bad spirits only, quite differently from Greek usage ; and daimon is sometimes used in the more general sense of Sallow. This sense is retained in dai- monic, and sometimes, though not usually, in dae- monic; demoniac and demon-ology are connected rather with demon.
4. Icon-o-clasm is the act of an icon-o-clast ; icon- o-graphy is the description of images, statues, or pictures.
5. Eremite (ep^pir^, from eprjfjuo^ is less com- mon than hermit, the corrupted form of the same word.
78 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [86—
6. The various meanings of canon are all more or less closely connected with the figurative sense of rule. For example, it denotes a rule of the church; the list of sacred books accepted by the church as belonging to the Bible ; the authoritative list of saints, as in the Roman Catholic church. Hence we have canonical and canonize.
7. N<zur/Xo9, which is merely another form of vavrrjs, is Latinized into nautilus, a little shell-fish that sails over the water in its shell. The con- nection between vav$ and nausea is plain to any one who has been sea-sick.
8. On a pyre (from irvp) the dead were burned, among the Greeks and Romans. Pyr-o-technics is the art (re^^) of making fire-works. The em-pyr- ean (from ep-Trvpos in fire or on fire, ev and Trvp) is the highest heaven, which the ancients imagined to be pure fire.
9. Rhetoric is primarily f) prjropLfcrj re^yrj the art of an orator ; but the term is now used to denote the art of composition, while oratory has more ref- erence to the art of speaking in public.
10. The primary force of character is still seen in its sense of a distinctive mark, as a letter, figure, or sign. Then the word came to signify the sum of those invisible marks of one's nature, the qualities of soul which make up what is called character. Hence characterize (^xapa/crrjpl^co^ and characteristic.
11. In this and former chapters we have met several Greek verbs derived from nouns and end-
87] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 79
ing in -l£co or -l%o/j,ai. This ending -/£o> (-/£b//,eu) was used very freely in Greek to change nouns into verbs ; and so many Greek verbs have been taken into English with the termination -ize (or -ise) that this ending itself has been pretty fully naturalized, and is added to many nouns and adjectives which have themselves nothing to do with Greek. Also, from the same class of verbs were formed nouns in -£07x09 and -KTrfa which have given us the endings -ism and -1st.
XV. CONSONANT DECLENSION: NEUTER STEMS
IN -ar- AND -e<7-. Ho\vs. 87.
TO (TTVeV/JLdT-^) TO (jy€V
breath race
Sing. N. G.
D. Trvevfjiar-i yevei,
A. TTvev/Jia «yei>o9
V. 7TV€V/Jia 7€J>09
Dual N. A. V. irvev/juar-e yeve-e
G. D. TTvevfidr-oiv yeve-oiv
Plu. N. V. Trvev^ar-a yeve-a
G.
D.
A. Trvevfjuar-a <yeve-a
a. All neuter nominatives singular in -a have stems in -ar-; final r of the stem is dropped in
80 THJS GREEK IN ENGLISH. [8d—
the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular, which take no case-ending. This r often appears in English derivatives.
b. Stems in -e<7- change the last syllable to -09 in the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular. This is the same vowel-change which we have already met in Xe<y&>, Xo^yo?; rpeTrco^ T^OTTO? (see 57, 7) ; o-reXXo), crroXo? (see 60, 7) ; V€/JLQ>, VO/JLOS ; cr/ceTTTo/jLai, CT/COTTO? ; (frepco, (f>6pos (see 82, 9). Be- tween two vowels, and before -c™, cr is dropped.
88. The adjective 77-0X^9, TroXX?;, TTO\V much (plural, many) has the stem TTO\V- in some for,ms, and in others the stem ?roXXo- (feminine, ?roXXa).
Sing. N. 7roXu9 7roXX?7 TroXu
G. TTOXXOU 7TOXX?79 TTOXXoi)
D. TToXXft) 7TOXX?7 TTOXXft)
A. 7TO\VV TTOXX^J/ 7TO\V
V. TroXu TroXX?; TToXiJ
(Dual wanting.)
Plu. N. V. TroXXo/ TroXXat TroXXa
G. TTOXXWJ/ TTOXXCOJ/ TTOXXft)^
D. TroXXoK TroXXafc 7roXXot9
A. 7roXXov9 7roXXa9 TroXXa
89. Vocabulary.
aXXo9, -77, -o1 o^r (allo-pathy).
77, -ov S#s£ (aristo-crat).
1 Declined like avrds (see 66 and note !).
90] CONSONANT DECLENSION.
o yd/j,os, -ov
81
marriage (poly-gam-y).
become, be born, (of events)
,77 take place.
TO
(fr.
TO rypafjifJLa, -TO9
TO €tSo9, -€O9
/caXo9, -?;, -ov
TO /CaXXo9, -€09 TO KpaTOS, -€O9
/cpaTeco (fr. /cpaTos) 9, -a, -ov
o/xou, adv., TO ovvfia, -T09 TO 7ra^o9, -eo9 TO TTvev/jia, -T09 6 Trvevfitov, -01/09 7roXu9, TToXX^, TroXu 7T/x>, prep. w. gen., TO xp&fjia, -T09 TO i|re{)8o9, -€09
writing, letter (tele-gram).
shape, figure (kal-eido-scope).
beautiful (kal-eidoscope).
beauty.
strength.
rule (aristo-crat).
like (homoeo-pathy).
together.
name (Vyn-onym).
x J m S
feeling, passion (pathos). breath, wind (pneumat-ic). lung (pneumon-ia). much, plural many (poly-gamy). before (pro-gram). color (chrome). falsehood (pseudonym).
90. ^Exercises. I. Translate into English.
1. 'Ei/ Ty dplo-Ty apxfj ol apicrTOL /cpaTeov&L (aristo-crat, aristo-cracy). 2. 77 ap^rj Kafctf ICTTLV el
1 Root ycv- ; compare Latin gigno, genui, genus.
82 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [90—
(if) KCLKOS Srj/jios fcpareei (demo-cracy) r&v aptcrrcov TroXZrooz'.1 3. ol deol vepovcn rco r&v dv0pa)7T(0v yevei /caXXo? KOI Kpdros Kal ra aXXa dyaOd. 4. ra TrdOea T&V Oewv o/jioia TOLS rwv dv6pu>7TG)v TrdOecriv^ el(TL. 5. 7ro\\al <yeveal olfceovcnv OJJLOV rrjv yfjv.
6. ol /ca\ol teal dyaOol TralSes ov \eyovcn tyev&ea.
7. TO %pO)/JLa T&V €7Tl TCO yS^ySX/ft) ypa/JL/JLaTCOV OfJiOlOV
pv<ra>* 8. pf TrvevfJboves rov dO\rjrov <yv/j,vd- irpb rov dywvos, Kal rj crap% yiyverai 6/jboid 9. TL €(TTLV ev ovv/Jbari, ; 10. /ca\a ei&ea o-K€7rrd/ji€0a (kal-eido-scope). 11. ol opvlOes elcri 7ro\\a>v xpco/jLaTcov^ (poly-chrome). 12. ypd(f>ovcn Trepl rov jd/jiov /caXXeo? Kal 13. TroXXol TrorafJiol paKpa ovvfjuara e^ovcn. 14. ov TTO\V 0o)5 e^ofjiev CK rwv acrrpcov. 15. <w ?rat, alaOd- vei rb Kpdros rcov
II. Translate into Greek.
1. In many contests the best men bear [away] the prizes. 2. The athlete's family has many marks of beauty. 3. The sailor's horses are from a beautiful race. 4. The child has a good name and a figure which is like the statues of the gods. 5. You are painting (ypdcfrco*) the letters with beautiful colors. 6. Men do not rule the winds. 7. The ship is borne by the strength of the winds.
1 As a verb of ruling Kparew takes the genitive (see 81,
i., i).
2 "O/xotos takes the dative, like tcros (see 72 and note x),
3 Predicate genitive, used as in Latin.
91] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 83
8. The orators are exercising their lungs ; they are reading together a song about marriage. 9. The marriage takes-place before the season of roses. 10. We have like feelings (homoeo-pathy) with other men. 11. In the books of ancient orators are not a few falsehoods. 12. In the best schools children are educated together. 13. The soli- tary athlete shows much strength, but not much beauty.
91. Notes on Derivatives.
1. Allo-pathy (aXXo?, vra^o?), the use of such medicines as will produce effects different from those produced by the disease, is contrasted, as a mode of treating disease, with homeo-pathy (see 14, #).
2. From yd/jios we obtain mono-gamy (^01^09), poly-gamy (vroXu?), and fo'-gamy; the last is another instance of the combination of a Latin with a Greek element. (Compare fo'-cycle, 60, 5.)
3. Hetero-geneous (erepo-yevrfs ; erepos and 76^09) means of different kinds, and is contrasted with homo-genedus (0/^0-76^779 ; for o/no- see 91, 8) of the same kind, or all of one kind. Eu-gene (evyevrjs, from ev and 761/09) and its feminine Eu-genia, or Eli-genie (the French form), signify well-born, or of good race. The root of ^l^vo^ai takes the form <yov- (see 87, b, second sentence) in theo-gony (0eo- yovtd, tfeoV), birth of the gods, or genealogy of the gods ; also in cosmo-gony, birth of the universe.
4. The syllable -gram, from ^pa^pa, has been already given, in some words, as from rypd<f>a) (epi-
84 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [91-
gram, 68, 6 ; mono-gram, 68, 9 ; deca-gram, 82, 3). Further, pro-gram (V/oo) is literally a before-writing ; grammar was first applied to written language ; the adjective grammatical shows the r of the stem.
5. We have seen that in many compounds the vowel -o- is inserted to connect the two parts, sometimes taking the place of a different vowel at the end of the first stem. (Compare 51, 1.) In spher-oid (from a^aipd), aster-oid (from darijp, dcrrpov), delt-oid (from SeXra), anthrop-oid (in which, if it stood by itself, one might say that the o be- longed to the stem of dvOpcoiro?), this o has been contracted with -id, the remnant of eZSo?, into the syllable -old. Then, as this ending occurred so frequently (especially in technical or scientific words), the syllable -old has come to be regarded as a simple suffix, meaning like, which may be added to words from Latin as well as to words from Greek. Thus ov-oid. (Latin ovum, egg), albu- minoid., etc. The syllable -ide, frequent in chem- ical terms, is also from eZ&o?.
6. Instead of /caXo? or /eaXXos, the related form /ca\\L- was used in composition. This gives calli- in calli-graphy, calli-sthenics (o-0eVo9, -609, strength, nearly equivalent to Kpdros).
7. From /cpdros, tcpareco, we have the forms -crat-ic and -cracy in aristo-crat, aristo-cracy ; demo- crat, demo-cracy ; auto-crat (auro?) ; theo-cracy (#eo<?) ; pluto-crat, pluto-cracy (TrXoOro?, -ov wealth). These words have made the meaning of the part from Kpdro<$ so familiar, that -crat and -cracy are
91] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 85
added to a few words not from Greek. Thus bureau-CT&t, bureau-ci&cy ; and mob-o-CT&cy is some- times heard instead of the more regular ochlo-cracy (0^X09, -ov moH).
8. The adverb O/AOV is a genitive form of the ad- jective 0/409, -77, -6v same, which early passed out of common use. But a number of compounds of 6/109 remained in common use, and we have in English homo-geneons (6/40-76^77' 9 ; see 91, 3) ; hom- onym, hom-onymous (ovvpa), of the same name, that is, pronounced alike.
9. Besides hom-onym, ovv^a gives us an-onymous (av- privative ; see 60, 3, 6) ; syn-onym (GVV), a word of like meaning with another (to be distin- guished from hom-onym) ; pseud-onym (-^61)809) ; also ep-onymous (eVt), giving a name to, and ep- onym, a name of a person given to a people or place. A patr-onymic is a name derived from that of a father (irarrip, Trarp- 6s father, Latin pater) or other ancestor. Met-onymy (yu,era indicating change ; see 60, 6) is a rhetorical figure consisting in a certain kind of change of name.
10. From Trdffos are derived pathetic (TraOrjTi/cos), a-pathetic and a-pathy (alpha privative; see 60, 3, 0), anti-pathy (aim), sym-pathy (cruz/), hydr-o-pathy (the treatment of disease by water, vScop'), and path-o- logy, the theory or doctrine of disease.
11. The r of TTvevfjuar- appears in pneumatic.
12. The representative of ?roXu9 in English is poly- with the force of the plural, many, which has already been mentioned with a number of com-
86 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [92—
pounds. (See 41, 1; 60, 3, <?; 60, 8; 82, 2; 82, 7.)
13. Hp6 appears in pro-gnosis (yiyvwo-fcci)*), judg- ment beforehand, especially as to the probable course and result of a disease, whence pro-gnostic and pro-gnosticate.
14. From ^pco/jia we have mono-chrome (/-toy 09), poly-chrome, chrom-o-litho-graph (see 67, I., 4), and the abbreviated chromo. Chromatic, pertaining to colors, retains the stem. It is most often used of a musical scale of which the intervals are all half- tones, the intermediate tones having been at one time commonly written in colors.
XVI. CONSONANT DECLENSION: STEMS IN -i-
AND -6V-. 92.
fj (?roXt-)
city king
Sing. N. G. D.
A. iro\,L-v /3acri\€-a
V.
Dual N. A. V. 7roXe-e
G. D.
Plu. N. G. D.
94] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 87
a. Stems in -i- take -&>?, instead of -09, in the genitive singular, and take -v in the accusative singular. The vowel i appears only in the nomi- native, accusative, and vocative singular; else- where e (in the accusative plural e^) has taken its place.
b. The genitive singular and plural of stems in -t- still keep the accent on the antepenult.
c. Stems in -ev- lose v before a vowel in the end- ing ; they take -o>9 in the genitive singular, -d in the accusative singular, and -a? in the accusative plural.
93. The verb Svva/j,cu can, am able, is a deponent, and, like Latin possum, takes the infinitive in dependence upon it. It is conjugated as follows :
Sing. 1 Svva-fjiai,
2 Svva-a-ai
3 Svva-rcu
Dual 2 Svva-<70ov 3
Plu. 1 2
3 Svva- vrat,
94. Vocabulary.
TO a/cpov, -ov top, upper part (acro-stic).
77 a/e/oo-7ro7U9, -e«9 citadel, acro-polis.
6 /3<z<7fcXeu9, -e&) 9 king.
-€&>9 birth, origin, genesis,
THE GREEK IN ENGLISH.
[95—
oY9, adv.,
s, -eft>9 o SvvdcTT'rjs, -ov lepds, -a, -6v o iepevs, -eft>9 \vco TI \V<TIS, -eft)?
, -6ft>9 TO /U0-09, -609
-a, -ov
-€ft>9
77 Tat9, -€ft)9
<f)VQ)
f) <f)VO-l,<}, -60)9
TO <f>VTOVy -OV
carve (hiero-glyph-ic). i(?e, related to Svo
force, power (dynamite).
ruler, dynast (dynasty).
sacred (hiero-glyphic).
priest (hier-archy).
loose, undo, let loose.
a loosing, setting free.
unloose, take apart, ana-lyze.
an undoing, taking apart, ana-lysis.
hatred (mis-anthrope).
dead (necro-polis).
new, young (neo-phyte).
city (necro-polis).
line (as of writing).
arrange (tactics).
arrangement (syn-tax).
make grow.
( (originally growth, then) ( nature (physical).
plant (neo-phyte).
95. Exercises. I. Translate into English. 1. O/ lepees ev ry aKpoiro\€i yX
2. e
Trep T^9 ToO /coafjiov yeve(Tec0$ (cosmo-gony). 3. ol Svvdo-rai, TroXhrjv Svvafuv e%ov<ri /cal /cpareov-
95] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 89
(Ti TTO\\WV dvOpwTTCOV. 4. 8^9 dvajLjvci)a-/C€L 6 Paari- Xei;9 TO veov f3i/3\lov Trepl rrjs rcov dcrrpcov Ta£eo>9. 5. ev rrj vea vroXet (Nea-polis, Naples) ylyverai veov <yeVo9. 6. TroXXal teal ica\ai eicriv al TCDV ve/cp&v 7roXee9 (necro-polis). 7. 77 Svva/Ms rov rfKiov <j)vet> ra <f)vrd. 8. TO /i6o~o9 dv0pa>7rcov (mis-anthropy) /ca/cbv 7ra#o9 ecrri. 9. ol 6eol \vovcn ra TrvevuaTa, fcal rj vavs KO\ TO, vea <f>vra /cXdovrat,. 10. al veai Svvav- rai dva\vew TO (frvTOV, TO ovv/jia ov Svvavrai \eyeiv. 11. Svvacrai rrjv rwv dcrrpcov <f>vo-t,v \eyeiv ; 12. ol iepees oifceovaiv ev rfj aKpO7r6\eiy aXXa ov TTO\V Kpd- T09 e^ovcn. 13. TroXXol crri^oi <ypd<f>ovrai Trepl rfjs cro<l>la$ rov veov Swdcrrov. 14. 77 Tral? q>Sr)V Seta
II. Translate into Greek.
1. The sacred writings are carved on stones. 2. The priests rule (hier-archy) the city, and ar- range the sacred [things]. 3. The birth of a young king is reported in the sacred city. 4. The overseer takes-apart and examines the new ma- chine. 5. The force of the wind breaks many trees. 6. The rulers come-to-know the hatred of the citizens. 7. The priests announce the loosing of the sacred birds. 8. Sailors cannot rule the winds. 9. Man is by nature a little world (micro- cosm). 10. The plant lives in the air and has a long name. 11. Many races of men arrange their houses in cities, and have kings and priests who make laws. 12. In the sacred books are many tales about the birth of the gods. 13. The wise
90 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [96—
man writes a letter to the ruler about the nature of the laws. 14. The top of the tree is dead.
96. Notes on Derivatives.
1. An acro-stic (a/cpov and 0-7-^09, -ov verse or line) is a series of lines of which the first or last letters, or both, form a word or words. A di-stich (&- representing &($ or Suo) is a couplet, or two lines making complete sense. This prefix di-, meaning double, or two, appears in a number of derivatives, as di-graph, two letters standing for one sound (pA, for example) ; di-morphic or di-morphous, appearing under two forms ; di-phthong (see 68, 9) ; di-lemma (see 110, 8) ; di-(s) syllable (see 110, 8). This prefix must not be confused with the di- from Latin, meaning apart, as in di-gress.
2. Basil, as a proper name and as the name of a plant, is from fia<ri\evs. Basilisk, a kind of serpent, is from ftao-iKio-Kos little king, the diminutive of y8a<7£Xeu9, so called because something on its head slightly resembles a crown. (Compare asterisk, 68, 2.) A basilica ^/3aa-i\iKrf) was originally the building in which a judicial officer at Athens, called /3a<™Xei;9, held court. This style of building, imitated and somewhat changed at Rome, became the prototype of the early Christian churches, and churches of this form are still called basilicas.
3. Genetic is the adjective corresponding to gen- esis. Palin-genesis (jrd\iv and yeveo-is ; see 31, 6) is again-birth, re-generation.
96] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 91
4. The tri-glyph (r/oefc and y\v<f>(D*) is a kind of architectural ornament.
5. Dynamic (Suz/a/u/eo?) is the adjective from Suz/a/u?. Dynamo is a common contraction for dynamo-electric (rj\eicTpov amber, in which electricity was first observed) machine, so called because in it electricity is generated by force from a steam- engine.
6. Hieratic (Ve/wrrtAxfc) is the adjective from lepevs. Hiero-glyphics were the sacred writing, or picture-characters, which were used by the Egyp- tian priests, and which have come down to us carved on stone. A hiero-phant (</>atW) is one who shows (make plain, interprets*) the sacred things. Hier-onymus (6W/xa) means having a sacred name ; Jerome is a corruption of the same.
7. Para-lysis (jrapd-\vcn<^) is a loosing aside, or disabling, the name of a disease which disables the nerves. Paralytic (7rapa\vTifcd^ is the corre- sponding adjective, as analytic is the adjective cor- responding to ana-lysis. Palsy is a corruption of paralysis, intermediate forms being parlesy, palesy.
8. A necro-logy is an account of the dead.
9. Neo-logy or neo-logism (i/eo?) is the use of new words. A neo-phyte is one newly planted (yeo- <f>vrov) ; that is, a new convert, or a new member of a religious society. Also from z/eo? we obtain the prefix neo- meaning new, used with a considerable number of words, as neo-platonism (TlXdrwv Plato).
10. Miso-gamist is from /ucro? and 7^/109; miso- gynist from /jLiaos and yvvr], yvvai/c-os woman.
92 TEE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [96—
11. IToXt? has been put at the end of several modern names of cities, such as Indiana-polls, Anna- polis, in imitation of ancient Nea-polis (literally new town), and others. In Constantino-pie (Kcova-Tavrl- vov-7ro\is Constantine^ s town) and in some others, the last element has been shortened. A Greek metr-o-polis was the mother city (/jitfTrjp mother, Latin mater) which sent out colonies, and to which these colonies looked back as to a common centre. The adjective is metro-politan (TroXir???).
12. Tactics and tactic (ratcTiicos from rdo-aco') have reference to the arrangement of military or naval forces. Syntax (crvv and ra^) is the arrang- ing together of words in sentences ; syn-tactic is the adjective.
13. From <j)vo-i<? are derived a number of words which show quite a variety of meaning. Thus physi-cal signifies pertaining to nature; physi-o-logy is the science of nature, but in use the word is re- stricted to one phase of the nature of the human body ; physi-o-gnomy (<yiyvd)crfcc0~) is the art of dis- cerning the nature of a person from his face, and then the word comes to mean the face itself. Again, physics is the science of nature, having about the force which we should expect physiology to have from its etymology. Physic has received the special meaning of the art of healing diseases (whence physician) ; then the word was employed in the sense of medicine, and finally for that par- ticular kind of medicine with which, in old times, people were most familiar. In meta-physics
97] Mi- VERBS: Ti&y/u AND Ai'Soyu. 93
signifies after (a common use of* /xera with the accusative), since meta-physics was considered as coming after physics in the order of studies. It includes the study of the phenomena of mind, psy- chology (see 51, 8).
14. An epi-phyte (eW, <f>vrov) is a plant growing on another, without receiving from it any nourish- ment.
XVII. M^-VERBS: Ti'0i//u AND
97. A few verbs, some of them common ones, are conjugated in a slightly different manner from the verbs thus far given (with the exception of Svvafjiai). This form of conjugation is called the /u-form, from the last syllable of the present in- dicative active first singular. TlOrjfu put and Sl- give are examples.
Active. Passive (Middle).
Sing. 1 ri-6^-fii
2 3
Dual 2 ri-6e-Tov Ti-6e-<r6ov
3 ri-Oe-rov Ti-6e-cr6ov
Plu. 1 Ti-0e-fJL€V
2 TL-0€-T€
3 Ti-6e-acri ri-Oe-vrai Inf. ri-Oe-vai
94 THE GREEK tfr ENGLISH. [98—
Active. Passive (Middle).
Sing. 1
2 6Y-&0-9 Sl-So-crcu
3 oY-8G)-o"£ Si-Bo-rat,
Dual 2 Si-So-rov
3 S/-So-TOz/
Plu. 1 St-So-fjiev
2 St-So-re Si-So-(r0e
3 Si-So-dai Sl-So-vrai
Inf. St-So-z/a^ 8l-&o-<r0ai,
a. The root of rldrjfju, is #e-, that of StSw/it is So-; the syllables ™- in ri-Orj-^i and S^- in Sl-So)-/M, called the reduplication, do not appear in derivatives. (Compare yi-yvco-cr/ca).) The root-syllables 0e- and So- are lengthened to #??- and &a>- in the singular active.
98. Vocabulary.
TO avOos, -eo9 flower (anther).
TO Sepfjia, -TO? s&iw, Azc?^ (derm).
SiS&fii, give (dose).
Spdco do, accomplish.
TO SpafLa, -TO? (1) ^^c?, (2) drama.
TO 97^09, -609 character (eth-ics).
Kev6<$y -ij, -6v empty (ceno-taph).
TO fcepas, Keparos horn (rhino-ceros).
o fjidvTis, -e&)9 soothsayer, prophet (necro-mancy).
TO /^e\09, -eo9 song, strain of music (mel-ody).
-179 memory (mnem-onic).
99] Ui-VERBS: Ti&y/u AND Ai'&»/u. &5
77 pf$, plvo?1 nose (rhin-o-ceros).
d Ta<£o9, -ov grave, tomb (cenotaph).
riffrj/jLL put, place.
77 Oecris, -eo>9 position, putting (thesis).
ow-ri0ijfJLt put together.
a putting together, composition
77 <TVV-Ue(Tl<$, -60)9 , . . x
( (syn-thesis). TO <f)dpfjia/cov, -ov drug (pharmacy).
99. Exercises. I. Translate into English.
1. To Oepfjiov rov r/Kiov <f>v€t, ra avffea. 2. rc5 rdcfxt) (epi-taph) rov fiavreco^ <y\v<f)o/ji€V ra /jLara rov ovv^Laro^. 3. 77 fu/cpa irals rdcrcrec avOea €7rl ro3 Kevq> rd(f)Q) (ceno-taph). 4. o /3ao-i\evs Sv- varai Spdeiv 7ro\\a /cal dya0a Spa/jLara. 5. €7rl rc3 TT?? pivo? /cepa? (rhin-o-ceros) eVrt. 6. [77] v@pGt)7roL<? 7ro\\d <f)dp/JLa/ca,, a 6 (pharmacist, druggist^ 7. rot? 6/070^9 /cal Spa/jLa<ri, rov TraiSbs TO 77^09. 8. 77 a-vvOeGLs ov% 6/jLoid earl rfj ava\v<T€i. 9. 6 vavTijs ri6r](TLV vBcop ev TO) icevto SepfjiaTL pd$. 10. ol VTTO/cpiral fyaivovrai e^eiv ev rrj 7ro\\d fjbe\ea. 11. ol tepees TiQeacn %pv<rbv VTTO \i0<p ev jcovia rov oil/cov. 12. djaOd fiova \€yo/JLev Trepl ro)V vefcpwv. 13. crvvriOe/Jiev pdSa /cal a\\a avOea. 14. & ySao~tXei), ov Svvaaac ftiov rol<$ ve/cpol? StSovai.
1 Accusative ptva.
96 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [100—
II. Translate into Greek.
1. The soothsayer sells drugs [which are] like dead flowers. 2. The sun gives to the skin of the sailor's nose the color of a rose. 3. A good character is shown by good deeds. 4. The best actors have a good memory. 5. The king who makes (riO^^i) the laws of the people cannot make (nroieai) the songs. 6. Nature gives horns to the she-goat and a thick (jra^ii) hide (pachy- derm) to the hippopotamus. 7. The first flowers of the season are put upon the graves of the dead. 8. Can you tell the position of the cities which are sending their citizens to war ? 9. The peda- gogue is writing a book about the composition of words. 10. The priest is examining the origin of the sacred songs. 11. Young orators are able to put together many words which have little force.
12. The gods appear to the soothsayer alone.
13. A beautiful deed is like a light which can be seen afar.
100. Notes on Derivatives.
1. Anth-o-logy is properly a collection of flowers ; for the primary meaning of \eyco, from which the last part is derived, is gather. (^^K-\€KTL/CO<; eclectic, from e£ and Xeyw, shows the same force of the verb.) But anth-ology is generally used in a figurative sense, to denote a collection of choice passages from authors, especially from poets. Heli- anthus (rpuo?) is the scientific name for sun-flower.
100] Mi-VERBS: TMrjfjii, AND A/Soyu. 97
2. Epi-dermis (eW and 8e/>/ia), the scientific word for the outer skin, has come into common use. Hypo-dermis, the under skin (UTTO), is mostly confined to scientific writing and speech, although the adjective hypo-dermic has become common from the practice of giving certain remedies by injec- tion under the skin. The element hypo- is used in many scientific terms in the opposite sense to that of hyper- (see 46, 6, and note that the related Latin prefix sub- is in like manner contrasted with super-). The adjective pachy-dermatous (?ra^u thick) preserves the -ar- of Sepfiar-. Taxi-dermy is the art of preparing skins so as to preserve their natural appearance.
3. Dose is our remnant of So'o-i?, -eo>9 a giving, from BiBcofiL. Anti-dote (avri-Sorov) is a medicine given against — that is, to counteract some effect. An-ec-dote is from dv-ex-Sorov. The plural dv-etc- Sora (literally things not given out or published) was the name 'given by Procopius [a Byzantine writer of the sixth century A.D.] to the unpub- lished memoirs of the emperor Justinian, which consisted chiefly of tales of the private life of the court; whence the application of the name to short stories or particulars.9
4. A drastic (Spao-ri/cds from Spdco) remedy is an active, vigorous one. The r of the stem Spdpar- appears in dramatic, dramatist, and in dramat-urgy (SpdjAarovpytd for Spdfj.aT-o-€p<yid, the second part being from epyov) drama-making, or the art of writing and representing plays.
98 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [100—
5. An earlier meaning of 97^09 is custom, habit; hence, that body of habits and usages which make up character or morals. (In the same way Latin mos, moris, custom, has given us moral.*) From rjdos in the latter sense we have ethic, ethical, per- taining to morals, and ethics, the science of morals.
6. Besides rhin-o-ceros (plv-o-Kepco? nose-horn) /ee/oce>5 gives us also mono-ceros (/jLovo-Kepcos) unicorn (Latin unus, one, and cornu, horn).
7. From p,dvri<s we have the adjective mantic {fjiavTiKos), and also the element -mancy ^avreia), divination, in chir-o-mancy, divination by examin- ing the hand (%e//o), necro-mancy, divination by consulting the dead (veicpo<i), pyr-o-mancy, by in- terpreting the appearance of a fire (irvp), and biblio-mancy, by selecting hap-hazard a passage of the Bible (Pij3\iov). The corresponding adjec- tives are necro-mantic, etc.
8. MeXos (which refers to the music, while cJS^ refers more to the words of a song) appears in melody (see 31, 7) and in mel-o-drama, song-play, or play interspersed with music.
9. From fJLvtffjw) is derived the adjective /jLvrf^cov mindful, which gives our word mnemonic, pertain- ing to memory, and mnemonics, a system of artificial aids to memory. A-mnesty (a-^v^cfTeia, alpha priva- tive ; see 60, 3, 5) is a legal lack of memory, that is, a general pardon for past offences in time of war.
10. a. The root 0e- is the central element of a number of important derivatives. Thesis has the
100] Mi- VERBS: Tt%u AND A/S<w/u. 99
figurative meaning of a position taken and main- tained in argument. (Note the derivation of posi- tion from Latin positio, from pono, to place.) Anti- thesis (aim) is op-position, contrast; par-en-thesis (jrapd, ev) is literally a putting in beside, then something put in beside, as a side or subordinate matter; hypo-thesis (UTTO) is under-putting, a sup- position (Latin sub, under) ; syn-thesis, putting together, is often contrasted with ana-lysis, taking apart. The corresponding adjectives are anti-thetic (azm-0e™/eo9), par-en-thetic, etc., to each of which -al is often added. Further, epi-thet (eW-0eroz/) is a descriptive word put on (figuratively) to a person or thing.
b. Again, dtjKrj is a case or chest in which to put things ; an apo-thecary (airo) was originally so called because he has his drugs put away in cases; biblio-theke (j3ij3\lov), book-case, is an old word for library. Hypo-thecate is a legal term which goes back to the elements VTTO and Orj/cq. Hence re- hypothecate.
c. A theme (Oepa, -TO?) is primarily a subject laid down, or proposed for discussion ; from this are derived the other uses of the word. The adjec- tive thematic retains the -ar- of the stem. Finally, avddeiJia, -TO? (ava here meaning up) was originally anything put up in a temple, that is, offered or devoted to a god. Later, however, the form avd- OTJ/JLO, was used in this sense, and avd-de/jLa meant only what was devoted to an evil power. Hence ana-themat-ize (ttya-0e//,aT/£a>) signifies to devote to
100 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [101—
evil, to curse solemnly ; and ana-thema is not only the person thus cursed, but also the curse itself, which was formerly a solemn ceremony of the church.
11. Pharmaco-poeia (<f>ap/jLa/co-7roud) signifies a book describing drug-making, or the preparation of medicines.
XVIII. Mt- VERBS : r/Icm7/u AND
101. The root of iorrrj/ja set up, cause to stand, is
o-ra-, the same root which appears in Latin sta-re
and English stand. The present indicative and infinitive are as follows :
Active. Passive (Middle).
Sing. 1 I-O-TVJ-JM i-crra-fjiai,
2 2-<7T?7-9 i-o-ra-aai, 3
Dual 2 i-(TTa-TOV
3 i-ara-TOV i-crra-crOov
Plu. 1
2
3 (i-a-rd-da-i) i-ara-vrac
l-crrdo'L
Inf. i-crrd-vat,
a. The syllable /- (originally <™-) is a reduplica- tion, like TI- in rLO^^i. (Latin sisto corresponds, in formation and meaning, to r<7T?7/u.) The mean- ing stand is given to certain other tenses of the
103] Mi-VERBS : f/lo-rrjfjLi JND lie paw* fit. 101
verb, which we shall not use here, and most of the derivatives show this meaning.
102. The root of Kepavvvpi mix is Kepa-, which is shortened to Kpd-, in derivatives. The syllable -vvv-, -vvv-, is a suffix used to form the stem of the present tense.
Active. Passive ( Middle) .
|
Sing. 1 2 3 |
Kepd-vvv-s Kepd-vvv-cri |
Kepd-vvv-aaL Kepd-vvv-rat, |
|
Dual 2 3 |
Kepd-vvv-TOV Kepd-vvv-TOV |
Kepd-vvv-crOov Kepd-vvv-aOov |
|
Plu. 1 2 3 |
Kepd-vvv-fJiev Kepd-vvv-Te fcepa-vvv-do'L |
Kepd-vvv-a-6e Kepd-vvv-vTai |
|
Inf. |
Kepa-vvv-vai |
Kepd-vvv-aOai |
103. Vocabulary.
aipeo) seize, grasp.
alpeofjiai (middle) choose.
-tj, -ov able to choose (heretic). (di.eresis>
aip€co) Sca-\eyofjLaty dep., converse (dia-lect).
!in compounds only, with the force of hard or bad; op- posed to €v (dys-pepsia). TO %<pov, -ov animal (zoo-logy),
IN ENGLISH. [104—
-a, -ov one's own, private (idiom).
set up, cause to stand (stat-ic). fcepdvvv/jii mix.
o fcpdrijp, -77/009 mixing-bowl (crater).
6>aXo;9, -77, -ov even, level (an-omalous).
digest (dys-pep-sia). form, mould (plas-tic). 'cut (tome). (f>pd£o) make known, tell (phrase).
104, Exercises. I. Translate into English.
1. fO plvoKepax; (see 100, 6) Svvarai alpeetv ra a\\a %a)a KOI riOevau ev rc3 Trora/zft). 2. 6 ie icrrrjo-t, Kevov Kparrjpa VTTO rc3 Sez^S/ow. 3. TO, Qdp/jLa/ca. 4. eVt rfj o/jia\fj <yfj lara/JLev ol/covs. 5. o Trafc Kepdvvvo-i yrjv /cat vBcop /cal vrXacrcre^ /ca\as T&V £(pa)v. 6. 6 pl/cpos Tecopytos (see 57, 4) rb SevSpov, d\\d (but) ov Svvarai T^evSo? . 7. Svvacrai fypd^eiv rd ovvfjuara rwv av6e<ov a dva\vei<$ ; 8. dvOpcoTroi ev TreTrrovcn (en-peptic) rrjv crdp/ca £(pcov /cal (f>vrd. 9. o /cpvcrTaX\,os ev rw ISlep 7rapa$el<7G) rov f3aai\ea><$ o/i-aXo? ean. 10. ol 6eol bvvavrai 7T\dcrcr€iv vroXXa yevea £q>cov. 11. ol a7rd(7TO\oi St,a\eyovrai, avv TO?? TroXtrat? Trepl rov 7ro\€/jiov. 12. alpeofieOa dyadov 77^09 dvrl r^9 ftao-i- Xe&)9 &vvd/JL€(t)<;. 13. rt Kepdvvvrai ev rc3 Kparrjpi ; 14. ot 0eol &8oa<rt TroXXa ro6? Tra^crt TWI/ dv-
105] Mi-VEBBS: "IcrTrj/Jii AND Kepdwv/M. 103
II. Translate into Greek.
1. The solitary dynast converses with the priest, and makes-known his private feelings (idio-pathic). 2. The young [man] cannot mould an image of a hippopotamus. 3. The poets make-known the character and deeds of the ancients. 4. They mix drugs in a little mixing-bowl. 5. The animal is able to eat and digest many kinds of plants. 6. They are setting up a new machine, which cuts grass. 7. It is best to choose the level road. 8. In time we learn to choose the good instead of the bad. 9. The sailor's brother seizes and throws the measuring-rod. 10. The leaders of the people cannot divide the city. 11. To converse with others is not given to many animals. 12. A level road leads to the river. 13. He chooses the best place in the theatre, from which he can see the drama well.
105. Notes on Derivatives.
1. Di-eresis or di-aeresis (Si-aipeaw, -eews), liter- ally a taking apart, shows the active signification of alpeco. From alpeco in its middle sense we have heresy (aspect,?, -ew?), a choosing, and heretic. The term heretic was originally given to people who did not accept the doctrines of the church, but chose their own beliefs; and heresy was a belief thus chosen.
2. From Sm-Xeyo/^at (Sm and \eyco, in which the force of Bid is not clear) we obtain dia-lect (
104 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [105—
Xe/cro9, -on conversation, way of talking}, and dia- logue (Sm-Xo709). Dia-lectics was first used of a conversational form of argument and investigation.
3. A zoo-phyte (£eooz>, fyvrov) is an animal-plant ; that is, an animal very much like a plant. An epi- zootic disease is one which prevails among animals (eVl rofc £&)(H5) as an epi-demic (see 74, 1) among human beings. The zodiac (faSia/cds, an adjective formed from %q>§iov, the diminutive of £eSoi/), that imaginary belt of the sky through which the sun seems to move, contains the twelve constellations, which are fancied to resemble various animals.
4. Idiom (l§ia>p.ay -ro9) denotes, first one's own peculiar use of language ; then a mode of expres- sion which is peculiar to a particular language. Idiomatic retains -ar- of the stem. Idiot (iSicoTrjs, -ov) was formerly used in the Greek sense of a private person, as distinguished from one in public station. Then it came to mean a common, unedu- cated, or simple person, 'and finally one who has not the ordinary degree of intelligence.
5. From the root of to-T7?/u we have static (<rra- TIKOS) and statics. A compound of statics is hydr-o- statics (#&*)/)), the science which has to do with the laws of pressure and equilibrium of water and sim- ilar liquids. An apo-state (aTro-o-raT?;?) is one who stands off from, or deserts, his former faith or party. Apo-stasy (aTro-o-ra^^) is the act of so deserting. Ec-stasy (e/e-o-racw), a standing out, is an extreme state of emotion, in which, as we say, one is " be- side himself " ; ec-static is the adjective. Sy-stem
105] Mi-VERBS : "lo-TV/M AND Kepavvvpi. 105
-TO?, from <rvv and fa'Trjfii) denotes the standing together of things, in an orderly manner; systematic is the adjective, and systematize the verb. (Many English words containing the root sta are from Latin.)
6. The Greek /cpdrtfp was a large bowl in which the wine was mixed with water before being drunk ; the crater of a volcano is so named from its resem- blance in shape. From i&o?, avv, and Kpa<ri<; mix- ture was formed ISio-a-vy-icpdcrid idio-syn-crasy, one's own peculiar mixture of qualities ; idio-crasy is rarely used in the same sense.
7. From opa\b$ and dv- privative (see 60, 3, 5), we have an-omalous (dv-cl)fjLa\o$ with an irregular lengthening of o to o>), irregular, and ano-maly (av-cofjLa\La), irregularity.
8. Eii-peptic and eu-pepsia are contrasted with dys-peptic, (Sucr- and TreTrro)) digesting ill, and dys- pepsia, bad digestion.
9. From 7rXao-<7<*> we obtain plaster (e/^-TrXao-- rpov), and also plastic (TrXacrr^oV), moulding, or capable of being moulded, or pertaining to moulding or fashioning.
10. The root of refivco is re/-t-, which appears in English derivatives in the form TO^-, with the common change of e to o. A tome (TO/W, -oi/) is a part of a work cut from the rest, hence a volume. An a-tom (a-ro/io?, alpha privative') is a particle so small that it cannot be cut in two, an indivisible par- ticle. Ana-tomy is primarily the cutting up (ava-
?), dissection of a body ; then it came to mean
106 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [107—
the structure of a body, as learned by dissection. Zoo-tomy is the anatomy of animals. An epi-tome (eV^-ro/x?;) is a brief summary of a book, the result of cutting out all but the principal statements. The Greek word for in-sect (Latin in and seco, cuf) is ev-To/jiov, because so many insects, like the wasp and spider, are cut into so as to be almost divided. Hence the first element of entomo-logy.
11. Phrase is our form of (frpdais speaking, from (ppd^co. Compounds are phrase-o-logy, para-phrase (jrapd), and peri-phrasis (jrepi), with the adjective peri-phrastic. (Compare circum-locution from Latin circum and loquor.^)
XIX. THE VEKB <E>?7/u; THE ADJECTIVE Ha?.
106. The conjugation of fyripi say, affirm, is nearly like that of lo-rrj/Ai in the present active ; but the present indicative of fy^^i is enclitic (see 55), ex- cept in the second person singular, fyfo ; hence it follows the rules in 55, a and b, in regard to ac- cent, and should not be placed at the beginning of a sentence.
Sing. Dual. Plu.
2 (£779 <j)a-rdv <f>a~T€
3 tyrf-ai fya-rov <j)d<7l
Inf.
107. The adjective ?ra9 all (sometimes, in the singular, every} is of the third declension in the
108] THE VEEB <f>r)fjil ; THE ADJECTIVE TTCLS. 107
masculine and neuter, and of the first declension in the feminine. It has some irregularities of ac- cent, and is therefore given in full.
|
Sing. JN. |
7TC19 |
Tracra ircuv |
|
G. D. A. |
Traz/Tos TTCLVTl Trdvra |
Tracnjs Travros Tracrrj TTCLVTI ircLo'dV • Trciv |
|
V. |
TTCLV |
Trdara irdv |
|
DualN.A.V. |
irdvre |
TTddCL 7TCLVTC |
|
G.D. |
irdvroi |
v Tracraw irdmoiv |
|
Plu. N.V. |
Trai/res |
r Trdcrai, Trdvra |
|
G. |
TrdvTcov Trdcrwv TrdvTcov |
|
|
D. |
Trda-L |
j. ~ TTCLddl^ TTddi |
|
A. |
TTaVTCH |
? 7rao~a9 Trdvra |
|
108. |
Vocabulary. |
|
|
i] dyopa, -£9 So/eel (3rd sing |
.of , |
assembly (phantasm-agor-ia}. pain (neur-alg-ia). weight (baro-meter). teach (didac-tic). it seems, seems true. |
TO Soy/la, -TO 9 fcaa> (root
opinion (what seems true' dogma).
burn.
burning, caustic.
conceal (crypt). \a/jL/3dvco (root Xa/3-) take (syl-lab-le). p,av6dva> (root pad-) learn (philo-math).
/cavern /cos, -77, -ov
108 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [109—
TO /jidOrj/jia, -TO? lesson (mathematics).
fjivco shut the eyes.
TO fjLvarrjpiov, -ov secret doctrine, mystery.
fjLvo-Ti/cds, -T], -bv secret, mystic.
0X05, -rj, -ov whole (holo-caust).
Tra?, iraa-a, Trdv all, every (pan-orama).
r) irelpa, -a? attempt, trial (em-pir-ic).
o Treipartfs, -ov pirate.
Trpaa-ao) accomplish (prac-tical).
TO 7rpa<y/jLa, -TO? deed, affair (pragmat-ic).
sptit (schism).
say, affirm (eu-phe-mism).
109. Exercises. I. Translate into English.
1. TV <f>r)s TO ToO fwou /3apo? elvai ^ (to be) ; 2. ev rfj ayopa T&V iroXirwv ol ptfropes pavQavovai To3 Stffjiq). 3. Svvarai 6 Trpecr/Bvrepos SiSd- Trdvra ra /jLVcrrrfpia rwv 6e&v ; 4. TO?? eV cr%o\f) fjiaOrf/JLao-t, TrXdcrcrovrat, ol TraZSe?. 5. rj r) cro<j>id r&v ap^alcov OVK ere (longer) xpv- 6. ol irdXlrai <f>pd£ov(ri, ra S6<y/j,ara TV)? T. rj Treipa SiSd(r/c€i rl SwdpeOa irpacro-ew. 8. ol ireiparal a7ro-T€ p^vovcn (CLTTO- = off) ra$ K€<f)a- Xa? TrdvTwv TWV %<pcov a \a/ji/3dvov(ri. 9. ov Sv- vao~6e cr^i^eiv TO SevSpov. 10. vrai/Te? ol vra^Se? fiavOdvovcn TO 0X01^ /jidOrj/jia. 11. TO Kavantcov Oeppov rov r)\lov SiSoxTiv aX^ea. 12. o ptfrcop fyrjcrl
1 The verb <f>r)p,L, like verbs of saying in Latin, takes the in- finitive, with or without a subject-accusative, as its object.
110] THE VEEE fapl ; THE ADJECTIVE Tra?. 109
rov Sfj/jiov elvai, crocfrbv KCLI ayaddv. 13. Treipdowrcu Kaew rd SevSpa. 14. o fj\ios icaei, TO Bepfia rov veov dffXrjrov. 15. ra i^va-Tripta, a ol Trpeafivrepoi, tcpv- TreipdovTdi, Trdvra
II. Translate into Greek.
1. They conceal the nature of the drugs which they give. 2. The fire splits all the stones and burns all the plants. 3. The whole affair is secret. 4. Pain teaches many lessons. 5. Can you tell in the assembly of the people the secret-doctrines which the priests teach ? 6. The pirate takes all the gold in the city. 7. Caustic words give pain. 8. The king conceals the attempt of the sooth- sayers. 9. The air in the lungs has not much weight. 10. We learn from ancient books the opinions of the ancients about nature. 11. The wise affirm that the good citizen rules (inf.) his own feelings, and gives much to others. 12. It is best to learn, not many [things], but much about a few things. 13. What are you trying to accom- plish? 14. The image which the citizens are trying to set up is a work of much skill.
110. Notes on Derivatives.
1. Phantasm-agoria (^ai/racr/^a, 74, 11, and ayopa) denotes an assemblage of phantasms or images. In pan-egyric we have a derivative of a dialectic form of dyopa. A 7rav-tfryvpi$ was an assemblage of all the people, as at the great Olympic games ; and a
110 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [110—
Trav-rjyvpi/cbs \6<yo$ was an oration delivered at such an assembly. As such orations were often in praise of some city or person, the term came to mean a eulogy.
2. From a\<yo$ is derived the last part of cephal- algia (see 31, 5) and neur-algia (TO vevpov nerve).
3. In bary-tone the y stands for v of /3a/ou? heavy, which is plainly related to /3apo9- The word is also spelled baritone, (For tone see mono-tone, 68, 9.) The baro-meter is an instrument for measuring the weight of the atmosphere.
4. Didactic (StSa/cr^/co?, from &Sa<7/c&>, the root of which is StSa/c-) means instructive.
5. Ao7//,a sometimes has the same meaning as So£a; but the English dogma has taken on the sense of an accepted opinion, or one which is put forth as unquestionably true. Hence dogmatic and dogmatize.
6. The verb /caw has lost the v which is shown by other forms to belong to the root. Cautery (/cavrrjpiov a branding-iron) is the act of burning or searing in surgery. Cauterize is the verb.
7. Apo-crypha (ajrb'icpvfya, from aTro-Kpvirrfi)) signifies properly hidden away ; then by a curious transfer the word was applied to those books of the Bible which were not recognized as inspired.
8. Syl-lable is from o-v\-\a/3rj (<rvv and \ap- /3dva)), what is taken together, that is, pronounced with one impulse of the voice. In di-(s)syllable (for di- see 96, 1) the extra s was originally due to a blunder, like many other peculiarities of our
lid] THE VERB <f>rifjii; TttE ADJECTIVE TTUS. Ill
spelling. Tri-syllable has for its first element the stem of rpefc. Syl-labus, of the same etymology with syl-lable, denotes an abstract or compendium. In epi-lepsy (literally, an attack, seizure), the root Xa/3- appears in the slightly different form \TJTT-. The root is still farther changed in di-lemma (St- \rjfji /jia). This word was originally the technical name of a peculiar form of argument, but now is often used for a difficult situation, in which any course of action which may be chosen seems likely to lead to further difficulty. The force of the word may be roughly given as double-catch; for di- see 96, 1.
9. In mathematics the meaning of fjLadtjfjLara has been restricted to a particular branch of learning. A philo-math (<£/Xo9) is one who is fond of learning.
10. Holo-caust (0X09 and fcavo-rds from KOW) is used of sacrifices which were wholly burned. The phrase KaO' o\ov (for Kara oXou) is used in an adverbial sense, wholly ; from this was formed the adjective Ka6o\uc6<s universal, general ; hence our word catholic.
11. IIa9 appears in English in the forms pant- and pan-. Thus, pant-o-mime (see 78, 4), pant-o- phagous (fayeiv), equivalent to omni-vorous, from Latin. Fan-demonium (Sa//4&>z/) is the place of all demons ; pan-theon (irav-Oelov, #609), a temple of all gods; pan-theism, the doctrine that the universe, taken as a whole, is Grod ; pan-orama (6pa«), a com- plete view ; pan-acea (nav-d/ceia, from aiceo^ai to cure), a cure-all; pan-oply (jrav-oTrKia, from OTT\OV
112 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [110.
armor), complete armor. From frequent use in these and similar words, the syllable pan- has come to be used freely with a like meaning in forming new compounds, often when the second part is not Greek, as in pan-evangelical, ^n-Slavism. Dia- pason is an abbreviation of Sia Tracr&v %op$a>v (jj Xop&rj the string of a lyre, whence our chord) ; it means, therefore, the octave, or the entire scale.
12. An em-piric is one whose knowledge or skill is gained only in trial or experiment (eV ireLpa), and is not founded on scientific principles. A pirate makes hostile attempts or attacks on others ; piracy is shortened from Treipareia.
13. From Trpaao-co we have practical (nrpaicTiKo^, practice, and praxis (jirpa^i^), a technical term having one of the meanings of practice ; pragmatic shows the stem of 7rpay/j,a.
14. A schism (a^iv^a, -TO?, from a-^i^ai) is a " split," or division, in a party or organization ; hence schismatic,
15. From eft-fa /JLOS well-speaking (et> and </>??/<<</) we have eu-phemism, eu-phemistic. A Trpo-far^ is one who speaks for another (TT/OO, like Latin pro, often having the meaning for) ; pro-phet, one who speaks for, or in place of, God ; that is, one who is inspired by God and declares his will. Hence pro-phetic, pro-phecy, and pro-phesy. Hetero-phemy (ere/jo?) is a euphemistic word, of recent forma- tion, for false-speaking.
PAET II. THE GKEEK OF XENOPHON.
THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON.
111. Nearly all the verbs hitherto given are in the pres- ent indicative or infinitive. In learning the rest of the verb it will be a great help to observe the following facts.
a. Although the forms of the verb are many, the elements of which they are made up are few, each having a definite meaning ; and these elements can usually be clearly distin- guished. For example, He will be sent for is a sentence made up of five short words ; it is all expressed' in Greek by one verb, /xeTa-Tre/x^-^-o-e-rai, but that verb is made up of five elements, each of which is just as distinct in form and meaning as the separate English words. Yet we are so accustomed, in English, to distributing the meaning over several short words, that we are apt to overlook the separate elements when grouped in a single word, even when the total number of syllables is the same. It is absolutely neces- sary, therefore, to gain, as early as possible, the habit of catching the full meaning of every syllable as it is read or spoken. In- deed, this remark, though it applies especially to the Greek verb, applies also to every part- of any foreign language. Every element of every word conveys an idea, or helps to convey an idea. To learn a language one must become so familiar with its elements that the sign shall always call up the idea which it stands for,
115
116 THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON. [112—
b. It is not convenient to distinguish different conjuga- tions, as in Latin, but only different ways of forming the several tenses. In the present tense we have seen some verbs conjugated like y/oa<£o>, called co-verbs, others conjugated like riOrjfJii, called /xt-verbs ; but these names apply properly only to a part of the verb, and there are different ways of forming both /it-presents and w-presents. So in other tenses we shall find formations distinguished as " first " and " sec- ond," and a few verbs have a formation called the "/u- aorist," because of a certain likeness to the /xt-present. All the tense-formations of any verb are shown by the " princi- pal parts" (see 150).
c. The verb will first be taken up by modes, beginning with the indicative, the uses of which are in general the same as in Latin and English.
PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AORIST TENSES.
112. In the indicative mode there are seven tenses : the present, imperfect, aorist, perfect, plu- perfect, future, and future perfect. The tenses most used are the present, imperfect, and aorist; these will therefore be described first.
113. a. The present tense is used like the same tense in English.
Most English verbs really have two forms of the present, the simple present, as, He writes, and the compound present, as, He is writing. The former denotes an act simply as pres- ent, the latter denotes an act as going on in the present. The latter active form must not be confused with the com- pound present passive, as, It is written. All these forms are expressed in Greek by the present, active or passive as the
114] PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AORIST. 117
case may be, ypa<£ci and ypa<£ercu. In this case we make a distinction in English which Greek does not express.
b. The imperfect, as in Latin, represents the action as going on in past time.
It often corresponds to the English compound imper- fect, as, He was writing. It was being written; it sometimes implies repetition of the action, as in Latin. Thus He was writing and He used to write are both expressed by the im- perfect active 2ypa<£e ; It was being written and It used to be written by the imperfect passive cypa^ero.
c. The aorist,1 in the indicative mode, represents an act simply as occurring in past time.
This corresponds to the English simple past tense, as, He wrote cypai/K, It was written cypa<£?;. These uses must not be confused with those of the imperfect. Note carefully the English phrases by which we habitually make the same distinction that is made in Greek by means of these tenses. The only difference is that we use various groups of short words where the Greeks used longer single words slightly varied in form.
114. The fu-formation is in some respects sim- pler than the other. For comparison io-rrj^ set up, station, and \va) loose are given in the present, imperfect, and first aorist active.
In all paradigms the elements will be separated, as far as possible, by hyphens. If not so separated, this means that
1 From the Greek adpwrros indefinite (a privative and 6pi£o> define). We shall see later that the term is more suit- able to other modes than to the indicative,
118
THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON.
[115—
by some change the elements have been so closely united that a mark of separation might lead to misunderstanding.
115.
Present System.
First Aor. Syst.
|
PRESENT. |
IMPERFECT. |
||
|
/ set or am set- I was setting, ting, etc. etc. |
I set or stationed, etc., / did set, did I set, etc. |
||
|
S. 1 2 3 |
f/ tr l-CTTt}-(ri |
i'-cmj-v f-CTT?;-? f-a-rrj |
e-crrrj-cra V e-CTTrj-cre |
|
D. 2 |
V |
f-crra-TOV |
e-o-rfo-a-roi/ |
|
3 |
i-CTTa-TOV |
T-ard-rrjv |
e-cmj-crd'Trjv |
|
P. 1 2 |
1-ffTOr/JLeV i-crra-re |
T-crra-fjiev f-crra-re |
€~(7T11~(J'CL~/Ji€V > / €~G'T11~G'CL'~T€ |
|
3 |
(t-o-ra-acrt |
) f-crra-crav |
e-arrj-aa-v |
|
l-crrdcn |
|||
|
I loose, etc. |
I was loosing, etc. |
I loosed, etc. |
|
|
S. 1 |
\v-co |
e-\v-o-v |
€-\,v-(ra |
|
2 |
\v-ex |
e-Xu-e-9 |
€~\lV~(7Ct~^ |
|
3 |
\v-ei |
e-Xu-e |
6~Xu~(7"6 |
|
D. 2 |
\v-e-rov |
€\-V-€-TOV |
6~Xu~O"tt"TOl^ |
|
3 |
\v-e-rov |
e'-Xu-e-TT/z/ |
€~Xl'"O"£l"T77 1/ |
|
P. 1 2 . |
\V-0-fJL€V \v-€-re |
€-\V~0-/Ji€V €-Xu-e-re |
e-Xu-cra-re |
|
3 |
\V-OVCTL |
<!-\V-0-V |
e-\v-cra-v |
116] PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AORIST. 119
NOTE. — In reciting paradigms, a practice much followed in German schools will be found useful for distinguishing accents. A slight motion of the forefinger, as if one were writing the accent in the air, will show whether one has in mind the acute or the circumflex while pronouncing the forms; at the same time, the stress of voice indicates on which syllable the accent stands. It saves trouble in the end to take pains to pronounce as accurately as possible, making long vowels long, short vowels short, and doubling the consonants if they are doubled (as in English coolly, home-made, fineness, fire-red, mis-step, hop-pole, cat- tail, sack-cloth).
116. a. Comparison of the paradigms shows that in each verb one element appears in all forms, namely, erra- or o-rrj- in lo-Trjfu and Xv- in Avco. This element is called the verb- stem, or more simply, theme; it contains the fundamental idea of the word. Thus ora-, o-rrj- expresses the simple idea of setting up or stationing, and \v- the simple idea of loosing ; the other elements, added to this, indicate various modifica- tions, as of tense, voice, person, etc. We have seen, for instance, that the suffix -<n- added to each of these themes in the short form makes a noun-stem denoting the action: Av'-o-i-s (94) and (d7ro)-<rra-ai-s (105, 5). In the parts here given \v- remains unchanged, having the vowel long through- out, though in Au'-cro it is short ; but crra- is lengthened to cm/- in the present and imperfect singular active, and in the aorist throughout. The lengthening in the present singular has also been illustrated in ri-Orj-fu and 8i-8o>-/u (97). A theme ending in a vowel is called, for brevity, a vowel theme.
b. In the present ora-, orr/- is preceded by the present reduplication I- (originally (n-), a formation which is also illustrated by ri-Orj-^i and 8i-S<o-/u (97), and by yi-yvw-<r/co> (51, 2) and y£yv-o-/>uxi (89). Only a few of the oldest o>- and ^u-verbs take this present reduplication; whatever
120 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [116—
special meaning it had originally has disappeared. Note that the vowel of the present reduplication is always t.
c. In both imperfect and aorist of Avo> the syllable e- is prefixed to the theme; in TorT/fii the aorist has the same prefix, but the imperfect lengthens the initial I- of the pres- ent to I-. This lengthening of the initial vowel of the pres- ent is called the temporal augment, the prefixed c- is called the syllabic augment, since one increases the time of a syllable and the other increases the number of syllables of the verb. The two forms of the augment have the same force, indi- cating past time ; they belong, therefore, to verb forms that denote past time ; that is, to the indicative imperfect, aor- ist, and pluperfect.
d. In the aorist of both verbs the theme is followed by the syllable -era- (in the third singular -ore-) ; this is the tense suffix denoting the first aorist ; it will be found that before this tense suffix a vowel theme usually has its vowel long, e-orrj-o-a- and c-Av-ora- are therefore the tense-stems of the first aorist indicative, being made up of augment, theme, and tense suffix ; the first element denotes past time, and does not appear in the other modes, the second denotes the fundamental idea of the verb, the last marks the aorist tense.
e. In lo-TrjfJLi the present reduplication appears also in the imperfect (the only difference being that the imperfect is augmented), and no other element stands between the theme and personal endings. Here, then, the tense-stem is i-ora- or t-orrj-, with no tense suffix, but augmented in the imper- fect. In Avo), on the other hand, another element stands between the theme and personal endings in the present and imperfect. Throughout the imperfect and in part of the present this element is seen to be -o- or -e-; in the other forms of the present the element is really the same, but is so united with the endings that its original form is obscured. Here, then, the tense-stem is \v-o- or Av-e-, augmented in the
117] PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AORIST. 121
imperfect. The vowel -o- or -e- is the present tense suffix of this verb; it is called the variable vowel and may be written -%- ; it is -o- before p or v, elsewhere -c-. Since in all verbs the stem of the imperfect is merely the present stem augmented, while in the other modes there is no im- perfect, these tenses are grouped together as the present sys- tem, as distinguished from the first aorist system and others. That is, a verb system includes all the forms that contain essen- tially the same tense-stem.
f. As to the personal endings, observe (1) that those of the past tenses differ in part from those of the present;
(2) that those of the imperfect and aorist of A.vo> are alike, except that c-Av-aa, in the first singular, omits the ending ;
(3) that in the present system T-aTrj-fu. takes different endings from Xvo> in the third plural. The endings of the present are called the primary endings, and belong, as we shall see, to the indicative present, future, perfect, and future perfect, which are called the primary or principal tenses. The other set of endings are called the secondary or historical endings, and belong to the indicative imperfect, aorist, and pluper- fect, which are called the secondary or historical tenses. The same tenses which take the augment take also the secondary endings.
The significant elements in these paradigms, then, are the theme, augment, tense suffix, and personal endings.
117. The verb-stem or theme expresses the fun- damental idea of the verb. A theme which can- not be further divided into significant elements is called a root.
ora- and \v- are roots ; TraiSev-, the theme of TrcuSevw, is not a root, because it is seen to contain the noun-stem TraiS- and a derivative suffix -cv-.
122 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [118—
118. The augment indicates past time, and be- longs to the imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect in the indicative only. It has two forms :
1. The syllabic augment, made by prefixing e- ; it is used in verbs beginning with a consonant.
2. The temporal augment, made by lengthening an initial vowel; it is used in verbs beginning with a vowel.
a- and a- become ?;-; diphthongs (except ou-) lengthen their first vowel. The breathing remains unchanged.
119. The tense suffix, added to the theme, indi- cates the tense. We have met,
1. In the present system -%- or none. The im- perfect is distinguished from the present by the augment and the endings.
2. In the first aorist -era-, in the third singular -ere-.
120. The personal endings indicate person and number, and generally voice. The active endings are
Primary. Secondary.
(Principal Tenses.) (Historical Tenses.) Sing. 1 -pi -v
2 -9 -9
3 -cu [-T] Dual 2 -TOV -TOP
3 -TOV -rr)v
Plu. 1 -fjiev -pep
2 -re -re
3 -avi or -(V)0^ w^av or -v
123] PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AORIST. 123
The old secondary ending -T in the third singular ceased very early to be pronounced.
121. The /-^-inflection is followed
1. When there is no tense suffix ;
2. When the tense suffix does not end in -%- or -a-.
It has -acri and -crav in the third plural.
The endings generally appear without change.
122. a. The w-inflection is followed when the tense suffix ends in -%- or -a-. It has -(y)at, and -v in the third plural.
b. The first person has -CD instead of -fu ; the process which has made -eis out of -c-s in the second person and -a out of -c-cri in the third person is not certainly explained.
In the third plural -(v)ort very early lost the v; this caused the preceding vowel to be lengthened ; thus -o-vo-t became -overt.
123. Like \vco inflect in the present, imperfect, and aorist active :
d/covo) (a/eou-1) hear.
/3ao-(,\€va) (/3ae™\eu-) be king, reign (fr. ySao-^Xei;?).
POV\€VCO (^ouXeu-) plan (fr. ySouX^, a plan).
KCO\VCO (/cfc>A,{}-) prevent, hinder.
Travco (-Trau-) cause to stop, stop (transitive).
Like terry/Jit, inflect :
set down, establish (/card down and
1 In vocabularies in this book the theme of each verb will be given in parenthesis.
124 THE GHEES: OF XENOPHON. [124—
a. To inflect these verbs put the new theme in place of that in the paradigms, the other elements remaining the same. For the augment of d/covo) see 118, 2. The imper- fect can be formed easily from most presents, but the forma- tion of the aorist cannot always be inferred from the present.
b. Compounds of a preposition and a verb take the aug- ment after the preposition. Thus from Katf-t'orrj/Ai we have KaO-io"Tr)v imperfect, and Kar-eorrjo-a aorist.
c. In composition Kara loses final a before an initial vowel. If the initial vowel has the rough breathing, as in foTiyfu, the breathing and T are written together as 0, which had anciently the sound of T followed by a distinct ^-sound. Thus Kara appears as Kar- or Ka0-, according as the form of the simple verb begins with the smooth or the rough breath- ing.
124. Vocabulary.
6 'Apra£ep£?79, -ov Artaxerxes.
n QacriKeia, -a? (fr. Bacn- ) 7 . 7 7
1 ^ , ^ [ Kingdom, royal power.
Dareios or Darius,1 king of Persia 424-405 B.C.
1 To find the English form of a Greek name, transliterate it according to 14, and then place the accent according td the Latin rule ; i.e., accent the penult if it is long or if the word has but two syllables, otherwise accent the antepenult. In transliterating there is a difference of usage among schol- ars, some preferring to Latinize the forms more fully than others. No one is entirely consistent, or can be. We are equally inconsistent in our treatment of names from other languages. A name like Cyrus is so thoroughly adopted into English that it seems pedantic to try to change it. In general the author thinks it best to transliterate simply,
124] PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AORIST. 125
Be, conj., and, but.
Svo two.
els, proclitic, prep. w. ace., into.
6 r/EXX77i;, -05 Greek.
eri, adv., still, further, longer.
t A, ( death (Thanat-opsis, eu-
o uavaros, -ov ,, . ,
( tnanasia).
o KO/305, -ov Cyrus.1
r A -*,- ( Lydia,1 division of Asia
rj AvSia, -a? *
( Minor.
prep. w. ace., after.
w. gen., with.
-a, -ov younger.
o Hepo-rjs, -ov Persian.
6 7r6\€/jLo$, -ov war (polemic).
o crarpaTrrj^, -ov satrap, Persian governor.
ri why? what?
( Phrygia, division of Asia , j
without Latinizing, unless the name, like Cyrus, is actually used as an English name, or has received an English termi- nation, like Athens. The reasons which have made this practice universal in Germany have also caused it to be adopted by many well-known English-speaking scholars, although it is true that the majority in England and Amer- ica would Latinize nearly all names (not Melos, however, nor Delos, Latmos, Tenedos, Patmos, Pergamos). Pupils need to know the look of both forms, and generally in this book both will be given in vocabularies. 1 See note on p. 124.
126
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[125—
125. Exercises. I. Translate into English.1
O/f/EXX?7Z>e9 ryv/JLvdcria KaOicrracrav ev rat? Tro'Xe- criv, ev 0*9 ol vecorepoi eyv/jiva^ov -eavrov? (them- selves^). — Aa/)e£o9 €/3a(rl\€V€ T&V Hepo-tov. KCU, ryiyvovrai, Adpeiov ?ra£Se9 Suo, Trpecrfivrepos
1. icaOtcrTcurav : the funda- mental meaning of a word or tense may be variously modi- fied by the circumstances in which it is used ; in other words, the context is just as im- portant as the vocabulary in de- termining the meaning. Here the imperfect should be ren- dered used to establish. What is it in the context that shows this to be the meaning rather than were establishing?
3. TWV rUpo-wv: verbs of ruling and of superiority, like verbs of beginning, take the gen. Compare 81, I., 1 and note 2.
4. A ape Co v : the gen. here gives the source, with a verb denoting birth. The various senses of from are all expressed in Greek by the gen., often with a preposition, but sometimes without a preposition. — |Uv : a particle, .meaning that some- thing not yet mentioned is thought of as contrasted with the word before ptv. In Eng- lish we more often indicate this idea merely by the tone of voice, or by a slight change of pitch in speaking; the phrase on the one hand is too long and clumsy to use except rarely ; indeed sometimes expresses the
1 It is intended that all translation from Greek in the class should be done from the teacher's reading. This trains the ear, and affords constant practice in taking the meaning of the Greek in the right order, and will be found to add much to the rapidity of progress. The Greek exercise should also be read aloud by the pupil until it can be given readily, and on review should be translated back into Greek from the English. This gives the best kind of practice in writing Greek, especially after the Anabasis is begun.
125] PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AOEIST. 127
ved)T€po<; Se KOpo?. TOV fiev vecorepov 5 \dpeios (rarpd'Trrjv A.vSid$ /cal <&pvyid$ en TralSa ovra (being^), o Se TT peer /3v7 epos p*era TOV
o~ev CLVTL rov aSe\<pov /SacriXeveiv, aXXa
idea, but has so many other uses that it is best avoided.
5. v6«T6pos : the ending -repos has the same force as in irpeo-fiv- repos, — that of English ~er in young-er, denoting the compar- ative degree. Final -o- of the stem of the positive vto-s has been lengthened to -o>- before -repos. — 84 : conjunction, trans- lated but or and. It means that the member in which it stands is thought of as con- trasted with something pre- ceding; here, that vedrepos is contrasted with -rrpecr/StVe/oos, as (j.tv indicated the first member of the contrasted pair. Thus fji^v and 5^ correspond to each other; that is, are correlative. The contrast is often, as here, so slight that we do not indi- cate it at all, or only by the tone of voice ; but would here exaggerate the contrast, and so would be unnatural. Note that ptv and 5<* always stand after at least one word of their re- spective members. Hence they are called postpositive words (Latin post and pono) .
6. KaT&rrqo-c : appointed. Here the character of the sub- ject and objects — a king, a young man, governor — shows clearly what kind of establish- ing is meant. — o-aTpdirrjv : sec- ond obj. w. KaT&rr?7<re, as with like verbs in Lathi.
7. iraiSa: pred. ace. after 6vTa, agreeing with rbv vc&rcpov. We say while still a boy.
3. cpaorCXcvo-e : in this con- text reigned is about the same thing as became king, began to reign. Compare the Old Tes- tament phrase, as in 1 Kings 15, 8 : " Abijam slept with his fathers, and Asa his son reigned in his stead." This is a fre- quent use of the aorist, which, when so used, is called the in- ceptive aorist (Latin incipio'), because it denotes the begin- ning of an action. It is only the context which tells whether the aorist is inceptive or not.
9. dXXd : of stronger adver- sative force than 6t. — licwXii- o-€v : the object is often omitted when it can easily be supplied from the context.
128
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[125—
io 'Apra^ep^s. — rl Aape£o? ov /carecrT^cre Kvpov e/5 TTJV Pacn\eiav ; — eiravcrav fiev rov TroXeyico^, Se /ca/ca j3ov\evovcnv.
to take e£s with the ace. in- stead of tv with the dat. This difference of idiom between Greek and English will appear often with this and other words.
12. Kaicd: here used as a noun.
10. rC: what determines here whether rl means what ? or why ?
11. els TT]V pacriXeicLv: the motion implied in the primary meaning of KaOLo-T-rj/ju was prom- inent enough in the mind of the Greek to cause the word
II. Translate into Greek.
What stopped the music? — Did you ever (vrore, enclitic) hear the legend of the seven wise men? — I was planning to hear music in the theatre, but the young boys in the street prevented it. — Why did the king appoint Cyrus satrap ? — War caused the work to stop. — We were establishing a new gymnasium. — The king of the Persians got the city into a war. — Cyrus was (fiv) a son of Dareios
7. got : the word get has a great variety of uses in Eng- lish ; watch the context to de- termine the meaning. Here use Ka0t<rTr)/ju.
8 f. son, brother: mark the contrast in Greek, though we hardly think of it in Eng- lish.
In the last sentence what words are contrasted?
3. -was planning : there is a contrast here between was planning and prevented, which the Greek would mark by ptv and 5^ ; this contrast makes the two verbs the most prominent words in their clauses ; hence the verbs are to be placed first.
4. It : cf . I., 9 and note.
5 f . caused ... to stop : evidently equivalent to stopped ;
126] THE MIDDLE VOICE.
and brother of Artaxerxes. — The elder citizens were planning good things, but the younger pre- 10 vented them.
THE MIDDLE VOICE.
126. Forms with middle endings have thus far been treated almost entirely as passive or deponent, since they often are so, especially in the present, where the passive has no sepa- rate form (see 69). But other uses of the middle are very common. It is necessary to watch the voice carefully in reading, in order to learn its shades of meaning; for many of the ideas which this voice expresses in Greek, English must express in some other way. Sometimes, too, English does not express at all the slight difference between the active and middle, but leaves it to be understood. Some verbs, from their meaning, give no occasion for the use of a middle ; as /2ao-iAevo>.
a. The middle endings commonly represent the subject as acting upon itself, or with reference to itself. Thus in ^aivo^ai show one's self and iravo- fjiat, stop one's self, cease (or stop used intransi- tively), the subject is at the same time the direct object. These are examples of the direct middle. This is the simplest use of the voice, and is very like the passive ; but not many verbs are used in this way.
b. For example, \vo^ai does not mean loose one's self (that is expressed by \va) with the pronoun meaning myself, etc.), but loose for one's self, or get loosed for one's self by some one else. Thus
130
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[127—
\verai rbv a8e\$oV would be said of one whose brother had been taken in war, and who buys the captive off ; Tie gets his brother released, or ransoms his brother. This is one example of the indirect middle. In the case of \vo^ai there is a causative force, which is prominent in the middle voice of many verbs.
c. The middle of lo-rrjfju, is used both as a direct middle, set or station one's self, and as an indirect middle, set or station for one's self. As this verb is very common, both in composition and alone, every use of it must be carefully noted.
127.
Present System, Mid.
First Aorist System, Mid.
|
PRESENT. |
IMPERFECT. |
||
|
/ set myself, etc. |
/ was setting myself, etc. |
I set myself, etc. |
|
|
S. 1 2 |
f/ i-crra-crat, |
t-trrd-fJ/qv f-crra-ao |
? f £~GTfl~(TCL'~LLrfl V €~&TtJ~&CO |
|
3 |
i-crra-Tai, |
T-ara-ro |
t-vrfaa-TO |
|
D. 2 3 |
i-crra-crOov l-crra-aOov |
f-crra-affov |
€-aTtf-cra-cr0ov e-crTr)'crd-C70rj v |
|
P. 1 |
l-ard-fjie0a |
t-(TTd-fJL€0a |
€-aT<r)-<rd-/ji€0a |
|
2 3 |
L-o-ra-o-06 r/ |
f-crra-(T0€ T-ara-vro |
€-o-Tij-cra-(r06 e-crrrf-aa-VTO |
THE MIDDLE VOICE.
131
|
PRESENT. |
IMPERFECT. |
||
|
S. 1 2 3 |
/ ransom, etc. \V-O-/JLCU \v-rj or \v-6i, \v-e-rai |
/ was ransom- ing, etc. t €-\v-6-/Ji'r]V e-\v-ov e-\v-€-ro |
I ransomed, etc. €-\v-a-d-^7]v €-\V-(TC0 e-\v-aa-TO |
|
D. 2 |
\v-e-cr6ov |
€-\v~€-cr0ov |
e-\v-(ra-(r0ov |
|
3 |
\v-e-cr9ov |
e^ju-e-aOriv |
€-\v-(rd-cr0'r)v |
|
P. 1 2 |
\v-d-/jL€0a \v-6-a06 |
e-\v-6-fJL€0a €-\V'€-a0€ |
e-\v-crd-iJL€0a e-\v-cra-a-0€ |
|
3 |
\V-O-VTCLL |
€-\V-0-VTO |
e-\v-<ra-VTO |
128. Comparing these forms with the active we find that (a) the themes are the same, except that the present and imperfect middle of IOTT///.* have only the short form ora-; (6) the augments are the same, temporal in krra/Ar/v, etc., syllabic elsewhere ; (c) the tense suffixes are the same, in the present system of the /u-verb none, in the present system of the co-verb -%-, in the aorists throughout -era-. But
129. The personal endings of the middle differ from those of the active. They are seen unchanged in the present system of the /^-verb, and are
Primary. (Principal Tenses.) Sing. 1 -pat,
Secondary. (Historical Tenses.)
2 3
-crat, -rat,
-(TO -TO
132
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[130-
-0-00V
~(70r)V
Primary. Secondary.
(Principal Tenses.) (Historical Tenses.) Dual 2 -0-00V
3 '(700V
Plu. 1 -fji€0a
2 -(70€ -(70€
3 -vrai -vro
130. In some forms the tense suffix and ending have run together, \v-rj and Xv-ct are for Av-e-aat ; cr of the ending is dropped, as it often is between two vowels, and -e-ai contracts to -17 or -ct. i\vov is for eAv-c-cro ; cr is dropped and -e-o con- tracted to -ov. In like manner eor^cra) is for and cAvtro) for eAi;-ora-(o')o.
131. Vocabulary.1 Athenian.
-a, -ov (a?ro + crra-,
imp. d(f)-tcrTr)v aor. a
\, especially
Mid. (dir.) set one's self off, revolt.
Asia.
'plan. Mid. (indir.) plan for one's self or with one's self, hence delib- erate.
1 Inflect all words contained in the vocabulary.
131]
THE MIDDLE VOICE.
133
imp. crvv-eftovXevov aor.
-a?
o ' fttcToyp, -0/009 Kara-\vco (/cara 4 imp. aor.
€7TL-BoV\€VQ) (llTi + BoV- \ ,
, plan against, plots? scheme
> against. Middle forms
imp. €7T-€pOV\€VOV , ,
, 0 , used only as passive.
aor. €7T-€/30V\€VO'(l f
(rvfji,-/3ov\€vco (GTVV+ \ plan with another, advise. I Mid. (indir.) plan with ( another for one's self, ) ask advice, consult with. democracy. Hektor or Hector. \ break down, destroy. Mid. >• (indir.) destroy for one's ) self, get destroyed, establish, sometimes get or bring into a certain place or condition. Dir. mid., establish one's self, get one's self into a place or condition. Indir. mid., establish for one's self, sometimes appoint. Lacedaemonian, Spartan, be about to do something, intend, be going to do something. No mid. ; aor. scarcely used in this sense. month (Lat. mensis).
(/cara •
crra-, CTTT;-) imp. KaO-teryv aor. Kar-ea-rrjaa
-a,
imp. €fjL€\\OV
-09
134
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[132—
6/crd), indecl., 97
TTCLVCO (jrav-)
, -ou indecl., o Tvpavvos, -ov
Tvpavvevo) (rvpavvev-)
eight (Lat. octo).
oligarchy.
stop (transitive). Mid. (dir.) stop one's self, stop (intrans.), cease.
Priam, king of Troy.
thirty.
absolute ruler, tyrant,
be or act as absolute ruler or tyrant, tyrannize.
132. Exercises. I. Translate into English.
fjv (was) TTO\VV %povov rofc ' 777)09 roi>9 Aa/ceSaifjioviovs • pera Se TOV 7rd\€/jiov JJLCV * KOyvaiow rrjv Brj/JLOKparidv ol Aa/ce- Se /carearrja'av rrjv T&V rpia-
often in Lat. Literally, for the Ath. ; but we should say of the Athenians.
4. oXi-yapxCdv 84: the two clauses Kart\v<rav . . . Aajce- dai/jidvLoi and <5Aryap%/av . . . TpidicovTa are contrasted, rather than single words ; but in those clauses the most important words are KCLT&VO-CLV and 6X1- yapxtdv, which are therefore put first in their respective members, and followed, one by n{i>, the other by 5^. — -H)v : the
Latin, denotes extent of time ; TroXOp XP°VOV is the common phrase for a long while. — *A0T]vaCois: dat. of possessor, as in Latin.
2. irp6s : with the ace. means to or towards. Where we say between the Athenians and the Spartans, the Greek says to the Athenians towards the Spar- tans.— Note the Greek colon (•).
3. 'A6Tjva£ois : here dat. of interest or disadvantage, as
132]
THE MIDDLE VOICE.
135
Kovra. KOI ol rpia/covra ep,e\\ov pev Srj VO/JLOV? 5 TiOevai, Kaff ou? apX€LV efi€\\ov • avrl Se rov VO/JLOV? riOevcu €7T€/3ov\€V(rav TCH? iroKtrais ical ervpdvvevov fjirjvas o/crd). 6 Se Srjfjbos a7T€(mj(TaTO fiev O.TTO r&v rpiaKovra, Karea-njo-aro Se iraXiv rrjv Srj/jLOKparidv.
6 /3a<Ti\ev<; eKvcraro rov iralSa f/E#Topa. 10 6a TO) aTrocrroXft) Trepl rov VO/JLOV.
We use here the verbal noun in -ing, which happens to have the same form as the present active pple. in -ing, but is in fact of different origin. Such verbal nouns, like the Greek and Latin infinitive and the Latin gerund, retain enough verbal force to take a direct object or an adverbial modifier, but can be used only in short and simple phrases ; we shall see that in Greek such infinitive clauses may be of almost any length and very complicated.
7. iroXtrais : dat. after ^TTI- in £TT€f3ov\€V(rav.
& f. dir€0"Hj<raTO, icaT€<rrfj- o-aro: what in the context makes it clear whether these verbs have the force of the dir. mid. or the indir. ? Notice that while Kareo-r^o-aro is in the mid., Kar^rTT/o-aj/ above is ac- tive. The mid. is naturally used of a people setting up a government of their own. * 11. <rvv€|3ovX.€v<rd|j,€0a : for
form shows what this and the following words belong with ; the effect of thus postponing the modifier is given perfectly in this instance in English by translating r-f)v that and reserv- ing the whole phrase till the end of the sentence.
The war referred to is the Peloponnesian war, 431-404 B.C., in which the Spartans were victorious. The " Thirty Ty- rants" were deposed in the summer of 403 B.C.
5. 8-fj : a particle whose various uses must be carefully watched. Here its force may be given by as they said, im- plying that they did not really intend to do so.
6. ri0€vai : the verb regularly used of making laws. — icaO* : for KO.T& ; the same change as in KaB-Lo-rjjfjLt. KO.T& with the ace. often means, as here, ac- cording to. — TOV: marks the phrase PO'/XOUS Tt0^cu as a noun in the gen., governed by dvrl.
136
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[132—
— ov (TVvejiovXeva-aTe rois TroMraLs Traveo-Oai rov 7ro\€/Jiov ; — ol r/EX\77^€9 ol ev rfj 'Acrta d rov /3acr^Xeco5. — aTrecrr^cre rov$
15 r&v Hepcr&v.
voice, see vocabulary above. — dative after <rvt>- in
13. iroX^ov: here a from gen., denoting separation, after
CLTTO
In 600 B.C. the Greek colo- nies in Asia Minor, which had been subdued by the Persians, revolted ; this is known as the Ionian revolt.
II. Translate into Greek.
The Spartans were planning the war a long time. — The Greeks in Asia schemed against the Persians, and got themselves into a war. — The tyrant broke down the strength of the city. —
5 The people plotted against the oligarchy, but es- tablished over themselves a tyrant. — Were you consulting with friends ? — We advised the tyrant to rule according to the laws. — After the war I procured the release of many citizens. — Why did
10 you get the Greeks to revolt from the Persians? — Many cities took counsel with the Lacedaemonians and revolted from the Athenians. — There was war
3. got . . . into: mid. of /jiL and els.
5 f. Mark the contrast be- tween the members by ptv and 5^. — over themselves : suf- ficiently expressed by the mid. voice of the verb.
9. procured the release
of : expressed by one word.
10. did you get to re- volt : expressed by one word.
12 f . Of. 132, I., 1 f., and
put the word for Greeks in the dat.
134]
THE FUTURE SYSTEM.
137
for many months between the Greeks and the Per- sians.
THE FUTURE SYSTEM.
133. The future tense is used like the English future. There is no difference in the future be- tween /u-verbs and co-verbs. The active and middle differ only in the personal endings, and together make up the future system.
134. Future System.
|
ACTIVE. |
MIDDLE. |
|
|
/ shall loose, etc. |
/ shall ransom, etc. |
|
|
S. 1 2 |
\V-(TG) \v-crei? |
\v-cro-fjucu |
|
3 |
\v-a-et |
\v-a-6-rai, |
|
D. 2 |
\v-cre-Tov |
\v-ae-a-6ov |
|
3 |
\v-cre-rov |
\V-(T€-(T00V |
|
P. 1 2 |
\V-O"0-fJL€V \V-(T€-T€ |
\v-a6-fjLeOa |
|
3 |
\v-crovcri |
\v-ao-vrai, |
In the same way are inflected most futures, as crnyo-a> 1 shall set, and OTT/-CTO-/X(U / shall set myself, etc., from ixmy/u (OTOT, crrrf) ;
f3ov\ev-<T(a 1 shall plan, and flovXev-cro-pjai 1 shall deliberate, etc., from
138 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [135-
) 1 shall stop, and 7rav'-<ro-/>uu / shall cease, etc., from v'o) (TTCIU-).
135. a. The future tense suffix is -<r%-, with -o- before /x or y, elsewhere -e-.
b. The theme usually takes the longer form in the future, if there are two forms ; as in a-rtf-aco. Thus the future tense-stem of io-r^/ja is O-TIJ-O-%-.
c. The primary endings are used, and the same changes occur as in the co-present. Thus \v- (rovcn is for \v-a o-(y) GI\ \tharj and Xu-cret for
FIRST PASSIVE SYSTEM.
136. The passive voice has a separate form from the middle in the aorist and future only. The aorist passive and future passive are formed with the same passive suffix, and are so related that if one is given the other can always be known. Hence they are grouped together in one system, called the passive system, the mark of which is the passive suffix. In this system there is no difference between /u-verbs and co- verbs.
NOTE. — It will assist in keeping in mind the true relation of forms, if the pupil is always required, when writing verbs on the board, to put at the head the tense-stem of the system to which the forms belong. The analysis of forms should be called for often,
138] FIRST PASSIVE SYSTEM.
137. First Passive System.
139
|
AORIST. |
FUTURE. |
|
|
/ was loosed or ran- somed, etc. |
/ shall be loosed or ran- somed, etc. |
|
|
S. 1 2 3 |
€-\v-0r}-$ €-\v-0r] |
\v-0ij-arj or -&€i |
|
D. 2 3 |
€-\V-0rj-TOV |
\v-0ij-a-e-o-0ov \V-0rj-<T€-(T00V |
|
P. 1 2 3 |
6-\V-07)-/JL€V |
\v-0rj-o' 6- jj,€0 a \v-0rj-o- e-(T0€ \v-6r\-GQ-VTai |
In the same way are inflected most vowel themes, as €-ora- OYJ-V I was set, and <rra-077-cro-/Luu 1 shall be set, etc., from to-r^/At (crra-, (rrrj-) ',
€-7rav-Orf-v I was stopped, and Trav-O-q-o-o-fuu 1 shall be stopped, etc., from TraJo) (7rav-) ;
e-KtoXv-Orj-v 1 was hindered, and Kw\-v-Orj-<TO-iM.i I shall be hindered, etc., from KwXvco (KoAv-,
138. a. The passive suffix of the first passive sj^stem is, in the indicative, -Or]-. (On taking up the other modes we shall find that this suffix takes the form -0rj- only before a single consonant ; else- where — that is, before two consonants or a vowel — it is -0e-.)
b. The theme sometimes takes the long form,
140 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [139—
but often the short form, if there are two. Thus the passive stem of larrj^L is a-ra-drj- ; of \£G>, Xu- 0rj- ; of /JouXevo), /3ou Xei>-#?;-.
c. In the aorist passive there is no tense suffix ; the secondary active endings are added Directly to the passive stem, which of course is augmented in the indicative. This tense, therefore, is in all verbs a /it-formation (see 121), and in the third plural takes -vav.
d. In the future passive the future suffix -<r%- is added to the passive stem, and the middle pri- mary endings used. In the second person -0-77 and -crei are for -<7e-(o-)a£, as in the present and future middle.
139. Vocabulary.
/30UX7;-1) ..
P , n ^ , >dep/ wish.
tut. povKrjaoJiai
aor. eft
1 In /3ov\ojjjaL and some other common verbs the theme takes on the syllable -77- in some forms, apparently to prevent two consonants from coming together which the Greeks could not easily pronounce.
2 Compare 71. In the future and aorist some deponents take the middle forms, others the passive. Those which take the passive forms in the aorist are often called passive deponents ; those which take the middle forms in the aorist are called middle deponents. There is no difference in meaning.
140]
FIRST PASSIVE SYSTEM.
141
conj.,
-ft>T09
conj.,
l/cavo$, -77, -ov vvv, adv.,
OVTCO before a cons. o#rft>9 before a vowel 7roXe/uo9, -a, -oz^ Trore, interrog. adv., TTore, indef. adv., enclitic, rore, demonstrative adv., ore, rel. conj., o o-Tpari(f)Tr)<;, -ov
for.
laughter, when, after, sufficient, enough.
now.
adv., thus, so.
ware, conj.,
hostile; as noun, enemy, at what time ? when ? at some time, ever, once, at tTiat time, then, when, soldier.
so that, that, in a result clause.
140. Exercises.
"Ore
I. Translate into English.
Ki)|009 €TI TTCW fjv KOI eVatSeuero ra>v a\\(ov TraiScov, apicrTos irdvrayv rjv ev rols e/9 7rd\€fJ,ov epyot,?. eVel 8e o-arpdirrj^ Karearddrj, OVTCO
1. ptv: when ptv and 5^ stand immediately after a con- junction, as here after 6re and in line 3 after tird, it is usually the entire clauses, instead of single words, that are con- trasted. — liraiSevero : in tenses that have no separate passive form the context and the mean-
ing of the verb must determine whether a form is mid. or pass, in meaning.
2. els: of ten has the derived meaning with reference to, bear- ing upon, useful for.
3. c'p-yois : activities, exer- cises. — iireC : when tire is used in the sense of when, the time
142
THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON.
[140—
AcaXo9 KOI aya0b$ fjv wcrre <f)i\oi pev eylyvovro aura>
5 7TOXX(H, 7TO\€/MOl, &€ O\lyO(,. KOl €V T(p TToXe/tft) O9
V. /iera Se TOI> 7roXe/io*>, ore
O, roVe S^ ITepcrafc 10 (were) a£ra> l/cavol rbv apiOpov, efiovXtjOrj Be KCU
of the principal clause is gen- erally the same as that of the ic/iett clause ; in other words, while can be substituted for when without much change of meaning. When tird is used in the sense of when, the time of the principal clause is gener- ally later than that of the when clause ; in other words, after can usually be substituted for when. But the distinction was not always observed, and fad tended to crowd out 5re. — cra- TpaTTTjs : pred. nom.
4. KaXos : is used of charac- ter, as well as of the appearance; KdX6s Kdl aya&6s is a common phrase describing a thoroughly admirable person ; honorable and good is a literal rendering, but is far less common in Eng- lish than the corresponding phrase in Greek.
6 f. <t>t\os rots AO.K. : he aided them during the last three years of the war with ships and large sums of money.
8. €jjL€\\€v: v movable may be added to any verb of the third person sing, in -e, as well as to verbs of the third plu. in -0-1, to datives plu. in -0-1, and to tvrl. Cf. 40, I., 4 and note.
9. 8-fj : here slightly empha- sizes the preceding word.
10. avrw : lit. to Mm, dat. of possessor. When used thus alone, without the article and not in apposition, the forms of atfr6s supply the place of the unemphatic personal pron. of the third person, of him, her, etc. The nom. is never so used, but is always in agree- ment with some word, either expressed or understood. — apiBpo'v : in number, ace. of specification. — icaC: like Lat. et, Kat is not only a conjunc- tion, but also an adverb, call- ing attention to the following word or phrase. The context shows whether also or even is called for in English.
140]
FIRST PASSIVE SYSTEM.
143
s, dptcrroi jap efyaivovro Twv Tore. — fjv TTOTC 7roXe/-6O9 rois 'AOrjvalois 7rp09 rou9 Tlepcrds. — €7rel ol TratSes ij/covcrav TOV fJLv6ov, 7roA,U9 ye\co$ TJV. — Tore fjuev eTravOiycrav TOV rvpav- vevew ol TpicucovTa VTTO TOV SIJ/JLOV, vvv Se Tvpavvevet, 15 6 &%to9. — TTore TravOrjcreTcu 6 Tvpavvos T^S
tion. Compare TroX^tou, 132, 1., 13.
15. vnrd TOV 8-rjfxov : with pass, verbs the agent is regularly expressed by vw6 with the gen.
16. iroV€ : compare carefully the correlatives 7r6re, TTOT^, r6re and tire. All refer to time, all end in -ore. We shall find the same ending in other adverbs of time. Note particularly how the interrogative, indefinite, and de- monstrative are distinguished ; all are common, and students are apt to confuse them.
11. (TTpaTwoTas : in predi- cate apposition with "EXXrjvas : we should say as soldiers. — •yap : always post-positive, like ptv and 5£
12. TWV TOTC : by being put thus after the article, r6re be- comes equivalent to an adjec- tive modifier. The phrase is in the gen. of the whole, depend- ing on &PHTTOI. Say of those of that time, or of contemporary soldiers.
14. TOV rvpavv€V€iv : the inf. is here in the gen. of separa-
II. Translate into Greek.
When the satrap was honorable and good he had enough soldiers; but after he began to act like a tyrant, the soldiers kept revolting. — While
1 f. he had: use dat. of possessor, — were to him (atf- r<?). Cf. note on I., 10, and see vocabulary under
began . . . tyrant : express by one word in the aor.
3. kept revolting : what tense?
144 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [141—
the older citizens were deliberating, the younger 5 men got the city into a war which destroyed the city's power. — When were the thirty deposed from the government? — There was once a king who wished to rule the whole earth. — When the Greeks were revolting, the Persians wished to 10 prevent them. — The people will some time delib- erate about the matter, and then the war will be stopped. — When will the soldiers be released? — The enemy will some time be ransomed. — Then the children's laughter used to be stopped by their 15 elders, but the children of to-day sometimes (eW- ore) rule the house. — A word to the wise is enough.
4. older, younger : ntv
and 5(* cannot be used here, because 5^ is a conjunction, and there is no but or and here. The contrast of ideas is left unmarked, as it is in English.
6. deposed:
7. once : since irort is en- clitic it should not be put first.
10. them: use avrovs if anything.
11. matter : IT pay pa.
14. used to be stopped : one verb-form. — their : use the article.
15. the children of to- day: in Greek the now chil- dren.
FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM. 141. The perfect tense, indicative, represents
1. Usually an act completed in present time, as /ce/ccoXvfca I have prevented ;
2. Sometimes a continued state, the effect of an act now completed, as earvfca I have stationed (my- self), and so I am standing ; the latter is the com- mon meaning of this form of IO-
143]
FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM.
145
The first use is the same as that of the English perfect and the Latin perfect definite. The second use is frequent in a few verbs, and is seen also in Latin memini, I remember.
142. The pluperfect tense, indicative, represents
1. Usually an act completed in past time, as e/c€Ka)\v/crj I had prevented.
2. Sometimes a state continued in the past, as e/- a-TtJKrj I had stationed (myself), and so I was stand- ing ; the latter is the common meaning of this form of
The pluperfect is to the perfect as the imperfect is to the present. As the pluperfect is always formed in the same way from the perfect, both are grouped in the same tense system. But the perfect active system differs from the per- fect middle system.
143. First Perfect System.
|
PERFECT ACTIVE. |
PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. |
|
|
/ have loosed, etc. |
/ had loosed, etc. |
|
|
S. 1 2 3 |
\e-\v-Ka \€-\v-/ca-s \€-\V-K€ |
€-\€-\V-K7J, Or -K€L-V €-\€-\v-/crj-$, or -#e*-s |
|
D. 2 3 |
\e-\v-fca-Tov \€-\V-KCL-TOV |
€-\€-X V-KGL-TOV €-\e-\v-Kei-rrjv |
|
P. 1 2 3 |
\€-\V-fCd-/Ji€V \e-\v-fca-T€ \e-\v-Kacn |
€-\€-\V-K€l,-fJL€V €-\€-\V-/C€l-T€ €-\€-\v-K€-crav |
146
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[144—
s. i
2 3
PERFECT ACTIVE. I stand, etc..
etc.
PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. I was standing, etc. 7, or -K,ei-v 9, or -/cet-9
etc.
In the same way are inflected most vowel themes, as
Tre-TratSeu-Ka 1 have educated, c-Tre-TratSev-K^ I had educated, from TraiSeJa) (?rai8eu-) ;
avfJi-/3€-flovX.€v-Ka I have advised, <rvv-e-/3c-/3ov\eu-Kr] I had advised, from cru/x/foiAei/a) (ow + /SovAcu-) ;
d<#>-€-crT7^Ka / am m re?;o^ (^ave se^ myself off), 7 ^as in revolt (had revolted), from a
144. a. The theme in the first perfect system takes the shorter form in some verbs, the longer form in others.
b. To the theme is prefixed the reduplication, which is the special sign of completed action. The simplest form of the reduplication is seen in \€-\v-tca ; it consists of the initial consonant of the theme with e. Other forms of the reduplication will be noticed later. e-o-Tvj-tca is for the older form o-e-o-rrj'/ca ; initial a has been weakened to the rough breathing, just as in ib-nj/u for cricrTTjfjit,. Note that the vowel of the perfect reduplication is always e, of the present reduplication is t.
145] FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM. 147
c. The tense suffix of the first perfect is -/ca- (in the third singular -#e-).
d. The primary endings are used. But in the first and third persons singular the ending is omitted. In the third person plural -a-vcri has become -aai by dropping v and lengthening a.
e. The examples show that in compounds the preposition stands first of all.
145. In the pluperfect
a. The theme and reduplication are the same as in the perfect.
b. The augment is prefixed to the reduplicated theme. In elarrj/cij (for older e-cre-crT?;-*:?;) ei- has resulted from dropping a and contracting e-e.
c. The tense suffix is -/crj- or -tcei- in the first and second persons singular, -/ce- in the third person plural, elsewhere -KCL-. (The difference of pro- nunciation in the three forms was of course very slight.)
d. The secondary endings are used, with -aav in the third person plural. In the first person singu- lar after -/crj the ending is omitted.
It is clear, then, that the pluperfect active is in all verbs a /u-formation (121).
148 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [146—
146. PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM.
|
PERFECT MID. (PASS.). |
PLUPERFECT MID. (PASS.). |
|
|
/ have ransomed (or been loosed), etc. |
/ had ransomed (or been loosed), etc. |
|
|
S. 1 |
\€-\V-/JL(U |
e-Xe-Xu-///?7*> |
|
2 |
\e-\v-crai, |
l-Xe-Xu-cro |
|
3 |
\e-\v-rai, |
6-Xe-Xu-ro |
|
D. 2 |
\e-\v-a0ov |
€-\€-\V-(T00V |
|
3 |
\e-\v-cr6ov |
t-\e-\v-o-0r)v |
|
P. 1 |
\€-\V-fJL€0a |
€-\€-\V-fJL€0a |
|
2 |
\€-\V-(T0€ |
€-\€-\V-(70€ |
|
3 |
\e-\v-vrat, |
.e-Xe'-Xz^To |
In the same way are inflected most vowel themes, as
7r€-7rau-/jwu / have stopped (been stopped), c-Trc-Trav-//.^ / had stopped (been stopped), from 7rava> (TTOLV-) ;
(7VfJi-ft€-/3ov\€v-fjLai I have consulted, (rvv-£-/3e-/3ov\€v-fjLr}v I had consulted, from o-v/x^ovXevcu ( crvv + flovXtv-) ;
jSe-^ovXr^-jiuxt / have wished, €-(3e-j3ov\rj-fJir]v 1 had wished, from POV \ofjuca ((3ov\-, fiovXrj-).
NOTE. — The perfect and pluperfect middle of ftrr^/u are not used, except in a few compounds, and in these not often ; their place is supplied in this verb by the peculiar turn of meaning given to the perfect and pluperfect active, and by other verbs.
147. In the perfect and pluperfect middle
a. The theme takes the shorter form in some verbs, the longer form in others.
b. The reduplication is the same as in the per- fect active ; the pluperfect takes the augment.
149] THE Mi-AOEIST. 149
c. There is no tense suffix; the endings are added directly to the reduplicated theme, in the perfect the primary endings, in the pluperfect the secondary endings. The system is therefore a /u- formation (121).
THE
148. A few common verbs have an aorist formed without a tense suffix, the endings being added directly to the theme. This is called the ^6-aorist, after the analogy of the /u-present. lo-rrjiJLi has this aorist in addition to the regular first aorist, but with a different meaning ; while the first aorist 60-rrja-a is transitive, the /u-aorist ea-rrjv is intransi- tive, and is generally used instead of the direct middle eo-rrja-d/jLrjv in the sense / set myself, took my place, stood (not I was standing ; that is et- O-TT;*;?;). The same meaning appears also in the numerous compounds of this verb. yiyvwo-Kco has no first aorist, but a /u-aorist instead, with the ordinary aorist meaning.
149. Mi-aorist of tW^/u and
|
/ set myself, etc. |
1 perceived, knew, etc. |
|
|
S. 1 |
V |
V |
|
2 |
€-(7T?7-9 |
>r |
|
3 |
e-arrj |
V |
150
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[150—
|
/ set myself, etc. |
I perceived, knew, etc. |
|
|
D. 2 |
e-crrrj-TOV |
e-yva>-TOV |
|
3 |
L-crrtj-rrjv |
e-yvco-rrjv |
|
P. 1 |
e-<JT?7-/iej> |
€-<yV(0-fJi€V |
|
2 |
€-(TTrj-T€ |
€-yva)-T€ |
|
3 |
e-Grrj-aav |
€-yva)-(7av |
a. The formation is very simple. The aug- mented theme, in the longer form, takes the sec- ondary endings, with -aav in the third person plural. Neither eo-rrjv nor eyvcov has any mid- dle.
150. By the principal parts of a verb we mean the first form of every tense system used in that verb. They are so called because, if these are known, all the forms of the verb can be inferred from them. The following table gives the principal parts of most of the verbs hitherto introduced, so far as they are in common use. Not all compounds are given, since these can be formed from the simple verbs. It is necessary to learn the principal parts of all common verbs, because that is the easiest way of mastering their forms ; and until one knows thoroughly all the common verb forms, so that each one is recognized instantly in its full mean- ing, it is impossible to read with any satisfactory results.
151]
THE Mi-AOBIST.
151
f£ XL (£ -»
• "
<S T
41
2.2-
II
152
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[151—
W >
2
a
H
l
i *
w
d 'O
t Q3
tf o
a
-
55
w
M
^0 03
b 3 «
I
i
152] THE Mi-AORIST. 153
152. Vocabulary. ava-yiyvGtHTKco (dva + yvo-, ~\
yvw-), dvayvdxio^ai, > read, dveyvcov, dveyvco/ca )
o ftdpftapos, -ov foreigner, barbarian.
77 Paa-i\eid, -£9 kingdom, royal power.
o SouA,o9, "ov slave.
e\ev6epos, -d, -ov free.
77877, adv., already.
Ionic.
( Marathon, town on the ( eastern side of Attica. 77 mKrj, -779 victory.
vlKao) (yiica-, vl/crj- f r . vf/crj\ \
. , , . I conquer, be victorious,
vifcricrG), em/crjcra, vew/crj- >
, /71 surpass,
/ca, veviicrinai, evlfcrjvrjv )
{Xerxes, king of Persia, B.C. 485-464. on, conj., that,
a-rparevco (crrparev- fr. N
crrpaTo? army, cf . a-rpa- rtcoTT/9), o-Tparevo-co, ear par ever a, ecnpd-
pedition. Often used as deponent. ecrTparevdrjv G>9, rel. adv.(conj.), proclitic, as.
take the field, serve as soldier, make an ex-
1
When the reduplication syllable is followed by two con- sonants (or a double consonant ; see 212), the reduplication
154
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[153—
153. Exercises. I. Translate into English.
oKi^/ap^iai Kara\€\WTCU VTTO BTJ/JLCOV, TroXXat Be BTj/jLO/cpariat, VTTO rvpdvvcov. — i VIKCLS, & crTpcLTiwrai, o~vv ro2<; 6eol<$ eVel o ptfrcop dveyvco rrjv rov ftaa"t\€ 5 rore Brj eyvtocrav ol vroXmu on eVeySeySouXeui/TO. — ol f/EXX?7ve9 eveviKecrav 77877 TOU? TLepaas eV ore Hep^779 IcrTpdrevcrev eV aurou?. — at
1 f . iroXXal p.€v . . . iroXXal 8^: when, as here, a word of some importance is used in both the contrasted clauses, that word is usually put first in each clause and followed by ntv and 5e respectively. The contrast here is rather between
often means the democratic faction among the people; in the plural, demo- cratic factions.
3. vtKcis : cognate ace. with veviK-fiKare. Cf . English die the death. We cannot say conquer victories, but must say win vic- tories, or the like. — <rvv: ren- der with the help of.
5. €ir€p€povX€WTO : the mean- ing of the verb and the context
show that the form must here be taken as pass.
6. MapaOwvi : the battle of Marathon was fought 490 B.C.
7 f . ITT* : a final short vowel of prepositions, and a few other words, is often elided (cut off) before an initial vowel, even when not in composition. Com- pare dvr for avrl and dXX' for dXXd (12). Probably in speak- ing and reading the Greeks made such elisions very freely, but in writing they were some- times indicated, sometimes not. — 'IcoviKcd irdXcis : a name often given to the cities on the cen- tral-western coast of Asia Minor, colonized by Ionic Greeks, who were one of the three large branches of the
usually consists of Cf .
only, omitting the initial consonant.
153]
THE Mi-AORIST.
155
Tracrai a<p€(7rrJKacn rov
€<yva) ore al 'Icovi/cal TroXe^? a<f)€{,(TTiJK€(7av. — o crarpaTrr]^ €7T(,/3€j3ov\€VK€ ro3 /3acn\€i KOI ireirav- 10 rat Trjs cipXn^t Kal aXXo? Karacrrad^a-erai aarpaTr^ CLVT avrov. — TreTraiSev/Jieda ov% a>9 SovXot, aXX' 009 e\evdepoL 7ro\lrai. — Trore vevlicrjicacriv fSdpftapoi fXX?7^a9 ; — Trdre /carearrj ' Apra^ep^rjs et9 ySacrfXe/az/ ; - — o^ crvfjL/3€/3ov\€Vcr0€ rois api<TTQis 15
8. TOV f3a<ri\&i>s : gen. of separation ; the preposition is often not repeated after
race. The other two were the Dorian and the Aeolian branches. The Athenians were lonians, the Spartans Dorians.
II. Translate into Greek.
We have not yet (OUTTCD) surpassed the Greeks in wisdom. — The land has been ruled by kings a long time. — The power of the people is already established. — The slaves revolted from their mas- ters. — The slave has never ceased to plot against his master. — The orator is already standing beside his antagonist. — The king had not reigned many months when he was deposed. — The Athenians
5. never : that is, not ever, ov TTore, or as one word ovirore. A proclitic before an enclitic takes the acute accent. — to plot : use the inf . with the ar- ticle, in the gen.
8. was deposed : Travw in aor. pass.
1. surpassed:
2. in wisdom : dat. of re- spect. — has been ruled by kings : expressed by one word.
3 f. is established: pert act. of KaOia-rrjfjLL. — revolted : use the /xt-aorist. — their : the article is enough.
156
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[154—
were free and did not wish to be reigned over. — 10 I perceive that you have not yet read the tale. — Why have the boys not yet read the orator's speech ?
9. to be reigned over : ex- pressed by one word.
12. speech: \6yos, which has a wide range of meaning.
THE INFINITIVE MODE.
154. The infinitive is a verbal noun ; that is, like a noun it is used as subject, object, etc., in all cases but the vocative; but it is so far a verb that it may take a subject in the accusative, and any of the modifiers which any part of the verb can take. There is an infinitive in each tense system.
a. Except in indirect discourse
The present infinitive denotes an action simply as continued or repeated : as \vew to be loosing (at any time) ;
The aorist denotes an action simply as brought to pass : as \vaai to loose (at any time) ;
The perfect denotes an action simply as com- pleted: as \e\vK<=vai, to have loosed (at any time).
In all these the time is determined only by the context.
5. The future infinitive denotes an action as future relatively to that of the principal verb ; it is used (1) in indirect discourse to represent a future indicative of the direct, (2) as the complement of
156]
THE INFINITIVE MODE.
157
/ji€\\Q) : thus <f)r}alv TOU? <f>i\ov$ /3ov\evcr6(r0ai, Jie says the friends will deliberate, €<f>r) rov? <f>l\ovs j3ov\eva-€a-dcu he said the friends would deliberate, €/j,e\\ov /3ov\€vo-€o-0ai they were about to delib- erate. (/-teXXo) may take either the present or the future infinitive with no especial difference of meaning).
155. Infinitives of tirr^/u (<rra-, CTTTJ-).
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE.
|
Pres. |
t-crra-veu |
i-crra-a-flai |
[Like the mid.] |
|
Fut. |
(oriT-cre-cv) <7Trf-<T€W |
o'Tiq-o'e-crOai |
(TTa-Oij-(T£~crOa.L |
|
1st Aor. |
(TT^-o-at |
VTiq-a'a-o'Oai |
(TTa-Orj-vai |
|
Mi-aor. |
0"rrj-vaL |
||
|
1st Perf . |
€-0-T7/-K€-VOt |
156. Infinitives of \va (\v-, Xu-).
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE.
|
Pres. |
(Xv-e-cv) \v-uv |
Xv-c-o-^at |
[Like the mid.] |
|
Fut. |
(Av-o-e-ev) Xv-aciv |
Xv-cre-cr&u |
\v-0-q-cre-cr0ai |
|
1st Aor. |
Xv-crat |
Xv-aa-o'Oai |
\vOfj-vai |
|
1st Perf. |
Ac-Xv-K€-vat |
\t-\v-crOaLi |
[Like the mid.] |
158
THE GHEES: OF XENOPHON.
157. Infinitives of TraiBevco ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
PASSIVE.
Pres.
[Like the mid.]
Fut.
TratSev-o'C-cr&u
1st Aor.
1st Perf .
Tre-TratSev-Ke-vat
[Like the mid.]
NOTE. — Similar tables should be formed to show the infini- tives of other verbs, simple and compound.
158. The endings of the infinitive are Active, -ev (contracted with preceding -e- to -€6i>),
or -vai ;
Middle, -adai.
These are added to the tense-stem, as the per- sonal endings are.
a. Of the active endings -vat, is used in //^-forma- tions (//^-present, /-u-aorist, aorist passive), and in the perfect active ; in the perfect active the tense suffix before -VCLL becomes -/ce-.
b. In the first aorist active the wholly irregular -aai stands for the tense suffix and infinitive end- ing together.
159. a. All infinitives in -vai accent the penult. b. The first aorist infinitive active accents the
penult.
161] THE PARTICIPLE.
c. The perfect middle infinitive accents the pe- nult.
THE PARTICIPLE.
160. The participle is a verbal adjective; that is, it has the declension and construction of an adjective, agreeing with a noun or pronoun ; but it is so far a verb that it may take an object or other modifiers of the verb. Participles are formed in every tense system.
a. Participles generally denote time relatively to that of the leading verb. The aorist participle denotes an act relatively past, and is often trans- lated by our perfect participle, as \vcras having loosed. The perfect participle denotes an act com- pleted at the time of the leading verb, as XeXu/coi? having loosed. It often happens that English does not distinguish between the two. The present participle has the same meaning as in English. Sometimes the present, aorist, and perfect partici- ples differ only as the same tenses of the infinitive do (see 154, a). The future participle may in the paradigms be rendered by about to, as \va-cov about to loose.
161. Participles of la-rrjfu (crra-, crrrj-').
Pres. ACT. (t-ora-vr-, t-(7Ta(rd-).
N. i-oras t-OTacra l-ard-v
G. i-ora-vT-os t-orao^s etc., see 166.
160 TEE GHEES: OF XENOPEON. [iei—
MID. (t-oTa-//,evo-, [-ora-//.evd-).
N. i-ora-/>ievo-s t-(rra-/x€n/ l-(TTa-/x€vo-v
G. [-(TTa-fjitvov t-(7ra-/w,€j^s etc., see 163, a.
Fut. ACT. (o-Tiy-o-o-vT-, o-Trj-crovad-).
G. OTiy-cro-vT-os OT^O-OVCT^S etc., see 165.
MID. ((7T77-cro-/jievo-,
G. cTTrj-(To-fjL€vov (TTrj-cro-fJievrjs etc., see 163, a.
PASS. (oTa-077-(TO-/Aevo-, N. crra-Orj-cro-iJievo-s (r G. arTa-Orj-oro-fJievov (TTa-Orj-cro-iJicvrjs etc., see 163, a.
1st Aor. ACT. (aT^cra-vr-, oT^-(nxcrd-) .
. o-T7;-o-ds cmy-cra-cra
G. o-T>;-(ra-vr-os o-Trj-crd-o-rjs etc., see 16G.
MID.
N". O"T?y-(ra-/xevo-s G. oT77-cra-/A€Vov crTrj-cra-fjLtvrjs etc., see 163, a.
PASS. (ora-06-i/T-, o-ra-^etcrd-) . N. o-ra-^et? (rra-^eto-a ora-tfe'-v
G. aTa-^€-vT-o5 o-ra-^cto-^s etc., see 167.
Mi- ACT. ACT. (ora-vr-, oTacrd-).
N. crras (rrao-a ara-v
G. crra-vT-os (rra-cr^s etc., see 166.
1st Perf. ACT. (C-CTT^-KOT-, l-
N. €-crr?7-K(os k-crr-q-Kma.
G. e-CTT^-KOT-OS €-<7T7^/CVtds etc., S66 168.
162] THE PARTICIPLE. 161
162. Participles of ircuSeva) (TratSeu-).
Pres. ACT. (7rai8cv-o-rr-, TratSev-ovcra-).
N. TratSev-wv TrtuScv-ovcra TratScv-o-v
G. TraiScv-o-vT-os TraiScv-ovo^s etc.
MID.
N. TrcuSev-o-fievo-s G. 7rat8ev-o-^€vov
TraiSev-o-fJLtvrjs
7rat8ev-a-/xcvo-v etc.
Fut. ACT. (TratSev-ao-rr-,
N. 7rat8eJ-ora)v TratSev-aovcra
G. TratScv-ao-vr-os
MID.
etc.
N.
G. 7rat8ciM7O-/xeVov 7rat8ev-o-o-/i€K7;s
PASS. (7rai8€v-0T7-cro-/u,€vo-,
N. 7r G.
etc.
etc.
1st Aor. ACT. (TratSev-aa-vr-, N. •7rat8eJ-<rds TratSev-crdera
G. TratScv-era-vr-os TratSev-aacr^? etc.
MID.
N. ?rat8c
G. 7rat8ei>o-a-/x€vov
PASS. ( N. 7rat8cv-^ets G. TratScv-^c-vr-os
-, 7rcu8ev-(ra-/xcv-d-)
t8ev etc.
etc.
162 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [163—
Perf. ACT. (Tre-rraiSev-Kor-, 7re-7rai8ev-Kwd-).
N. 7rc-7rat8cu-K(os Tre-TratSev-Kwa
G. Tre-TraiSev-KOT-os Tre-TraiScu-Kw'ds etc.
MID. (7T€-7rat8ev-/xevo-,
N. Tre-TratSev'/xeVo-s 7re-7raiSev
G. 7T€-7rat8€v-//,€vov 7re-7raiSev-)U,€v?7S etc.
163. The participial endings are
Active, -i/T- (but in the perfect active -or-) ;
Middle, -pevo-.
These are added to (or, in the perfect active, com- bined with) the tense stem, and the entire parti- cipial stem is then declined as an adjective.
a. The middle ending -pevo- presents no diffi- culty ; participles with this ending are declined like ordinary adjectives of the vowel declension.
164. The accent of the participles is exceptional in the following respects ; the rules apply to the nominative singular masculine.
a. All third-declension participles in -9, except that of the first aorist active, are oxytone (that is, have the acute on the ultima). This applies to the /u-present, /u-aorist, perfect active, and aorist passive : /CTTO?, <rra$, TreTratSeu/cw, irai§ev6eis.
b. The perfect middle participle accents the penult (as does the perfect middle infinitive) :
166] THE PARTICIPLE. 163
165. Participles in -o)i>, -ov<ra, -ov are declined like \vcov (\vovr-, \vovad-) :
|
Sing. N.V. \v<ov G. XUOPTO? |
\vovcra XUOUO"?/? |
X0oi> X6oi/T09 |
|
D. \VOVTi |
Xuouo"?; |
Xuoi^Tt |
|
A. \vovra |
\vovdav |
XOoi/ |
|
DualN. A.V. \vovre |
\vovcrd |
X6oi/T€ |
|
G. D. \VOVTOiV |
\vov<raiv |
\VOVTOIV |
|
Plu. N.V. \vovres |
\vovaaL |
\vowra |
|
G. \IOVTCOV |
\vovcrcov |
\VOVTO) V |
|
D. \VOVai |
\vovcrcus |
\vovcri, |
|
A. \vovras |
\vovcrds |
\VOVTCL |
|
166. Participles in -a?, * ( - \ . |
-da a, -av are |
declined like |
|
Sing. N. V. <7Ta? |
« ^ |
ardv ardvros |
|
D. a-rdvTi A. crrdvra |
ardarj ardaav |
ardv |
|
Dual N. A. V. a-rdvre |
araad |
aravre |
|
G. D. (rrdvTOiv |
araacuv |
ardvroiv |
|
Plu. N. V. o-raj/re? |
ardacu |
ardvra |
|
G. (TTaVTCOV |
arda&v |
f aTCLVTWV |
|
D~2~. • (TTCLG L |
/ |
ardai |
|
A. o-rdvras |
crra<7a9 |
ardvra |
This is like Tra? except as to the accent of the first form and the quantity and accent of TTO.V. The accent of the first aorist active participle (Xveras, TraiSev'cras) is recessive.
164
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[167—
167, Aorist passive participles are declined like (\v06vr-.
Sing. N. V. G. D. A.
\v0evTo?
\v6evra
Dual N. A. V. \v6bre G. D. \v0evroiv
Plu. N.V. G. D. A.
\v6evres \v0evrcov \v6el<ri \vOevTas
|
\v0eicra |
\v0ev |
|
\v0ei<T<r)s |
\v0evros |
|
\v06iarj \v6ela-av |
\v6evrt, \v0ev |
|
\v0eicra |
\v6evre |
|
\v0eiaaiv |
\v0evroiv |
\vdelcrai \vdevra
\vdeia-i \v6evra
168. Perfect active participles are declined like
XeXu/coi?
Sing. N. V. G. D. A.
Dual N. A. V. G.D.
Plu. N.V. G. D. A.
•-, \e\vicviar) :
\e\vxv2a
\e\VKOTt,
\e\VKora
\e\vfcvla \e\vicvlav
XeXu/co?
\e\VKvLa \e\VKore
\e\VKOTOW \e\VKViCLLV \€\VKOTOLV
\e\VKora
XeXf/core? \€\v/cdcri
\e\vKviai
\€\V/CVIO)V
\e\vfcvlais \€\VKO<TI, XeXv/cora
170]
THE PARTICIPLE.
165
169. The /u-aorist participle of yt,yvob(r/cco is as follows :
(ryvovT-, yvovaar).
Sing. N. V. yvovs yvovcra yvdv
G. yvdvTOS ryvovarjs yvovTO?
D. ryvdvri yvovcrr)
A. ryvdvTa yvovcrav
yvov
Dual N. A. V. yz/oWe
G. D. ryVOVTOLV
Plu. N.V. G. D. A.
yvovTcov yvovat,
yVOVTCLS
yvovaa yvovcraw
yvova-cu yvovcr&v
yvdvToiv yvovra
ryvovads
yvovat, yvdvTa
170. a. If the participial ending -VT- follows a tense suffix ending in -o-, the nominative singular masculine rejects the case-ending -9, drops -r, and lengthens o to o>, as in \vwv for \V-O-VT-S. Other- wise -VT- is dropped before the case-ending -9, and the preceding vowel lengthened in compensation, as in /crra? for IO-TCI-VT-S : e then becomes e^, as in \v0eis for Xt^^e-z/r-?, o becomes ou, as in yvovs for <yvo-vT-s. The dative plural also shows this latter change. The nominative singular neuter simply drops -T without lengthening, as in \vov for \V-O-VT.
b. In the perfect active participle -KOT- may be called the combined tense and participial suffix;
166 THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON. [170—
the nominative singular masculine and neuter have -/C609 and -#09.
c. The formation of the feminine participial stem is somewhat irregular. Note that all par- ticiples (and adjectives) of the consonant and a-declensions have short a in the nominative, accu- sative, and vocative singular feminine ; all partici- ples and adjectives of the o- and a-declensions have long a or rj in these forms.
d. Comparison of the passive forms shows that the passive suffix appears as -07)- before a single consonant, elsewhere as -6e-. So in the /u-aorist a theme vowel is long before a single consonant, elsewhere short.
The following synopses, giving the first forms of each tense and mode, will show the relation of the infinitives and participles to the indicative forms of the same system. The principal parts are in full-face type.
NOTE. — The participles of other verbs should be given in tabular form, as in 161 and 162.
171]
PARTICIPLE.
167
7* 7^ 7««
px ja px ja ^ Ps ^^^ j a
t Ml? ' 8 " T: ?
PR
W 3
J
QD H
B
H fc>
»
Kj
S
3 1 f
pK<3>.a
*
I
o
»
i
168
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[172—
£
«
^ w
5 CO
I *
H •a OQ
CO H
HI
3 3
VP P
CO 60
A A
173]
alrea)
THE PARTICIPLE.
173. Vocabulary.
alrrj-), alrtjaa), yrrjica? yrrjfjuai,, yrtf-
169
rj /3otf0ei,a, -a? o /3&>yu,09, -oO Sov\dco
, Sov X&><7<w,
, €Sov\ct)0rjv (fr. SoOXo?) (Jbvva-, Svvrj-
€&vvrj0rjv, pass. dep. f
eavTov,3 -779, -of), reflexive pron.,
(
elbevai, inf. of oZSa, irreg., perf . in form, pres. in meaning,
spaTrevfca,* re0e- > •
, €0€pa7T€V0rjV )
, 0V(TG), e6v<ra, re- ) , erv0rjv \
ask (for some- thing), de- mand.
help.
altar.
> enslave.
can, be able.
one 's self, him- self, herself.
to know.
serve, worship (therapeutics).
sacrifice.
1 The diphthong at is regularly changed to rj by the aug- ment. See 118, 2.
2 Verbs beginning with a vowel lengthen that vowel for the reduplication ; in such verbs, then, the reduplication takes the same form as the augment.
3 Declined like avros, but from the meaning there is no occasion to use it in the nominative or vocative. Compare Latin sui, sibi, etc.
4 A rough mute (<£, 0, ;() becomes smooth (TT, T, K) in the
170 THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON.
ol "Icoves, -cov
[173—
fj,d\\ov, adv., comparative,
TI /jid^rj, -779
oifcot,, adv. (fr. ol/co^,
(ol-, 0677-)? oirj(ro/j,at,) v,2 adv.,
7roXXa/a9,2 adv., f) <rlrytf, -7)9
, , k Y make an expedi-
o-vo-rparevco (a-vv + crrparev-), av- . . 7 . .
/ ,1 tionwith,ioin
a-rparevcra), ---
etc., reg.,
Tonians. common, public. more, rather. battle, fight. at home. think, suppose. everywhere. often. silence.
, . in an expeai-
tion. Sokrates or Soc-
rci/ces. body.
dare.
<f>av€po$, -a, -6v (fr. root of </>eu- ) plain, evident, vco) j visible.
-oi>9, -ei, -rjv
-TO9
(roXyLta-, roX/i?;-),
w9, adv.
plainly, openly.
reduplication. See 211. In like manner the theme 0v- becomes TV- in the passive system, because the passive suffix in the next syllable begins with 0.
1 Imperfect wo/x^v. See 118, 2, and compare atrew.
2 Note the derivation and endings. We shall meet other adverbs of place in -ov, and all the numeral adverbs but the £rst three end in -a/as.
174]
THE PARTICIPLE.
171
o <f>i\6(ro(f)o<;, "Ov
&v, ovaa, 6V,1 pres. pple. of
lover of wisdom,
philosopher, being.
174. ^Exercises. I. Translate into English.
Ol 'AOijvalot,, TWV 'Icovcov TI^TJ a^ea-rrjKorcov CLTTO /3a<7fc\e&>9 Kal alrTjo-civTow avrov? /BoijOeiav, vvve- o-rparevcravro avrols, oWe? /cal avrol "lave? TO 761/09. Se i£*i?<ra? TO 1)9 eV rfj *Aaia
four meanings which we always distinguish in English. The first meaning, and, is familiar. Below in /cal rb <rw/xa Kal r^v tyvx^v we translate the first Kal by both, the second by and. Besides these uses as a conj., the word is often an adv. em- phasizing the following word or phrase, with the force of also, too, or of even. Deter- mine by the context which meaning is intended. — TO -y€- vos : in race ; ace. of specifica- tion.
4 f . Adpctos : Dareios I., son of Hystaspes, king of Persia 521-486 B.C. — viK^jcrds, 8ovX<&- <rds : having conquered and hav- ing enslaved; or better after conquering and enslaving. The
1 f. TWV 'IwVWV d<()€CrTT|K6-
T<OV, atrqo-dvTwv : a noun and pple. may stand together in the gen., not directly connected with any other word; this is called the genitive absolute. Its uses are similar to those of the Latin abl. absolute. It should most often be translated by a clause; thus here, when the lonians, etc.
2. avrovs, po^|0€iav : objects of aiT-rjo-di'Twv. As in Latin, verbs of asking, teaching, and some others may take two ac- cusatives, one of the person, the other of the thing.
3. avTots : dat. of associa- tion after <rvv- in <rvve<7Tpa.Teij- <ravTo. — KCU : also. Compare 140, I, 10 and note. Kal has
1 Gen. OVTOS, ovvrjs, ovros, etc., like AiW, 165.
172
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[174-
5 TroXXaZ?
/cal &ov\ct)o"ds 7rd\i,v rot>9 a?ro- /cal TOU9 ' A.0rjvaiov$ SovXcocrat €<f>' eavrov arparevaacrdaL. ov- 7ro\efJLioi (fravepcos eyiyvovro Tlep&at, /cal
/Jia\\ov r&v 7ro\\a)V. ol
Oepairevcov yap
aor. pples. here denote actions which preceded that of the verb
5 f . pdxais : dat. of means, though in translating we should use in. — rot>s oL-iroo-Tavras : practically a noun, object of dov\6<ras : translate by a rel. clause.
7. TOVS ToXji'/jtravras : the repetition of TOVS shows that the pple. belongs to 'AOyvalovs. Translate by a rel. clause.
8. ovv: accordingly, or an unemphatic therefore or then. Another post-positive word. — iroXljuoi : this was really the cause of the Persian expedition against Athens and the other Greeks of Greece proper.
10. 6€pair€va)v : pred. nom. after <f>ai>epbs ?iv, agreeing with the subject, Swjcpdrr/s. This is the first instance of the supple- mentary pple., a common idiom in Greek, to which there is no corresponding usage in English. Lit. Sokrates was plain (or well-
known) worshipping; i.e., it was well known that S. wor- shipped. Oepawetwv is thus an essential part of the predicate, and not merely a loose modifier. In distinction from the supple- mentary pple., the usage in the gen. abs., and in 6vres, vlirfi- (ras, 5oi>Xc6(ras, is called the circumstantial pple. ; that in Tofls dTrocrrdvras, roi)s roX/x^- a-avras, is called the attributive pple.
11. iroXv: much; adver- bial ace., so frequent as to be practically an adverb. — TWV iroXXwv: gen. of comparison after nSXKov. Comparatives without TJ (than) are followed by the gen. Cf. the Latin use of the abl. after comparatives without quam. The phrase ol iro\\oL (lit. the many) is often used in the sense of the mass of men, most peo- ple. — |i€v -yap : notice the posi- tion, between the article and
TToXXo/.
174]
THE PARTICIPLE.
173
TroXXot. olovrai rovs Oeovs rd pev el&evai rd &' OVK elbevai, • ^to/cpdrrjs Se Trdvra fjuev cSero 6eov<$ elSevai, rd re \€<yd/ji€va /cal Trpdrro/Jieva /cal ra o'lyfj /3ov-
, 7ravra%ov Se irapelvai (are present), /cal 15 \v ?roXXa/a9 /j,ev oll/coi 7roXXa/a9 S* eirl
ToXeft>9 /3co/JLO)V. A:aXft)9 Be 7T€7rCU-
Sevfjievo? r)V KOI TO <rw/Jia /cal rrjv ^v^tjv • rot>9 jap jjirj &vva/ji€vov$ eavr&v apfteiv OVK €</>?) Swrfo'ea'dat, aXXo)i/ deiv. 20
12. rd fUv, rd 84: some things, other things. In this and some like phrases the ar- ticle retains its earlier force as a pronoun.
14. T€ : both. Enclitic par- ticle slightly weaker than /ca/, like Latin que. re ... KaL is a little less strong, both . . . and, than KaL . . . KaL — irpa/rrdficva : without the article, therefore still affected by the ra before \ey6fjLeva. Therefore ra . . . TrpaTT6fji€va as one phrase is parallel with ra pov\ev6fjL€i>a, and re is correlative with the KaL before the latter phrase. -irparru is the common Attic prose form for the older irpdo-o-u. So y\u>rra for y\uxr<ra, and in other words containing rr or <r<r. — (riyfj : dat. of manner.
15. iravraxov 84 : with which per is this 5t correlative ?
16. iroXXdicis . . .
cf . 153, 1., 1 f . iro\\al fUv... iro\- \al 5^ and note. — 4ir£: in the literal sense of on something brL usually takes the gen. in prose.
17 f. KO.XWS: well; adv. of manner from /caX6s. Compare (pavep&s from <f>avep6s. Adverbs of manner in -ws are formed from most adjectives ; the ac- cent is like that of the gen. plur. of the adjective. — ireircu- Scvplvos : trained, disciplined. — TO o-cojia, TTJV +VX^V : acc« °^
specification.
19. jrfj: TIO^. The differ- ence between ^ and ov must be learned by careful observa- tion. Here TOI)S IJL^J dwa^vovs is general, meaning any one who cannot ; while roi)s otf 5v- va/j.evovs would be particular, re- ferring only to certain definite persons whom the writer has in mind. — «f>T] : imperfect of
174
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[174
(0a-, ^77-), conjugated like Iffryv, except in the 2d sing., thus :
e<f>a<rav. but
modules
when <t>r)nl introduces a nega- tive clause, the negative regu- larly stands just before the form of 0i?/u/, as if compounded with it. Compare Latin nego.
n. Translate into Greek.
I did not think the Greeks knew everything. — He said he did not know the man who was caus- ing the lonians to revolt. — The barbarians wished to enslave the Greeks, but the Greeks declared 5 they would be unable to do so. — The lonians, having revolted from the king, asked help of the Athenians, who were themselves also lonians in race. — Sokrates evidently thought that the best way to ruling others was through conquering
1. knew : use the inf.
2 f. the man •who was causing to revolt: express by the article and the attribu- tive pple. ; in the pres. tense, because the time referred to is the same as that of he said.
4. declared: 0i^.
5. they : if this referred to the Greeks, the subject of de- clared, it would not be ex- pressed in Greek ; since it refers to some one else than the subject of the principal verb, it must be expressed.
7. who were : pple. ; them- selves and lonians, being predi-
cate words denoting the same persons as Athenians, must agree with Athenians.
8. evidently thought : use the supplementary pple.: lit. was evident thinking.
9. to ruling others: use tirl with an inf. clause preceded by rb to mark the clause as ace. governed by tnl. Euling is here a verbal noun of the same nature as the Greek inf. So conquering. — was : use the inf. el vat. — through conquer- ing : did with an inf. clause pre- ceded by TOV to mark it as be- ing in the gen. governed by 5id.
174]
THE PARTICIPLE.
175
one's self ; for he that could not rule himself was 10 already himself enslaved; and he used to advise all his friends to 'know themselves.' — When the Persians, after being defeated by the Athenians in the battle at Marathon, were planning another ex- pedition against them, the Athenians asked the 15 Spartans for help ; for the contest, they said, was a common one. — Though few, the Greeks dared to take their place in battle against the barbarians, who were many.
10. he that could not:
attributive pple., with ^t be- cause the statement is general. The tense of could and icas in- dicates that this statement is given as that of Sokrates; in other words, that the clause is an indirect quotation. This re- lation is marked in Greek by putting the principal verb of the clause (was enslaved) in the inf. Note the position of ydp. The first himself is re- flexive; the second is merely intended to emphasize the sub- ject of was enslaved, and should therefore be expressed by avrov. 12. know themselves : use the aor. There was an inscription in the vestibule of the temple of Apollo at Delphi, "Know thyself" (yv&Oi <rav- r6v), which Sokrates often quoted. — -when : #re.
13. after being defeated :
express by a circumstantial pple., aor. pass.
14 f. another expedi- tion : lit. to-make-an-expedition again.
16. they said : can be sufficiently expressed by put- ting the clause, for the con- test was a common one, in the inf.
17 ff. though few, etc. : in Greek say the Greeks, being few, dared . . . against the bar- barians, being many. — take their place: /u-aor. of Ka.01- a-Trjfjn, followed by ets with the ace. because of the motion implied. — against the bar- barians: dat. of association with iJLdxyv. (We say fight with, using with of hostile, as well as of friendly, associa- tion.)
176
THE GKEEK OF XENOPHON.
[176-
CONTRACT VERBS.
175. Verbs in -aw, -eca, and -6co are contracted throughout the present system. That is, final a, e, or o of the theme unites with the following vowel or diphthong, according to certain rules, to form one long vowel or diphthong. The uncon- tracted forms are like those of other ^-presents ; but the contracted forms are alone used in Attic prose.
176. Present System of vlKaco (ylica-) conquer.
INDICATIVE.
Pres. S. 1 2 3
D.2 3
P. 1
2 3
Active. viAcd-co vZ/coi
n/ca-€i viKa
vZ/cd-e-TOv vZ/carov vZ/carov
vlKa-ovcrt
Middle (Passive) i/ZK<i-o-^uxi vZ/ca)l vZKa-T| or -€i vZ/ca
vZKa-6-//,e^a vZKa-o-vrat vZKwvrat
Impf. S. 1 2 3
D.2 3
Active.
c-n/ca-o-v evf/ccav
Middle (Passive).
c-vZ/cd-ov
e-vZ/cd-c-ro evZ/caro
c-viKA-6-rov cvl/carov
177]
CONTEACT VERBS.
177
Impf.
P.I
2
3
Active.
€-I/lKO,-O-/A€V
evZ/care
c-vt/ca-o-v
Middle (Passive).
c-vZ/cd-o-vro cvZicaivTO
INFINITIVE.
Middle (Passive).
PARTICIPLES.
i'tKot-a>j/
v/cav vZ/caivros
vZ/cd-ovo-a
etc.
<0>V
etc.
Middle (Passive).
vZKa-6-/icvos, -77, -ov ievav, -lys, etc.
-17, -ov -r/5, etc.
177. The contractions of verbs in -a&> are all included in the following rule :
(1) a + an e-sound1 (e, 77, e^, rf) gives a (a) ;
(2) a + an 0-sound (o, o>, o^,2 ov) gives o> (w) ;
(3) Original i is retained as i subscript.
a. In vlKav (from vZKaeiv) t is not retained, because it was not in the original form. That is, vZ/ca-civ is contracted from vZ/ca-e-cv, ct being here merely a way of writing the long
1 In giving this rule pronounce the e- in e-sound as in prey.
2 In the forms thus far given the combination a + ot does not occur, but it will occur later.
178
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[178-
sound of c (practically the same as French e prolonged, or German long e). In such cases the i was never pronounced.
178. The contract syllable takes an accent only when one of the syllables contracted had one ; it takes
The circumflex if the first syllable was accented, The acute if the second was accented.
179. Present System of
INDICATIVE.
love.
Pres.
S. 1 2 3
D. 2 3
P.I 2 3
Active.
Middle (Passive).
</)tX^-0-jLWU
Impf.
S.I 2 3
D. 2 3
P.I 2 3
Active.
€<f>L\OVV
Middle (Passive).
€<t>L\€L(T00V
€<J>L\OVV
€-<f>l\i-0-VTO €<f>l\OVVTO
181]
CONTRACT VERBS. INFINITIVE.
179
Active.
Middle (Passive).
PAKTICIPLES.
Active.
<f>lXoVVTOS
etc.
<f>iXovv etc.
Middle (Passive). »;, -ov
^>tXc-o-/xei/ov, -lys, etc.
^>tXov/xevo9, -17, -ov ys, etc.
180. The contractions of verbs in -ew are all in eluded in the following rule :
(1) e + e gives et;
(2) e + o gives ov ;
(3) e before a long vowel or diphthong is ab- sorbed.
181. Present System of SovXaco (SouXo-) enslave. INDICATIVE.
Pres.
Active.
2 j 8oiA6-€i5 3
Middle (Passive).
SovXovjMU 8ovX6--g or -€i SovXol
SovXorrat
D. 2 3
SovXovrov
180
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[181—
Pres. P. 1 2 3
Active.
8ouA<5-o-/x,ev SovAov/xcv 8ouA6-€-re 8ouAo9rc 8ouA6-ovcn
Middle (Passive). 8ovAov/x SovAowfle
Impf.
S. 1
2
3
D. 2 3
P. 1 2 3
Active.
c-oWAo-o-v €-8ouAo-€-s
cSovAovv
e-SovAo-o-v
tW/e (Passive).
c-8ovA<5-€-ro
€-8ovAo-6-/x,e0a c
C-8ovA<J-€-O"^€ €
€-8ovA6-o-vro e
INFINITIVE.
SovAovv
Middle (Passive).
PARTICIPLES.
Active.
etc.
SovAwv SovAovcra SovAovv
SovAovvros SovAovo-^? etc.
Middle (Passive). ;, -ov
8ovAo-o-/xei/ov, -^5, etc.
8ovAov/xcvo5, -77, -ov 8ovAov/i€vov, -779, etc.
182] CONTRACT VERBS. 181
182. The contractions of verbs in -6co are all in- cluded in the following rule :
(1) o + e or o or ov gives ov ;
(2) o + ?; l or & gives o> ;
(3) o + an ^-diphthong (et, ot,1 77) gives ot,.
a. In SovXow (from 8ovXo-cti/) t is not retained, because it was not in the original form, &>vA.o-c-ev, and was never pro- nounced. Compare 177, a.
The following synopses show that the remaining parts of these contract verbs are perfectly regular.
1 In the forms thus far given the combination o + rj and o + 01 do not occur, but they will occur later.
For the convenience of teachers who wish at this point to group the principles of contraction in a more general form, the rules given in the Hadley- Allen Grammar are appended, with slight changes.
a. An open vowel before a close forms a diphthong with it.
6. Two like vowels unite in the common long.
c. An o-sound absorbs an a- or an e-sound and becomes CD.
d. If an a- and an e-sound come together, the first in order absorbs the second, and becomes long.
e. But e-e gives a ; c-o, o-c, o-o give ov.
f. A simple vowel before a diphthong is often contracted with the first vowel of the diphthong : the last vowel, if it is i, becomes subscript.
g. But c and o are absorbed in 01 or ov without further change.
h. And o-ci, o-j; give ot ; a-ov gives o>.
(The close vowels are c and v ; all others are open.)
182
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[183—
g X
§ «
x"*\ *
^ CO
CO
So
CO H
.
mi
1 1 s i
c
1 'II I
H CL,
a 3 -
b b b
"v
c3
3 ai
i
184]
CONTRACT VERBS.
183
~ s </•
5>^vl» V3
S-
184
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[185—
s
H
OQ
tf
CQ
.- «
O * CO 02
^ W .* §
H
CO CO CO CO
•43
g CO CO CO CO
^ co co co co
CO CO
^ M
1 1J1
* 331
">J O
**S <*% ^-H *^ /^ '^
CO CO CO CO CO
^0000 ^» co co co co
CO CO CO
186] CONTRACT VERBS. 185
186. The interrogative pronoun is rt?, rl who? which? what? Its accent never changes to the grave, this being the only exception to the rule in 13. The same word when enclitic is the indefinite pronoun some, any.
Interrogative. Indefinite.
M. F. N. M. F. N.
S. N. rk rl rfe rl
G* * f /
TIVO<$, TOV TIVQS, TOV
Df * / /
rivu TO) TIVI* TCO
I ' t
A. riva TI Tiva T\
D. N. A. Tive Tive
G. D. rtvow Tivolv
P. N. TH/e? riva TIV& Tiva
G. TIVCOV TIV&V
D/ /
TI<JI Tiai
A I It f
Tiva<$ Tiva TIVOS Tiva
a. In the genitive and dative singular the forms TOV, ro> are quite as common as the longer forms, and must be care- fully distinguished from the article.
b. The accents printed in the forms of the indefinite pro- noun are those which the forms take when, by the regular rules for enclitics (55), they come to have an accent. (In the case of rts, rl the grave accent is merely a conventional way of distinguishing these, when spoken of separately, from the interrogative forms.)
186
-ov
THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON. [187—
187. Vocabulary.
worthy.
worthy, think
eZra, adv.,
ro9, -77, -6v (fr. $vva/JLai) , able, capable, si, conj., proclitic, if.
afterwards, then,
secondly. , adv., still.
adv. (comparative /xaX- ) very, much (more, \ov, superl. /j,d\icrTa), ) most*).
01 MLYJOOI, -G>V M.ecles.
o Bevocfrcov, -wz>ro9 XenopTion.
0409, oia, olov, rel. pron. of ) of what sort, as
quality, ) (Lat. qualis).
6fio\ojea) (0/^0X076-, o/ioXo- 777-), 0^0X07770-0), coy
7770-a,
0)^0X0777^77^ (fr. 6/-&0-
TO 6WyLfca, -TO9
> agree.
name.
1 Further illustrations of the temporal augment, and of the fact that the reduplication and augment have the same form if the theme begins with a vowel. (Cf . atrco) 173 and note.)
2 6/x.d-A.oyos, of the same word, agreeing (OJJLO- having the same root as o/xotos and English same)) has given us homolo- gous.
188] CONTRACT VERBS. 187
Treipdco (ireipa-, Tre^pa-), Tret- A test, make trial of; paa-to, eirelpcura, TreireipaKa, I (indir. mid.) try 7T€7r€ipdfjiaii €7T€i,pa0r]v (fr. j for one's self, en- 7T€Lpd) J deavor, try.
TrjcrTo?, -?;, -6v faithful.
o 7roVo9, -ov toil, work.
(7Tft>Xe-, 7Tft)X^-), -^crw, A
e7ra>X?7/ca, TreTreo- > seK. ^0rjv
6 a-vvep<y6s, -ov (GVV, epyov) helper.
rlfjidco (rlfjia-, rtyu,^-1) -770-0), ert- A
, rerifirjKa, rert^/Lta^, > honor. ifAijd'rjv (fr. rl^irf) )
r/, inter, pron., ^Aol* which? what?
. . , « ( som^, anv (-one or
t?, rl, mdef. pron., '. * v
( -thing).
188. Exercises. I. Translate into English. e'cr^e (received) /JLCV TO 6Vo/ia a?ro TOV K.vpov TOV e% dpxf)<> TOU?
1 f . 6'vofjLa : this is the form used histead of 6wfM hi the
Attic dialect. — TOV distinguished by this epithet
1 Enough examples have been given to illustrate the fact that verbs in -ao>, -ew, and -dw regularly have the final vowel of the theme long outside of the present system ; and here- after, for such verbs, only the short form of the theme will be given, a lengthens to d after p ; elsewhere to rj. Of the principal parts of vowel verbs hereafter only the present and future will be given, if the rest are formed regularly.
188
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[188—
Svvacrdat Se fyaviv rj\iov TO ovof^a. r]V Se r&v pera
Kvpov TOP ap^alov Il€po-a>v dfycoraros ap^eiv, o>9
5 6fJLo\,o<yeiTcu VTTO TTCUVT^V rwv IJVODKOTCDV olos yv.
KOI €<f>i\ovv avrov, w (frrjo-i Sevoffr&v, TroXXol Sia
ancient from the younger Cy- rus ; we call him the Elder, or the Great. He conquered the Medes about 559 B.C.
2. TOV . . . VIKWVTOS : trans- late this attributive pple. by a relative clause. — !£ dp x"ns : originally, first. In many such phrases the Greek says from where we say in.
3 f. SvvcurOai : signifies; so dtvafus is used for the force or meaning of a word. The English order of the clause would be <pdffl 5£ rb tivopa 5tiva- o-Oai 7J\iov, but this would be colorless, without expression, in Greek, — as if one should in English make the statement in a perfectly monotonous tone. There is an antithesis (100, 10, a) between the source of the name and its meaning; therefore dvi>acr6ai is the most prominent or emphasized word of its clause, and is for that reason put first. <pda-i is im- portant grammatically, and so may properly stand early, while it was rather a habit to put a form of <f>r]fjLt within the quota- tion which it introduces,
is the least important word in the clause, being a mere repeti- tion of 6vojjia in the first line, and therefore is put last, in the place of least emphasis ; ^Xtov, telling what the name signi- fies, is far more important and is placed before it. — TWV . . . Ilcpo-ttv : gen. of the whole, with the superlative — the same usage as. in Latin. — jjtcrd Kv- pov : say since Cyrus.
4. dJiw-Taros : superl. of #£ios, formed by adding -raros, -TJ, -QV to the stem of the posi- tive. For the lengthening of o of the stem to a compare ved- re/oos, 125, I., 5.
5. TWV l-yvwKOTwv : those who have discerned. uW with the gen. is the regular way of expressing the agent with pas- sive verbs.
6. ws: a proclitic before an enclitic takes the acute ac- cent. — g€vo<|>a>v : in the An- abasis and elsewhere Xenophon represents Cyrus as a very at- tractive man, of many virtues and few faults. — 8td : with the ace. means because o/, on ac- count of: 8ia TroXXd for many
188]
CONTRACT VERBS.
189
TroXXa. Trpcorov fjuev yap Trepl TTCLVTOS eVotetro, el VTTOCT^OLTO (promised) T6, ical TTOLCLV avro • elra Se fjt,d\a (fravepbs TJV Treiptopevos vlitav rov? fjuev <f>i\ov$
€V TTOltoV TOt>9 Se 7rO\€/ALOV$ KafCO)? TTOltoV. TTlCTTol IO
ovv r)crav avrS ol (f)i\o^ /ecu eVet/owz/ro a>9 /-taXtcrra e&vvavro crvvepryol avrq) ajaffol elvai. eVel yap KOpd? nva TTICTTOV re /cal SvvaTov ovra,
reasons. There is a strong tendency in Greek to place near each other words of allied or of contrasted meaning, or two forms of the same word in different constructions, as here iro\\ol and iro\\d. This rhe- torical device for enhancing the force of both words was called Trapovo/JLCLffld (Trapd, tfpo/xa) paro- nomasia.
7. irpwrov : neut. form used adverbially : in the first place. — ircpl iravros €iroi€iTO : idio- matic phrase for considered it of the highest importance; <?7r<uetTo, indir. mid., made it for himself beyond everything (irepl retaining here an earlier meaning).
8. \nr6<rxoiTO : the form will be explained later. — KCU : not and.
9. VIKCLV: surpass.
10. €t» iroiwv : eft 7roieu> and /ca/cws TTOLCIV are often thus con- trasted in the sense of do good to and do harm to ; both phrases
take the ace. of the person, not the dat. as we might expect. Here <f>i\ovs and iroXe^tovs stand as the objects of both VIKO.V and TroiCjv. To hate and harm ene- mies was commonly considered the duty of a good man, as much as love for one's friends. Yet Sokrates and Plato taught the golden rule.
11 f. «s . . . €8vvavro : lit. as they most could, i.e. to the best of their ability.
12. avTw : dat. after <rvv- ID rwepyol, which is in the pred. after elvai and agrees with the subject of ^TreipcDvTO.
13 f . eyvw . . . rivet ovra : 74- yv6<TKw and other verbs of knowing, perceiving, remem- bering, and their contraries take a supplementary pple. agreeing with the object, where we use an infinitive or clause. An expression like / saw him com- ing is the nearest approach that English has to this very com- mon Greek construction.
190
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[188—
rjglov avrov en /juaXXov rl/AacrOai,, KOI 15 €7roi€L TWV a\\<ov ware ol /jLev ajadol
€<f>aivovTo afyovpevoi eV rfj K.vpov apxy, ol Be tcafcol
v 0V.
T&v TTOIHOV 7ra>\ov<riv rjplv (to us) TTCLVTO, ol Oeoi.
14. T|JCov avrdv : he deemed him worthy. — ert (idXXov : put with rl/jid<rOcu. — otpxcvra : pres. act. pple. of &PX& used as a noun.
15. d-ya0wv : neut. ; gen. af- ter d^Lov/jievoi. d^iw takes the gen. after the analogy of its primitive, A£ios. — wo-re : acute accent, not circumflex, because made up of cJs proclitic and re enclitic. Cf. w's <t>rj(ri 6.
16. dgiovfjievoi : supplemen- tary pple. after tyalvovTo, agree- ing with &ya.6oL tyalvovro a£iov/ju-voi is equivalent to <f>ave- pol fjffav d%iovjjt£voi : cf . 174, 1., 10 and note. — dpxfj : province.
17. ov: a proclitic at the
end of a clause takes the acute accent, since there is nothing for it to ' lean upon.'
18. irdvttv : price is denoted by the gen. — rd-ydO* : for rd ayaOd. The running together of a final and a following initial vowel is called crasis (icpdcris from Kepdwviu mix). The ac- cent of dyaBd is thrown back on the penult because the ac- cented a is elided. Oxytone prepositions and conjunctions lose their accent in elision ; other oxytone words throw it back on the penult. The sen- tence is a line (trochaic tetra- meter) from Epicharmos (about 480 B.C.).
II. Translate into Greek.
When Xerxes was attempting to enslave the Greeks, the Athenians, daring to enter into battle
2 f. daring : the Greek would probably use an aor. pple. instead of a present. —
enter into battle with: cf. 174, II., 18, take their place in battle, and note.
188]
CONTRACT VERBS.
191
with him, were victorious with the help of the gods. — In war the possessions of the vanquished all belong to the victors. — Those who try to do 5 good to others are most loved by others. — Those who recognize what sort of a man Cyrus was all agree that he was more worthy to be loved than his brother ; but Artaxerxes became king, accord- ing to the law of the Persians, because of his being 10 the elder. — When we became aware that Cyrus honored faithful helpers more than the king did, we kept trying, as much as we could, to do such things as we thought Cyrus wished. — Who, pray,
3. with the help of : <rvv.
4. the possessions : rd w.
the gen.
5. belong to: lit. are of; but a neut. pi. subject generally takes the verb in the sing. — the victors: pres. act. pple. — Those -who try : attributive pple.
6 f . by others : virt> w. the gen. — Those who recognize, etc. : lit., those recognizing Cy- rus, of what sort he was.
8. more worthy: d£i6-Te- pos, like veti-repos. — than : ex- pressed by putting the word for brother in the gen.; cf. T&V TroXXwv 174, I., 11 and note.
10. because of his be- ing : did rb Trpefffivrepov afobv
elvat. elvai is the inf. of the verb meaning to be, aMv is its subject, the whole inf. clause is in the ace. governed by did.
11 f . became aware : one word in Greek. — that Cyrus honored : supplementary pple.; lit. became aware of Cyrus hon- oring.
12. than the king: may be expressed by the gen. Or to avoid all ambiguity we may use here TJ (than) followed by the nom. Omit did in Greek.
13 f . such things as : use the neut. pi. of ofos, omitting the antecedent. — wished : inf.
14. pray : the effect of this in making the interrogative
192
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
when king, does not think it fitting that he should be honored more than even the best of those who are not kings ? — Sokrates tried most of all men to be a good citizen and to know him- self.
prominent is given in Greek by the enclitic TTOT£ (Compare the vulgar English expression, Who ever can it be ?)
15 f . -when king : circum- stantial pple. denoting time ; lit. being king, but in reverse
order, because king is the more important word. — that he should be honored : inf.
16 f . even : KO.L — those who are not : attributive pple. ; neg. ^ ; cf. rods ^ 6vva- 174, I., 19 and note.
LIQUID VERBS.
189. The letters X, /*, v, p are called liquids, because their sound is smooth and easily prolonged. The combination of a liquid with a following & was avoided by the Greeks. This produced changes in the future and first aorist systems of liquid verbs (that is, of verbs whose themes end in a liquid), because the ordinary tense suffixes -<r%- and -<ra begin with o-.
190. Liquid verbs in the future insert e before the tense suffix -<r%- ; a then drops out (as it usu- ally does between two vowels) ; this leaves -€%- as the future tense suffix of liquid verbs ; then the same contractions are made as in the present sys- tem of (f)i\€Q) (compare 179 and 180). Thus the future of crre\\o) (crreX-) send is (o-reXew) crreXco, etc., as follows :
192] LIQUID VERBS.
191. Future System of o-reXXeo (0-reX-) send INDICATIVE.
193
|
Active. |
Middle. |
|
|
S. 1 |
o-reXw |
<TT€\OV/JiCU |
|
2 |
o-reXefc |
trreX^, or -el |
|
3 |
0-reXei |
<TT€\elrat, |
|
D. 2 |
(7T€\€ITOV |
0-T€\€l(T00V |
|
3 |
areKelrov |
tnekelcrOov |
|
P. 1 |
<7T€\OV/Ji€V |
<TT€\OV/Ji€0a |
|
2 |
(TT€\€lr€ |
o-T€\el(r0€ |
|
3 |
(7T€\OV<n, |
<TT€\OVVTat, |
INFINITIVE.
Active.
Middle.
PARTICIPLES.
Active.
crreXovv
Middle.
-ov
192. In the first aorist liquid verbs drop o- and lengthen the theme vowel ; a becomes a after e, t,, p, elsewhere 77; e becomes «. Otherwise the in- flection is like e\vara.
194
THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON.
[193-
193, First Aorist System of o-reXXw (o-reX-). INDICATIVE.
|
Active. |
Middle. |
|
|
S. 1 |
€-O"T€l\-a |
6-0-T€L\-d-MV |
|
2 |
e-o-retX-a-? |
€-(TT€i\rO) |
|
3 |
e-crre^X-e |
e-o-reiX-a-ro |
|
D. 2 |
€-(TT€i\-a-TOV |
€~O"T€i\rCi"'O'uOV |
|
3 |
€-o-T6i\-d-rrjv |
6~O"T€AX~Cl~O"6'77 V |
|
P. 1 |
€-(TT€L\-a-/JL€V |
€-o-T€i\-d-pe0a |
|
2 |
€-(TT€i\-a-T€ |
€"CT T€ 1 X~ft-0" (/ € |
|
3 |
t-*™\-a-v |
€-0-T€l\-a-VTO |
|
INFINITIVE. |
Active.
Middle.
PARTICIPLES.
Active.
crr6?X-a-z/
Middle.
-77, -ov
SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM. 194, Some verbs form their passive system with the passive suffix -77- (-e-) instead of -0rj- (-0e-) ; this formation is called the second passive instead
195]
SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM.
195
of the first passive. As in the first passive, -??- is used before a single consonant, elsewhere -e-; in every respect the inflection is like that of the first passive, except for the omission of 0; and the meaning is the same.
195. Second Passive System of <7Te'XXa> (o-reX-,
INDICATIVE.
S. 1 2 3
D. 2 3
P. 1 2 3
Aorist.
Future.
<7TaX-i7-cr?7, or -et,
INFINITIVE.
Aorist.
Future.
PARTICIPLES.
Aorist.
o-raX-e/9)
Future.
196
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[196—
a. The change of the theme oreA- to orctA- is of the same nature as those referred to in 87, b. The sounds a, €, o are nearly related, and often pass into one another in the inflec- tion and derivation of words.
The coming together of consonants often produces changes. Some of the commonest are seen in the
196, Perfect Middle System of o-reXXw (o-reX-,
0-raX-). INDICATIVE.
|
Perfect Mid. (Pass.). |
Pluperfect Mid. (Pass.). |
|
|
S. 1 |
e-<7TaX-/iat |
e-ard\-Mv |
|
2 |
6-crraX-crat |
e-ardX-a-o |
|
3 |
e-<7raX-T<u |
e-o-raX-TO |
|
D. 2 |
e-(TTO\-00V |
€-(TTa\-00V |
|
3 |
e-(na\-6ov |
€-(TTd\-0<nV |
|
P. 1 |
t-(TTd\-/JLe0a |
€-a-rd\-/iJL€0a |
|
2 |
e-crrak-Oe |
€-o-Ta\-0e |
|
3 |
€~(7TCL\-fJL€VOt> €LO"L |
e-(TTa\-fJi€VOi, rjaav |
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
e-ardX-Ocu
e-(7TaX-/4ei>09, -77, -ov
a. The reduplication omits the consonant and consists of e- only, if the theme begins with two
197] SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM. 197
consonants , a double consonant (£, i/r, £), or p. In such cases the pluperfect is not usually aug- mented. (Compare 152, note 1.)
b. When the theme ends in a consonant, the addition of the endings -<70oz/, -adyv, -c70e, -&0ai, -VTCLI, and -I/TO produced combinations difficult for the Greek to pronounce. Hence
(1) a between two consonants is dropped.
(2) Consonant themes in the perfect and pluper- fect middle indicative third plural use the perfect middle participle with ela-l they are and fj<rav they were.
197. The verb orcAAw illustrates also another way of forming the present stem, and it is now time to group together the present formations thus far introduced. It is convenient to classify verbs in the present system according to the way of forming the stem from the theme.
a. Variable Vowel Class. — This includes all verbs which form the present stem by adding the suffix -%- to the simple theme : as \vco (Xu-), pres- ent stem \v%-. So most of the verbs whose inflec- tion has been described.
b. Iota Class. — This includes all verbs which form the present stem by adding the suffix -i%- to the theme. This suffix always produces sound changes. X with i produces XX: thus <7TeX-*%- gives (TTe\\%- for the present stem, o-reXXo) for the present indicative active first singular. (Compare
and Latin alius.)
198 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [197—
c. Inceptive Class. — This includes all verbs which form the present stem by adding -O-K%- to the theme, with or without reduplication : as yi- <yv(i)-a-K(o (jyvo-, 7^0)-), present stem <yi-yva)-o-K%-. The class is so named because some verbs belong- ing to it have the sense of beginning or becoming (Latin incipio, begin). Thus ycyvGoo-Kco means be- gin to know, come to a knowledge of something, dis- cern, etc.
d. Root Class. — This includes all verbs in which the theme itself, with or without reduplication, but without any tense suffix, serves as the present stem: as i-o-rrj-fjn (crra-, CTTT;-), present stem lara-, larij". Such presents must of course be of the /u-form (121).
e. Other classes will be noticed later. Observe that this classification has reference properly to the present system only. The present suffixes -%-, -i%-, -O-K%-, are parallel with the future suffixes -0-%- and -e%-, the first aorist suffix -era- or -a-, the perfect suffix -/ca- and pluperfect suffix -KT/-, -KCI-, -KC-, and the passive suffixes --ftp- (-0e-) and -rj- (-e-). So the names variable vowel class, iota class, inceptive class, root class, etc., for the present system, are parallel with the names liquid future, first aorist, /xt-aorist, liquid aorist, first and second passive, etc. They are merely ways of naming the manner in which each system is formed from the theme. The theme, not the present indicative, is to be thought of as the basis of every verb form.
The following synopsis gives a view of the formation of every system of
198]
SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM.
199
•SB. g. -SB
0> ' • CD *
u
II! i
?-
$
M
OQ
H 3
s? -
3 o
H H
»r
o 2, ? ^
GC q
11
CO
200 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
SECOND AORIST.
[199—
199. Another liquid verb of the iota class, /3aXX&> 08aA-), illustrates the formation of the second aor- ist active and middle. The meaning is the same as that of the first aorist.
200. Second Aorist System of /3aXXo> (/3aX-) throw. INDICATIVE.
|
Active. |
Middle. |
|
|
S. 1 |
e-pa\-OT> |
e-pa\-6-fJLr)V |
|
2 3 |
e-/3aX-e-9 e-/3aX-e |
e-/3aX-ou . e-ySaX-e-ro |
|
D. 2 3 |
!-/3aX-e-roz> |
€-/3d\-6-(700V |
|
P. 1 2 3 |
€-/3d\,-0-/JL€V e-/3aX-e-re e-/3a\-o-v |
€-/3d\-€-(T0€ €-/3d\-0-VTO |
INFINITIVE.
Active.
Middle. /3a\-e-cr0ai,
PARTICIPLES.
Active.
-v
Middle.
/3aX-o-/^ez>09, -77, -oi/
200] SECOND AORIST. 201
a. The theme always appears in its simplest form.
b. The tense suffix is the variable vowel -%-.
c. The infinitive and participle accent the end of the stem, i.e. the variable vowel; fta\elv is for /3a\-e-€v ; for f3a\6p,evo<; this gives the same accent as the ordinary rule.
d. There is evidently a close resemblance between this system and the imperfect, infinitive, and participle of the present system of the co-form, since the augment and end- ings are the same, and the tense stem of each system ends in the variable vowel. But it will always be found that the tense stems of the two systems differ in some way. Thus in /&xXXa> the present tense suffix is -6%-, which gives XX in the present stem ^oXX%-, while the theme, and therefore the second aorist, has but one X. The accent of the infinitive and of the active participle is also different.
The synopsis on the following page gives a view of /SoXXw throughout. In the perfect and passive systems the theme becomes ^8X77- by transposition and lengthening.
NOTE. — Care should be taken to distinguish in pronuncia- tion between the forms with one X and those with XX ; compare p. 119, Note.
202
THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON.
p
H
I
•«
S
II
Hi
^
w <3
44
* ^<
«
W
PH
eg. eg. eg.
5 r-
ci vi vu 0
i H 1
g 02. 02. 02. 02. »<5 «vw
"S 'S
H •
>
CQ.
"
SECOND PERFECT.
203
SECOKD PERFECT.
202. The second perfect differs from the first perfect only by the omission of /e, so that the tense suffixes are -a- in the perfect indicative, -?;-, -e^-, -e- in the pluperfect, -e- in the infinitive, -or- in the participle. The theme often shows a change of vowel. Thus yez/-, the theme of yiyvopai, becomes yov-.
203. Second Perfect System of ylyvo/j,ai (761*-, 701;-) become.
INDICATIVE.
|
Perfect. |
Pluperfect. |
|
|
S. 1 |
ye-yov-a |
6-ye-ydiMj, or -ei-v |
|
2 |
ye-yov-a-s |
e-ye-yov-rj-s, or -et-9 |
|
3 |
76-70 1/-6 |
e-ye-ydv-et, |
|
D. 2 |
ye-yov-a-rov |
€-ye-yov-6t,-Tov |
|
3 |
ye-ydv-a-rov |
e-ye-yov-eL-Trjv |
|
P. 1 |
ye-yov-a-fjiev |
t-rye-ytp-ec-fJieV |
|
2 |
ye-yov-a-re |
z-ye-yov-ec-re |
|
3 |
ye-yov-da'i |
e-ye-ydv-e-aav |
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
ye-yov-e-vat,
76-701^605, ye-yov-vla,
204 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [204—
a. The present belongs to the variable vowel class ; ylyvofjiai, is for ryi-yev-o-/jicu, e being cut out. In the future the theme becomes yevrj-, giving yevtf-ao-fjiai, (cf. ftovXija-ofjiat, from ^ovKofJuaC). There is also a perfect middle ry€-yevr)-/jiai with the same form of the theme ; there is no difference in mean- ing between the perfect active and the perfect middle of this verb. The aorist is of the second form,
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
204. The usual ending of the comparative de- gree is -re/009, -repd, -repov (stem -repo-) ; of the superlative, -raros, -rarrj^ -rarov (stem -raro-). These endings are applied to the masculine stem of the positive. Adjectives in -05 with short penult lengthen -o- to -&>-. Thus :
POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE.
young vec-Tepos, -a, -ov veco-raro^ -77, -ov
worthy a^oo-re/w
o-o</>o'-5 wise o-o<£o)-Tep09
6p06-? upright 6p66-T€po<t opOo-raros
)1 old Trpeo-pv-repos
1 The positive is not used in Attic prose in this sense, though the plural is common in the derived sense of ambas- sadors.
206] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 205
205. A less frequent ending of the comparative is -Zeal/, -lov (stem -lov-') ; of the superlative, -£(7x09, -icrrr), -KTTOV (stem -40-To-). These endings appear in a few very common words, some of which are irregular. Thus :
POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE.
bad KdKlCDV WOTS6 KCLKIVTO* WOTSt
os good fteXrf&v better ft€\Ti<7TO<; best
or a/jL€ivo)v.OidfjL€mQ)v) apiaro? or
kos beautiful /ca\\£cov
206, Comparatives in -wv are declined like
better.
M. F. S. N. /3eXTto>i/
G. ySeXrf 01^09
D.
A. /SeXrfoj/a, ^e\rtco
V.
D.N.A.V.
Gr. D. /3e\Tlbv-oiv
P. N. V.
A.
206 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [207—
a. The forms in -ov have recessive accent. The shorter forms in the accusative singular and nominative and accusa- tive plural are contracted forms from a different stem in -co--, which loses o~ between two vowels.
207. Vocabulary.
dyrye\\Q)1 (a^eX-), 0776X0), 777- ^
rjyj€\fca, tfyyeXjuu, > announce, report. )
proclaim; mid.2 7eX«, etc., } offer, promise.
al 'Adrjvai, -&v Athens.
(ama-), alnaaQ^ai, ) blame, find fault
etc., reg., ) with.
f " ( Boiotian or Boeo-
0 DOICOTOS, -OV
I tian.
01 AeX^ot7, -&v Delphi. e/e/3aXXft> (l/c + /8aX-), €Kf3a\S>,\
e%efia\ov, €icpefi\r)Ka, e/cySe- > cast out, drive out.
)
r)\6ov, e\tj\v
1 The XX of the pres. mark it as belonging to the iota class, the pres. stem being dyyeXX%- for dyycX-t%.
2 Lit. announce to (another) from one's self. This use, a little different both from the dir. and from the indir. mid., is called the subjective mid.
8 The pres. belongs to the variable vowel class, but the 2d aor. and perf. are from a different theme. The 2d aor.
207] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 207
epcordco (epcara-1), ep&>rr;<7fc>, ^
etc., reg. ; also 2d aor. 77/70- >ask (a question). /*?7i> (e/?-1), dep.,
Kpivo) {icpiv-? fcpi>-)i fcpivG), \ (1) separate, pick eicplva, fce/cpL/ca, KeKpt^ai, V out; ercpldrjv ) (2) decide.
(a?ro + Kpiv-, Kpi>-), ^ ii aTre/cplvafjujv, > answer, reply. mid. dep., )
< ., ( (1) guest or A0s£;
o f ei/09, -ou < ,ox , * . ,o
( (2) guest-friend.3
ovT€ . . . oiire4 neither . . . nor.
rj Trarp/9, -tSo? (fr. Trarrjp) fatherland.
inf. and pple. are cAfletv, cX^wv. In the perf. we have an- other form of reduplication, called the Attic reduplication. This consists in prefixing the initial vowel and following consonant; the vowel of the second syllable is then length- ened : €\-rj\vO- from eAv#-. The plup. in such verbs is not augmented. The future of this verb is not used in Attic prose.
1 Ipayra- is derived from the shorter form cp-. The 2d aor. inf. and pple. are IptcrOcu and €po/>t€vos.
2 Pres. of the iota class ; Kptv-t%-, by transposition of v and i with contraction of i-i to I, becomes Kplv%-. The lengthening in the liquid 1st aor. is regular. The perf. and pass, employ the shorter theme Kpi-.
3 Private hospitality filled a great place in ancient Greek life. If one person was entertained in a foreign city by an- other, this act of hospitality formed a tie of friendship between host and guest and between their families. Per- sons in this relation were called £ei>oi to each other.
4 For the accent cf. wore, 188, I., 15, note.
208 TBE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [208—
Pisidians. \ make war.
o
etc., reg., av/Ji7ro\€/Ji€a) (aw + TroXe^e-), *\
avjjL7ro\€fjujo'a>i (rvveTroXe/jMy- V make war with.
o-a, etc., reg., J
97 o-TpaTia, -a$l army.
•VO) (VTTO + O7TT6U-) V7TO-
VTTCx)- v
• suspect.
V7TCD-
j, impersonal verb,
( ought (Lat. opor- \ te£).
208. Exercises. I. How Xenophon joined the expedition of Cyrus.
Tlapijv ev rfj Kvpov arparta tlevocfrtov 1 A.6r)valo<; , ovre dp%(0v ovre crrparLcorr)^ &v, aXXa Tlpolfevds rt? Bo^o>T09 yrrjcrev avrov eXdeiv, %evo<$ <bv ap^alo?. €7rrjyj€i\aro Se ITpo^e^o? <j>l\ov avrov TLvpw TTOITJ-
1. Ilapfjv : was present; compound of irapd and ^v was.
2. apxwv: j)ple. used as a noun, in the pred. after wv. Cf. Apxovra 188, I., 14. — TIS : a certain.
3. avr6v: cf. a^roi/s 174, I., 2 and note. The second obj.
is here t\0eTv. Or one may re- gard avrbv as the subj. of ^X- Beiv.
4. <|>CXov : second object of Troi^ff-eip, put first in its clause for emphasis. The subject of Tronri<T€iv is not expressed, be- cause it is the same as the
1 Cf . OT/DCITOS, (TTpaTrjyos, OT/oanoJTTjs,
208]
COMPAB1SON OF ADJECTIVES.
209
TT? 5
crew, ov avros ecj>rj Kpeirra) eavra) oizcrQai 7rar/)/So9. 6 Se Hez/o<£&>z> avayvovs rrjv
<7VfJL/3oV\€V€Tai, ^Q)KpaT€L * KOI 6 ^CO/Cpdrr)? V7T07TT€V-
rrjv TTO\IV alnacrecrdai n *3<€Vo<f)(*)VTa el K.vpG) <y€vtfcr€Tai) Sta TO Kvpov roZ? Aa/ceSatfJLovtoi,? €7rl ra? 'Adtyittfe <7VjjL7ro\€fjirjo-ai,) crvfi^ovXevei rcS 10 €\66vTa et? AeX0ov9 epwrav rov Oebv
subject of the principal verb. (This is contrary to the rule in Latin. )
5. avr6s : in apposition with the subject of €$77, but is to be connected in translation with ofecrflcu. — Kpei-rrw : in the sense of more useful. KpetrTuv and KpdTio-Tos differ in meaning somewhat from diielvwv, &pi<r- ros and from jSeXrfwi/, jSArttrros. The first pair are connected with Kpdros strength, and often mean stronger, strongest. — ccump: dat. of interest with KpelTTO) ; for himself.
6. irarpCSos: gen. of com- parison. — 6 g€vo<|>a>v : the ar- ticle is often used with proper names in Greek, sometimes to mark the person as one already mentioned ; it tends to give a familiar conversational tone, and is less likely ta be used in a dignified or stately style.
8. TI : cognate ace. with atTLao-eo-dai ; would blame X. somewhat.
9. •y€v^<r€T<u : as the whole narrative refers to past time, we must say should become, although the Greek can use the fut. ind., which would be used in the direct form : the city will blame you if you (shall) become.
9 f. Sid TO ... crvfnroXefAfj-
oreu: another inf. clause used as a noun, marked by TO as being in the ace. Within the clause Kvpoif is the subject. We should say on account of the fact that (or more simply, be- cause) Cyrus, etc.
11. €\66vTa : agrees with the understood subj. of tpwrav. — Delphi was the seat of the most famous oracle of ancient times. It was believed that Apollo answered the questions put to him, by inspiring the priestess, who seated herself upon a tripod and submitted to the intoxicating influence of a gas that came from a chasm in the earth. The priests took down the response which she
210
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[208—
I
7T6/H T?79 OOOV. €\.tfO)V O€ O £3€
'ATroXXo) rlvt 6e&v dvcov /cdXX.iO'Ta Kai dpiara Trotijaerai, rrjv 6B6v • /cal Xeyet aura) 'ATroXXw^ 6eol$ 15 0*9 %pr) Oveiv. eirel Be TraKiv fj\6ev, jjyyet\ev TO* ^cofcpdrei, a 6 Oebs dTre/cptvaro. 6 8' ^TLCLTO avrov OTI ov Trp&rov r)pd>ra el fieKrlov e<m arparev- ecrffat, 77 ov. 'Evrel Se ovrws ijpov, OVTCOS, e(f>rj^
uttered under this influence, and gave the response to the worshiper in hexameter verse.
12. 68ov : here journey.
13. ' AiroXXw : like compar- atives in -iwv, 'A7T6XXWV has in
the ace. both 'A 'A7r6XXw. — 6vwv :
and the circum-
stantial pple., like the pple. in Latin, may imply various re- lations, such as time, manner, means, a condition, etc. Here we should say by sacrificing, em- ploying our verbal noun in -ing
translate here in the most suc- cessful and best way.
14. iroi-fjo-cTcu : indir. mid. — 0€ots : for 6eots, attracted to the case of the rel. which stands next to it.
16. 6 84 : beginning a clause in this way and not followed by a noun to which it belongs, 6 is a demonstrative pron., usu- ally implying a change of sub- ject from the previous clause or sentence ; but he, meaning Sokrates. Cf. r& tfv . . . ™ 5^
with a prep, to mark plainly 1 174, I., 12 and note, the idea of means, which the I 17. &ri : because, a mean- Greek pple. merely suggests. — i ing about as common as that ; KoLXXwrra, apio-ra : the neut. j the two are closely connected, pi. ace. of superlative adjs. is j as may be seen in Latin quod,
regularly used as the superla- tive adv. For the comparative adv. is regularly used the neut. sing. ace. of the comparative adj. Thus the adv. from /caX6s is compared /caXws, /cdXXto*/, /cdX- Xicrra ; of &ya06v, eft (which is independent of dya06s), &f*eivov, &PHTTO., or pt\Ti6v, /S^Xrto-ra, or KpdTHTTa. We might
and in such English sentences as " Her eyes are mad that they have wept till now" (Shak. Yen. and Ad. 1062); or "I am sorry that you are ill." — cl: whether. We often use if in this sense, but if would hardly be suitable here.
18. 6-ircC : since. The causal meaning is a development from
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
211
irotelv 0)9 o 0609 €\€j6V. 6 Be Eevocftcov €pX€rat/ 7rapQ' IZ-vpov /cal eyevero <£tXo9 avrq). /cal 20 Hpo!;€vov T€ /cal JLvpov alrovvrtov earparevero &>9 €7rl Hl(7iSdsi 01)9 e(f>rj Ku/009 j3ov\€(r6ai e/c/3a\eiv e/c
T?79 77/9-
the temporal, as in Latin cum and English since.
19. 0vcrdfj.€vos : indir. mid., have sacrifice offered for one's self, used especially, as here, of taking the omens in sacri- fice.
20. irapd: takes the ace. after verbs of motion ; to Cyrus.
21. npo^'vov . . . O.ITOVVTCOV :
something of cause is here im-
plied in the gen. abs. — ws : even in a literal translation of the phrase it is clear that cJs implies that it was Xenophori*s belief that the expedition was against the Pisidians. This is a use of ws which has a wide development, especially with pples.
23. -yf]s: land, as the con- text shows.
U. Translate into Greek.
Xenophon became a friend of Sokrates while still a young man. — Sokrates often advised his friends to go to Delphi and inquire of Apollo, when they were about to do something, whether it was better to do it or not. — A certain friend of the philosopher, going once to Delphi, asked the
1 f . of Sokrates : use the dat. SwKpdrei. — while still, etc. : lit. being still young, but in reverse order, still young being.
3. to go . . . and : best ex- pressed by a circumstantial pple. (aor.), which may agree
with the word for friends or with the understood subject of the inf.
4 f. whether it was: lit. if it icas. Greek can retain here the tense and mode of the dir. form. So in 7, if any one was.
212
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[209—
god if any one was wiser than Sokrates; and Apollo answered that Sokrates was the wisest of mankind. He, however, declared that he did not know what
10 Apollo meant. — The Greeks thought that Apollo replied to his worshipers when they asked him what they ought to do. — Neither Xenophon nor Proxenos supposed that Cyrus was going against his brother. — The Athenians blamed Xenophon,
15 because he fought with the Spartans against Ath- ens after he came back from Asia.
thought that: ofo/ucu usually takes the inf.
11. replied: not aor. Why? — his worshipers : use the attributive pple.
12. what they ought to do : they need not be ex- pressed.
15. fought with : use
7. than Sokrates : use the
gen. Sw/cpdrous.
8. answered: takes a 6Vt clause, not the inf., as object. — of mankind : say of all men.
9. He, however: 6 W. — declared . . . not : put OVK be- fore 60T7. Cf . 174, 1., 19 and note.
10. meant : X£y«, an idio- matic use of the word. —
CLASSIFICATION OF CONSONANTS.
209. We have seen that when consonants come together changes are often made for ease of pronunciation. To understand some of these changes it is necessary to notice the character of the sounds. The student should practice giving aloud the sounds (not the names) of the different letters as they are described in the following sections (re- membering that the name of each letter begins with the sound of that letter), and should observe always what organs and muscles are active in making each sound.
It is not always easy for us to see why combinations were difficult for the Greeks, and avoided by them, which we find
211] CLASSIFICATION OF CONSONANTS. 213
easy, while on the other hand they found some combinations easy which we find hard. Thus it is difficult for us to pro- nounce r final or before a consonant (as in fire, horse) and we usually make only a partial approach to the sound in such places. So we have to make an effort at first in order to pronounce initial kn, ks, kt, pn, tl, with which the Greek had no trouble. Some of these combinations, too, a German finds easy, though an English th, or final £>, c?, or g, is to him almost impossible. National habit in such matters can hardly be explained, but must be recognized as a fact.
210. a. The sounds of TT, /3, </> are made with the lips ; these letters are therefore called labials (or lip-letters, Lat. labrum, lip).
b. The sounds of r, 8, 6 are made with the tip of the tongue placed just back of the upper teeth ; these letters are therefore called linguals (or tongue- letters, Lat. lingua, tongue) or dentals (tooth-letters, Lat. dens, tooth).
c. The sounds of K, 7, % are made with the back of the tongue pressed against the palate or back part of the roof of the mouth; these letters are therefore called palatals.
d. All these sounds are so weak, or so little resonant, when made alone, that these nine letters are called mutes.
211. a. Again, the sounds of TT, r, K are merely whispered; they are therefore called surd (Lat. surdus, dulT) or smooth mutes.
b. The sounds of ft, S, 7 are made with the lips or tongue in the same position as for TT, r, K, but
214 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [212—
they contain another element, that of voice. That is, in uttering /3, 8, 7, as in uttering the vowels, the vocal chords in the upper part of the windpipe vibrate (the vibration can even be felt by putting the finger on the outside of the throat) ; hence /3, 8, 7, like the vowels, are called sonant (Lat. sonans, sounding') mutes. Greek grammarians called them middle mutes, and some still use that term.
c. The sounds of </>, 0, % are also surd, but they differ from TT, T, K in having the distinct A-sound added in the ancient pronunciation ; hence they are called aspirates (Lat. aspiratus, Ireathed on) or rough mutes.
212. Of the other consonants, notice for the present that a is also lingual and surd ; and that •>/r and £ are double and surd. ^ is but another way of writing TTCT, and £ another way of writing /ccr. £ is also a double consonant (it probably had the sound of dz), and is sonant.
213. The following table will render this classi- fication easier to remember.
MUTES. DOUBLE CON-
SONANTS.
Smooth. Middle. Rough.
(Surd) (Sonant) (Aspirate)
Labial TT /3 <f> ty
Lingual r 8 0 a- %
Palatal K 7 % £
a. The mutes in the same horizontal line are cognate with
214]
MUTE THEMES.
215
each other (Lat. co-gnatus, born together), because made with the same organs. Those in the same perpendicular line are coordinate with each other, or mutes of the same order.
214. The conjugation of themes ending in a lingual mute is illustrated by 7re/#o> (?re^-) per- suade; middle (direct) persuade one's self, believe.
a. The present system is like \vco.
b. In the future system 6 before the tense suffix -cr%- is dropped, giving Trei-crco, etc. ; inflected like
\V(7Ct).
c. In the first aorist system 6 before the tense suffix -era- is dropped, giving e-Tre^-o-a, etc., inflected like e'Xto-a.
d. In the first perfect system 6 before the tense suffix -/ea-, etc., is dropped, giving Tre-Trei-Ka, etc., inflected like \e\v/ca.
e. The perfect middle system is as follows :
INDICATIVE.
s. i
2 3
D. 2 3
P. 1 2 3
Perfect.
Tre-jrei-aOov
Pluperfect.
e-7re-7re la-fArj v > /
€-7re-7T€i-(r()ov
-pevoi rj<rav
216 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [215—
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
-?;, -ov
Here also 6 before a- is dropped, and before p, and T is changed to cr, which is, like #, a lingual, and more easily pronounced with those conso- nants.
/. In the first passive system 0 before 6 of the passive suffix is changed to cr, just as before r. This gives e-Tre/o--^?;-^, etc., inflected like e\u-
The same changes are made in other lingual themes, and are summed up in the following rule :
215. A lingual mute (r, 8, 0)
before a or K is dropped, before another lingual or JJL is changed to cr.
Thus aOpoifa (aOpoiS-) l assemble (transitive) ; middle (direct) assemble one's self, assemble (intransitive) makes ot-o-o), 7jf'0/ooi-o-a, TJOpoi-Ka, rjOpoLcr-fJuai, rjOpoi(T-Or]V.
216. The conjugation of themes ending in a labial mute is illustrated by Tre/mco (?reyLi7r-) send.
a. In the future system TT and the cr of the tense
1 For the formation of the pres, stem see 241, note 8.
216]
MUTE THEMES.
217
suffix -cr%- are written as i/r, giving Tre/i^o), etc. (for 7re/,67r-<ja>).
b. So in the first aorist system e-Tre/jiTr-o-a is writ- ten e-7re/i^a, etc.
c. In the perfect active system the second per- fect and pluperfect suffixes -a- (-?;-, -a-, -e-) are used, and before these (as is often the case in the second perfect) the final consonant of the theme is aspirated, becoming <£; at the same time the theme vowel e varies to o, giving 7re-7ro/x<£-a, etc., like yeyoz/a (203).
d. The perfect middle l system is as follows :
INDICATIVE.
S. 1 2 3
D. 2
3
P. 1 2 3
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
e-Tre-Treyu-TT-ro
1 It happens that the entire middle of this verb is used only in compounds.
218 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [217—
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
7T€-7r€/jL<f)-0ai,
7re-7re/4-yLtez>09, -77, -ov
TT before -yL6at, -/4e0a, -pevos is changed to //,, and in this verb (since three /*'s could hardly be pro- nounced otherwise than two) one JJL was dropped. TTCT is of course written ty. In -aOov, -o-Orjv, -aOe cr is dropped between two consonants (see 196, 5, (1) ; then ?r before 6 is changed to the cog- nate rough mute <£, that is, is made coordinate with 0.
e. In the first passive system TT is made coor- dinate with the following 0, giving e-7reV</>-0??-J'> etc.
Like changes are made in other labial themes and are included in the following rule :
217. A labial mute (TT, & 0)
before p becomes & with cr forms i/r,
before a lingual mute (r, 8, 0) is made coordinate.
218, So \a/jL/3dva> l (Xa/3-, X^yS-) forms (for X?;/3-cro-/<ta£), 2d aor. e-Xa/3-oz/, 2d perf. ei- (with quite irregular reduplication e^-), ei-\rjfji-fjLcu (for et-X^/3-^at), k-\r]^-Qj]-v (for €-
1 For the formation of the present see 221,
219] MUTE THEMES. 219
a. The perfect middle of \a/i/3ai/ft> is as follows : INDICATIVE.
S. 1 2 3
D. 2 3
P. 1
2 3
Perfect.
elaL
Pluperfect.
rjcrav
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
-ov
Here /3-/A become
/3-a- become i|r,
)S-r become TT-T,
/3-^ become </>-0, by the rule in 217.
219. The conjugation of themes ending in a palatal mute is illustrated by Sel/cvvjAi (Se^-) point out, show.
a. The present system assumes the suffix -w-
220
THE GREEK OF XENOPRON.
(see 221, 5), and is thus of the /u-form, conjugated like Keparvvv'^L (102), as follows:
|
INDICATIVE. |
||
|
Pres. |
Active. |
Middle. |
|
S. 1 2 |
O€iK-VV-U>i $€l/C-VV-$ |
Sei/c-vv-fjicu Sel/c-vv-aai |
|
3 |
Sei/c-vv-a-i |
Seltc-vv-Tai |
|
D. 2 |
SeiK-vv-rov |
SeiK-vv-adov |
|
3 |
Sel/c-vv-rov |
SeiK-vv-crffov |
|
P. 1 |
SetWv-/A€i> |
Setvvv-peda |
|
2 |
SelfC-VV-T€ |
SeiK-vv-crOe |
|
3 |
Sei/c-vv-dcn |
SelK-vv-VTai |
|
Impf. S. 1 |
A ctive. |
Middle. |
|
2 |
€-$€lK-VV-S |
e-Sel/c-vv-o-o |
|
3 |
e'-SetVi^ |
e-Sel/c-vv-ro |
|
D. 2 |
e-Sel/c-vv-Tov |
€-0€i/C-W~O'00V |
|
3 |
e-Sei/c-vv-Trjv |
€-B€l/C~VV-O'0'nV |
|
P. 1 |
Uelic-w-pev |
e-$€i,K-vv-/j,e0a |
|
2 |
e-Sel/c-vv-re |
€-O€LK-W-(T0€ |
|
3 |
e-Sel/c-vv-crav |
€~o€LK"W-VTO |
1 v is lengthened in the sing, of the pres. and imperf . ind. act., as is a of
219]
MUTE THEMES. INFINITIVE.
221
Sei/c-vv-vat,
PARTICIPLE.
-vv~v
etc., like l
-97, -ov
b. In the future and first aorist tc-<r are writ- ten £, giving felga) (for Se^-o-o)) and e-Se^a (for
c. In the second perfect K, is aspirated, giving Se^-a. (Compare 7T€7ro/i<£a, et\r)<f)a.)
d. The perfect middle system is as follows :
INDICATIVE.
S. 1 2 3
D. 2 3
P. 1
2 3
Perfect.
Pluperfect.
*&•&*£*
e-Se-Seitc-TO
Se-Seiy-fJievot, fja-av
222 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [220-
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
-77, -ov
Here K-/A become K-V become £, K-6 become ^-0, a- between two consonants
being dropped as always.
e. In the first passive system K before 0 is made coordinate, giving e-Set'%-0?7-z/, etc.
Like changes are made in other palatal themes, and are included in the following rule :
220. A palatal mute (/e, 7, %)
before JJL becomes 7, with <r forms £,
before a lingual mute becomes coor- dinate.
221. The verbs 7ret#ft>, Xayu-/3av&>, and Se//ci/£yu illustrate other modes of forming the present stem, and for completeness the remaining classes are here described.
a. Strong Vowel Class. — The present suffix -%- is added to the theme and the theme vowel is lengthened, i becoming e^. Thus, we find in a second aorist of Trelffa), used only in poetry, that the theme is properly 7n0~. In the present this becomes TreiO-, so that the present stem is fjreiO-%-. Like most verbs of this class, Trelffco retains the
223] MUTE THEMES. 223
strong (or lengthened) form everywhere, ex- cept in the second aorist; and in this verb, as was said, the second aorist is not used in Attic prose.
b. Nasal Class. — A suffix containing v is added to the theme, and sometimes a nasal inserted in the theme. Thus in SelK-vu-fiL the suffix -vv- is added. In \a/jL/3dvco the suffix -av%- is added, and /JL inserted.
c. Tan Class. — The suffix -r%- is added to the theme. Thus, KpvTr-ra) (/cpt><£-) hide, present stem /cpV7r-T%- (future Kpv-^roi).
222. The common varieties of verb formation have all been given in the modes most used, and the student is now ready, if what precedes has been well learned, to begin an easy author. The subjunctive, optative, and imperative, modes will be taken up gradually as they are needed. The pupil should obtain a Grammar, to which reference will now begin to be made, G. standing for Goodwin's, and H. for that of Hadley and Allen.
The reading lessons that follow are the opening pages of Xenophon's "Anabasis," or "Expedition of Cyrus." The information which one should have before beginning that work has been in great part given in the preceding lessons, but for convenience it is brought together here.
223. Xenophon was an Athenian, born, prob- ably, a little before the beginning of the Pelo- ponnesian war (431 B.C.). In early manhood he became acquainted with Sokrates, and for about ten years, probably, remained in close relation
224 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
with the philosopher, to whom he owed much of his moral and intellectual development. It was in 401 B.C. that his friend Proxenos invited him to come to Asia Minor and make the acquaintance of Cyrus, as narrated in the last Exercise. Cyrus was then not over twenty-three years old, and had for six years been governor of a large extent of territory. He was energetic and ambitious, and determined, if possible, to make himself king in place of his brother, Artaxerxes. The only ground which he had for a claim upon the throne was that Artaxerxes, though the elder, had been born before his father became king, while Cyrus was the eldest son born after that event, and was therefore the eldest son of the king. Xerxes I., successor of Dareios I. and great-grandfather of Cyrus, is said to have used the same argument successfully. The account of the expedition, in the latter part of which Xenophon was the real leader, was written several years afterwards.
224. Vocabulary.
dfjL<f>OT€po$, -d, -ov both.
(airo + Se^/c-), A d-Tre'Se^a, CLTTO- I ' [
ANABASIS, /., 1, 1-2. 225
acrOevea) (acrffeve-), 0,06 evri- ) , 7 , . 7
7 [ 6e weak, be sick. a-®,1 etc., reg., )
/3az/-, /8a-), firjcro-
avaBaivcd (dva+Bav-, Ba-), ) . 7 ,
,H go up, ffo inland.
avaprjcro/jiai, etc., )
( journey up, or towards
• , ' interior.
or (T'fflo'a), ea^ov, V have.
Kastolos or Castolus.
; ^ in_ ^ ^ ^
,g ^
Xenias.
C heavy-armed soldier, j
1 From its meaning this verb has no middle.
2 The pres. belongs to the iota class ; the theme (3av- takes the pres. suffix -t%-, v and t are transposed, and i forms a diphthong with the preceding a, giving for the pres. stem PO.IV%-. Elsewhere the stem appears in the shorter form (3a-. The future is deponent. (Compare ytyvwcr/co), Xa/x- /?ava>, and others.)
8 A /u-aorist, conjugated like ccmyv (149).
4 For full explanation of the forms of this verb see 239.
226
THE GBEEK OF XENOPBON.
[225—
„ ( how much, as much -??, -or, rel. pron. ot I , 7
, r . < as; pi., A0w many,
quantity and number,
V
, Uappatrw, -a, -ov
77 Hapvo-arL^ -^809 TO TreoYoz/, -ov
as many as. Parrhasian, of Par-
Pary satis. plain. ., make, do.
rj re\€v T??, -779 o Ticro'acfrepv'rjs, -OU9,1 -e^, -ai, -a
TissapTiernes. three hundred.
happen, chance.
rerv^rj/ca or rerev^a
225. Anabasis, I., 1, 1-2. 1. Aape/ou /<m Hapf crdriSos yiyvoVTCU 7ratSe9
7Tpecr/3vT€po$
1. Adpeiou, ZlapwrdTiSos :
gen. of source. H. 750 ; G. 1130. — -yC-yvovTai : historical present, common in Greek, as in Latin. — 8vo : there were four sons in all ; but the two younger sons are left out of view because
&
they are not concerned in this story. Note that a numeral or other adjective is likely to fol- low its noun, unless the adjec- tive has some emphasis upon it or the noun has the article.
2.
Artaxerxes
1 For declension see H. 191, 193 ; G. 228, 230.
2 Of the nasal class ; the theme rv^- aspumes the pres. suffix -av%-, and inserts the palatal nasal before the palatal mute x- Compare Xa/x^avcu, which inserts the labial nasal before the labial mute /3.
8 Second aorist, like €/?aAoi/ (200).
225]
ANABASIS, L, I, 1-2.
227
€7rel Se rja-Qevei kapelos KOI v7ra)7TT€ve reXevrrjv rov
/3/OU, €/3oV\€TO TOD TTCliSe d/Ji<f)OT6pCO 7Tap€LVai,. 2. O
fiev ovv 7rp€cr/3vT€pos Trapcov €Tvy%av€ • Kuyooz/ Se fjL€Ta7re/ji7r€Tai, airo rf)? apx*js ^9 avrov e, /cal arparrjyov Se avrov
II., called fjL^fjLOJv unf or getting, for his remarkable memory. It was said that he remembered the names of all his soldiers. The line of Persian kings was Cyrus the Great, Kambyses, Dareios I., Xerxes I., Arta- xerxes I., Dareios II., Arta- xerxes II.
3. T|<r0€V€i Adpeios : the pred. here stands before the subject because the former is the more important, containing the real point of the new statement. The general principle is that the more important precedes the less important, other things be- ing equal. But other things are often not equal, and hence other principles come in play, some of which will be noticed later. When the relative im- portance of words is merely grammatical importance, as is often the case in simple narra- tive, then we have nearly the ordinary English order; but the more feeling is expressed, the more the order in Greek is likely to differ from that in English. Note that the final
place in a clause is likely to contain an important word in English, but an unimportant one in Greek.
4. irapcivcu : to be near him ; made up of irapd near and eivai to be.
5. jt€v ovv: each particle has its proper force; fdv, al- though translated only by the tone in which the whole phrase is spoken, shows that the writer has in mind something con- trasted with 6 IT pea- pfo epos, while ofiv connects the statement with the former sentence as our ac- cordingly does. — irapwv: sup- plementary pple. with agreeing with the subj. 6 ptirepos. With rvyxdvw the pple. really contains the main statement. We say, chanced to be present, or was at hand, as it happened. H. 980, 984 ; G. 1578, 1586.
6. fi,€Tair€jj,ir€Tcu : indir. mid., sends for to come to himself, summons. — apx^s : province, a meaning easily derived from that of government.
7. eiroifjo-c: the Greek is
228
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[225—
O<TOI eh Ka<TTQ)\ov ovv o Ku/309 Xa/3ft)i>
often content to describe an act by the aor. merely as occurring in the past, where we are care- ful to describe it by the plup. as completed in the past. Hence the plup. is far less common in Greek, and we must often use the plup. to translate an aor. ind. ; so with dir{dei%e. — ical orrpaTTj-yov 8c : as 8{ is al- ways a conj., Kal must here be the adv. meaning also. The writer drops the rel. clause and practically begins a new sen- tence. Greek often does this rather than extend the rel. clause to two or more members as we do.
8. oo-oi : since we have no single rel. pron. ref erring espe- cially to quantity or number, and as many as is clumsy, we we may translate who. But Greek generally uses fooi for icho after an indefinite word of number like irdvrwv. — Ka- o-TwXov ircSCov : practically one proper name ; hence the omis- sion of the article. In the ace. because of the motion implied in dBpolfrvrai (dir. mid.). In Anab. I., 9, 7 Xenophon tells US that Cyrus Kareir^^dTj vir6 TOV irarpbs (ivas sent down by his father) aaTpdirys A.v5tds re
avafiaivei real rwv
a>9
Kal &pvyids Kal K
&s §£ Kal iravruv dire- ols Kad-fjK^ (whose duty it is) eis Kao-rwXoO TredLov ddpoi- £e<r6at. This was the central mustering place of a wide re- gion. — &va|3aiv€i : note the position and the reason for it. This journey was made in 405 B.C. dvd in composition with verbs of motion is used to denote travel from the coast inland, as we often use up. Hence dv.dpao-is means a jour- ney from the coast inland ; it is the title given properly to Xenophon' s account of the march of Cyrus up to the neigh- borhood of Babylon. This ac- count is contained in the first eight chapters of Book I., and the remaining six Books de- scribe the return of the Greeks ; but the title is used as that of the entire work.
9. Tioro-a4>€pvr]v : really an enemy of Cyrus, to whom had been given a large part of the power formerly held by Tis- saphernes. Doubtless Cyrus distrusted him, and for that reason was unwilling to leave him behind during an ab- sence certain to last several months,
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
229
Se avrwv ^evicuv Tlappdcriov.
ap^ovra 10
10. €\wv : having under his command, as a body-guard. We may translate with; but ob- serve that in this sense ex(t)V can be used only of a superior, who can be said to have under him soldiers or other inferiors. Cyrus had seen clearly the ex- cellence of Greek soldiers as compared with Asiatics. — 6-irXt- TO.S: men fully armed with a heavy shield, a bronze cuirass, helmet, and greaves (which clasped around the leg and pro- tected it from the knee to the ankle), together with a sword and long spear for weapons of offense. This armor all to- gether was called forXa (ti-n-Xov in the sing, means implement in general), hence oTrXfr^s with
the same derivative ending as in TroXiTTjs from TTO'XIS. — dve'pTj : the change from the historical pres. to the aor. and from aor. to historical pres. is very com- mon.— Tpia,Ko<rCovs : added af- ter the clause is apparently complete, as if it were an after- thought, the number thus re- ceives a certain prominence. A word so added is in fact made the beginning of a new rhetorical group, as we might say in English, " Some Greek soldiers also accompanied him, three hundred in number." In this way a word standing at the end of a clause may be an emphatic one.
11. Ilappdo-iov : Parrhasia was in southwestern Arcadia.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
226. The subjunctive mode has, in principal clauses,1 only three uses, which are all found in Latin.
a. The first person is used to express a request
1 The uses of the subjunctive in subordinate clauses will be described as they occur.
230 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [227—
or proposal (hortative subjunctive) : avaft&nev let us go up.
b. The second and third persons are used with fjuj (not*) in prohibitions, but only in the aorist : prj aOpoicrrjcrOe do not assemble.
c. The first person is used in questions as to what may be done with propriety or advantage (deliberative subjunctive) : ri TTOI&ILGV ; what had we better do f
In each of these uses it is clear that there is some refer- ence to future time ; and in almost all uses of this mode in subordinate clauses as well, the connection and the nature of the situation show more or less of reference to the future. But
227. The tenses of the subjunctive do not mark distinctions of time, but have the following force :
The present denotes an action simply as con- tinued or repeated (at any time) ;
The aorist denotes an action simply as brought to pass (at any time) ;
The perfect denotes an action simply as com- pleted (at any time).
The context alone indicates what time is re- ferred to. Compare 154, a on the infinitive.
228. There is no future subjunctive. Each tense system except the future has a subjunc- tive ; there is no subjunctive imperfect or plu- perfect. '
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
231
229. Subjunctive of \vco (\i>-, \ih).
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE.
|
Pres. S. 1 |
\v-co |
\V-0)-/JLCU |
|
|
2 |
Xz)-?;? |
\v-rj |
|
|
3 |
XU-T; |
\v-rj-rai |
|
|
D.2 |
\V-T]-TOV |
\v-rj-o-0ov |
|
|
3 |
X£-77-TOZ/ |
\V-1)-(T00V |
|
|
P.I |
\V-0)-fJL€V |
\v-a>-tJL€0a |
|
|
2 |
\v~rj-re |
\v-rj-a0€ |
|
|
3 |
\V-GMTI, |
\v-c0-VTat, |
|
|
lAor.S. 1 |
\v-<r<o |
\faa-liM |
\V-00) |
|
2 |
XV-0-779 |
\v-<rrj |
\v-0fjs |
|
3 |
\v-a-rj |
\v-o-rj-rcu |
\v-0fj |
|
D.2 |
\v-a-rj-rov |
\v-<rr)-(T0ov |
\V-0fj-TOV |
|
3 |
Xv-arj-TOV |
\v-a-rj-o-0ov |
\v-0rj-rov |
|
P.I |
\V-(7CO-fJL€V |
\v-crco-fjie0a |
\V-0W- fji€V |
|
2 |
\v-a-rj-re |
\v-a-rj-a-0e |
\v-0rj-re |
|
3 |
\v-a-coa-L |
XWco-i/ra^ |
\v-eauTL |
|
Perf. S. 1 |
\e-\v-fcco |
Xe-Xv-^i/o? & |
|
|
2 |
\€-\v-/crp |
" y<* |
|
|
3 |
\e-\v-Krj |
44 w |
|
|
D.2 |
\e-\v-/crj-rov |
\€-\V-fJL€VCO fJTOV |
|
|
3 |
\e-\v- icy-rov |
44 TITOV |
|
|
P.I |
\€-\V-KQ)-/JL€V |
\e-\V-fJL€VOl &fJL€V |
|
|
2 |
\€-\V-Kr]-T€ |
44 fjT€ |
|
|
3 |
\€'\V-/CCOCTL |
far* |
232 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [230—
230. The mode suffix of the subjunctive is the lengthened variable vowel -%- ; co when the end- ing begins with p or v, elsewhere 77.
a. If the indicative has a tense suffix ending in -%- or a, the corresponding subjunctive puts -%- in place of that vowel. Otherwise the subjunctive adds -%- to the tense stem; a, e, or o contracts with a following •%-.
This amounts to the same thing as saying that the sub- junctive adds -"Iff in /u-tenses, and elsewhere puts -<%,- in place o/the final vowel of the tense stem.
b. But the perfect middle system has only com- pound forms, made up of the perfect middle parti- ciple and the present subjunctive of the verb elfii am.
These forms of ct/xt are easily remembered, because they are exactly like the combined mode suffix and endings of all active subjunctives. The participle is of course declined to agree with the subject.
c. In the aorist passive the passive suffix is -0e- by the rule in 170, d. The accent is according to the rule in 178.
231. The subjunctive takes the primary endings, omitting -/u in the first singular; i subscript is written where the indicative has i.
The subjunctive forms in ^u-tenses, in the second aorist,
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
233
and in contracted presents, are shown in the following para- digms. In the tenses not given, these verbs are like the corresponding tenses of A.VOJ.
232. Subjunctive of
ACTIVE.
(crra-,
MIDDLE (PASSIVE).
|
Pres. S. 1 |
f /•» £-<rro> |
L"O"TO)~LL(tt/ |
|
2 |
/-err?}? |
L~O'T'yj |
|
3 |
l-arp |
hrtfrnu |
|
D. 2 |
l-a-rrj-rov |
l"O"Tll~O'(/OV |
|
3 |
l-CTTrj-TOV |
i~(n"fl~(Tvo v |
|
P. 1 |
i-o-rti-fJiev |
l-(TTci)-/Ji€0a |
|
2 |
i-o-rfj-re |
i-crrrj-a-Oe |
|
3 |
i-arw |
ivT&VTIU |
|
a. In the /xt-aorist |
||
|
Mt-Aor. S. 1 |
(7TO) |
subjunctive the theme |
|
2 |
M |
has the short form ac- |
|
3 |
N |
cording to 170, d. In |
|
tJ |
O-TT; |
both present and fu- |
|
D. 2 |
O"T>77~T"0 1' |
aorist the contraction |
|
3 |
(TTTj-TOl' |
of a-rj is 77, contrary |
|
to 177, (1); but these |
||
|
P. 1 |
(TT&-fJL€V |
forms are easily re- |
|
2 |
o-r^-re |
membered, because |
|
3 |
<7TW-(7fc |
they show the mode |
|
suffix the more plainly. |
234 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [233—
233. Mi-aorist Subjunctive of yiyvwa/co) (71/0-, <yva)-).
|
S. 1 |
yva) |
a. The theme has |
|
2 |
7Z>ft)5 |
the short form accord- |
|
3 |
7^cS |
ing to the rule in 170, |
|
d. The contraction of |
||
|
D. 2 |
yvco-rov |
o-r/ando-cois according |
|
3 |
ryv&-Tov |
to the rule in 182, (2); |
|
P-j |
but 0-77 gives a), con- |
|
|
. 1 |
<yv&-fjL€V |
trary to 182, (3), so that |
|
2 |
ryV&-T€ |
CD appears throughout |
|
3 |
ryVWCTi |
the paradigm. |
234. Aorist Subjunctive of areXXco ((jreX-, crraX-). ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
IstAor.S. 1 2 3
D.2
3
P.I
2 3
<TT€i\-CO
<7T€i\-7)-T€
a-reiK-rj-dOov
235] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
PASSIVE.
235
2d Aor. S. 1
2 3
D.2 3
P. 1 2 3
crraX-Tj-re
a. The subjunctive in the liquid first aorist and in the second aorist passive differs from that of the <ra- aorist and the first aorist passive only in the part that precedes the mode suffix.
235. Second Aorist and Second Perfect Subjunctive of \afjt,/3dvo) (Xa/3-, X?7y8-).
ACTIVE.
MIDDLE.
2d Aor. S. 1 2 3
D. 2 3
P. 1
2 3
Xa/3-w \dfrg
\d/3-rj-(T0ov
\d/3-CO-VTCU
236 THE GHEES: OF XENOPHON.
ACTIVE.
[236—
|
2dPerf.S. 1 |
€l-\7)(p-(*) |
a. The second aorist |
|
2 |
€lr\,Ti<p-'rjs |
subjunctive active and |
|
3 |
middle consists merely |
|
|
€i~ W'V |
of theme, mode suffix, |
|
|
D.2 |
6 t,-\1J <p-7)~TO V |
ending. The second |
|
3 |
€i'\TJ (D-7J-TO V |
perfect subjunctive |
|
differs from the first |
||
|
P.I |
€L~\/n d)~(t)-LL€V |
perfect only in the |
|
2 |
€6-X^</)-77-Te |
part that precedes the |
|
3 |
el-X^-axn |
mode suffix. |
236. Present Subjunctive of vlfcda)
ACTIVE. MIDDLE (PASSIVE).
S. 1 2 3
D.2
3
P. 1
2 3
vlK(a-rf)a-rov w«(a-(»)ft)-/i.6i'
a-co
a. In reading the paradigms, omit the syllable next after the parenthesis to obtain the uncontracted form ; to obtain the contracted form omit the letters in the parenthesis.
The contractions here follow the rule in 177.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
237
237. Present Subjunctive of ^Xeea
ACTIVE. MIDDLE (PASSIVE).
s. i
2 . 3
D. 2
3
P. 1
2 3
a. These contractions follow the rule in 180, (3).
238. Present Subjunctive of SouXo'w (SowXo-). ACTIVE. MIDDLE (PASSIVE).
S. 1 2 3
D. 2
3
P. 1
2 3
So uX (0-779) 06?
SowX (O'-T;) <W-TO z/ So uX ( 0-77) W-TO z^
( 6-ft)) ft)-yLUU
SouX (0-77)0^
SoV\ (0-77)
So v X (o-a>) co-vrat,
a. These contractions follow the rule in 182, (2) and (3).
288 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [239—
239. The verb fya) is so common and has so many pecu- liarities that a full description of it is here given.
a. The theme was originally <r£\- ; initial <r, as in ivrqfju, VTTO, vTrep, CTTTCI (compare Latin sisto, sub, super, septem) was weakened to the rough breathing in some forms, and in others (wherever ^ remained unchanged) was still further weakened to the smooth breathing. This gives the present indicative l^w, etc. The imperfect takes the syllabic aug- ment, remaining from the time when the <r was still pro- nounced ; e-e^-o-v gives by contraction ct^ov.
b. The future !fo> is for l^-o-co, the initial rough breathing being here retained because the aspiration of x disappears in f . The other future, 0^770-0), shows another form of the theme, cr^rj-. €^<o is much more common.
c. The second aorist lo-^ov is for l-cre^-o-v, the theme ap- pearing as (r\-. The subjunctive is cr^to, ar^ys, °"X?f> o"X*7TOV> cryrjTov, crx&fjitv, o^re, cr^wo-t ; the infinitive, o^etv ; the par- ticiple, o-^wv, cr^ovo-a, o-\6v.
d. The perfects ecrxrjKa and toyflnai are regularly formed from the theme o^-; the reduplication is e- only, by the rule in 196, a. There is no aorist passive until a late period, that system being supplied by other verbs.
240. The verb elfit am, of which some forms have already been given, should now be learned in full (except the optative and imperative modes) from H. 4T8, 479, 480; G. 806, 1-3.
Observe that in Tra/oci/u (compounded of Trapa and ct/u) the participle Trapwv retains the accent of the simple verb. In the imperfect Trapfjv, Trapfja-Oa, etc., the accent remains on the rj in accordance with H. 391 b ; G. 133, 1.
241] ANABASIS, /., 7, 3-4. 239
241. Vocabulary.
^
>-,2 KTOV-),
, aireicTeiva, aTreicTova } death. (a?ro + 7re//,7r-, TTO/^^)-), \
re/^^/rct), aTreTreuilra, aTTOTre- [ 7
^r ,' , \send away. a, aTTOTTeTrefjifjiai, a7T€7re/i<p- [
ATV
arladfo (drt/^aS-3), a,Tiu,av<»),\ ,. , ,.
; ^b >_^ I dishonor, dis-
rjri.fjiaa'a* nriLLa/ca* 77Ttua<7uat, >
. - / /, I ^«^-
rjTi/jiacrv'rjv )
Sia/3d\\co (&a + £aX-, /8X^-), S^a-^ slander, bring /3aX<w, S^eySaXoz/, Sta/SeySX^/ca, > iwto discred- SiafteftXrj/jiai,, &i€/3\ij0r)v ) it.
eav? conj. followed by subjv. (jf.
e^aireo) (e^ + aZre-), e^airijcrco, etc., ) J^ o^*, /ree Jy reg., ) entreaty.
77, conj.,
1 For the accent see H. 391 J ; G. 133, 1.
2 Liquid theme ; the present of the iota class, formed like uvco (see 224, note 2).
8 From art/xos unhonored, which is from a privative and honor. The present is of the iota class, the present stem being aTt/Aa£%- for drt/xa8-t%-, 8-t forming £. Cf. a#poi'£a>, which is in like manner derived from the adj. d0/ooos together.
4 Compounded of et z/ and the particle avf which marks the action as contingent.
240 THE 'GREEK OF XENOPBON. [242—
-1), KivSvvevo-co,
Kiv$vv€vco etc., reg., e, adv.,
, -r/>o9 (H. 189; G. 274)
be in danger. (Lat.
7r/>o9, prep. w. ace.,
never.
mother mater).
to, in the pres- ence of.
how?
how.
7rcJ)9,2 interrog. adv.,
O7ree>9, adv., indir. interrog. or in-
def . rel.,
(7v\Xa/ji/3dvQ) (a-vv + \af3-, X?7/3-), ^ (1) take toget Ti~ i, avve\aj3ov, avvei- V er; (2) seize,
i, <Twe\r}<j)9'r]v ) arrest.
T€\€vrdco (reXeura-), r€\€VTtjcra) ) (1) end;
etc., reg., i (2) die.
(^Tro + a/o^-), vTrdpgco, ) begin to be, sub-
\ sist, exist.
242. Anabasis, I., 1, 3-4. 3. 'Evrel &e €T€\€vrrjo-e Aapeto? KOLI Karea-rrj efc rrjv
rov
1. eireC: see 140, I., 3, note on tirel. — KaT€<rr»] ets : entered on, became established in'y cf.
KaTto-Tyo-e 125, I., 6 and note, also 188, II., 2 and note.
2. 8iapdX\€i : how this com-
1 From KiVSuvos danger. Verbs derived from nouns or adjectives, like d^pot^o>, aTtfUi£a), KtvSuveva), 8ovXoa>, reAevrao), are called denominatives.
2 The series TTWS A0w ? OTTWS how, TTWS (enclitic) m some way, cus as, OVTCDS ^ws are correlatives, like TTOTC, TTOTC, rorc,
242]
ANABASIS, Jr., 1, 3-4.
241
Kvpov vrpo? roz; dSe\<f)bv o>9 €7ri/3ov\evei
ireiOerai /cal a-vKKappdvet, Kvpov a>9 dTro/crevwv • 77
avrov aTTOTrefiTrei, ird\iv 5
stituted without changing the meaning. But hi the sentence, "I, not remembering how I cried out then, will cry it o'er again," how is very nearly the same as that. The change of meaning in a; s is the same, but cJs in the sense of 6n is far more common than how in the sense of that. — 6 8^ : but he, that is, the king. A frequent way of beginning a sentence, when there is change of sub- ject, and the new subject is made prominent by the con- text. Cf. 208, I., 16 and note.
4. «s diroKTCvwv : lit., as about to kill him ; that is, apparently to put him to death. The fut. pple. here, as in Latin, denotes purpose, and cJs marks the purpose, not as one of which the writer is certain, but as one which people inferred from Artaxerxes1 words and actions.
5. €£<uTTj<raji£vT| : indir. mid. ; the force of the voice is lost in translation.
pound of $«£ and j3<£XXo> came to have this special meaning is uncertain. Xenophon was a warm admirer of Cyrus and evidently did not believe the story. Plutarch tells us hi his life of Artaxerxes, that Cyrus was accused of planning to kill his brother at the ceremony of coronation. Tissaphernes was doubtless glad to get Cyrus into trouble, but we cannot be cer- tain whether his accusation was true or not.
3. ws : the first instance of cJs in the sense of tfn that. cJs is, in its origin, an adv. of man- ner from the rel. pron. 6s (like /caXws from /caXo's, etc. ; cf. 174, L, 17 and note), and therefore means in what way, as, how. In Shakspere's lines, " There's a divinity that shapes our ends, rough-hew tHem how we will ;" and " How thou pleasest, God, dispose the day," how is the exact equivalent of «'$ in the first sense, and in each sen- tence quoted as could be sub-
ore. Observe that the TTOJ? series, all adverbs of manner, have the same ending with KoAws and other adverbs of manner.
242
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[242—
eirl rr)V ap^rjv. 4. o S' &>? /cal arlfJiacrOels, ftov\€V€TCU, OTTCDS /JLiJTrore CTL earai €7rl TO* aSeX<£<:3, aXXa, eav Svvrjrat^ j3acn\£vcrei, avr eiceivov. Tlapvcrans /Aev Srj rj fAiJTrjp VTrrjpxe rcS 10 Ku/oft), <f>i\ovcra avrbv /taXXoz/ TJ TOV ftacri\evovTa
6 f. a>s dirfiX0€: ws is here temporal, when. As shows a like change of meaning ; for example, "He greeted me as he entered" ; "As mine eyes opened I saw their weapons drawn." — KivSvvevo-ds Kal drt- |iacr0€Ls: English does not use pples. so freely as Greek ; trans- late after being in danger and disgrace.
7. oircos . . . €<TTat : lit., how he shall never again be. This is really an expression of pur- pose; see H. 885; G. 1372.— }i^7roT€: ov expresses negation simply ; /x^ expresses it as willed or as thought of. The same distinction appears in all their compounds. It is evident that a purpose clause expresses something willed / hence a neg- ative clause of purpose always has rf. H. 1018, 1021 ; G. 1610 (2d sentence). Instances of the second use of ^ are seen in /-nj with pples. ; cf. 188, II., 17 and note.
8. €irl T<J a8c\<|>cp : twi with
the dat. often means on, upon, in a figurative or derived sense ; here, dependent on, in the power of. On in the literal sense is more usually, in prose, M with the gen. — &v SVVTJTCU: dvvafjLai is one of three verbs which, though the theme (dwa-) ends in a, have recessive ac- cent in the pres. subjv. The conditional clause refers to fu- ture time, and is viewed as not improbable ; that is, it is of the future, more vivid form. H. 898 ; G. 1403, 1404.
91 8Vj: of course. — virnpx€ T<J> Kvpw : lit., existed for Cy- rus, that is, was on his side, supported Cyrus. * For the ac* cent of vTTTjpxe see H. 391, b ; G. 133, 1. -Ktptf is a dat. of in- terest. H. 767 ; G. 1165.
11. 'ApTale'pfrjv : compara- tives with TJ (like comparatives with quam in Latin) are fol- lowed by the case of the corre- sponding noun before the com- parative. H. 643 and a.
243]
ANABASIS, /., 7, 3-4.
243
243. Translate into Greek.
When Dareios fell sick, Cyrus chanced to be in the province of which Dareios had made him satrap. Accordingly he was summoned, for the king desired to see both his sons before his death. — Let us send for Cyrus, for the king wishes to see him also. — Cyrus wished, before the death of Dareios, to be king ; but Xenophon does not be- lieve that he plotted against his brother, as Tissa- phernes affirmed. — We chanced to be present when some one was slandering the boy. — Do not 10 appoint the young man general, for if the enemy come against him, he will not be able to conquer them and so will be disgraced. — Whom shall we appoint as commander? — If the Persians attempt to enslave Athens, the Greeks will have better 15 generals and more effective soldiers.
See 236,5.
1. feU sick: inceptive aor. dffOevfa. H. 841 ; G. 1260.
— to be: supplementary pple.
2. had made : use the aor.
3. accordingly: remember that otiv is postpositive.
5. Let us send for : horta- tive subjv. in the aor. See 226, a. H. 866, 1 ; G. 1344.
6 ff. Cyrus wished, etc. : the antithesis between the state- ments of the two members of the sentence should be indi- cated by ntv ... 5^.
JO f. Do not appoint: ^
with the aor. subjv. H. 866, 2 ; G. 1346.
11 f . if the enemy come : a condition like &v SUVTJTCU, 242, 8. H. 898 ; G. 1403. As to tense, the aor. is preferable here, since the action is more naturally conceived as merely occurring than as continued.
13 f. "Whom shall we ap- point : deliberative subjv. See 236, c. H. 866, 3 ; G. 1358. — as : omit in Greek.
16. more effective : Kpelr-
244 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
THE OPTATIVE MODE.
[244—
244. The optative mode has, in principal clauses,1 only two uses, both of which belong in Latin to the subjunctive.
a. The optative is used to express a wish that something may happen; this is the use which gives the name to the mode (Latin opto, wish) : e\6oi may he come. Such a wish always refers to future time. H. 870 and d ; G. 1507.
b. The optative is used with av as a less posi- tive expression for the future (or present) indica- tive, and is translated with may, might, would, etc. ; this is called the potential optative: e'X0ot av he would (might) come. H. 872 and b ; G. 1327 ff.
245. The tenses of the optative do not mark distinctions of time, but differ as those of the sub- junctive do (227). Each tense system has an optative, but the future optative has but one use, which will be described later. There is no opta- tive imperfect or pluperfect.
4- 246. Optative of Xva> (Xf-, Xu-).
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE.
|
Pres. S. 1 |
\V-OL-fjLL |
\v-oi-fJLrjv |
|
|
2 |
Xi5-0£-5 |
\V-OL-O |
|
|
3 |
XU-CM |
\V-Oi-TO |
1 The uses of the optative in subordinate clauses will be described as they occur,
THE OPTATIVE MODE. 245
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE.
|
D.2 |
\V-Ol-TOV |
\t-oi-aeov |
|
|
3 |
\ihoi-Trjv |
\v-oi-a6riv |
|
|
P.I |
\V-Ot,-fJi€V |
\v-ol-fjL€0a |
|
|
2 |
\V-OL-T€ |
\v-oi-(T0e |
|
|
3 |
\v-oie~v |
\V-Ol-VTO |
|
|
Fut. S.I |
\V-(70t,-fJL(, |
\v-croi-fJLrjv |
\v-0rj-(TO l-fir) v |
|
2 |
\v-a-oi-? |
\V-(TOl-O |
\V-0T)-(TOi-0 |
|
3 |
\v-aoi |
\V-(TOl-TO |
\v-6rj-aoL-TO |
|
D.2 |
\V'(70l-TOV |
\v-aoi,-(70ov |
\v-0tf-cro i-a-0 ov |
|
3 |
\v-a-oi-Trjv |
\v-croi-cr 6 r)v |
\v-0rj-a-oi-o- 0rj v |
|
P.I |
\lhO- 01-/JL6V |
\V-(TOl-fJL€0a |
\v-0rj-o~o i-/JL€0a |
|
2 |
\V-(TO(,-T€ |
\v-croi-cr6e |
\v-0rj-a oi-dOe |
|
3 |
\V-(TOl€-V |
\V-(TOl-VTO |
\v-0rj-croi-VTO |
|
lAor.S.l |
\v-crai-/jii, |
\t-a-ai-MV |
\v-0elrj-v |
|
2 |
\v-o-eia-s, |
\v-aai-o |
\v-6eifr]-s |
|
\v-a~ai-s |
|||
|
3 |
\v-<T€L€,\v-<rai |
\v-aai-ro |
\v-6ei-rj |
|
D.2 |
\V-CTCU-TOV |
\v-aai-cr0ov |
\v-6el-rov, |
|
\v-6e irj-rov |
|||
|
3 |
\v-(ral-rirjv |
\v-crai-a-0rjv |
\v-0el-Trjv, |
|
P.I |
\V-(TCU-fJL€V |
K«aW |
JSSZT' |
|
2 |
\V-(TCU-T€ |
\V-(7ai-(T0€ |
\V~(/€if]~lli€V ~\i\J~\j€lf~T€^ |
|
3 |
\v-aeia-v, |
\v-aai~VTo |
\v-6ele-V) |
|
Xv-o-atc-v |
Xv-Octrj-crav |
246 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
[247-
|
Perf. S. 1 |
\e-\v-Koi-jJbi, |
\€-\v-fji€VO<? elr)-v |
|
2 |
\e-\v-KOi-s |
" erw-9 |
|
3 |
\€-\V-KOI |
" €irj |
|
D.2 |
\e-\v-KOi-rov |
\€-\V-fJL6VCO el-TOZ/, elt)-TOV |
|
3 |
\e-\v-fco l-rrjv |
ec-TTjv, elrrrnv |
|
P.I |
\e-\v-icoirpev |
\e-\v-fievoi, €i-fJL€V) eirj-^ev |
|
2 |
\e-\v-KOi-re |
" eZ-re, etrf-re |
|
3 |
\6-\v-fcot,e-v |
" €i€-v, efy-crav |
247. The mode suffix of the optative has four forms, -£-, -677-, -£e-, -ia-. These are added to the tense-stem, i forming a diphthong with the pre- ceding vowel. Before this i the variable vowel has the form o, and in the perfect active o is sub- stituted for the a of the indicative tense suffix. The perfect middle has only compound forms, made up of the perfect middle participle and the present optative of efal. H. 478, 479 ; G. 806.
a. The mode suffix is -i- always in the middle, and usually in the active and passive ; but in the third plural before the ending -v it is always -^e-. In the singular of /u-tenses (active, and aorist passive) -irj- is always used ; in the plural of these tenses, -i- or -^7- may be used, but the third plural forms in -lycrav are late.
248]
THE OPTATIVE NODE.
247
b. In the first aorist active the common forms of the second and third singular and the third plural are irregular. The tense suffix here has e instead of a, and the mode suffix is -la- in the second sin- gular and third plural, -ie- in the third singular.
c. The optative takes the secondary endings, but in the first singular active after the mode suffix -L- the ending is -fja (after ~ir)-, however, the ending is -v).
d. For the accent of Xkot, Xtoxu, \vcrat,, \e\v/coi, see EL 102, a and b ; G. 113. The accent of \vOel- TOV, \v6elfjLev, \v6elre, \v6elev is in accordance with the rule that in optatives of the /it-inflection the accent cannot stand back of the mode suffix -6-. H. 388.
The optative forms in /u-tenses, in the second aorist, and in contract presents, are shown in the following paradigms. In the tenses not here given these verbs are like the corre- sponding tenses of Avo>.
248. Optative of um?/u (era-,
ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
Pres.
S. 1 2 3
D.2 3
-(na-Tov or -crrarj-rov
-a-ra-o
l-crral-crOov
248 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [249—
ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
|
P.I |
l-arairrn, l-a-rai^ev |
l-crral-fjieda |
|
2 |
l-arai-re l-araiy-re |
l-aral-crOe |
|
3 |
i-GTaie-V i-o'Tairj-o'av |
l-crrai-VTo |
|
Mt-Aor. S. 1 |
(rralrj-v |
|
|
2 |
/ |
a. In like |
|
3 |
(IT airj |
manner the |
|
D.2 3 |
(rrai-Tov or o-ralrj-rov o-rai-rrjv o-rairj-Trjv |
/xt-aorist opta- tive of /2aiVo> (/3a-, )8av-) is |
|
P.I |
~ ' |
j8a«y-v, /3airj-s, |
|
2 |
aral-re crraLrj-re |
etc. |
|
3 |
(7Tai€-V CTTairj-vav |
249. Optative of jiyvmcncco (71*0-, °/va)-~).
ACTIVE.
Mt-Aor. S. 1 2 3
D.2 3
P.I
2 3
ryvo-rov or
ryvoi-rrjv
ryvoi-/jiev
yvorj-re
250]
THE OPTATIVE NODE.
249
250. Optative of o-re'XXo) (o-reX-, 0-raX-). ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
IstAor.S. 1
2
D.2
3
P.I
2 3
oreiX-ai
0-rctX-atc-v
erretX-at-ro <TT€i\-ai,-(rdov
ffT€t,\-ai-fieda <TT€i\-ai-cr0e
PASSIVE.
2d Aor. S. 1 2 3
D.2 3
P.I
2 3
or
<7TO,\-€L-fjL€V <TTa\-€L-T€
250
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[251—
251. Optative of
ACTIVE.
(\ay8-, X??/?-). MIDDLE.
2dAor. S. 1 2 3
D. 2 3
P. 1 2 3
Xay8-ot \aj3-ol-T7jv
\d/3-OL-T€
Xa/3-ot-ro
\df3-oi-crdov
Xa/3-o i-<T0r]v
\a/3-oi-/Ji€0a
\djS-ot-o-6e
\d/3-oi-vro
2dPerf.S. 1 2 3
D. 2 3
P.I 2 3
252. Present Optative of vl/cdco (mica-*). ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
s.i
2 3
V~uc(a-Ol)<p
vl/c (a-o /) w vl/c(d-oi)q)~o
253]
THE OPTATIVE NODE. 251
ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
D. 2 3
P. 1
2 3
vlic (a-o L)O)-TOV VLK (a-o C)(p-Triv
(a-o i ) GO-O- 0rj v
253. Present Optative of <f>i\ea)
ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
s. i
2 3
D. 2 3
P. 1
2 3
^t\(e-oi)owy-1' or e-ot')oM/-? or <f>i\(_e-oC).ofa) or
€-0 0 -
252
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[254—
254. Present Optative of Sov\dco (SouXo-). ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
s. i
2 3
D. 2 3
P. 1
2 3
Soi>X(o-o/)o/?7-z> or So v\ (0-01)0/77-9 or SouX(o-o')o/?7 or
Sou X (o-o t ) o t-fjLrjv
SouX (o-ot) ol-vro
255. ^N"o further special vocabularies will be given; henceforth the learner should look for new words at the end of the book. Further, on each lesson the learner should make out for himself, from the general vocabulary, a list on the model of the special vocabularies hitherto given, though it is not necessary to put the words in alphabetical order. This list should contain all words, with their meanings, which the pupil was obliged to look up, and should be thor- oughly committed to memory, so that the English can be given from the Greek or the Greek from the English, aloud. By following this plan on every lesson, it will be found that one's vocabulary is rapidly increasing, until a whole page will furnish a shorter list than a single section did at first. In learning such lists, one should always associate together words which are related in derivation or meaning.
256]
ANABASIS, I., 2, 5-7.
253
256. Anabasis, L, 1, 5-7.
5. f/O(7T£9 8' a^HKvelro r&v irapa y8a<r£\e&)9 TT/OO? Trdvras ovra) SiarcOel? aTreTre/XTrero
coare
avrcp fjia\\ov <f)i\ov$ eLvai 77 eaurft) Se /3ap/3dpcov ifcavol elriaav /cal evvoiK&s
1. &O-TIS : learn H. 280 and a ; G. 425-427. — TWV irapd pa<ri\€ws : lit. of those from the king ; the motion expressed in d<J>lKveiTo leads the Greek to use with irapd the case which will continue to suggest the same motion from the king ; English idiom would lead us to expect rCov irapa /SacriXe?, and we should translate of those at court. /Sao-tXetfs, when used of the king of Persia, regularly omits the article, being thought of almost as a proper name.
2. SiariGcis : for $ia-ri-0e-j>T-s, pres. act. pple. nom. sing. masc. of 5ia-Tl0t)iJLL dispose (Lat. dis- pono), bring into a certain dis- position. — dir€ir^ir€TO : indir. mid., sentfaom himself, let go. Note that the rel. clause pre- cedes the antec. irdvras, as is more often the case in both Greek and Latin ; also that 5ta- riOels is more prominent than direTr^fjLTreTo. We should say rather, brought them all into such a disposition before dis- missing them. It was part of
irap
ft>9 7roXe/*,e£i> re ejfoiev avTu>. 6. rrjv
his plan to win over to his cause as many nobles and cour- tiers as he could. The imperf. here, as in d</>t/cvetro, denotes repetition of the act.
3. avrcp : dat. with </>fXous. H. 765; G. 1174. — ctvai: werre denoting result takes the in- die, or the inf. H. 927 ; G. 1449, 1450.
3 f. Kal Ttav trap' CCLVTW Sc
since 5^ is the conj., must here be an adv. irap* lit. beside him, that is, at his court, dt is farther than usual from the beginning of the clause. The gen. is governed by <?7re/xeXerTo. H. 742 ; G. 1102.
4 f . <os . . . €iT](rav, . . . k'xoicv : for the opt. see H. 881 ; G. 1362, 1365. Xenophon is fond of als to introduce purpose clauses; other Attic prose writers em- ploy ws very rarely in this way. See vocab. under ws. — evvotKws €\oi€v: equivalent to evvol'Kol et^ffav. £xw with an adv. frequently has the force of dpi with an adj. See vocab. under exw.
254
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[256—
eSvvaro
OTTCD? on, aTrapacTKevdrarov \d(3oi, J3a<ri\ea. a>8e ovv eTTOielro rrjv <rv\\oy)jv. oTrocra? eZ^e (f>v\a,Ka$ ev rat? ir6\€crt, 7raptfyyei\€ rot? </>pov- 10 pdp^ot,? e/cdo-Tois \apl3dvew avSpas
6 f . a>s . . . €irncp\nrr6ji,€vos :
lit. concealing himself as he most could ; that is, as secretly as he could. Cf. 188, I., 11. From such phrases as cJs / Xicrra t5vva.ro arises, by omis- sion of the form of 5wa/xcu, the practice of using ws and 6'n with the sup. to denote the highest possible degree of a quality. So 8n airoipaffKCvb TOV (7) as unprepared as possi- ble, STL ir\€t(7Tovs /cat /SeXr/trrous (11) as many and brave as pos- sible.
7. oircos : here used like ws, as often in Xenophon, to intro- duce a purpose clause. The common prose word for this is Iva. — XdjSoi : cf. efytrav, exoiev (5) and note.
8. «8€: thus, referring to what follows; adv. of manner from 85e this, as ourws is the adv. of manner from OVTOS this, that. Learn H. 271, 272 and c ; G. 409. ode = Lat. hie} OVTOS = Lat. is, ^60/0$ = Lat. ille. — &TTOI- €iro : indir. mid. — 6ir6<rds : in- def. rel. pron. corresponding to trot (see 225, 8); H. 282; G.
429 ; in the table the iroffbs, T0(r6<rde, TOVOVTOS, 3<ro5, 6ir6(ros. It is easier to remem- ber these common words if one groups them together, noting carefully their likeness and un- likeness in form and meaning. In this sentence observe that again the rel. clause precedes the antec. Lit. how many gar- risons he had in the cities, he ordered the commandants each to take, etc. We should re- verse the order of the clauses, and say, he ordered the com- mandants of all the garrisons, which he had, etc.
10. avSpas : from dv/ip. Learn the declension of iraT-fjp,
TTTJp, 6vy&TT)p, CLV7)p. H. 188,
189 ; G. 274, 1 ; 278. At the close of the Peloponnesian war, 404 B.C., large bodies of men, especially Peloponnesians, who had spent many years in a sol- dier's life, were thrown out of the employment to which they were most accustomed. They were ready, therefore, to hire themselves out to any one who would pay them and give them
256]
ANABASIS, /., 7, 5-7.
255
OTI 7r\e/(TTOU9 fcal /8e\T/a*TOf99 ft>9 Tt,<r<7a<j>epvov<; rals 7ro\ecn. KOI jap rjcrav at 'Icovt,- KCLI 7roXe£9 Ticro-acfrepvovs TO ap^alov, e/c ftacriXecos SeSoytteW^, TOT€ S' afaicrTtf/cecrav 777309 Kvpoz/ Tracrat,
those opportunities for plunder which accompanied war. Thus it was easy for Cyrus and his lieutenants to get together large mercenary forces of Greeks, whom he knew to be far better soldiers than the Persians, not only in equipment and tactics, but above all in courage, intel- ligence, and fidelity.
11. irX€(<TTOvs: sup. of TTO- Xvs; H.254, 5; G.361,8. — ws: has here, with ^Trt/SouXeuo^ros, a force to which there is no an- alogy in English. It indicates that the statement in &ri/3ou- Xeuovros Tt<T(ra<t>£pvovs is given, not as the writer's, but as made by some one else ; who that is we are to infer from the con- text ; in this case Cyrus. cJs with the pple. very often has this effect, marking the pple. as hi a sort of indir. discourse. Render, asserting that Tissa- phernes, etc. The gen. abs. here denotes cause.
12. teal -ydp : a frequent com- bination, like Lat. etenim. Or- iginally the expression involved an ellipsis, as, and (he could reasonably give this excuse) for; but the omitted clause
was not usually thought of dis- tinctly, and it would be clumsy to supply it in Eng. It is gen- erally best, therefore, to leave that and the Kal to be under- stood, translating only the ydp. — rjo-av : the effect of the posi- tion may be given by translat- ing : belonged in fact to Tissa- phernes originally.
13. Tur<ra4>^pvovs : pred. gen. denoting possession. — rd dpxaiov: neut. adj. used ad- verbially (H. 719 and 6; G. 1060), about equiv. to # dpxfjs (188, I., 2). — IK Pcuri\&>s: lit. from the king, instead of the more usual vir6 /3a<rt\^w$.
14. 8e8ofj.€vaL : from dtSufu. Even without knowing the full conjugation, the formation of this word is clear when it is seen that do- is the theme ; cf . \e-\v-ptvai. The passage shows that these Greek cities along the coast were not included in Cyrus's satrapy, but remained subject to Tissaphernes. They knew they would be better treated by Cyrus, and it was for his interest to have control of the seacoast. Perhaps he had stirred them up to revolt.
256 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [256—
15 7T\rjv MF\T;TOU • 7. ev MZX?;rou Se Ticro'atyepvrjs irpo- aiaQo^VQ^ ra avra ravra /3oiA,euo///eVou9, arKOdfrr\vai v, TO t/9 ///ez/ aTrercreive rou9 8* e%efta\ev. o Se / TOU9 <f)€vyovras crvX\e^d^ crrpdrev^a €7ro\c6p/c€i M.i\r)TOv /cal /cara ryrjv Kal Kara daXarrav 20 Kal €7T€ipdTo Kardj€LV TOU9 eKTreTTTcoKoras. Kal avrrj
av aXX?;
rjv
rov aOpoi^
16. TO, avrd raOra : obj. of the following pple. ; pi. because the Greek conceived of the re- volt as made up of many sepa- rate acts. We conceive of it rather as a whole, and should use the sing. — povXcvojicvovs : supplementary pple. agreeing with the understood obj. of Trpoaurebnevos. H. 980, 982 ; G. 1578, 1582. — diroo-Tfjvai : in apposition with rd atrd.
17. TOVS fxev, TOVS B€ : cf . 174, I., 12, and see H. 654 ; G. 981.
18. v-iroXapcov: taking un- der his protection. — TOVS <j>cv- •yovras: in most Greek cities revolutions occurred often, and were generally followed by the banishment of leading mem- bers of the defeated party. Hence exiles, endeavoring to get back home by one means or another, were familiar fig- ures in Greek life everywhere, and there were several com- mon expressions to denote men in that situation. The pple.
used as a noun, was one such term.
20. Kard-yctv : the verb reg- ularly used of one who restored such exiles to their homes, as /car^pxo/xat was regularly used of the exiles themselves who re- turned ; Kard in both verbs has come to mean practically to their homes. — CKireirrcoKOTas : the syl- lables -K6ras mark the word as a perf .act. pple. in the ace. pi. mas. It is from ^/cTrt7rrco,usedvirtually as the pass, of e/c/3dXXw, and is another common term for exiles.
21. irpo<t>ao-is : without the article, therefore avrrj does not agree with it directly (see H. 673 ; G. 974), hence irpt><t>a<ns is ^predicate noun. H. 669 ; G. 956. avTT] is attracted to the gender of the predicate noun. H. 632, a. Translate freely, in this, again, he had, etc. — TOV: shows that the clause d6pol£eiv (rrpdrevfjia is a noun in the gen. depending on irp6(f>a(rLs ; we should say, pretext for gathering an army.
258]
THE
MODE.
257
THE IMPERATIVE MODE.
257. The imperative represents the action as commanded : Xeye speak. There is an imperative in every present and aorist system, and in the per- fect when that denotes a continued state. The perfect middle so often has this force that it regu- larly makes an imperative ; the perfect active has one in comparatively few verbs.
a. The distinction in meaning between the pres- ent and aorist imperative is the same as in the subjunctive and optative (see 227, 245). By its nature, a command in any tense necessarily refers to future time.
258. Imperative of \VCD (Xv-, \u-).
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE.
|
Pres. S. 2 3 |
\V-€ \V-e-TG) |
\v-ov \v-e-a-0a) |
|
|
D.2 3 |
\V-€-TOV \v-e-rwv |
\v-e-cr0ov \V-€-(T0a)V |
|
|
P. 2 3 |
\V-€-T€ \v-6-VTC0v or Av-e-Toxrai/ |
\v-e-crOe \v-e-cr6 (ov or Xv-€-<r0<j)(rcLv |
|
|
lAor.S. 2 3 |
\v-aov \v-crd-TO) |
\v-crai \v-o-d-a0a) |
\V-01J-Tl, \V-0rj-TG) |
258 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [259—
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE.
|
lAor.D.2 3 |
\v-aa-Tov \v-<rd-TO)v |
\v-cra-cr0ov \v-ad-a-0a)V |
\v-0rj-rov \V-0tf-TCOV |
|
P. 2 3 |
\v-ara-T€ \v-ad-vrci) v or \v-(ra-T(ticrav |
\v-cr a-(70€ \v-a- d-(T0a)V or Xv-o'd-o'Owcrav |
\v-0rj-re \v-0e-VTC0v or Xv-Orj-T<J)<TCLV |
|
Perf. S. 2 3 |
\€-\V-(70 \€-\V-(T0CO |
||
|
D.2 3 |
\4-\v-crOov \€-\V-(T0Q)V |
||
|
P. 2 3 |
\€-\V-<T0€ \€-\v-(T0a)v or \e-\v-crOa)<Tav |
259. Imperative of ACTIVE.
(o-ra-, <rrr)-). MIDDLE. PASSIVE.
|
Pres. S. 2 |
lorn |
i-crra-ao |
|
|
3 |
l-o-rd-ra) |
l-(TTd-a-0a> |
|
|
D.2 |
i-ara-Tov |
i/~(frc(/~&t/ov |
|
|
3 |
l-o-rd-TW |
l~&TCL'~O?\sCt)V |
|
|
P. 2 |
i-ara-Te |
i'O-Ta-o-06 |
|
|
3 |
l-crrd-VTCov or |
l-(TTd-cr0a)v or |
|
|
t-crra-Tcocrav |
i-a-Td-o-Oaxrav |
260] THE IMPERATIVE MODE. 259
ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE.
IstAor.S. 2 3
a-rrj-crov
<TT7]-(rd-TG)
etc., as in AT; d>.
etc.
ard-Orj-Ti
-Olj
etc.
M*-Aor.S. 2 3
D.2 3
P. 2
3
(7T1-TOi)
(TTT^TOV (TTIJ-TCQV
M*-Perf.S.2 3
D.2 3
P. 2 3
e-crra-ra)
e-ara-Tov e-o-rd-rcov
e-o-ra-re
260. The formation of the imperative is best seen in the /u-tenses. The imperative has no mode suffix, but takes personal endings which are in part different from those of the other finite modes; these distinguish the forms clearly enough.
260 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [260—
a. The imperative endings are :
Active. Middle.
So 2 -0i -era
3 -TO) -(700)
D. 2 -TOP -<r0ov
3 -TG)l> -(T0a)V
P. 2 -re -<70e
3 -VTCOV (-Toxrav) -(r0(DV (-crtfaxrav)
The endings -roxjai/ and -crtftocrav are not found in Attic until a late period.
b. The endings are added to the tense stem as it appears in the indicative (of course without augment). Variable- vowel stems have -o- before -VTW, elsewhere -e-.
c. After the variable vowel, -61 is dropped ; -o-o loses o- between vowels, and e-o contract to -ov. In /it-presents -0i is omitted and the stem vowel lengthened. In the first aorist passive -0i become -TL after -#?;-, to prevent two successive syllables from beginning with an aspirate.
d. In //,£-aorists, active voice, and in the aorist passive (which has active endings), the stem vowel is long before one consonant, short before two. Of. 170, d.
e. The first aorist second singular active and middle are irregular, and the explanation un- known.
/. Instead of the first perfect of timy/u is found
THE IMPERATIVE MODE.
261
a second perfect of the pi-form, or /u-perfect, with- out tense suffix. It consists of the reduplicated theme, in the short form, with the ending un- changed. It means be standing, etc.
Other common forms of the imperative are shown in the following paradigms.
261. Mi-Aorist Imperative of yiyvcoo-fco) (fyvo-, yvco-).
S. 2 3
D. 2 3
P. 2 3
ryvco-rcov
7Z/W-T6
or yvo>-Ta)<rav
262, Aorist Imperative of crreXXa) (o-reX-, <rraX-). ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE.
S. 2 3
D.2
3
P. 2 3
<7T€t\-a-TO)
crretX-a-Tov
crre/X-a-re (TT€i\-d-VTa)v or OTeiA-a-rcocrav
crretX-a-cr$ft> ffreC\-a-<rdov
<TT€i\-a-(70€
G"r€L\-d-cr6wv or (rretX-a-cr^cacrav
(TTa\-e-VTC0v or <TTaX-i7-TO)crav
262 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [263—
263. Second Aorist Imperative of \anf$dvc0 (Xa/3-,
ACTIVE.
MIDDLE.
|
S. 2 3 |
Xa/3-e Xa/3-e-ra) |
Xa/3-oO Xa/3-e-cr#a> |
|
D. 2 3 |
Xa/3-e-roz/ Xay8-e-Tft>z/ |
\d/3-e-(T0QV \a/3-e-(70ct)v |
|
P. 2 3 |
Xa/3-e-re \a/3-6-vrcov or Aa^-e-raxrav |
Xa/3-e-a-(9€ \ap-e-<T0a)v or Xa/3-€-crOoio-av |
a. The second aorist imperative second singular accents the end of the stem (1) regularly in the middle : \af3ov (for Xa/3-e-cro) ; (2) in five active forms, of which e'X0-e and Xa^S-e are two. (The others belong to verbs that have not yet occurred in this book.)
264. Present Imperative of m/cdo) (vl/ca-). ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
S. 2 3
D. 2 3
vlic (a-e) d-a~0a)
vl/c (a-e ) a-a dco v
266] THE IMPERATIVE MODE. 263
ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
P. 2 3
vlfc(a-6^)(i)-VTCov or viK(a-e) a-raxrav
vlK(a-e)a-cr6<i)v or
265. Present Imperative of <f)i,\eco
ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
S. 2 3
D. 2
3
P. 2 3
) et-raxrav
266. Present Imperative of Sov\dco (SouXo-). ACTIVE. MIDDLE.
S. 2 3
D. 2
3
P. 2 3
Bov X (o-e ) ou-rct) Sou X(o-e) ov-rov
o\)uX(o-o/)ov-z>T&>z> or SovX ( o-e) ov-ro)crav
SouX(o-e) OV-CT0Q)
Sov\(6-e)ov-a0ov
Sov\(d-e)ov-(r06 §ov\(o-e)ov-crO(DV or 8ovX(o-€)
264
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[267—
267. Perfect Middle Imperative of Consonant Themes.
<rr
, 0-raX-) .
S. 2 3
D. 2
3
P. 2 3
e-<7raX-<7o
€~(TTa\r00V
€-<TT(i\-6a)V or
Tre-Trela-ffcov or
vct) (Xa/3-, XTyyS-) .
S. 2 3
D. 2 3
P. 2 3
el-\r}<l)-6tt>v or
or Se-Set^-^axrav
a. The euphonic changes in the imperative are the same as those in the indicative; see 215, 217, 220, 196, b, (1).
268. The entire conjugation of the regular verb has now been given, except the future perfect (which does not occur often and is very simple), the verbals, and some less com-
268] THE IMPERATIVE MODE. 265
mon forms of icrrrjfu. The learner should now accustom himself to grouping the forms of each verb in complete syn- opses, similar to those already given in this book, but with the subjunctive, optative, and imperative added. Let Avo> be taken as the first model, H. 313 ; G. 474. For the future perfect middle, see H. 318 (p. 89), 466 and a; G. 474 (p. 97 at the bottom) and 703. For the verbals, see H. 475 ; G. 776. (The future perfect and the verbals need not be insisted upon until they are met in reading.) Next the synopsis of £cm//u should be taken in hand, omitting for the present the second perfect forms, except in the imperative, H. 351; G. 509. For the peculiar future perfect active in this verb, see H. 467 ; G. 705. Note that the tense called in this book fu-aorist is called in the Grammars second aorist of the pi-form. This longer designation amounts to the same thing ; but it seems unnecessary to add the word second, and the shorter term, while equally descriptive and more convenient, avoids confusion with the totally different second aorists like IAa- /3ov. (If Goodwin's Grammar is used, it will be necessary for the teacher to assist in making out the synopsis of to-TT/^t.) Next may be taken SCIKVU/U, H. 352 ; present system, £1. 332. (If Goodwin's Grammar is used, it will again be necessary for the teacher to assist in making out the synopsis.) To these may be added i/t/cao> on the model of rlfjuio), H. 337 ; <£tAeco and Trote'to, H. 339 ; SovA.oo> and 877X60), H. 341 ; crrcAXa), H. 342 ; TretUo, H. 347. (These synopses are not given in G., but can easily be made out for the class by the teacher.) Next Aa//,/3avo> and other common verbs should be written out in the same way; for it is of great importance that each verb should be clearly understood, in its formation, as a whole. It is worth while to spend enough time in review at this point to accomplish that end, the details of the review naturally varying according to the cir- cumstances of the class,
266 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
Also in reading the remaining sections of the Anabasis in this book, care should be taken not to read too fast, due regard being paid to the number of new words occurring and the amount of grammatical work involved. For a con- siderable time to come, alongside of the task of learning new words, it is important that the pupil should gradually be systematizing his knowledge of grammar, grouping to- gether, whenever possible, what were first learned as isolated facts; only thus can grammatical facts and principles be held in such form as to be of practical use. Hints to this end will be given in the notes ; but a large amount of read- ing must be done before the end can be fully reached. Set reviews of the declensions and conjugations in the Grammar used by the class will of course be necessary ; but the exact time and amount of this review will vary with different classes, and are best left to the judgment of the teacher.
269. Translate into Greek.
Arrest the man and put him to death, for he has plotted against the king. — Let us go away and consider how we may never again be thus dis- graced.— Let us give our attention to the sol- diers, that they may be both capable of making
1. Arrest . * . put to death :
use the aor. impv. The rule for exceptional accent of Xa/3<? does not apply to compounds ; the accent in both impvs. of this sentence is recessive.
2. Let us go away, etc. : hortative subjv.
3. never: since the nega- tion is here willed,
be used instead of OUTTOTC. H. 1018, 1021 ; G. 1610.
4. Let us give our atten- tion to : express by one word, which governs the gen.
5. that they may be, etc. : since this purpose clause does not depend upon a past tense, the mode to be used is the subjv., H. 881 j G. 1365,
ANABASIS, I., 1, 5-2
267
war and friendly to the city. — May lie never again be in danger. — He would never again be in danger. — We had many garrisons in the cities, but all revolted to the enemy. — They are plan- ning how they can revolt to the enemy. — When 10 Cyrus was arrested, and was about to die, his mother begged him off. — Let them collect the Greek force as secretly as they can, that we may catch the king as unprepared as possible.
this sentence expressed by ov- Trore.
8 f. We had ... but aU revolted : the Greek would mark the contrast by pkv . . . 9*.
10. how they can: use
6 f . May he ... be : a wish, therefore hi the opt. H. 870 ; G. 1507. A wish is always an expression of will; hence the neg. in a wish must be ^. H. 1020 ; G. 1610, end.
7. He would never, etc. :
use the potential opt., with the particle &v. This word &v can- not be separately translated into Eng. ; it is always post- positive, and is inclined to stand after some rather prominent word ; a favorite position is after a negative. Never is in
the fut.
12. Let them collect: use
the impv., with the idiom seen in 256, 6 f. ; the pple. here must be plural.
13 f . that we may catch : present purpose ; therefore the subjv.
270. Anabasis, I., 1, 8-11.
8TT ^ 5*\/O "v ' "" f ' f* ^
. 11/009 oe pacrtXea TrefiTrwv rj^iov
avrov SoOrjvcu ol ravras ra9 7r6\ei,$ fia\\ov rj
1. riJCov : from the meaning but these two must be carefully
deem worthy or fitting is devel- distinguished from <?/owrdw. —
oped the meaning ask as proper wv : which use of the pple. ? or fair, as here. In this use 2. SoOfjvcu: without knowing
differs little from a^T^w, the full inflection of dldufu one
268
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[270—
avTO)V) /cai i] jjujriyp crvveTrparrev ravra • ware ftacri\€v<$ rrjv /j,ev Trpb? eavrov 5 €7Ti/3ov\r)v OVK rjcrOdvero, ^icraafyepvei Se TroKefJLOVVTa avrov a/Ji^l ra arparev/juara W(JT€ ovSev ij^Oero avr&v 7ro\€/j,ovvra)V. Kal jap 6
can easily distinguish the three elements of do-Orj-vai,, and see that it is an aor. pass. inf. The clause dodTjvai . . . ir6\eis is the obj. of ii&ov. — ol : learn the de- clension in H. 261, third col.; G. 389, third col. The forms o 5, of, 2, <r<}>lcrL are enclitic, but ol is here accented because emphasized by the contrast with Ti<r<ra<j>{p- vf\v. In Attic prose this pron. is always reflexive. H. 685 ; G. 987. eaury might have been used instead. — ravrds : note the position. H. 673 ; G. 974.
3. apx«iv avrwv: the pres. tense denotes continuance : should continue to rule them. The passage shows that these cities were still nominally a part of Tissaphernes' prov- ince. We receive a vivid im- pression of the looseness of the" king's authority, when two governors and their subjects could carry on such a war with- out interference from the king, while each was appealing to him for support.
3 f. crvWirpaTT€v avr<5 ravra: lit. was doing these things with
him; that is, was acting with him in this. For atfry, see H. 775; G. 1179.
4. irpos lavrov : has the same force with tirLpov^v which the simple dat. has with ^Tri/SoiAetfo;.
5 f. Ticr<ra<|>€pv€i Tro\ep.ovv- ra: phrase contrasted with T^V Trpbs eavrov eTri/SouX^v, this con- trast being marked by ptv and §<?. To give due prominence in English to these phrases, we should put them at the end of their respective members, trans- lating in the order: /3a<riXei)s otf/c 'QffOdvero TTJV . . . ^TTL^OV\I^V and avrbv dairavdv d/x0i rd
This natural Eng. order would be bad Greek order, because it would suggest a false empha- sis; it is given only to make clear the difference. — €v6|u£€ : this verb takes a dependent inf. with subj. ace. The synopsis of the entire verb is like that of Kofdfa H. 348.
7. ov5ev: learn the declen- sion of efs and ovdels and wdets, H. 290 and a; G. 375, 378. While eft has the circumflex,
270]
ANABASIS, I., 1, 8-11.
269
Kupo? a7T€7re/i7re rot>9
9. aXXo Se <TTpdr€v/jLa aurcS o-ui/eXeyero ez> Xeppo- 10 /car' avrnrepas 'A/36Sou roVSe TOZ> rpoirov. Aa/ceScu/Jidvios cfrvya? rjv • TOUTO) crvyyevo-
5 and note. e?xe would here express all that is intended. Tvyxd™ with pple. is some- times a mere circumlocution for a form of the verb to which the pple. belongs.
10. avrw : dat. of advan- tage. H. 762, 766, 767 ; G. 1157, 1165.
11. KttT* avTiirlpds : a phrase with the force of a single prep., like our equivalent over against. — rov8€ TOV Tp6irov: for posi- tion of r6vde, cf. ratfras, 2 and note. For syntax of rpbirov, see H. 719 and a ; G. 1060.
12. <|nryds: in Anab. II., 6 Xenophon describes the char- acter of Klearchos and tells why he was exiled. In 408 B.C., when commanding for the Spar- tans in Byzantium (now Con- stantinople), he treated the people with such harshness that they surrendered the town to the Athenians to get rid of him. After the close of the Peloponnesian war the Spartan authorities sent him to Thrace to protect the Greek colonists there from the native tribes,
oiidels and /x?7$e/s have the acute ; otherwise the compounds are accented like forms of els. ou5^i> is in the adverbial ace. denot- ing degree, with faO*™- H. 719 and 6 ; G. 1060. — avrwv iro\€- jiovvTuv : at their being at war / gen. abs. denoting cause. H. 970, 971 and a ; G. 1568 ; 1563, 2. — Kal -yap: the ellipsis here might be thus supplied: and (there was another reason) for, etc. But the effect is best re- produced in Eng. by saying, besides, Cyrus kept sending, etc. This leaves the causal relation to be understood.
8. -yi-yvo^vovs : accruing, coming due. — f3a<ri\€i : with TT^/XTTW the person is often ex- pressed by the simple indir. obj., although Lat. mitto re- quires the ace. with a prep.
9. «v: attracted from the ace., as obj. of €%wj/, to the case of its antec. close beside it. Such attraction occurs fre- quently. H. 993, 994 ; G. 1019, 1031. — Turcra4>€'pvox>s : posses- sive gen. with <Sv. — €Tv<yxav€v 6X«v : cf. iroipwv Myxav€i 225,
270
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[270—
o K0p09 rj^dcrdt] re avrov KOI StfotHriV avrq) fjivpiov? Sdpei/covs. 6 Se \a/3o»v TO %pvalov crrpd- 15 rev/Act crvve\e%ev OLTTO TOVTCOV rwv xprj/jidrcov /cal
€7TO\€/JL€i €K XeppOVlJOTOV 6 p fJid) fJb€V 0$ Tofc ®pOL^l TO£9
VTrep cE\\ijcr7rovTov olfcovcri KOI a)(f>e\€(, rov? f/EXX?;-
vas • &(7T€ /cal xptj/AaTa crvv€/3d\\ovTO avrfi 6/9 rrjv
rpocfrrjv r&v <TTpaTio)Twv at 'TfiXXTja-TTOvTiatcal 7roXe^9
20 e/covcrai. rovro S' av OVTCD rpe^ofievov e\dv6avev
but recalled him before he had left Greece. He refused to obey, and for this disobedience was banished. Yet he was an able soldier, and soon became the virtual leader of the Greeks in the expedition with Cyrus.
13. T)-ycur0Ti: inceptive aor. H. 841 ; G. 1260.
14. (xvpCovs SdpciKovs : about $54000, but worth -several times as much as that sum now in purchasing power. Such a present was not given out of mere personal affection. Doubt- less Cyrus came to some un- derstanding with him even thus early, to the effect that Klear- chos was to get together an army and hold it in readiness for service with Cyrus later. — 6 U : cf . 6 5<? 242, 3 and note.
15. diro . . . \pi\}ia,T<t>v : lit. from this money, where our idiom leads us to expect a dat. of means, which also would be correct here.
16. liroXIjtti : notice the change of tense : was now car- rying on war. — 0po££ : dat. of association. H. 772 ; G. 1175. We also say fight with, as well as fight against.
17. w<|>4\6i: notice the ac- cent.
18. KaC : with xp^ara has almost the effect of &\\a xp^~ fjLara. — <rvv€poX.XovTO : subjec- tive mid. H. 814; G. 1244.— avrtp : dat. of advantage.
18 f. els TTJV Tpo^-fjv: ex- presses purpose, like Lat. ad or in with the ace.
20. €Kov<rai: pred. adj. in agreement with the subj., to be rendered by an adv. H. 619 ; G. 926. For position, cf. r/ua- KOO-LOVS 225, 10 and note. — rpc- <(>6jx€vov: supplementary pple. agreeing with the subj. of t\dv- Oave. Cf. Myxav€J/ *X(av 9 and note. From our point of view the pple. here seems to contain the main thought, and
270]
ANABASIS,
, 8-11.
r (Trprev/jua.
10.
Se
VTTO
TWV OLKOi a.VTl(TTa<TitoTO)V €p%€TCU 7T/909 TOI>
Kal alrel avrov els §ia")(iKlov<s %evov<$ /cat rpi&v
fJLTJV&V /M(T0dV) ft>9 OVTCO 7T6piy€v6lJL€VOS UV TWV 2$
we should translate, was being secretly supported.
21. TO <TTpdT€vfia: might have been omitted, since rouro plainly refers back to &\\o o-rpdrevfjia 10 ; inserted, in the least prominent place in the sentence, merely to cut off all chance of misunderstanding.
23. oteoi : has the force of an adj. In the same way we say, his opponents at home.
24. ds : with a number often means about. Yet it is more likely that one would ask for pay for troops than that one would ask for so large a body of troops themselves. It is not probable that Cyrus could or would lend so large a force, but he could easily give a large sum of money with which to raise the force ; and that would aid Cyrus later still more. Therefore it is better to take els as in els r^v Tpo^v 18. The translation then is, pay for 2000 mercenaries and for three months. — glvovs : the term JJLL- (rOuroL (hirelings, fr. /u<r06s) was so blunt a recognition of
the tie between mercenary troops and their employer that it was not a pleasant word to use to such soldiers ; people have always recognized a dif- ference between one who fights from love of country and one who fights for pay. Therefore such troops were more often euphemistically called #wi, men bound by a tie of hospitality to him who supported them. — rpiwv : declined H. 290 ; G. 375.
25. 0>S OVTCD TT€pl'y€v6}UVOS
av: more concise expression for \tywv tin ovTkj TrepiytvoiTO SLV. For the force of w's, cf. w's tTTipovXetovTos 256, 11 and note. Here it is Aristippos whose statement is thus indirectly quoted. The i of irepL does not suffer elision ; hence in the impf. ind., irepu-yLyvbwv. Note also that irepL- here has the force of beyond, as in the phrase
irepl Travrbs £TTOL€ITO 188, I., 7. &v is used with an inf. or pple. when a finite verb in its place would take &v. Here irepLyevb- fievos &v stands for a potential opt. H. 861, 872 ; G. 1308, 1327.
272
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[270—
6 Be KD£>09 Sl&oHTiv avTto et9 rerpa- teal e£ /Jirjvwv {JLiaOdv, teal &€ircu avrov fjurj Trpoa-Oev KaraKvaai 777)09 TOU? avTio-Tao-icords Trplv av avrw avfjL/Sov^vcrrjTai. ovrco Se av TO 30 eV OerraXta e\dv6avev CLVTM rpe^ojjievov crrpdrev^a. 11. TIpogevov Se rbv Botwr^o^ %evov ovra e/ceXefcre \af3bvTa avSpas OTL TrXe/o-rou? Trapayeveada^ 0)9 e/9
arevecrda^ a>9 TT pay par a rfj eavrov
26. avTUTTCwricoTwv : H. 749 ; G. 1120.
26 f. els T€TpaKi<rxtMovs Kal If ji-qvwv : cf . the phrase in 24 f., and note.
27. SCITCU : for the contrac- tion of this verb, see H. 411 ; G. 495. — avrov : gen. of source. H. 750, 743, a; G. 1130.
28. JX-/J: used instead of otf because ^ KaraXuo-cu is some- thing willed by Cyrus. — irpd- <r6ev : anticipates irplv, and need not be translated separately. — KaraXvo-ai irpos : come to terms with. See vocab. under
Ka.TO.\V(i).
29. irplv av . . . <ru|j,|3ovX.€v- <rivrai: H. 921, 924; G. 1465, 1469. Cf. the use of Lat. donee, etc.
30. 4v 0€TTa\Cq,: standing just after the article, is an at- tributive modifier of o-Tpdrev/ma. Probably it is mainly for vari- ety that the order of this sen-
tence is different from that in 20 f.
31. |K^X€VO-€: in the perf. mid. and aor. pass, this verb, with some others, adds <r to the theme ; the inflection of these systems is thus like the same systems of 7re/0w (214, e and /). H. 461, 469 ; G. 640. So 'yiyvdjffKbj has cywacrfuii, and dKotfw has ijKot-
32 f. <us ... pov\6(ji€vos : cf . ws Trepiyevb/jievos 25 and note. — els IIicrC8ds: we cannot say into the Pisidians, but must say either against or into the country of. The Pisidians were an unsubdued tribe in the mountains, 150 to 200 miles southeast of Sardis, Cyrus's capital.
33 f. irpd-yjiaTa Tra,pt\6v- T(ov : translate the gen. abs. by a clause : were making trouble. 7rpdyfj,a has as wide a range of
272]
AXASAS1S, I., Jf, 8-2
273
verov Se TOV %evov ? 6Wa? / r<z9 e\6elv on vei crvv T06
OVTOt)? OVTOl
meaning as Lat. res. Notice the three instances of ws with the pple. in this section.
KOI ^( €K€\ev(T€V
TOV 'A^cuoV, 35
€7roiovv
37. o>s
them to understand that he was going to make war on.
271. Complete the list of common pronouns by learning :
'a. The personal pronouns €7^ and <ru, H. 261, 262,263; G. 389, 390,141,1.
b. The reflexive pronouns, H. 266 and a; G. 401.
c. The reciprocal pronoun, H. 268 ; G. 404.
d. The possessive pronouns, H. 269 and a; G. 406.
272. Translate into Greek.
From the means that we have we will willingly contribute largely to the support of Cyrus's army, for we admire him. When we chanced to be ex-
2. largely : lit. many, agree- ing with xpifiwra understood.
3. When, etc. : a Greek would express by yap the fact that this sentence gives the rea- son for the preceding statement.
1. means :
which: let the rel. here be attracted to the case of the an- tec. ; cf. r&v Tr6\ewv wv 270, 9. — willingly : make a pred. adj. : cf. e/coC<rcu 270, 20.
THE GREEK OF XENOP&OX.
[272-
iles he took us under his protection and restored 5 us to our homes. Now therefore when Tissapher- nes is falsely accusing him and when his enemies are making trouble for his province, we will en- deavor to cooperate with Cyrus in what he wishes to do. Let us therefore send him these soldiers, 10 and enlist as many other men of the Peloponnesus as possible, and let us go ourselves to him, that the king may perceive that we are friends to Cyrus ; and may he conquer all his enemies. If he ever wishes to make an expedition against the 15 king even, with the aid of the force which is being secretly collected for him he would get the better of his brother. But of course he will not attempt to make war on the king until he has consulted with you.
4. took under his protec- tion : express by one word.
5 f . when . . . when : 6Ve ptv . . . tire 5t.
8. cooperate with Cyrus in what: lit. accomplish with C. what (things).
10. as many other men of the Peloponnesus : follow the order of 256, 10 f.
12. that we are : use the supplementary pple.
13. all his enemies: H. 672 ; G. 979.
13 f. If he ever wishes: condition like tav dtvyrai 242, 8.
14 f. against the king even: Ko.1 M j3a<n\^d.
15 f. with the aid of: <rtv. — is being secretly col- lected : lit. escapes notice (\av- Oavu} being collected.
16. would get the better of: irepLyiyvo/mai in the poten- tial opt. Cf. the note on ircpi- yev6fji,evos &v 270, 25 f.
17. of course . . . not : ov dj.
18. until he has con- sulted: irplv &v with the aor. subjv. Cf. the note on 270, 29.
273]
ANABASIS, I., 2, 1-12.
275
273. Anabasis, I., 2, 1-12. 1. 'E-Trel S' ISdfcei, avrq) r/S?; Tropevea-Qai avo), rrjv
e/c T
67rl TOUTOU9 TO re fiapftapiicov KOI TO ' evravda 7rapayye\\eL ro3 re KXeap^ft) \aj36vrt, ij/ceiv 5 oVoz^ ^z/ aurc5 o-rpdrev/jLa, fcal rw 'Ap^crT/TTTTft) cruz/aX- \ayevri Trpo? rou9 ol'/co^ aTTOTre^^ai TTpbs eavrov o
ical &€via rc3 'Ap/cdSi, 09 aura3
TOV €V TCUS TToXeCTfc %€ViKOV, iJK€lV TTdp-
l/cavol 10
1. €86K€i: # seemed best. irop€ij€(r6ai &vu is the subj. — ava> : adv. with the same force as ct^a- in avajSalvctj.
2. (x€v : the idea contrasted with rr;j> /i£j> irp6<t>a<rtv is no- where expressed, being easily understood. — liroictro : indir. mid. — MS Pov\6(j,€vos : ^a^ Tie wished, as he said. Yet the word pretext for icpbfyajffiv so clearly implies the idea as Tie satfd, that this phrase is better omitted in translation.
3. ws : we say as if.
4. pappapiKov : supply crrpd- reu/xa. Xenophon usually speaks of the Persians and their sub- jects by the term pdppapoi in- stead of Il^po-ai.
5. IvravOa: in these circum- stances, thereupon.
6. bcrov TJ v avrco crrpdr€V|JLa : cf. 07r6<ras el^e <f>v\aKcts 256, 8 f. and o el%e trr/x£reu/xa just be- low. In each sentence the an- tec. is taken up into the rel. clause, and the rel. is then made to agree with the noun adjectively. This is called in- corporation. H. 995 ; G. 1037. It is far more common in Greek than in Eng., and therefore must often be resolved, in translating, into the fuller form.
9. irpo€i(TT^K€i : observe the tense and its force. — TOV gcvi- KOV: for the case cf. dj/Tio-ra- ffiwr&v 270, 26 and note. Ob- serve the ending -i*6s and cf. fiap(3ap-iK6s and *E\\r)v-iK6s.
10. Xapovra: agrees with the understood subj. of %K€iy
276
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[273—
rj&av ra? afcpoiroXeis <f)V\drT€iv. 2. e/cd\ecre Se /cal TOV? Mt\7jrov TroXiopKovvraS) KOI rovs <j)vyd&a$ e/ce-
el tfaXw? tear aTrpa^e Lev eft a ecrrparevero^ /JLTJ Trpd- 15 (T0ev Travaecrdai jrplv avrovs Karaydyoi oH/caSe. ol Be
instead of being attracted to the case of He^£, as \afi6vTi in 5 is to the case of KXec^xy. Xaj36j>ri stands close beside KXedpxv? while \ap6vra is widely separated from Eevty. — irXrjv oirdtroi : for irXfyv rotroi/- T(*)v 6ir6<roi.
11. CKdXecrc : final e of the theme is not lengthened. H. 504, 5 (with cross-reference) ; G. 639.
13. viro<r\dji€vos : see UTTKT- xvtoftai. Observe that the ac- tion of ^7ro<rx6^ews does not precede that of ^Xeu<re, but coincides with it in time. The promise was a part of his sum- mons, an inducement to the exiles to come. H. 856, b ; G. 1290.
14 f . cl . . . of KaSe : indir. discourse. The dir. form would be : taiv Karairpafa (aor. subjv.)
€(f> 0. <TTpaT€VOfJLai, Ol) 7Tp6(r0€J>
iravo-ofjiai irplv SLV u/xas Karaydyu of/ca5e If I accomplish that for which I am making the expedi- tion, I will not stop till I re- store you to your homes, toiv fcarairpd^ is a condition like
&v dvvnrai (242, 8). H. 898; G. 1403, 1404. The conclu- sion is ov TraiHTOfjLai. irplv dv vfjids Karaydyu is like irplv &v o-v/jL^ov\€va"rjTaL (270, 29 with note) . In changing this to the indir. form (1) the principal verb iravo-o/jLCLi is changed to the inf. of the same tense ; (2) other forms in the 1st and 2d person (AcaraTrpa^w, <rrparei;o/xat, /cara- ydyw, vpas') are changed to the 3d pers. ; (3) the subjvs. Karairpd^cij and Karaydyw are changed to the opt., and a-rpa- TevofjLaL to the impf . ind. ; (4) the &v of tdv is dropped (since tdv goes only with the subjv.) and el alone is retained with the opt. ; in like manner irplv &v becomes irplv alone. Read carefully H. 928-936 ; G. 1475, 1476, 1481, 1487, 1497. The neg. otf would regularly be re- tained in the indir. ; but wher- ever there is a suggestion of wish or of will, as with verbs of hoping, promising, and the like, the inf. is inclined to take nt even in indir. disc. H. 1024, end ; G. 1496,
273]
ANABASIS, I., 2, 1-12.
277
?5Se&>9 €7T€idovTO ra oVXa 7rapr)<rav rot>9 e
yap avTto • /ecu Xa/3oWe9 3. SeWa? //,ez> S?) e/9 l^dpSeis TLpo%evo$ Se Trapfjv OTrXira? /^ez/ €69 TrevraKoa-Lovs KOI xl\iovs, 71^- 20 Se Trez/Ta/cocr/of?, So^aiWro? Se o SruyL60aXto9 arr)? Se 6 'A%aios 077X1- TIacrlcov Se 6 Meyapev? jj,ev 07rXtra9, TpiaKocrlovs Be 7reXra<7Ta9 Trapeyevero • rjv Se fcal ouro9 /cat o ^co/cpdr'rjs 25 a/i</>l MfX?;To^ o-Tparevo/juevcDv. 4. ouro^ /Ltez/ 6/9 e£9 a^Tft) a<f>t/covTO. TKT<ra<f)epvr)<} Se /caravotf- raura, Aral pei^ova rjyrjad^evo^ elvai rj 009 eVt r^i/ Trapaa/cevijv, Tropevercu a>9 j3acri\€d f/ rd^o-ra linrtas eywv a>9 TrevraKOcriovs. 30
Learn H. 247, 236 ; G. 346, 358. — Tj-yTjcraiAcvos : deeming, think- ing. Cf . Lat. duco. — r\ ws : lit. greater than as, etc. ; that is, too great to be, etc.
29 f . o>s : with names and other words denoting persons, ws is a prep, like irp6s, meaning to. — rf : used adverbially, prac- tically = ws in its primary signif- icance. 77 edvvaro r&x^ra. as quickly as he could. — TCLXIO-TCI : sup. adv. from raxus. For the comparison, see H. 253 with list ; G. 357 with list. For the formation of advs., see H. 257, 258, 259 ; G. 365, 367-369. r«-
17. 2ap8€is: declined like the pi. of 7r6\is. H. 201 ; G. 250. In the nom. pi. -ees is in Attic prose contracted to -e«. So in stems in -eu- like /Sao-iXeus. H. 206; G. 263. Sardis was the capital of Lydia, and the resi- dence of Cyrus.
19. els : about. So in 20.
23 f. ws: about. — Tpioxoo-t- ovs [tAv . . . rpioiKOo-Covs 8e : cf . 153, 1 f. and note. In 20 f . we have oTrXtras IL£V . . . yv/mvyTas 84.
26. TWV . . . CTTpaT€VOfJ.€VCOV :
pred. gen. of the whole. 28. ncCtova : comp.
278
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[273—
5. KCU /3ao-i,\€v<; /Jiev S??, eVel rjicovcre TOV Kvpov (TToXoz>, avTiTrapecr/cevd^ero.
Se €%cov ou? €iprj/ca atp/JLaro aTrb
Trapa-
35 (rdyyd? eltcocri /cal Svo €7rl rbv
xvs is declined like ydvs H. 229 ; like y\vKvs G. 320. raxvs and words like it come under the rule that adjs. of the consonant and vowel declensions have short a in the fern. sing, nom., ace., and voc.
31 f. tjicov(r€: note that CLKOVW has the Attic reduplica- tion (H. 368, 358, 6 ; G. 529, 533) in the perf. act., but the ordinary reduplication in the perf. mid. ; also that the theme assumes a- in the perf. mid. syst. and the passive syst. (Cf . KeXeuw.) — Tior<ra4>€pvo\>s} <TTO- Xov: gen. of source together with the dir. obj. H. 742, c; G. 1103. We must here trans- late rjKovae heard of. The pri- mary meaning of o-rAXw is set in order, array, especially with the idea of equipping, as for a voyage or expedition. <rr6Xos equipment retains the earlier meaning, while o-r^XXw itself in Attic prose came to signify send, especially to send on a journey.
33. €i'pr|Ka: see ^wl. The pres. is supplied by
or (in composition) by We in like manner group to- gether go, went, gone j am, was, been, making up the full para- digm from two or more roots, each of which taken alone lacks some parts.
34. c§€\avv€i : since the word originally meant drive forth, it is not -often used, in the sense of march, of any one that can- not be regarded as driving. Thus of a commander who rides, and of cavalry, ^eXaiW may be used ; but seldom of foot-soldiers ; these iropevovrai. — o-TaOpovs: properly halting- places, then days'1 march; like irapacrdyyas, ace. of extent. H. 720, 6 ; G. 1062. — rpets : for the decl. see H. 290 ; G. 375.
35. TOV Ma£av8pov TTOTOHO'V : the fixed order when a river is named. This river runs for a long distance through a plain, winding and turning back upon itself extraordinarily. Hence the meaning of our word me- ander, and Milton's expression (Comus, 232) " By slow Maean- der's margent green,"
273]
ANABASIS, I., 2, 1-12.
279
TOVTOV TO
6. TOVTOV Sia/3a% e%e\avvet, Sia ld? orTaffjjibv eva Trapao-dyyd? 6/cTO) et? KoXocr-
0*09, evTavOa
/ca
oTrXfra?
evrra • KOL rj/ce Mevcov 6 40 teal 7T€\Ta(TTas irev-
36. TOVTOV : It is a striking characteristic of Greek style that nearly every sentence is connected with the preceding one by a conj. Up to this point in the Anabasis nearly two- thirds of the complete sentences are introduced by $<?, about one- sixth by Kalj and a few by in- ferential offv. Of the remainder two have ^v drf inserted after the first word, 5^ having a force very similar to that of otv. In the other four cases the sen- tence either begins with a dem., or is preceded by a dem. which looks forward to and intro- duces it. The words of this class which have occurred are cJ5e, r6v5e rbv Tp6wov, ^j/raC0a, OVTOS. It is evident that a dem. in such a position really con- tains a connective idea, in that it refers to something in the preceding or following sen- tence. We see then that nearly every sentence is connected with the preceding context by some conj. j if, however, the
sentence is introduced by a dem. pron. or adv., the conj. is often omitted. Such omission of the conj. was so infrequent that Greek rhetoricians gave it the special name asyndeton (d-crw-de-roj', a priv. and <rvv- 5&o, bind together). — cvpos: declined like ytvos H. 191 ; G. 228. The contractions are the same as in verbs in -^w. (The contraction of e-e to 17 in the nom. dual is late ; in inscrip- tions of the classical time e-e becomes et here as elsewhere.) 37. 4£€vy}i€VT) : for the red., see H. 365 ; G. 523. A bridge joined by seven boats we should call a pontoon bridge of seven boats. — TOVTOV: what?
39. otKovjt^vT]v : inhabited. Even at this early time there were in Asia, as now, many cities which had been deserted, the ruins still retaining the old names. — €vSai|j,ova : for decl. see H. 234, 235 ; G. 312, 313.
40. Note the asyndeton. — Mevwv ; sent by Aristippos,
280
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[273—
AoXovra? /cal Alwava? KOI 'O\vv0iov$. 7. evrevOev e%e\avvei a-TaOpovs rpeh Trapaadyyd? et/coa-iv eh KeXatz^a?, r^9 <&pv<yi
45 /JL€<yd\r)V /cal ev$al/j,ova. evravOa
/cal TrapdSeicros /L&eya? dypicov Oypicov TrX^/o?;?, a e/cel- vo<$ eOrjpevev diro tTTTrou, OTrore yv/juvdcrai, ftov\0iro eavrbv re /cal rou? ETTTTOI;?. Sia /juecrov Se rov Trapa- Seiaov pel o MalavSpos Trora/Lto? • al Se Trrjyal avrov
50 elcriv €/c TWV jSacriXeicov • pel Se /cal Sid Tr)$
43. €VT€00€v : asyndeton. The ending -Oev appears in several advs. denoting motion from a place.
43 f. irap curacy "yds el'Kocriv : the distances covered in these first days, six to eight para- sangs daily, were greater than the later average.
45. pao-iXcia : distinguish from jSao-tXetd. The neut. pi. is used for palace, probably be- cause of the numerous apart- ments.
46. nfyas : H- 247 i G- 346- — e^ptwv: H. 743, 753 and c; G. 1112, 1139, 1140. — irXVjp^s: declined (except for the ac- cent) like evyerfs H. 230 ; like dXi^j G. 313.
47. diro iirirov : lit. from a horse; we say on horseback. The Greek is inclined to look at an act as proceeding from a place, when we look at it as
occurring in a place. In re- gard to this phrase observe that the number of horses must be the same as the number of riders ; hence they hunt on horseback would be Orjpevovo-iv curb iTrirwv. — oirore povXoiro : a rel. clause implying a past gen- eral condition. H. 912, 913, 914 B, (2), 894, 2; G. 1428, 1429, 1431, 2, 1393, 2.
48. (X€orov : for the position, see H. 671 ; G. 978.
50. €K TCOV pcuriXeicov: we should say in the palace; cf. note on airb 'iirirov 47. A /3atrt- Xeia, like a mediaeval castle, was a fortress as well as royal residence ; for such a collection of buildings, containing quar- ters for troops as well as for court officials, a good supply of water was essential, and an abundant spring was usually included within the walls.
273]
ANABASIS, /., 2, 1-12.
281
8. eo"Ti Se K
eV KeXa^afc epvfjuva eVl raZ? Trrjyais rov Map&vov TTorafMov VTTO rfj aicpOTroKei • pel Se /cat ovro? Sea Tr;9 7ro'Xefc>9 /cat €fji/3dX\,€i 669 TOZ> MatavBpov • rov Be Mapavov TO 6^/009 eanv ei/coo-i ical irevre vroSw^. 55 evravOa \ey€rai 'ATroXXcoi/ 6/cSeipai Mapcrvdv <ra9 epi^ovrd ol Trepl (TO^>/«9, /cal TO Se^a ev TcS dvrpq) o6ev al Trrjyai • Bta Be rovro 6 Ka\elrai Mapavas. 9. evravOa Sepgrjs, ore e/c rrj?
OLKO- 60
51. «TTI: H. 480,2; G. 144,5.
55. iroSwv : pred. gen. where we should expect the nom.
56. licScipai: the inf. here stands in indir. discourse for the aor. indie, of the dir. form ; in such cases the aor. inf. does denote past time, as the indie, would. H. 851, 852, 854; G. 1280. The dir. form would be <Wa00a 'A7r6X\a>*> t&detpe. The story is often alluded to, and parts of it are told in several works of art that have come down to us. It is said that Athena invented the flute (a#- X6s, more like our clarinet) ; but catching sight of her own image in the water as she playedr she determined never again to distend her cheeks in such an ugly manner, and threw the pipe away. The satyr Mar- syas, who had been listening
with delight, at once caught it up, and soon was so proud of his own music thereon that he challenged Apollo himself, the god of music, to a contest, Apollo to use his lyre. The victor might punish the van- quished as he pleased, and the Muses were to be the judges. Of course Apollo won, and he punished the presumptu- ous satyr in the way described in the text.
57. ol: enclitic, therefore not the art. but the pron. Cf. erf 270, 2. — crowds: here skill, art. Translate after defeating him in a contest of skill in music. — Scpjxa : from 5e//>w, theme §e/>-, with the ending
-fJLCLT-.
58. o6€v = e£ o v : cf . tvrev-dev.
59. Mapo-vds : pred. nom.
60. rfj jxaxu : the well-
282
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[273—
$o/jLrj(7ai ravrd re ra /3a<ri\ei,a KOI rrjv d/cp07ro\LV. evravOa epewe Kvpo? rj/jLepd? rpiaKovra • KOI Tj/ce KXea/^09 o AaKeSai/jiovios <j)vya$ e^cov OTrXi- r«9 fXJL\lovs /cal TreXrao-ra? ®pa/cas o/cra/coalov^ KOI 65 To£ora9 Kj07?ra9 Sid/cocrlovs. a/jia Se KOI Swcrt? Trapfjv 6 ^vpd/c6(7i,o$ e%a>v OTfXtrd^ rpiaKocriovs, KCLI
KOI
OTrXtra?
/cal apiOfJbov rcov 'l ), KOI eyevovro ol KOI %i\(,oii TreXracrral Se 10. evrevOev e%e\avvet, araO- Svo Trapao-dyyd? Se/ca et? ITeXra?, iroKiV ol/cov- evravO* efjueuvev rjfJLepds rpel? • ev als HeWa? ra Avfcaia eOvcre /cal d<ya)va Wrjice • ra &e ^pvaal • edeapei Se rov dycova
6 'Ap/ca? evravOa Ku/oo? e €7rolri<T€V ev TW 70 Trai/re? oirKlrai fjuev rovs
75 a6\a rjcrav
known battle of Salamis, 480 B.C. Dat. of means, H. 776 ; G. 1181. — Xeycrai olKoSo|j,fj(rai : Cf. X<fyerai ticdeipai 56 and note.
68. dpiOfxov : here the ac- tion of numbering; an enu- meration.
69. €-y€vovro : amounted to. 71. dfjicjH TOVS SwrxtXCovs :
H. 664, c; G. 948, (6). The numbers do not agree with those previously given.
74 f. TO, AvKcua: cognate ace. H. 715, b ; G. 1051 : celebrated the Lycaean festival with sacri- fice. This festival of Zei>s Ai5- KCLLOS was the common festival of the Arcadians. Every such
festival had for its central point a sacrifice, which was followed by athletic contests, these also being in honor of the god. — €0T]K€: a 1st aor. ind. act. 3d sing, from ri6r}^ with -*e- for the tense suffix instead of -ere-. ridriiju. is the verb regularly used for appointing or arranging a contest. — rjo-av : pi., even though the subj. is in the neut. H. 604 and b ; G. 899, 2.
75. <rT\€Yy£8€s : in Greek gymnasiums and wrestling- schools boys and young men took their exercise naked ; they rubbed themselves thoroughly with olive oil, to make the
273]
ANABASIS, I., 2, 1-12.
283
KOLI K{)po9. evrevOev e^e\avv€i crraOfJiovs Svo Trapa- ds ScaSe/co, els Kepd/mcov dyopav, TTQ\LV olKOVfjue- Trpbs rfj Mucrta ^wp'i. 11. evrevdev crraQ /JLOVS rpecs Trapacrdyyds Tpid/covTa els Kavarpov TreSiov, rjro\iv ol/cov/jLevrjv. evravO* epeivev 80 rjpepds 7T€VT€ • /cal TO 2<$ err pander ais ox^e/Xero fiio'Oos
7T\€OV T! TplWV /JL'TJVtoVi KOI 7TO\\dfCLS l()VT€S €7rl TO?
dvpds ctTryrovv. 6 Se eXvr/Sa? \€<ycov Sirjye KOI Sij\os rjv avltofievos • ov yap rjv Trpos rov Ktpou rpOTrov
muscles supple, and the fine sand with which the place was strewn would naturally stick to their oiled flesh, so that with oil, dirt, and sweat together, a youth after an hour's exercise was probably as thickly coated as the contestants on a muddy foot-ball field nowadays. To remove this coating before the necessary bath, <TT\eyyl des were in everyday use. Those made of gold were not for use, but me- morials. — xP^°"at : li^6 aTrXoOs H. 223, 224; x/>u(ro0s G. 310. Learn at the same time vovs H. 157 ; G. 201, 2. (Since the dual is nowhere used in authors read in school and college, it is better omitted.)
78. lo-xdrqv irpo's : lit. far- thest near ; that is, on the bor- der towards.
82 f . irXc'ov % : H. 647, 2d sentence. — p/qvwv : depends on and is not affected in
case by ir\tov. — loVres: give the meaning of each element (/-6-i/r-es) . Learn the entire inflection. H. 477 ; G. 808. The irreg. impf. is like a plup. ; the ind., impv., and inf. are tu- forms, while the subjv., opt., and pple. are of the w-form. In the impv., however, i-6-vrav has the var. vow. as tense suffix. In l-tvai the ending is -evai in- stead of -vai. — ras 0vpds: lit. the doors ; a common Oriental expression for house or gen- eral's quarters, especially for the king's palace ; to the pres- ent day our term for the court of the Sultan of Turkey is The Sublime Porte, lit. the high gate.
83. 4Xirt8as Xc'-ycov : lit. speak- ing hopes; that is, speaking hopefully. — SfjXos TJV vos: cf. <f>av€pbs ?jv de 174, I., 10.
84 f . irpos TOV rpo-rrov : in accordance with the character.
284
THE GHEES: OF XENOPHON.
[273—
85 e^ovra p/rj aTroSiSovai. 12. evravda 'E7rua£a 77 ^vevveaios yvvrj rov T£i\L/ca) Trapa Kvpov • /cal e'Xeyero Kvpa) Sovvcu TroXXa. rfi &' ovv crTparta Tore aTreSco/ce Kvpos jMcrOov Terrdptov /JLIJVOJV. el^e Se 97 Ki\i(rara <f)V\a-
90 /c?)z; 7re/H avrrjv K/Xt/ea? /cat 'A<77rez>8tot>9 • eXeyero Se /cat a-v<y<yevecr6ai Kvpov rfj
: circumstantial pple., agrees with the understood subj. of &iro5i86vai. Lit. wo^ ^o ^«2/, (when) having (money) ^ was not, etc. ; more freely, it was not like Cyrus not to pay, when he had money. — jx^j : H. 1018, 1023 ; G. 1611. — diroSiSo- vcu: &ir6 in composition, as here and in airyTovv above, often suggests that something is due. It is now time to learn the entire verb 5/Sw/xi, H. 350, 330, 334 ; G. 506. Note care- fully the following irregulari- ties. (1) In the pres. syst. impf. ind. act. sing., H. 419, a ; G. 630. Impv. act. 2d sing. 5l8ov, H. 415, b • G. 755. Pple. act. didovs, H. 382 and 56 ; G. 770 and 335. (Cf. yvovs 169, 170, a.) (2) In the /xi-aor. there is a mid. as well as act., but the sing, of the hid. act. is wanting, those forms being sup- plied by the peculiar 1st aor. in -*a-, H. 432 ; G. 802, 2. The other peculiarities of this sys-
tem are described in H. 443, a-c ; G. 802, 1. Note particu- larly that the theme vowel o is not lengthened, and that dovvai has the ending -emt, with which cf . t-tvai. Outside of the pres. and aor. syst. didwfu is regular. 86. <yvWj: H. 216, 4 ; G.291, 8. — pao-iXe'ws : subject, how- ever, to the king of Persia. Syennesis and Epyaxa seem to have played a double part, fa- voring both sides, in order that they might retain their throne, whichever should win.
88. 8* ovv : at any rate, im- plying that the statement as to "her giving Cyrus money is mere hearsay ; but however that may be, his paying the army was a fact.
89. T€TTopo)v: H.290; G.375. 90 f. &£ycTO Kvpov: here
the impers. construction of A<?- 76TO is used, although A<fyero dovvoLi 87 is in the personal con- struction. For tense cf. note on oiKo5oiJ,7)<rai 60.
274]
ANABASIS, L, 2, 13-27.
285
€- 5
274. Anabasis L, 2, 13-27. 13. ^VTevOev ej~e\avvet, o-raOfAous Svo Se/ca e^9 ©vfA/Spiov, TTO\LV OiKOvjj,evrjv. evravOa Trapa rrjv 6Sbv /cptfvr) f) M/Soi; /caXovfievrj TOV ja)v /3a0YXe&>9, e<f> rj \eyeraL Mt'Sa 6r)p€V(rai Oiva) /cepdads avrrfv. 14. evrevOev \avvei crraO/jiovs Svo Trapaa-dyyds Se/ca els Tvpid- euov, ir6\tv olKov^evrjv. evravOa epewev rpei$. KOI \€<y€Tcu Serjffijvcu rj Kl\i,(rcra Ktpov Sel^at, TO (TTpaTevfjia avTrj • /3oiA,o'//.ez>o9 ovv eT !;ai e^eTaariv TroieiTai ev rcS 7reS/6> TWV ' /3ap/3dpcov. 15. €tC€\€V<r€ &e row avTols 669 (JLafflVi OVTCO Ta%()rjvat, /cal
i S* €/cacrTOV rou9 eavTov. eTa^Orjcrav ovv €7rl TCTTapcov • el'xe Se TO fjuev Segibv M.€VQ)v /cal ol avv aurcS, TO Se evcavv/jiov KXeap^O9 /cal ol €/c€ivov, 15 TO Be fJiicrov ol a\\oi aTpaTrjyoL 16. effecopet ovv
/ca 10
3. MCSou: pred. gen. after KaXovfjitvr) : lit. the spring called Midas'1 s. We say, the so-called spring of Midas.
5. ol'vu) Kcpdcrds avr-qv : lit. mixing it with wine; we say rather, mixing wine with it. The story is that the satyr drank so much of the wine from the spring that he became an easy prey.
12. vopos : custom, the ear- lier meaning of the word ; the earliest law was merely custom. Supply fy.
13. IKCUTTOV: supply
14. lirl T€TTapo>v : four deep, to make the line long, and so make the army appear large. — TO SeJuSv: supply ictpas wing. The right was the post of dan- ger (and therefore of honor), because the shield was carried on the left arm, so that the right side was unprotected. Hence an enemy always tried to attack on the right, and fortifications were so planned that an enter- ing force must expose that side.
286
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[274—
6 Kvp09 irp&TOV aev rou9 /Bapftdpovs • ol \avvov Teray/Jievoi, Kara fXa? /cal Kara rdgeis • elra Be rots' f/EXX?;i>a9, TrapeXavvcov e<£' ap/jLaro? /cal rj ^>' apaaad^r)?. €^XOV ^ Trdvres /cpdvrj teal ^iT&vas (froivl/covs /cal KvrjfuBa^ /cal ra9 9 €/cK€fca\vfji/JL€vds. 17. eTreiBrj Be Trdvra?
cmjo'ds TO apua Trpo rr)$ jLyfrd^ Tllryprjra TOP eparjved Trapa 25 (TTpaTrjyovs T&V 'TZXXrjvatv e/ceXevae 7rpo/3a\ea0a(, TCL oVXa fcal eTn^copijo-ai o\rjv T^V </>d\a<y<ya. ol Be
TavTa TrpoeiTTov rot9 crrpaTtcoTa^ • Kal eTrel
7rpo/3a\6/ji,€voi, TCL oVXa eTrycrav. e/c Be TOV- TOV OaTTOV TrpolovTCdV <rvv tcpavyf) diro roO avTo-
17. irpwrov: H. 719, 6; G. 1060. Trpwros is the ordinal numeral corresponding to els. See list, H. 288 ; G. 372.
19. irap€\avvo>v : here the original meaning of tXatvw ap- pears.
21. \a\Kcl, <J>OIVIKOVS : de- clined like x/)i)crous ; see x/wo-cu 273, 75 and note.
22. £KK€Ka\v|jL(j.€vds : observe the effect of the pred. position : a lit. translation in the Greek order gives the same force. H. 670, a; G. 972. On the march shields were usually protected by leathern covers. — TrdvTds : governed by the irapa- (along, or past} in
24. fJ.6CTT)S : Cf. fJL^ffOV TOV
irapadela-ov 273, 48 and note.
25. irpopaX&rOcu : indir. mid. ; lit. throw their arms be- fore them ; that is, put the shield and spear in position for attack. The subj. is the Greek soldiers, or ryv <j>d\ayya.
26. oX-qv : pred. position ; in a body. H. 672, c ; G. 979.
27. lo-dXiriyfc : the subj. (raXTrry/cr^s or ris omitted, as often with ffcCkirlfa.
28 f. lirfjo-av : i subscript marks the form as from efyu, not elpl. Cf. ^7rixw/>?7<rcu 26, with the same meaning. — €K TOVTOV : thereupon. — irpouSv- T«V: gen. abs. with the subj. p omitted.
274]
ANABASIS, I., 2, 13-27.
287
Spo/xo? eyevero rofc crrpaTKorais €7rl ra? 30 . 18. rcoz> Se fiapftdpcov <£o/3o9 vroXu?, /tal re Kt \icro-a efywyev eirl 7-779 dpfJiafjid^rj^ /ecu ol etc T}? dyopds fcara\i,7rdvT€s rd &via e<f)V<yov. ol Se
TIW <ye\Q)Ti, &rrl ra9 a-/crjvas r}\6ov. f] Se . ISovo-a rrjv \afjL7rp6rrjra /cal rrjv rd%iv rov 35 crTpaT€V/jLaTO<; eOavjjiacre. KOpo? Se rjcrOrj rbv €K TWV rft\\r)V(0v et9 TOU9 j3ap/3dpovs (frdftov IScov. 19. zvrevOev c%e\avv€t crTadpovs rpeis Trapao-dyyd?
etfcocriv
evravOa e^eive rpei? fj r?)9 Avfcdovtds a-ra KOVTCL. ravrijv rrjv
evrevOev e%e\avvet Sid 40 irevre Trapacrdyyds rpiar eTrerpei/re Siap7rd(rcu ovcrav. 20.
29 f . airo TOV
of their own accord. — Spopos €-y€V€TO TOIS o-Tpartwrais : lit. running arose to the soldiers / that is, the soldiers began to run.
32 f . ol €K TTJS d-yopds : for ol £v rrj dyopq.. Cf. TtDf irapa /3ao-t\^ws 256, 1 and tic r&v paffi- \elwv 273, 50.
35. I8ov<ra : see opdaj. The impv. i'5<? belongs with dirt, i\0t, and XajS^. H. 387, 6 ; G. 131, 2. For the tense cf. l$6v 37, and UTTOO-X^WS 273, 13 and note.
36 f . HO-OT] : for ^5-^ from T;§O/AGU. — IK TWV 'EXXrjvcov its TOVS Pappdpovs : the preps, mark clearly the source and
goal of the feeling, while the position between art. and noun shows that the phrase is an attributive modifier of <t>6pov, we must use a rel. clause, as, the fear which the Greeks in- spired in the Orientals. One object of the display was to impress the Orientals with the superiority of the Greeks ; Cyrus was naturally pleased at the success in that direction.
42. Siapirdo-ai : inf. denot- ing purpose, as in Eng. The inf. was originally the dat. of a verbal noun ; the original force appears in this usage. H. 951 ; G. 1532.
43. ws TToXejjudv ovcrav: cf.
288
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[274
45
TLi\icrcrav €69 rrjv Ki\i/cidv aTTOTreyt&Tre*- rrjv 6S6v • KOI avveTrefji'^ev avry roi>9 arpa- 01)9 Me^o>z> eZ^e Kal avrov. K£yj09 Se rcov ahXcov el;e\avv€t, Sea Ka7T7raSo/aa9 a rerrapa^ Trapacrdyyds ell/coo"^ Kal vreWe e/9 ®6ava, 7ro\iv olfcov/jievrjv, /Ji€jd\r]v fcal ev&al/jiova. evravOa 50 efjieivav rj^epd^ r/oet9 * ev cS Kvp09 aTre/creivev avSpa
/ecu
erepov nva TWV vTrap^cov eTriftovXeveiv avr(S. 21. evrevdev €7
55 bpOld la")(yp&s KOI d/JL^^avo^ elcre\6elv
el T£9 €K(t)\vev. €\e<y€TO Se /cal l^vevvecns elvai eVl TCOV aKpwv <f)V\drTc0v rr)V elcrf3o\r}V • 810 efjueivav fjjjiepdv ev rc3 TreSt'w. rfj S' varepaia fjicev ay<y€\o<? Xeycov OTL XeXo67Tft)9 efy ^vevvecris ra a/cpa, eirel
60 r)a6eTO QTI TO Me^o)^o9 (TTpdrevfjia 'tjSrj ev KtX^/c/a
w$ tirt(3ov\&jovTos 256, 11 and note ; ws TT pay /xara rwv 270, 33 f. ; cJs /3 273, 2.
44 f. TT|V Ta\i<rTT] H. 719, a ; G. 1060.
46. avrov: supply
50. 4v w : supply
53. €mpovX€i>€iv : depends on aiTid<rdfj,€vos : of plotting.
55. €l<T€X0€tV <TTpaT€V|JLaTl :
both depend on d/x^xaws. H. 952, 766, 767; G. 1528, 1165.
58. rfj vo-T€pcua : supply
o$. H. 782 ; G. 1192.
68ov :
59. XcXonrws ctrj : the com- pound form (as often in the perf. opt.) for XeXo^Troi. For the mode see H. 932, 2 ; G. 1487. But notice the mode of TJo-Oero and ^v in the two fol- lowing lines, and cf. H. 935, b and c ; G. 1482, 1499.
60. TJ'<r6€TO on : cf . jSouXeuo- fjitvovs 256, 16, which illustrates the more usual construction of a clause dependent on alo-0d- VO/JLCLI. Xenophon might have written here ycrBero rb M^VWPOS
2T4]
ANABASIS, L, 2, 13-27.
289
T)V €i<TO) TtoV Op ft) I/,
OTt
7J/COV6 7T€pl-
/cat avrov Ktijoou. 22. KOpo? 8' 67rl ra oprj ovSevbs /CCO\VOVTO$, /cal elSe ra? cr/c^va? ov ol K/X^/ee? e<£uA,aTToz/. evrevOev Se 65 Kareftaivev ek ireSlov /A€ya KOI Ka\6v, eirippVTOV, KOI SevSpcov TravroSaTTtov <rvp,7r\ewv KOI a/ji7re\cov • Be teal crrj<ra/j,ov /cal p,e\iv7)v /cal Ke /cal tcplOas (frepei. 0/309
avro
61 f . KaC : must connect the clauses of which ya-Bero and 17/coue are the verbs ; therefore the next word 3rt must mean because, not that. — Tpirjp€is : for the decl. see H. 232 ; G. 234. When TrepnrXeofoas is reached, it is seen that r/u^peis is in the ace. pi.; and it then appears as if rpnypeis TrepurXeoiJo-ds were obj. and supplementary pple. with TJKove. But when further TafjL&v and ZXOVTCL appear, it is found that rptrjpets must be the obj. of exoj/ra, which is itself a supplementary pple. with Ta/x<2j/ after TJKOVC, while Tre/UTrAeoiVas is a circumstantial pple. This momentary ambiguity must have been felt by a Greek reader as well as by us. The sentence therefore cannot be called well constructed gram- matically ; yet as regards their relative importance
7r\eoi5(7as and Ta/uwv cxoira are placed naturally. — For the ab- sence of contraction in -irXeotf- <rds see H. 411 ; G. 495, 1.
63 f. TOS AdKcScUfAOVLCOV,
etc. : added as an afterthought to rpi^peis. — 8* ovv : cf. 273, 88. — cISc : see bpaw.
65. ov: rel. adv. of place; H. 283; G. 436. — 4<|>vXaTTOv : seems to be used here for the plup., had been on guard, or were before on guard; cf. fjo-av . . . Tiffffa^tpvovs rb dpx&?ov 256, 12 f. The Greek expresses the past continuance of the action, leaving unexpressed the fact that the action was completed in the past.
67. ScvSpcov, dfi-ireXcov : cf. 0rjpiwv 273, 46 and note. — <rvji- irXcwv: declined like ?Xewj H. 226, 227, with 159; G. 306 with 196, 197.
69. avTo : that is, r6 iredlov.
290
THE GKEEK OF XENOPBON.
[274-
70 o^vpov KOI vtyqXbv irdvrrj e/c 0a\drrr}^ els 0d\ar- rav. 23. /carafias Se Bid TOVTOV rov TreSlov 7/Xacre rerrapa^ Trapaa'dyyd^ vrevre KOI eiicoaiv % KfcX£/aa9 TTO\LV fJLeyd\r)v KOI evBal- . evda rjv rd ^vevvecrios ftaaiKeia rov 75 /SacriXecos • Sia ftecrov Se rfjs TroXecy? pel
KuSi/o? 6Vo/Aa, evpos Svo 7r\e0pcov. 24. Tavrrjv rrjv 7ro\iv e£e\i7rov ol evoucovvres perd ^vevvecnos et9 o'xypov eTTi rd 0/377 irhrjv ol rd KcnrrjKela • ejjbeivav Se /cal ol Trapd rrjv 6d\arrav 80 oircovvres ev So\o^9 KOI ev 'Icrcrofc. 25. '
Se ?; ^vevveaios <yvvrj TTporepd Ifcupov TreVre rjfjiep 669 Ta/)crou9 d^iKero • e^ Se T^ vTrepftdXy rcov op&v rrj els TO ire^iov Bvo \6%ot, rov Mevcovo? crrpareii- /jLaro? aTrdSKovro • 06 /xez^ efyacrav dpTrd^ovrds TL 85 KaraKOTrrjvaL VTTO TWV K^Xt/cco^, o/ Se v7ro\ei<f)0evTas /cal ov BvvafjLevov? evpelv TO aXXo crrpdrevp^a ovBe T09 0801)9 elra ir\ava)iJievov<$ airoKevQai • rjcrav S' ouz^
75. )i€(rov T-qs iroXews : here /A^O-OU is used substantively, r^s 7r6Xeo;s depending on it. Cf. 7-97$ <f>d\ayyos /xeo-^s 23 f.
76. ovojxa, evpos : H. 718 and 6 ; G. 1058. — irXc'epwv : gen. of measure with Trora- jpi6t.
77 f. €ls x»ptov, iTrl TOL opt] : ace. because of the motion im- plied in €&\LTTOV : abandoned for a secure stronghold on the mountains. — irXrjv : here a
conj., hence the nom. after it. Cf. Eng. except, used both as prep, and as conj.
81. irpoTcpol: H. 619 and a; G. 926. Cf . <?/coC<rcu 270, 20 and note. — T]n*pais : H. 781; G. 1184.
84 f. ol JJK'V, olSe': H. 654; G. 981.— itycurav: H. 481 and «; G. 812; 141, 3.
86. TO aXXo 0-Tpa.Tevfxa. : the rest of the army.
87. 8* oflv : cf. 63 f.
274]
ANABASIS, /., 2, 13-27.
291
e/carov oirXlrai. 26. ol S' a\\oi eTrel fj/cov, re 7ro\iv rovs Tapcrovs SitfpTraaav, Sia rbv 6'Xe- Opov T&V o-vcrTparicDTWv opyi^ofjLevoi, /cal ra /3a<rl- 90 \eia ra ev avrrj. K{)po9 Se eTrel elafaacrev els rrjv
7TO\IV, fJL€T€7r€fJL7T€TO TOV ^V€VV€(71V 7T/309 ZCiVTOV O S'
ovre 7rpoT€pov ovSevi TTW KpeLrrovi eavrov els X€^Pa^ e\6elv €(f)7j OVT€ rare Kvpcp livai r^6e\ey jrplv r] yvvrj
eXaySe. 27. pera Se ravra 95 p,ev eSco/ce Se
ITTTTOV /cal
avTov eTretcre /ca
crvveyevovTO Xpij/JMTa TroXXa S&pa a vo^L^eTai irapa
KOI crrpeTTTOv xpvaovv /cal
88. ol 8* aXXot : subj. of ^ACOJ/, placed before tiret for greater prominence.
89. TOVS Tap<rovs: in app. with T7)v ir6\iv.
91. Kvpos : cf . oi 5' &\\OL 88 and note.
92. irpos iavTov : to come to him.
93. o*8ev£: H. 767 ; G.1165. We must translate as if it were gen. So Kvpy 94. Observe the Greek way of repeating the neg. where we now use but one neg. H. 1030 ; G. 1619. Yet in old Eng. we find the same practice as in Greek. Thus Chaucer has, " And wol not suffren hem by noon assent | Nother to ben y-buried nor y-brent" (mod- ernized, "And will not suffer
them by no assent neither to be buried nor burnt") ; and Shakspere, " I cannot choose one nor refuse none." Among the uneducated this old usage is still common, and children are apt to adopt it uncon- sciously as the more natural way of speaking.
95. eXafk: the subj. is not ij yvv/i, but Zvtvveo-is. Such a change of subj. is often left to be understood in Greek, al- though in Eng. the new subj. must be expressed, nplv here takes the indie, instead of the subjv., because the action is one which actually occurred. H. 922, 924; G. 1469, 1464. Cf. irplv cLv <rvfj,(3ov\€ti<rr)Tai 270, 29,
292
THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON.
[275—
iood/clvd/cr]v ^pvcrovv KOI (rroXrjv Tlepcn/ctfv, KOI rrjv
SiapTrd&a-Oai, ' ra Se fiv TTOV evrv<y%dva)cn,v,
100 ff. TTJV \copdv . . . Siap- ird£eo-0cu and rd Tjpircwriuva . . . diroXa}Apdv€iv are also objs.
of
cf.
understood. — diro- : for the force of dir6 , 85 and note.
FORMATION OF WORDS.
275. In mastering the vocabulary of a language, it is a great help to observe how words are formed. New words are directly formed from existing words in two ways, — (1) by composition, (2) by derivation.
a. Composition is putting together two existing words to make a new one, as o,K/oo-7roAis from aKpos and TroAis, Trpo- /3aAAo> from Trpo and /2aAA.<o. Some slight change of form often occurs, especially in the first member. The simpler cases of composition are easily recognized and the com- pound easily remembered, if the parts were already known ; the more detailed study of compounds may be postponed a while longer.
b. Derivation consists in adding to the stem or root of a word a suffix, which modifies the meaning of the stem or root, but is not itself used as a separate word, as
The most common modes of derivation have now been illustrated abundantly, and are grouped together in the following sections. The most important examples that have occurred are first given, then the suffix is pointed out, and a reference given to the Grammar.
276] FORMATION OF WORDS. 293
Primitive Nouns.
276. Words formed immediately from a root or verb theme are called primitives.
a. Xo-y-o-s (Xo-y-o-) speech, word, from X^-yw (Xe-y-) speak. 8p6fA-o-s (8po(ji-o-) running, 8paji-€iv (Spaji-) run. Tpoir-o-sCTpoir-o-) turn, manner, rpe'irw (rpcir-) turn. Tvir-o-s (TVTT-O-) stroke, type, TVTTTW (TV-IT-) strike. orroX-o-s (o-roX-o-) equipment, \ ( o-reXXw (crrcX-) equip,
expedition, J \ send.
v6|i-o-s (vofi-o-) law, v€jjLw (v€|i-) distribute.
apx-o-s (dpx-o-) ruler, a-px" (a-px-) rule.
(vir-apxos subordinate ruler.)
a/ywy-6-s (d-ywy-o-) leader, a-yw (ot-y-) lead.
(stem reduplicated. )
Suffix -o-, H. 548 ; G. 832.
b. dpx-^i (dpx-d-) beginning, rule, from apx" (apx-) begin, rule. Tpod>-Ti Crpo<i>-d-) nurture, ^
support, } ^4"" ^P'*-) WOUTOft-
garrison, povX--/j (povX-d-) ^s^, p?aw, povXojtai (povX-) wish.
(<ruX-XoY-d-) gath- \ ( o-vX-Xc-yw (<rvv + Xe-y-)
ering, levy, f \ gather.
t<r-poX-^ (€l<r-poX-d-) pass\ f €
into, / \
poX-^(v'ir€p-poX-d-)^roto->> f vircp-pdXXa) (virep-
r beyond, passage over, f \ paX-) throw beyond.
(K-aX-»-) battle, licxxoK-ai (jiax-) ^^- Suffix -d-, H. 548 and b ; G. 832.
c. Kpt-TTj-s (Kpt-rd-) judge, from Kptvw (Kpi-) decide.
•n-oiTj-T'/j-s(iroiT]-Ta-) maker, poet, irotca) (irow-) make.
'-*\ s*a\ -\ ^i + rdOXew (d0X€-) contend
aOX-n-r^-s (aOX-n-ra-) athlete, 1 s •
\ for a prize.
^k f dvT-avwv(tco (dvri +
avT-_av»vlo-T<,.S(avT-a1f»vl«r. I ' }
TO-) antagomst, ] \ ^.J
Suffix -ra-, H. 550 and a ; G. 833, 1.
294 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [277—
d. Xv-<ri-s (Xv-<ri-) loosing, from XVCD (Xv-, Xv-) loose.
€-<ri-) putting, position, TCOijju (6€-) put.
c.) birth,
(dva-pa-o-i-) 00- ) f dva-pcuvu> (dva + Pa-)
ing up, ] \ go up.
Trp6-<t>a-cri.-s (irpo-<|>a-cri-) pre-\ f irpo-<|>aCva> (irpo+<|>av-,
text, | \ <|>a-) show before.
4J-£ra-<ri-s (€{-€Ta-<ri-) re- ^ J €|-€TO^<O (ef + 4ra8-)
view, ) (. inspect. TO£I-S (TO£I- for Tav-crt-) ar- ")
ranyement,
irCo-Tt-s(mo-Ti-form9-Ti-)/a#&, ir€£9a> (iriO-) persuade.
Suffix -<ri-, -TI-, H. 551, 1 ; G. 834.
e. 5pd-|Aa (8pd-fi,aT-) deed, drama, from 8paa> (Spa-) do.
vpau,-u,a (vpau.-u.aT- for •vpad)- ")
r \ir r r i .vpadxo (vpa<b-) jiar-) writing, /
irpay-ixa (irpdv-uar-) thing}
done, «/«£•,
8€p-u,a (Scp-jiar-) Mde, Seipca (8€p-) /«?/, skin.
86v-u,a (8ov-uiaT- for SOK-) „ ,c N
r , v I,1". V 8oK€i (8oK-) seems 6es«. jiar-) resolution, J
(TTparcv-fxa (o-Tparev-jxaT-) "i f crrparcva) (orrpaTev-)
army, f \ make an expedition.
Suffix -nar-, H. 553, 1 ; G. 837.
- ")
TaTTW
/. TTcuSei'd (iraiScid-) education, from irai86va)(i
pacriXcid (pacriXeid-) kingdom, pa<riX€vw(pa<riX€u-)re^w.
Suffix -id-, H. 522, G. 836.
Denominative Nouns.
277. Words formed immediately from a noun (or adjec- tive) stem are called denominatives.
a. lirir€v»-s (iinr-€t>-) horseman, from i'-inro-s horse. Upcv-s (lep-€v-) priest, Up6-s sacred.
278]' FORMATION OF WORDS. 295
s, Hermes, mes-
v-) interpreter, senger of Zeus and
(. god of trade.
Suffix -€v-, H. 557, 1 ; G. 841.
b. iroXf-Ttj-s (iro\l-Ta,-) .citizen, from ir<5Xi-s city, state. TO|O-TT)-S (Tofo-To,-) bowman, rojo-v bow. 6-irXt-TTj-s (oirXl-TcL-) hoplite, 8-irXa arms.
Suffix -TCI-, H. 557, 2 ; G. 841.
c. xpv<r-£o-v (\p\5cr-io-) gold piece, from xpv<rd-s 0i]p-£o-v (Orjp-io-) beast, Orjp beast. Xwp-Co-v (xwp-to-) fortress, x«P°-s> ircS-Co-v (ircS-io-) plain, ircSo-v ground. ptpX-Co-v (Ptpx-io-) 6ooA:, p£pXo-s papyrus.
Suffix -to-, H. 558, 1 ; G. 844. Many diminutives have lost the diminutive meaning.
278. Denominative Adjectives.
a. dpxato-s (for dpxa-io-s) ancient, from apx^ (apxd-) beginning. 1 A0t]vato-s (for ' Ae^va-io-s) \ ( * A6fjvai ('Ae^vcL-) Ath-
Athenian, / \ 6ns.
pYos (dVpo-) (Lat. ager).
(for paa-iXcv-io-s) \ ( pacriXevs
kingly, f \ king.
MlX^jo-to-s (for MiXrjT-io-s) \ ( MfX-qros (MlX-qro-)
Milesian, f \ Miletos.
op0-io-s steep, opOos (op0o-) upright.
•iroX€|j,-io-s hostile, enemy, iroXcfxos (iroXcfjio-) war.
honorable, T^H-^ (TIJIO-) honor.
Suffix -io-, H. 564 with a and b ; G. 850.
b. pappap-iK6-s barbarian, from { PaPPaP0's (PapPapo-)
I foreigner.
6-s (for oapei-iKo-s) daric, < .
:6-s Hellenic, "TH\\r\v ('EXXr^v-) Greek.
296 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [279—
Ionic, "Iwv-cs (*Iwv-) lonians.
f Ilepo-n-s (Il€p<rd-)Per- »
j€v-iic6-s mercenary, ^vo-s(£€vo-) guest-friend.
Suffix -IKO-, H. 565 ; G. 851, 1.
^°"-€°-s) golden, from xpvo-6-s (xpvoro-) gold. (for va\K-€o-s) of} \ j / \ \-L
bronze, } X<***-« (X^KO-) bronze.
4>oivlKov-s (for <|>otviK-€o-s) \ / <|>oivij (<)>OIVIK-) pur-
purple-red, ] t pie-red dye.
Suffix -co-, H. 566 ; G. 852.
279. Denominative Verbs.
a. aft6-a> deem worthy, from a|io-s worthy. 8ovX6-w enslave, 8ov\o-s slave.
H. 570, 571, 1 ; G. 861, 3.
b. 8airava-a> expend, from Sairavr) expense. TcXcvTa-a) end, die, T€\€vH] end, death. ir€ipd-o|xai attempt, ircipa attempt.
accuse, alrCd cause, charge,
be worsted, TJTTWV ivorse.
H. 571, 2 ; G. 861, 1.
c. olK€*-a> dwell, inhabit, from ottco-s house. iro\€fi€-o> make war, iroXcjio-s war. Xcopc-o) withdraw, move, X"P°-s P^acc. eewp^-w view?, 0€<op6-s spectator.
H. 571, 3; G. 861, 2.
d. pao-iXcv-w reign, from paonXcv-s king.
) suspect, vir-o-rrrTj-s suspicious,
educate, irais
p^an, povX-/j
iruTT€v-w «rws^,' iricrrd-s faithful
FORMATION OF WORDS.
297
Kiv8vv€v-« be in danger, icCv8vvo-s danger.
ev-w make proceed, iropo-s passage.
hunt, 8rjp wild beast.
H. 571, 4 ; G. 861, 4.
e. cpC£« (for IpiS-iu) strive, from epis (epiS-) strife.
^o) (for <raXiriyy-u0) ) f o-dXm-yJ
trumpet, / t trumpet,
assemble, d0poo-s together.
H. 571, 5; G. 861, 6; 864.
/. •yvp.vdfcw exercise, from •yviivo-s naked.
d.Ti|ioLJ;<i> dishonor, arlpo-s without honor.
^a) wonder at, 6avjxa wonder.
H. 571, 6; G. 861, 5; 864.
280. Translate into Greek.
At my summons the Greeks assembled at Sar- dis ; for I intended to march with them against the king, but they did not suspect it. We traveled for many days through many large cities and prov- inces, crossing rivers and ascending mountains, 5
1. At my summons : gen. abs., I calling.
2. intended : use juAXw. — march : here (rrparei/o/xat ; for it is not merely the act of march- ing that is meant, but rather the making a military expedition.
3. but they: cf. 274, 17. tKeivoi. might be used, but would make the new subj. unduly prominent. — We traveled : use a connective in Greek.
4 f . for : expressed by the ace. of extent. — many large : the Greek would always say many and large. — cities and provinces : use re Kai.
5. crossing rivers and as- cending mountains : the Greek would contrast these phrases, which we merely coordinate. Put the nouns before the pples., to give them the same relative prominence as in English, and
298
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[280—
and the Greeks gladly obeyed their generals in everything. When we were at Kaystros Plain, the soldiers came again and again to my head- quarters and asked for their pay. I kept telling
10 them that I could not pay them until I got the
means ; but they saw that I was distressed, for it
is not like me not to pay my debts. But after
Epyaxa came, I paid them four months' wages.
At one town I held a general review. The Greeks
15 were drawn up and took position as is their custom for battle, each general arranging his own troops ; and when, as their line was advancing in a body, the Greek began to run, it was a fine thing to see
mark the contrast by ptv and 5£ Since certain definite rivers and mountains are had in mind, use the article. We thus get rods jj.tv 7TOTajuoi>s diapal- vovres tiri dt ra 6pi) dvapaivovrcs. 6 f . generals : H. 763 ; 764, 2; G. 1158, 1160.— in every- thing: Trdvra, cognate ace. — at: ev.
8. again and again: TroX- Xd/as. — my : use the personal pron. in the gen. For the position see H. 673, 6 ; G. 977, 1.
9. I kept telling : the Greek would indicate the contrast be- tween the new subject and that of the preceding sentence by expressing ty& and using 5<?, which will also properly con-
nect the sentence with the for- mer one. For kept telling use a single word in Greek.
10. could not : opt. H. 932, 2 ; G. 1487. Or the impf . ind. may be used, H. 936; G. 1489. — until : cf . trplv &v (ru/A/3ouXetf- (rijTcu 270, 29, and irplv /carcryd- 701 273, 15, with notes.
11. they saw that I -was : lit. / was plain being distressed.
12. my debts : lit. the things owed, pres. pass. pple. used substantively.
14. At one town: /cai ev nvL w6\€i. — general: lit. of all.
16. troops: omit.
17. as ... in a body : gen. abs.
18. the Greeks began to
281]
ANABASIS, /., <9, 1-12.
299
the fear of the Persians. There for the first time it became clear how much better soldiers these 20 Greeks are than my own people ; and with them as auxiliaries I think I shall be able to defeat Artaxerxes.
run : cf . 274, 30. — fine : fca\6s. — thing: omit.
19. for the first time:
20. how much : dat. sing. neut. (H. 781 ; G. 1184) of the indef. rel. that is correlative with foos. See H. 282 ; G. 429.
21 f. my own people : the
article with the gen. of the re- flexive pron. — with : either crtfv or exwi/ may be used.
22. as auxiliaries: put in apposition with the word for them. Do not use w's. — I shall be able : H. 940 ; G. 895, 2.
281. Anabasis, L, 3, 1-12.
1. ^vravOa epewe Kvpo? /cal 77 err par ta eiKoenv - ol jap crrpanwrai ov/c ecfracrav levai rov Trpocra) • VTTcoTrrevov jap rfSr) CTTL ftacriKed ievat, ' Se ov/c eirl TOVTCO €<fra(rav. 7r/ocoTO9 Se TOU? avrov o-Tpancord^ e/3m£eTO ievai * 5
alone, is virtually made a noun by prefixing the art. ; this phrase-noun is then treated as an ace. of extent or adverbial ace., or (as here) a gen. of place. H. 760, a ; G. 1138.
4. eirl TOVTW: on this basis; for this.— rrpwros: H.619,5; G.926.
5. avTov : note the position. So in 10. — €pidt€To: for deri- vation cf. 279, /. For tense see H. 832 ; G. 1255.
1. ^ivc : H. 607 ; G. 901.
2 f. OVK €(()a<rav : refused. Cf. 174, I., 19 and note. It was now plain that Cyrus's pretense about the Pisidians was false. The march had al- ready lasted three months, and they had passed directly by the Pisidians. — TOV -rrpoo-w : the adv. alone would have been sufficient. But sometimes an adv. , instead of being used
300
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[281—
ol Be avrov re e/3a\\ov KOI ra vTrotyyia ra eVel ap^aivro Trpoievcu. 2. KXe'a/r^o? Se rore filKpov €^€(f>vy€ pr) KaraTreTpcodijvai) vcrrepov S' Zyvco on ov Svvtfo-erai, ftiacracrQai, (rvvtfyayev € 10 criav rcov avrov (rrpancDTWv. fcal Trpcorov pev eSa-
ve 7TO\VV ftpOVOV 60-TC09 * Ol Se 0/3CO^T€9 €0CLV/Jia%OV
€(Tt,(i)7rQ)v • elra Se eXe^e rotate. 3. vA^S/?e? jJbrj OavfJid^ere on ^aXeTrw? <f>epa) rot?
6. epaXXov : supply \L6ois : lit. ^reio at (repeatedly) with stones.
7. ap£aivTo: indir. mid. H. 813 ; 816, 4 ; G. 1242, 2 and 3. <?7re£ is a rel. conj., and com- bined with the opt. mode of tLpZcLLVTo means whenever. Thus the clause implies the condi- tion if ever they began. This is a general condition referring to past time, and takes the opt. H. 890 ; 894, 2 ; 912 ; 913 ; 914, B, (2); G. 1393, 2; 1428, 1; 1431, 2.
8. juKpdv : H. 719 and b ; G. 1060. Translate barely escaped. — (jrij : H. 1029 ; G. 1615. The same idiom appears in older Eng. ; as, uYou may as well forbid the mountain pines | To wag their high tops and to make no noise" (Shakspere), where we find the modern and the Greek idiom combined.
9. Sryvw: recognized. — Svvfj- <r€T<u : retains the mode as well
as the tense of the dir. form. What he thought was otf dwri- crofjicu.
11. lo-n&s : peculiar 2d perf . act. pple. of i<rr?7/u, more com- mon than effTyKds. H. 336, 454, 244 and a ; G. 507, 508 ; 342. Translate, he stood and wept. Although the Greeks expressed their emotion more freely than we do, yet this action of the veteran soldier could not but excite attention and sympathy, as it was intended to do.
12. "Av8p€s : regularly used as a general form of respectful address, followed by the more particular title, as TroXtrcu, Si/ca- <rral ( judges) , or o-rpartwrai. Translate the second title only.
13. \LV\ Oav|j,a£€T€: the neg. /^, suggesting an exercise of will, shows that flav/xdfere is impv. instead of indie. H. 874 and a ; G. 1346. — xaXcirws <j>€p(o: am sorrowful, or de- pressed.
281]
ANABASIS, /., 3, 1-12.
301
Trapovo-L TTpaypacnv. e/Aol yap £ez/o? KCyjo? eyevero Kal fji€ favyovra e/c TT}? TrarpiSos rd re a\\a ert/i^o-e 15 Kal pipiovs €&a)K€ SdpeiKOV? • oft? eyco Aa/3&)i> ov/c e& TO tSiov Kare6e^r]v efjiol ovSe KaO^VTrdOrjaa^ a\V efc v/jid$ e&aTrdvtov. 4. Kal Trpwrov pev Trpbs roi>9
14. irpaYH-curi : H. 778 ; G. 1181. Translate the phrase, at the present situation.
15. rd aXXa: cf. /xl/cp6^ 8 and note.
16 f. |J,Vp(oVS €S(i)K€ 5dp€L-
KOVS : the effect of the order is to give considerable promi- nence to fjivplovs and edw/ce. In a lively or earnest style, such as this speech exhibits, a favor- ite way of ending a sentence in which the verb is accompa- nied by a dependent noun with an adjective modifier, is this arrangement : (1) adjective modifier, (2) verb, (3) depend- ent noun. — OVK €ls TO t8iov Ko.T€6l|AT]v ejjoC: did not lay up (lit. deposit) for my private advantage. Kar-e-d^-^v is in the ju-aor. mid. ind. 1st sing.
The entire conjugation of TlOtifu should be learned at this point. H. 349, 329, 333; G. 504, 506. Note carefully the following irregularities. (For future convenience it is well to put the references against the form, in the paradigm, which is explained.) (1) In the pres.
syst. rttfets, MOets, trlOei and the opt. riOolwv etc., H. 419, a ; G. 630. Accent of Tt0etVov, Titfef/xej', Ti0e?re, TiOeTev, rtOeTro, Ti0oto, H. 388 ; G. 131, 3. rl0€i, H. 415, & ; G. 753. TtOels (for Ti-0e-ir-s), H. 382, 56 ; G. 335 ; 131, 5. (2) In the /u-aor. the sing, of the ind. act. is wanting, and is supplied by the peculiar 1st aor. in -*a-, H. 432 ; G. 670. The other peculiarities of this system are described H. 443, a— e\ G. 802. Note particu- larly that e of the theme is not lengthened, and that OeTvai (for 6e-€vai) has the ending -emt, with which compare l-tvai and dovvai. (3) The perl act. rt- 6ei-Ka is wholly irregular for T^-6-rj-Ka ; and in fact Tt-0y-Ka etc. are the classical forms, rtOeiKa etc. not appearing in inscriptions before 100 B.C. There is a close resemblance in inflection between ri0rifu and 5£5o>/xi.
18 f. ISairavwv: note the change of tense. — irpos TOVS equiv. to rots 6/>?££. — in behalf of.
302
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[281—
eTroXefjirjcra, /cal virep TT}? 'EXXaSo?
20 pOVjJbTJV peff V/JL&V, €K TT)<$ X.eppOVr)(TOV CLVTOVS €%€-
\avvwv /3ofXo/>ceVoi;5 afyaipelaOai, rou? evoi/covvra? rrjv <yfjv. eTreiSrj Se KO/oo? eKaXei, \a/3a>v Vi Iva el TI Seotro axpeXoirjv avrov av6* &v ev €7ra0ov VTT e/ceivov. 5. ejrel Se v/juels ov 25 /3ov\€(T0€ crvfjuTropeveaffai,, avdy/ctj 81$ JJLOL rj uyita? rfj Kvpou <f)i\ia xpijaffai, rj TT/OO? eicelvov ' V/JL&V elvai. el fjuev Srj Sl/caia TTOL-
20 f . IJeXavvwv : in the orig- inal, not the secondary, mean- ing. — povXojAc'vovs : notice the agreement.
22. "EXXTjvas TTJV -yfiv: H. 724 ; G. 1069.
23. A TI S&HTO: what he thought was t&v n dfyrai (H. 898 ; G. 1403) ; this becomes opt. in the implied indir. dis- course because introduced by a past tense, tiropevbwv. H. 937 ; G. 1502. — W^€\O£T]V : H. 881 and a ; G. 1365, 1369.
24. dv0* wv : = avry ticelvajv & : in such phrases the antec. is regularly omitted when it is indef. — cv ciraBov : 7rd<rxw does not in itself imply an unpleas- ant feeling, but means merely experience something ; e& makes it clear that the experience was a pleasant one. Taken by it- self, then, the phrase e$ eiraBov is equivalent to had been well
treated (for tense see H. 837), and so takes the gen. of the agent with U7r6, like a pass. The entire clause must be trans- lated freely, in return for the \favors which I had received from him. — vjwis: emphatic, and so complimentary to the troops. The whole address is intended to tickle their sense of their own importance and so win their confidence, while suggesting that there are diffi- culties before them if they take this course, and barely hinting at the claims of honor.
25. dvcfyKT] : supply fart. — 8if : of course.
26. irpoSovra: cf. \ap6j>ra 273, 10. — <t>iXl£: H. 777; G. 1183. — xP^°"®at: f°r XP&effQai"> irreg. contraction. H. 412 ; G. 496. Translate enjoy.
27. el : whether, introducing an indir. question. Eng. if is
281]
ANABASIS, /., 3, 1-12.
303
OVK olSa, aiptfcrofjLai S' ovv vfjias /cal <rvv V/JLLV o rt, av Bey TreicrofJiaL. /cal ovTrore epel ovSels ft>9 eyco "}£\\r)vas dyaycbv els rovs /3ap/3dpov$, TrpoSou? 30 TOT)? f/EXX?7i>a9 rrjv rcov /3ap/3dpcov fyiXiav ei\6fjirjv. 6. aXX' eirel vaeis e/Jiol OVK etfeXere TreidecrOcu, crvv vfilv e^ofjLai /cal o TI av Sep Trelo-o/jiai. yap v/jias efjiol elvai /cal irarplSa /cal tf>t\ov? /cal o-vfi/jid^ov^ /cal <TVV vfjblv /J,ev av olfjiat, zivai rt/i^o? 35 OTTOV av c5, vjjicov Se 'eprj/Aos cov ov/c av iKavos olfiac elvai OVT av <f>i\ov QxfreXrjcrat, ovr av e^dpbv aXe^a- cr6ai. to? efjiov ovv IOVTO? OTrrj av /cal Vfjbels OVTQ>
often used in the same way. Observe that indir. questions do not take the subjv. in Greek.
28. otSa: learn the conju- gation, H. 491 ; G. 820. — alptf- <ro|iai : H. 816, 1 ; G. 1246.
29. '6 TI av S^TJ : supply Trdexeiv- For the mode see H. 912, 913, 916 (with example), 898 ; G. 1428, 1 and 2 ; 1434 ; 1403. — imo-ofj.o.1 : from ird<rxu ; the form from TrdBw would not yield a meaning suited to the context. — oviroT€ ovSeis : H. 1030 ; G. 1619. Cf. 274, 93 and note.
30. €ls: among, into the land of.
32. v>€is €jioC: put side by side for contrast. So in 34
i
33. crvv: omitinEng. £TTO- u takes either the simple dat.
of association (H.772; G. 1175) or the dat. with <rtv.
35. av: belongs with eli/at, which is thus shown to stand for a potential opt. H. 964 ; G. 1308. Cf. 7re/H7ei>6/>iej>os Av 270, 25 and note.
36 f. Sirov av w: cf. 8n &v dty 29 and note. — vjxwv: gen. of separation. H. 753, g\ G. 1139, 1140, 1112. The reminder that he is an exile is an appeal to their sympathy. — av Uavos otficu ctvat : cf . civ ol/xai rf/xtos 35. — OVT' av : this &v is merely a repetition of & v in 36 ; it adds nothing, except that it lends a slight emphasis to the preced- ing oUre. H. 864 ; G. 1312.
38. <os: belongs with the pple. — Ijiov IOVTOS: gen.
I where we might expect rather l tin ty& elfjit. — oirrj av Kal vp.€is :
304
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[281—
rr)V yvcojjirjv e^ere. 7. ravra elirev • ol Se 40 rat, 01 re avrov erceivov KOL ol aXXot ravra dtcovcrav- T€9 on ov $air) Trapa f3aa-i\ea TropeveaOai eiryveo-av • Trapa Se Bevlov KCU Hdalayvos 7r\elovs rf $icr')(t\ioi, XaySoVre? ra oVXa KOI ra o-/cevo<f)6pa eo-TparoTreo'ev- aavro Trapa K.\eap%ov. 8. Kvpo? Se TOVTOIS aTro-
45 pWV T€ Kal \V7TOV/Ji€VOS fjL€T€7T6/ji7r€TO TOV
6 Se levai fiev ov/c f)6e\e, \d6pa Se rwv TrefJLTrwv avrat a<yy€\ov e\€<y€ dappelv ct>9 ao/Jievcov TOVTCOV €t? TO Seov. fjieTaTre/jLTrecrOai, 8' €/ce\€vev avrdv aura? S' ov/c €(f)rj levai. 9. /juera Se 50 ravra o~vvayaja)V rovs 6* eavrov err pan cor a$ KOI
supply fr;re, and cf . 8 TL &v 29 and tiirov &v 36. Translate freely, Be quite sure therefore that I am going whichever way you do.
40. 01 re : for accent of the art. see H. 112, c ; G. 143, 4.— avTov: emphasizes ejceiVov, for which in Eng. use the proper name.
41. on : because. — ov : for position cf. OVK e^ao-av 2. — 4>atT] : what does the mode in- dicate ? — iropevWBeu : like ibv- TOS 38 and Uvai 2, fut. in mean- ing. So in Eng. am going. — €irrfv€crav : see eiraivtu. For the retention of e at the end of the theme cf. AcaX^w, ^/cdXecra.
44. irapd K\4apxov : ace. be- cause of the motion implied in the verb.
46. TWV crrpaTuoTwv : gen. of separation with \d6pg.. H. 756; G. 1150.
47. €\€-y€ 6app€iv: told him to be of good courage. Only in this sense of bid does X<?7a> in the act. ordinarily admit the inf. in classical prose. — o>s : in- dicates that the following gen. abs. is Klearchos's statement. Translate, assuring him that this matter would be settled in the right way.
48. (i€Tair€ji,'rr€o-0ai : thetense denotes repetition : keep send- ing for. The object was to make it appear to the soldiers that Klearchos was really at enmity with Cyrus.
50. 6* : for re. H. 79, 82 ; G. 48, 92.
281]
ANABASIS, I., 3, 1-1
305
rou9 7rpoo-€\06vTa$ aurc3 /eal TWV aXXcov TOV
fjievov, eXe^e rotaSe. "Az/Spe9 crrpaTiwrai, ra /JLCV
Srj Kvpov 8rj\ov OTL 01/70)9 G^CL 7rpo9 ^7/ia9 axTTrep
TCL rjfJLerepa irpos e/ceivov • ovre yap ^pel? e/cewov
€TL (TTpaTLtoTaL) eirei rye ov (rvveTro^eOa avrq), ovre 55
e/ceZz/09 €TL fjplv fjnaOoSorrj^. OTL ^evro
vo/jii^ei, v<f>* rjfjL(f)v olSa ' 10. &crre Kal
fjuevov avrov OVK e0e\co e\6elv9 TO /J,ev
ala"xyv6ii€vo<$ OTL crvvoLSa €/j,avTq> TTCLVTCL e
CLVTOV, €7T€LTa Kal Se&w fjirj \a/3d)v fie BLK^JV €7TL0rj 60
51. avr^ : dat. after Trpos- m
TTpO(T€\66vTaS. TOV POV\O|1€VOV :
any one icho desired.
52 f . TO, Kvpov : the relation of Cyrus, subj. of 6x«. — 8f]\ov 8n : virtually = an adv. 5iJXws. In the original construction 5^- \6v ten was the principal clause, with a 8n clause as its subj. Next 5ij\ov 8ri, with tcrrl omitted, was used par- enthetically, as here. — OVTWS
€X€l : Cf. €VVOi'K&S €XOL€V 256, 5
and note. Translate, the re- lation of Cyrus to us is evi- dently (5iJ and S^Xov 8n to- gether) the same as ours to him.
55. Y€: cannot here be translated; at least is too clumsy. In actual speech the e was elided before a vowel, so that the word did not even make a separate syllable.
56. jtwr0o8oTtis : that their pay has stopped is merely the first of the disadvantages sug- gested as resulting from their changed relation to Cyrus. — d8iK€io-0ai: since no subj. is expressed, while one is required, it must be the same as that of the governing verb. H. 940 ; G. 895, 2.
57 f. Kal p.€rair€|xirofj,€vov av- TOV : even though he keeps send- ing for me. H. 969, e and Rem. ; 971, c; G. 1663, 6; 1568. — TO ptva-Tov: chiefly; H. 626, 6; G. 915.
59. alcrxvvofj.€vos : from shame. H. 969, b and Eem. ; G. 1563, 2. — 4|iavTw : dat. after <rvv- in avvotda. — i\|/€vo*|i€vos : supplementary pple. agreeing with the subj. H. 982 and a ; G. 1578, 1590.
60. €ir€iTd : correl. with pAv
306
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[281—
vofjLi%ei VTT efjiov rjSi/cfjcrffai. 11. efjbol ovv So/eel &pd elvai rjjJilv /caOevSeiv ovS* afJbe\elv rjfjiwv &v, d\\a (3ov\evecr6ai o TL %prj nroielv CK TOVTCOV. /col 60)5 re fjievofjiev avrov cr/ceTrTeov yuoi Sofcei 65 OTTO)? a(7(f)a\eo'TaTa fjuevov/Aev, el re rjSTj Bofcel evai, OTTO)? acr^aXecrrara aTTifJbev, KOI 6V&>5 ra 67
avev jap TOVTCOV OVTC crTpaTrjyov cure o^>e\o5 ovBev. 12. 6 8' avrjp TroXXoO
58. — SeStws : cf . note on at<rxv- vb/jLevos, 59. — jxrf : lest, that. — 8iKT]v : punishment. — liriOfj : H. 887 ; G. 1378.
61. wv : for Toirrwp &j cf. avd' wv 24 and note. TOVTWV would depend on dlicy • since the antec. is omitted, the rel. is made to depend on dticrjv, in- stead of being left in its proper construction, the cognate ace. with ijdLKrj(T0ai. H. 996, a, (2) ; G. 1031, 1032. Translate, pun- ishment for the wrongs he thinks he has received from me. — 8oK6i : impers., to me therefore it seems to be no time.
62 f. TJJIIV: H. 767; G. 1165.
— Ka0€v8civ: depends on a>'/>a. H. 952; G. 1521. — w&v a*- TWV: H. 742; G. 1102. — POV- Xe v€cr0ai : supply doKeT wpa elvai.
— '6 TI: here indir. interrog., not indef. rel. as in 29 and 33. We use what in both senses. 6 TI xpy Troie'iv is the indir. form of rl xpi) TroLfTv ; which is equiv-
alent to rl Troi&pev ; with the deliberative subjv. — CK TOVTWV : "next, expressing time (se- quence) with an implied idea of consequence, in considera- tion o/, in consequence o/, the present circumstances."
64. avTov: adv., here. Cf. TTOU, TTOU, which were originally genitives. — O-KCTTTCOV : verbal from (r/c&rTojucu. For the for- mation, H. 475 ; G. 776, 1 and 3. For the syntax, H. 988, 990; G. 1594, 1597.
65. SITUS |j.€vovfx€v: an ex- cellent illustration of the way in which purpose clauses (H. 880, 885 ; G. 1362, 1372) arise from the indir. question and indef. rel. clause. — SOK€I : seems best; commonly called impers., but really having airitvat as subj.
66. airijiev : fut. in mean- ing, parallel with ^evov^ev and
68. iroXXov: H. 753, /; G.
ANABASIS, L, 3, 13-21.
307
KOI
v KOI
vavTiicr)V r\v Traz/re? /a)<? opw/JLev re /ca KOI yap ouSe Trdppa) So/covfjuev /JLOL av- rov tcadrjcrOai. &are &pd Xeyeiv o TL n apicrrov elvcu. ravra eiTrtov eVaucraro.
- 70
1135. — |*4v : here stands within the phrase (TroXXou d^tos 0fXos) which is contrasted with xa^e-
69. <o av (JH\OS -Q: implies the condition £av <f>l\os y. H. 765 ; 912 ; 913 ; 914 ; B. (1) ; 894, 1 ; G. 1174 ; 1428 ; 1431, 1 ; 1393, 1. So (f SLV iroMfjLios y.
72 f . ov8€ : here adverbial, slightly emphasizing -n-bppu. — SoKov|i€v |ioi : we should use the impers. construction. The mild form of statement, as if
the fact which is obvious to all were doubtful, makes all real- ize more forcibly the signifi- cance of the fact. — avrov : gen. of separation with irbppu. — Ka9fjo-0cu : to be encamped. Learn rj^an and KdOrjfjLcu, H. 483, 484 and a; G. 814-816. — wpd : supply tarl. — X£y€iv : cf. KaOevdetv 62. — •yryvwo-Kei : judges, Lat. sentit. Note that the ind. is here used, not the subjv. Although 6 TL and rls are indef . , the time is not.
282. Anabasis L, 3, 13-21.
13. 'EA; Se rovrov avitTTawro ol pev e/c TOV avro- /JLCLTOV, Xe^oi/re? a eylyvcocr/cov^ ol Se /ecu VTT e/celvov
oid ellrj r) airopid avev
yvdxTKw frequently means form a judgment, and hold an opin- ion.
3. oi'd : the Greek is inclined to speak of the quality of things, as here (lit. of what sort) , where we think rather of the magni-
1. IK TOVTOV: cf. e/c TOVTWV 281, 63. — dvto-TavTo : force of the tense ?
2. \€'£ovT€s: H. 969, c; G. 1563, 4. — €^ryvcocrKOV : really thought, as opposed to those who are next mentioned. 71-
308
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[282—
r?79 Kvpov jvca/Ar]? fcal fjueveiv /cal dirievai. 14. el? 5 Se Srj eZvre, TrpoaTroiov/Jievos (TTrevSeiv co? rd^iara 7rop€V€cr@at, €£9 rrjv 'EXXaSa, arparrjyov^ /jiev eXe- >9 ra^(7Ta, e/ yu/^ /BovXerai KXea/^09
\P»>5 /C>J> / 4* /I fO>?» X
ra o eTTirrjoet, a^opa^ecruai — i] 6 ayopa rjv ev TW /3ap/3apt,/cq) arparev/jLarL — /cal ava/cevd- 10 £ecr0ai • eXOovras Se KO/ooz/ alrelv TrXom, 009 avro- 7r\€oi€V • eaz/ Se yu/^ S^SoS raura, rjye/Jidva alrelv TLvpov oc7T^9 S^a <f)i\tds 7-779 %<w/3«9 aTrd^ei. eav Se
tude (Tio^ great), or content ourselves with the less definite
4. THS Ktfpov -yvcofx-qs: Cfy- rws's consent. — (xmiv, airUvai : depend on airopla. Cf. X^yeip 281, 73 and note.
5. 8rj: in particular.
6 f . 4X.€<r0ai : the mode shows that elTre 5 was used in the sense of bade, told them. Cf. e\e7e 0appeii> 281, 47 and note. — pov- X€TCU : the form of the dir. dis- course retained. Observe that simple conditions take the in- die., as in Eng. and Lat.
8 f . ij 8c d^opd . . . (TTpaTev- jxan : not part of the speech, but thrown in parenthetically by Xenophon to show the man- ifest and intentional absurdity of the proposal.
10 f. diroir\&H€v: H. 881; G. 1365.
11. alr€iv : the force of elTre 6 still continues.
12. SO-TIS : has for its antec. not Kvpov but the more em- phatic yye/jibva. — (jnXids : the predicate position (H. 594, 6 ; 670 and a ; G. 971-973) and place of emphasis make the meaning very different from that of 5ta T?}S (fitXlds %c6/oas, or 5i<i <j>i\las %cfy>as. Lit. would lead them back through the land friendly / that is, render the land friendly through which he was to lead them. This form of predication is a slight exten- sion of the usage seen in such familiar sentences as, He wipes his face dry. The fact that a guide given by Cyrus was lead- ing them would render the population friendly, elxov ras
CL(TTr[§aS ^KK€KA\VfJL^VOL3 274,
20 ff., exhibits nearly the same construction. — dirogci : H. 911 ; G. 1442. The clause is essen- tially the same in character as tfnrws pevovfAev 281, 65.
ANABASIS, I., 3, 13-21.
309
Se
o>, crvvTaTreo-Oai, rrjv
rakri'^ro^evov^ ra dfcpa, OTTCO? /-ir; <fr0dcrco(ri ^re KOpo? /i^re 06 Ki\i,K6$ tcaraXa- 15
/30Z>T€9, WI/ TTOXXOV? KOi TToXXa %prjp,aTa 6%Ofji€V
dvrjpTT a/core^. ofiro? /*<ez> roiavra elire • fjuera Se TOVTOV K\eap^o9 eZvre TOCTOVTOV. 15. '-fl? //<ez/ arpa- e/^e ravrrjv rrjv crrparri^idv yu-^Sel?
13 f. n^8^: adv. Translate, i/ /ie should not give them a guide either, or, i/ ^e should refuse to give them a guide too.
— <nivTaTT6<r0at, ir€'ju|s<u : the force of elTre 5 still continues.
— TTJV TaxCo-TTjv: H. 719, a, 3d line ; G. 1060, 2d example. Cf . T^\V rax^TT/j/ odbv 274, 44 f.
14. •irpOKaTaX'qt|/ojJL€vovs: note the force of each element. We need not suppose that the Greek reader supplied dvdpas or any such word ; the ending -ous ex- presses the idea of dvSpas dis- tinctly enough, just as in TTO\- \ovs in the next line. For tense cf. \t£ovTes 2 and note. There is no more emphasis on &Kpa than on irpo- : to seize the heights in advance (first).
15 f . <|>6curaxri : pi. because the subj. is at first thought of as general ; it is then divided up into Kupos and oi K/Xt/ces. — Kara\apo'vT€s : supplementary pple. with 00d<rw<rt agreeing with the subj. H. 984 ; G. 1586.
For tense cf . I5ov<ra 274, 35. — «v: relates to KJXi/ces, and de- pends on TroXXous and x/^A«*Ta. — €\O|X€v dvt]pTraKOT€S : each word has its full ordinary force. Translate freely, many of whom we hold as prisoners along with much of their property that we have carried off. Observe the change to the dir. discourse. In the preceding indir. quota- tion /SovXercu 7, 5i5<? 11 and 13, d7rd£ei 12, and tpSfowi 15 are in the same form as in the dir. This gives a liveliness of tone that leads up to the change in
€X<>fJ<€V.
18 f. TOO-OVTOV : only so much. The sets of correl. prons. and advs. (H. 282, 283 ; G. 429, 436) should gradually be thoroughly learned. — «s <rTpaTTiyr{<rovTa €(X€: ace. abs., a not infrequent construction in Xenophon. H. 973, 974 ; G. 1569, 1570. The gen. abs. <Js (TTpaTr)yr)<rovTOS C/JLOV would have had the same meaning. Cf. ws
310
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[282—
20 \€J€T(O ' TTOXXa <ydp €VOpO) &i a €/JLOi TOVTO OV TTOLrj-
Teov • <i)9 Se rc5 dvSpl ov av €\rjcr6e TrelcrofJiai f Svva- TOV ^aXiarra, riva el&rjTe on /cal dp^eadai ^i <W9 T£9 fcal aXXo9 fjbd\io~ra dvOpcoTrcov. 16. TOVTOV aXXo9 dvecrTrj) eiT&eiicvvs fjiev rrjv 25 TOV ra 7r\ola alrelv /ceXetoz^T099 coo-Trep 7rd\iv TOV crTO\ov Kvpov TToiov/jievoV) €7riS€i/cvv$ Se a>9
tfJLOV ofiv loVTOS . . . OVTbJ T7]V yvd)- /J.r)V €X€T€ 281, 38 f. 0-TpaTT]-
•yCdv: cognate ace. Translate, Let no one of you speak in the belief that I (note the emphatic form <?ju<Q will be general in this campaign.
20 f. €H,O(: H.991; G. 1597. — iroiT]T€Ov : supply fort. — o>s 8e': though correl. with ws ptv 18 in form and in thought, cos does not here have the same office as above, but is declara- tive, equivalent to tin. The clause depends upon a verb like tare be assured, in the mind of the speaker, — the op- posite of fjurjdels Xe7^rw, which suggests it. — imcrofjLcu : from ireiOw or Trda^w ? — TJ 8vvar6v fjLcxXi<TTa : cf . rj tdvvaro rdx^rra 273, 29 f.
22. elSiJTe: do not confuse the forms from o!5a (^5r/, ei'Sa), eideiyv, foOi, ddtvai, e/5c6s) and those from eidov (f5w, ?5o/u, tdt, ideip, id 6 »>). Though derived from the same root, the forms
and meanings are entirely dis- tinct.
23. COS TIS . . . dvOpCUTTCOV :
lit. as any one else also of men most; that is, as well as any one else whatever.
25 f ; TOV . . . K€\€VOVTOS I
translate by a rel. clause. — wcnrrep Kvpov iroioufuvou : gen. abs., uxrirep denoting a com- parison, which we must denote by as if, although the Greek phrase does not imply a condi- tion : just as if Cyrus were making his expedition back again, a slightly humorous way of saying giving up his pro- ject and marching back, as he would have to do if he assented to the demand. — ciriSeiicvvs Se : cf. rpiaKoatovs fttv, TpiaKocrlovs 5t 273, 24 and note. We may give the effect of ptv and 5<* combined with the repetition by saying, pointing out on the one hand . . . and on the other hand. — o>s : there is nothing in the context to determine which
ANABASIS, L, 3, 13-21.
311
eirj rjye/jLova alrelv jrapa rovrov q> \v/jLaivdfJi€0a rrjv 7rpa%iv. el Se /cal TO> rjye^ovi incrrev cro /JL€V bv av K£y>o9 So3, ri Kco\V€L teal ra d/cpa rjfjblv K€\eu€iv Kvpov 7rpofcara\a/3eiv ; 17. eyco yap 6/cvolrjv fjuev 30 av et9 ra rr\ola epftaiveiv a rjfuv £0/77, fjirj 77/^9 rat? rpiripeai /caraSvcry, (frofioi/JLrjv S' av roS rjyefjiovi, cS Solrj €7T€a-0a^ firj 77^9 aydyrj oOev OVK ecrrai
shade of meaning is intended here, that which we express by that, or the one which we ex- press by ftow. The Greek did not distinguish them, but we are obliged to do so.
27. irapd TOVTOV : instead of the ace. of the person, which was used in 10. — § : dat. of disadvantage ; we say whose en- terprise.— \v(iatvo'fx€0a: sudden change to the dir. form, as in 16.
28. €t irurT€v<ro|X€v : H. 893, c; G. 1391.
29. TJHIV : dat. of advantage.
30. Kvpov : obj. of supply r} pas as subj. of
The sentence is ironical, the thought being, If we are to assume that he will be so kind as to give us a guide in order to make our return safe and easy, we might as well trust his good nature a little farther and ask him to occupy the heights in order to defend us from the Cilicians ; of course he would do neither, — 4-yw
•yap : introduces the reason for the statement in the previous section, that it was silly to talk of asking such favors of the man whom they were injuring. In Eng. it is more idiomatic to begin this sentence without for, leaving the causal relation to be understood.
31 f. a SoCrp implies the condition el afca Sofy, H. 917, 900 ; G. 1436, 1408. — rats Tpirf- p€<ri : with his war-ships, dat. of means. — KaraStKrn : cf . tiri0y 281, 60 and note. — <f>of3oCjn]v 8* av: correl. with dKvot-rjv ^v &v 30 f. The two synonyms differ but little here, although <f>o^oLfjLf)v is stronger, and the order is similar to that in 24 and 26. — $ : attracted (H. 994 ; G. 1031) to the case of ^ye^vi, for which cf. <rbi> ifuv 281, 33 and note, also avrf 281, 55.
33. SofTj: cf.«oMl. — 80€v: the antec. (<?/cet<re) is omitted, being indef . — O$K Ko-rai : it will be impossible.
312
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[282—
Oelv • ftov\ol/ji'r)v S' av CLKOVTOS cnritov Kvpov \a6elv 35 avrbv a7re\6(i)v • o ov Svvarov ecrriv. aXX' €700 ravra p,ev <f*\vapia$ elvai • 18. So/cei Se /JLOL e\66vTd<s 777909 Kvpov, o'irives eTrtT^Setot, avv epcorav eicelvov TI j3ov\€rai r^pZv %pf](rOai, • /cat eav /Jiev r) Trpagis y TrapaTr^rjaia o'lairep KOI 40 irpbcrOev e^prjro rofe ^ez/ot?, eirecrOai KOI rj/uas fcal /j,rj Kcuciovs elvai T&V irpoa'Oev rovra) crvvava/3dvTO)v 19. lav Se /Jielfav r] Trpafy^ T% TTpocrdev
34 f . aKOvros : put with Ku- poi/. — XaGeiv avrov : shows the primary meaning of \av0dvw and the common construction with it. The emphasis falls upon &KOVTOS and \a0etV. — dircX- 0«v: nowise different, except in tense, from diritbv. With \av0dvw and QOdvu the supple- mentary pple. regularly has the same tense as the finite verb ; with TU7xd^w the pple. com- monly agrees in tense, but there are many exceptions. Cf. <j>0d(rt*)<ri Kara\a(36vT€s 15 f. ; also Tpe<j>6fjL€i>ov tXdvOave and wv trvyxave 270, 20 f. Trans- late, I should like, if I go away without Cyrus's con- sent, to go without his know- ing it.
36. 8oK€i |ioi : it seems best to me, the subj. being the clause beginning with dvdpas and end- ing with Pov\€ve<r0ai 48, in which the leading infinitives are tyw-
rav, ^7T€(T0aL, elvai, d%iovv, dway- 7e?Xcu, (3ov\ev€<r0ai.
37. €iriTT]8€ioi : has here its primary meaning, suitable ; the meaning seen in &rn-^5eia 8 is secondary, and is found only in the neut. pi.
38. T(: cognate ace. with Xpi)<r0ai, what use he wishes to make of us.
39. lav if: the condition refers to fut. time ; if the en- terprise proves to be. — ot$ircp : we should expect ticdvy yvircp ; instead of that the antec. is omitted, though it is here defi- nite, and the rel. of quality used (cf. note on oi'a 3) in the case of the omitted antec. ywrep or o'ldvirep would have had with txpfjro the same construction as rl 38.
40. irpoVOev: the journey mentioned in 225, 8 ff.
42. Ttis irpoV0€v : supply
ANABASIS, I., 3, 13-21.
313
Kal €7ri7TOVQ)T€pd KOl €7UKl,vSvVOT€pd) d^LOVV Tj
cravra fjfjbds ayeiv rj TreiaOevra Trpo? <j>i\idv afylevau • ovro) yap KOI eTrofievoi av <f>l\ot, aura) /ecu Trpodv/jioi, 45 €7rol/ji€0a Kal cnrLovTes do"0aXw9 av aTrioi^ev • o TL 8' av 7T/009 ravra Xey?; aTrayyeiXai, Sevpo • 97/^9 S' nrpos ravra j3ov\ev€crdaL. 20. eSo^e fcal dvSpas e\djji€vot, avv KXea/o^ft) Treyu/Trof- i/, ot rjpcorcov Kvpov ra Sd^avra rfj a-rparia. 6 8* 50 OTI a/covoi 'Aftpo/cdfjidv €%0pbv avBpa eirl
43 f . ireicravTa. TTCLG 0evra : agree with Kupoi> understood, subj. of dyeiv and d0i^j/at. His readiest means of persuading the soldiers would of course be an offer of higher pay ; this is what is hinted at in TreLo-avra. — irpos <|>iX£dv : in friendship. We may give the general effect of the parallelism of the sen- tence thus: that they should ask that he either win our con- sent before leading us on, or let us go in friendship with his consent. — d<jnevcu: from d<j>iri- /u. The form from #7rei/u go away would be air^vai. Learn the conjugation of ITJIJU, H. 476 ; G. 810. Note the resemblance to, and the few differences from TWyfju, which should be thor- oughly reviewed with fy/u. The long I in the pres. reduplication is irregular.
45. €iropi€voi; translate as
if it were e£ tirol^a. So d7ri6jTes as if it were el dirioi-
fUV.
47. Sevpo : instead of tvBdde (here) because of the motion implied in dirayyc'tXai.
48. irpos ravra : with refer- ence to this. — €'8ofj€ TavTa : this was agreed to. e5o£e is regu- larly used to denote the passage of a resolution. For the time being the Greek army has be- come a mass-meeting, in which proposals are made, advocated by speeches, and put to vote ; the question is decided by majority of hands raised, and the minority submit. This pro- cedure was as familiar to the democratic states of Greece as to us ; indeed it originated among them.
50. Td 86£avTa: the ques- tions agreed upon. — -rjj <rrpa- TI£ : indir. obj. of d6%avra.
314
THE GREEK OF XENOPHON.
[282—
TO) EtV(f)parrj Trora/Jiq) elvai, a^re^ovra Sct)Se/ca araO- 7T/30? TOVTOV ovv €(f>r) /3oi\€<rO(u e\0elv • KCLV e/cei, rrjv Sl/c^v e</>?? Xpy&iv € 55 eav Se <j>v<yrj) rjpels e/cel TT/OO? ravra
21. afcovaavres Se ravra ol alperol a7rayye\\ov(7L T069 o-TparitoTais • Tofc Se VTTO^id fji€V r]V fin, dyoi 7T/009 /3a<7tXea, oyLto)9 Se eSd/cei eireaOat,. Trpoaai- TOLO-L Se fjbiaOov • 6 Se Kvpos VTrior^velrai rjjjiiokiov 60 Trdcri Saxreiv ov Trporepov efapov, avrl Sdpei/cov rpia rov /Jirjvbs rcS arpaTKOTrj • on Se €7rl ayoi oi>Se evrai/Oa rjKovcrev ovSels ev <ye rc3
52. etvai : CLKOVCO, like opdw, at<r0dvofjiai, o?5a, takes the sup- plementary pple. more often than the inf. The inf. proba- bly marks the statement more distinctly as an indir. speech, that is, as a matter of mere hearsay.
53. K5,v : for /cai ^a v, by era- sis, H. 76 and b ; G. 42.
54. Vf: cf. note on y 39. The condition is of the same sort as in <j>vyr) 55.
55. TJfwts : again the change to the more lively dir. form.
57. TOIS 8€ viroxl/Cd TJV : = ol
58 f. TrpocrcuTovo-i jjucrOov : lit. demand pay in addition. We put the idea of irpos- in the form of a modifier of />u- <r6bv, and say, demand higher pay.
60. ov: for TOVTOV o: gen. after ^/u6\ioj/, which has a com- parative force, a half more. — €<|>€pov : were receiving.
61. rpCa TJfuSapciKa : we say a daric and a half.
62 f . cv *y€ rep cj>av€pw : this expression makes it evident that some, probably most, un- derstood pretty well what the real purpose of Cyrus was.
285] SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 315
USES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE.
283. All the common uses of the subjunctive and opta- tive have now been illustrated and should at this point be thoroughly reviewed. To assist in this, summaries are here given, with references to the Grammar. The pupil should collect out of the text as many examples of each construc- tion as possible. The uses of these modes can easily be so learned at this point that they will give no serious trouble hereafter.
284. The Subjunctive.
1. In Principal Clauses.
a. Hortative. H. 866, 1; G. 1344.
b. In prohibitions, in the aorist only. H. 866, 2; G. 1346.
c. Deliberative. H. 866, 3 ; G. 1358.
2. In Subordinate Clauses.
a. Denoting pure purpose. H. 881 ; G. 1365.
b. After expressions of fear. H. 887 ; G. 1378.
c. In conditions
(1) of the present general form. H. 894, 1 ; G. 1393, 1.
(2) of the future more vivid form. H. 898 ; G. 1403. Also in relative clauses implying such conditions. H. 912,
913 ; G. 1428 ; 1431, 1 ; 1434.
d. With coos and other words signifying until, and with irpw before, until, when they imply expectation. H. 921, 924 ; G. 1465, 1469.
285. The Optative.
1. In Principal Clauses.
a. In wishes, referring to future time (without av). H. 870; G. 1507.
316 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [W6—
b. Potential (with Sv). H. 872; G. 1327.
So in conclusions of less vivid future conditions. H. 900 ; G. 1408. 2. In Dependent Clauses.
a. Denoting pure purpose, after past tenses. H. 881; G. 1365.
b. After expressions of fear, after past tenses. H. 887 ; G. 1378.
c. In conditions
(1) of the past general form. H. 894, 2 ; G. 1393, 2.
(2) of the future less vivid form. H. 900 ; G. 1408. Also in relative clauses implying such conditions. H. 912,
913 ; G. 1431, 2 ; 1436.
d. With cws and other words signifying until, and with Trpw before, until, when they imply expectation, after past tenses. H. 921, 924 ; G. 1465, 1469.
e. In indirect discourse, after past tenses. H. 932, 2 ; 937 ; G. 1481, 2; 1502.
Observe that those uses of the optative which involve the principles of indirect quotation (namely, a, b, d, e under 2) are permissive only, not required. The forms of direct speech may be retained after past tenses, and are retained in nearly half the cases. To retain them gives the same effect of liveliness which is produced by the historical present, or by the sudden changes from indirect to direct form in prin- cipal clauses.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES, INDIRECT DISCOURSE.
286. All common forms of conditional sentences have been illustrated, except those contrary to reality. With some classes it may be well to postpone the connected review of these sentences until later ; but in any case, as soon as the forms yet lacking occur, the entire subject should be
286] INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 317
reviewed as presented in H. 889-900, 912-918 ; G. 1381-1420, omitting the paragraphs in the smallest type and the less important paragraphs in type of the second size.
In the same way should be reviewed the subject of indi- rect discourse as presented in H. 928-937, 946; G. 1475- 1503, 1522, 1523.
NOTE. — In the Greek-English vocabulary the theme of each verb is given in parenthesis immediately after the first form; next follows the class to which the present belongs, unless it is of the variable-vowel class. Under most compound verbs the theme is given as a compound of the preposition and the simple theme; for the principal parts look under the simple verb. The derivation or composition, when known, is generally indicated in square brackets [ ] just before the translation. This matter is so given that the student can trace the successive steps in word -formation more precisely than in most vocabularies or dictionaries. For example, it is indicated that e7ri/3ovAevo> is a compound of CTTI and /3ovAevo>, that /SovAeuw is formed from povAr?, and ]8ouA^ from 0ov'Ao/uai. Unless care is taken in clear cases to impress upon students the historical order of word-formation, the whole subject of etymology is likely to appear a mass of guess-work, and so be of little use and some positive harm. In cases of doubt of course the matter should not be pressed. Words which occur only in Part I. are treated less fully than the others. The English-Greek vocabulary is complete for the Exercises that precede the beginning of the Anabasis. The additional words needed for the four exercises based on the early sections of the Anabasis are not included, because it is better for the student to accustom himself to rely, for such words, upon the Greek text.
The following abbreviations are used in the book, with some others that need no explanation.
act. = active, adj. = adjective, adv. = adverb, antec. = antecedent, aor. = aorist. app. = apposition, art. = article, cf . = confer, compare, cl. = class.
comp. = comparative, conj. = conjunction, correl. = correlative, decl. = declension, dem. = demonstrative, dep. = deponent, dir. = direct, e.g. = for example. Eng. = English, equiv. = equivalent, f ., ff. = following, fut. = future. i.e. = that is. impers. = impersonal, impf . = imperfect, impv. = imperative, indef . = indefinite, indie. = indicative, indir. = indirect, inf. = infinitive, interr. = interrogative.
318
intr. = intransitive.
Lat. = Latin.
lit. =* literal, literally.
mid. = middle.
neg. = negative.
obj. = object.
opt. = optative.
p., pp. = page, pages.
pass. = passive.
pass. s. = passive suffix.
perf . = perfect.
pers. = person.
plup. = pluperfect.
pple. = participle.
pred. = predicate.
prep. = preposition.
pres. = present.
priv. = privative.
pron. = pronoun.
red. = reduplication.
rel. = relative.
subj. = subject.
subjv. = subjunctive.
subst. = substantive.
sup. = superlative.
syst. = system.
trans. = transitive.
t. s. = tense suffix.
var. vow. = variable vowel.
vocab. = vocabulary.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
A.
s, -a (H. 149; G.
188, 3, end), 6, Abroko-
mas.
"ApvSos, -ov, -f), Abydos. d-yaOos, -•(], -6*v, good. Comp.
d|i€(va)v, pcXrtwv. KpeiTTcov,
sup. apurros, P^XTWTTOS, Kpd-
TKTTOS.
d-yajxat (d-ya-, root cl. , H. 404 ;
G. 619), Tfydo-Oiiv, admire. ayy&Xca (dyy€\-, i-cl., H. 399 ;
G. 593), d^€\w, ti
0i]v, announce, report. d-yy€\os, -ov, 6, messenger. d*yopa, -as, T|, [d-yeCpw assem-
ble^assembly ; market-place,
market. d^opdt«(dYopa8-, i-cl., H. 398 ;
G. 584, 585, 587),
buy. (Cf. our verb mar- ket.)
a-ypios, -a, -ov, [<rypos field, country'], wild.
aY« (d-Y-), a{w, rj-ya-yov (H.
436; G. 535), fa*, TO"",
TJxBtjv, drive, lead. d-ywy6s, -ov, 6, [<vy«], leader,
d-ywv, d-ywvos, 6, [<rya>], con- test.
d-yci)v^o|iai, [d-ywv], struggle, engage in a contest.
d8€\<|>6s, -ov, 6, brother.
dSiK€o> (dSiK€-), dSiKTjo-co, etc., [dSiKos], injure, wrong.
aSiKos, -ov, [a priv., 8CKT]], un- just, wrong.
drip, a€pos, 6, air.
*A9f]vai, -«v, at, Athens.
'AO-qvatos, -a, -ov, [*A6f}vai], Athenian.
d9\T]TT|s, -ov, 6, athlete.
a6\ov, -ov, TO, prize.
, -ov, 6, athletic game. w (dBpotS-, i-cl., H. 396, 398 ; G. 579, 584, 585, 587), d0pot<ra>, TjOpoura, TJGpoiKa, T]0pour|Aai, T|0poCo-0i]v, [d0po- os together'], assemble, mus- ter, (trans.) ; dir. mid. as- semble (intr.).
319
320
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
Alvidves. -«v, ol, Ainidnes or
Aenianians,m southwestern
Thessaly. alp€Tos, -i\, -6v, verbal of alpe'w ;
ol alperoi, the men chosen,
the committee. alp€a> (alpe-, 4X-), alpt]o-a>,
€lXov, (8X«, etc., H. 359, a ;
G. 537 and 2), TJ'pTjica, TJ'pt]-
}iai,.T)p€0'qv, seize, ta&e; in-
dir. mid., choose, elect. alo-0dvojiai (ato-9-, alcrO-r]-, nas.
cl., H. 402, 6; G. 603,605),
alo-0Ticrop.au flcr06|AT)v, TJ'ar0T]-
pai, perceive. alo~xvva> (alo~xw-, i-cl., H. 400 ;
G. 596), alo~xwa>, •rjfo'xvva,
tjorxvv0T]v, [cf. a,icr\vvr\
shame"], put to shame; dir.
mid., be ashamed.
(alT€-), alr^cra), TJ'TT]<ra, a, fJTT]|xai, TJT^)0T]v, asA:
/or, demand, entreat. lTtdojiai (alria-) , airiouro-
fi,ai, etc., [alrCd cause], give
as the cause, accuse, blame. KivaKT]s, -ov, 6, [Persian
word], short sword. T|. -fjs, TJ, summit, prime. (aKov-), dKovcrojxai,
tjKovo-a, dK^JKoa (H. 368, 44 ;
G. 529), tjicou<r|xai, ^KovcrO-qv,
hear. aicpoiroXis, -€a>s, T|, [aKpos, iro-
Xis], acropolis. aKpos, -a, -ov, at the point or
end (H. 671 ; G. 978) ; r6
aKpov, the top or end; rd
ctKpa, ^e heights. OLKCOV, (XKovo-a, aKov, [a priy.,
IKCOV], unwilling. aX-yos, -cos, r6, pain.
XcK-), dX€'go|j,ai, , toarc? o^", defend
one's self against. dXXd, [dXXos], but, more
strongly adversative than Be*. dXXdTTo (dXXa^-, i-cl., H. 397 ;
G. 584, 588), dXXd£«, tjXXa£a,
or •qXXdxO'nv, exchange. dXXtjXw, -a, -w, only du. and
pi., oblique cases, [dXXos],
each other. dXXos, -T], -o, other ; after the
art. often the remaining, the
rest of.
&(ia, adv., at the same time. ajiaja, -TJS, TJ, [&jia, a-ya>],
wagon. djiaJiTos, -6v, [Afiaja, cljjii],
traversed by wagons; 686s
- , wagon-road.
e'w (djJicXe-), djxeXf^o-ft), etc.,
[djxeX^s], neglect, be care-
less. fxcX^s, -^s, [a priv., plXci ^ is
a c«re], careless, neglectful.
Xav^j], without device, im- practicable. dpireXos, -ov, TJ, vine,
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
321
dfx<j>£, prep. w. ace., about, in
connection with. d(jLc()6T€pos, -d, -ov, both. av, post-pos. adv., cannot
be translated by itself.
Its uses are described
in H. 857-862; G. 1299-
1316. dvapaivo) (dva+pav-, pa-), go
up, go inland.
ascent, journey inland. dva-yi'yvtto-Kft) (dva+Yvo-), read. dvd-yKi], -TJS, fj, necessity ; with
IcrrC expressed or under-
stood, it is necessary. dva-yvovs, see dvcrja^vwo-KW. dvdXvo-is- -€a>s, T) [dvaXvw],
undoing, analysis. dvaXvw, unloose, take apart,
analyze. dvapird£a> (dva+dpiraS-), snatch
up, carry off as booty. dvSpdiroSov, -ov, TO. [dvr)p,
-iro8ov being perhaps a de-
rivative ending], slave. avev, improper prep. w. gen.,
without. dvt)p, dv8p6s, 6, man as dis-
tinguished from woman, dif-
fering from dvOptouos as
Lat. vir from homo. dv0os, -€os, TO, flower. avOpuiros, -ov, 6, man, human
being, Lat. homo. dvidw (d via-) , dvtcurw. Tjvtdcra.
T|viaBt]v, [dvtd grief '] , grieve, distress.
dv£o-n]|jii (dva + o-ra-), raise up, cause to stand up j dir. mid. and jii-aor., arise.
-ov, 6, [dvri, , antagonist.
dvrC, prep. w. gen., instead of; in comp. the older mean- ing against, in opposition, is often retained.
dvTiirapcurK€vd£a> (dvrt + irapa- o-K€va8-) , prepare in turn or in opposition.
avTiir^pas [dvrC, tr^pds on the other side], adv. w. gen., over against.
avrCo-Tao-is, -€a>s, TJ, [dvrC, o-rd- <r is party, from UTTTIJU], op- posing party.
dvTio-TCuruoTT]s, -ov, 6, [dv- rCo-Tao-is], political oppo- nent, member of the oppos- ing party.
avTpov, -ov, r6, cave.
av«, adv. [dvd], upward, above; inland.
d^ios, -d, -ov, worthy.
d|idw (agio-), djiwo-w, etc., [djios], deem worthy, think Jit, claim as proper, re- quest.
diraY'Y^XXw (diro + d-yycX-), bring back word, report.
aird-yco (diro + d-y-) , lead away or back.
322
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
dirairla) (diro + alre-) , ask as
due, demand. dirapdo-K€vos, -ov [apriv.,irapa-
o-K€v^j], unprepared. aim}!!. (diro + t-, see €tju), go
away. dirlpxoficu (d-rro + 4p\-, «X0-,
4Xv0-), dirijXOov,
go or come away.
<TX-, o-X'n-)? hold off* oe dis-
tant.
dirf)X0ov, see dirlpxo|iai. dir6, prep. w. gen., from, away
from. In comp. off, away ;
often indicates that some-
thing is due (see
diroSeticvvfu (diro + SeiK-) , ap-
point. diroS£Sco|ii (diro + 80-), give
what is due, hence pay. <vrroKptvo|Acu (diro + Kpiv-, Kpi-),
diroKpivov|xai, dTT€Kplvd|JH]v,
diroKCKpifjiai, reply.
CLTTOKTeiVCO (dlTO + KT€V-, KTOV-),
kill, put to death, execute.
aTroXajipavw (diro + Xa^-,
XT^P-), take back, receive back.
diroXXvju (diro + 6X-, oXe-, nas. cl., H. 402, e; G. 608; SX- Xii|u is prob. for oXvvju), diroXu, onrwXecra. dira>X6fi,T]v, diroXtoXcKa, onroXwXa, in the act. pres., fut., 1st aor., 1st
perf., lose, destroy; in the mid. pres., fut., 2d aor., and in the 2d perf. act., be lost or destroyed, perish.
'Airo'XXwv, -coves, 6, Apollo, son of Zeus and Leto, god of the sun, of health, of div- ination, of music and poetry.
diroir€fi,irci) (<xiro+ir€|jnr-, iro|i<)>-), send away, send back; in- dir. mid., send from one's self, dismiss, let go.
ciiroirX&o (diro + irXv-, sail away.
diropeo) (diropc-),
etc. , [airopos] , be perplexed.
diropCd, -as, T|, [diropos], diffi- culty, perplexity.
diropos, -ov [a priv., iro'pos], without resource, hence per- plexed.
diroo-T^XXw (diro + o~T€X-,
o-raX-), send away.
diroVroXos, -ov, 6, [diroo-rcX- Xw], envoy, ambassador.
diroxwpcw (diro + XWP€~) -> with- draw, retreat.
dpi0|ila> [dpi0jxo's], count.
dpi0|j,o'$, -ov, 6, number, enum- eration.
'ApCo-Tiiriros, -ov, 6, [dpiorros, iiriros], Aristippos.
apio-ros, -T], -ov, sup. of d-ya- 0os.
'ApKas, -a8os, 6, Arcadian.
ctpjia, -aros, TO', chariot.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
323
-T]S, TJ, [apjia, afj.a|a], covered carriage.
dpTrd£a> (dp-iraS-, i-cl., H. 398 ; G. 584, 585, 586), dpird<ra>, TJpiracra, TjpTraica, {Jpirao-^xai, Tjp-Trdo-B^v, seize, plunder.
'ApTa|€pfr]s, -ov, o, Artaxerxes.
dpxaios, -a, -ov [dpx^|], an- cient; TO dpxatov, of old, formerly.
<*PX^ -to *\> [&PX»]> ^gin- ning ; government ; province.
hence begin, and rwZe. pxov, pple. of dpx« as subst.,
commander. cr6€v€to (do-0€V€-), do-Oevrjo-o),
etc. [do-06v^s], be weak or
-& [a priv.,
strength], weak. 'Acrid, -as, T|, Asia. *Acrir€v8ios, -a, -ov, ["Acrircv-
8os city in Pamphylia], As-
pendian.
do-irts, -C8os, TJ, shield. do-Tpov, -ov, TO', star. do-<|)a\€crTaTa, sup. of a<r<|>a\(os. do-c))a\T|s, -^s, [a priv., o-<t>d\\w
make fall~], safe, secure. acr<|>aXws [do-<|>aX^s], safely;
comp. do-<j>a\€crT€pov, sup.
dcr<|>a\€crTaTa. dTljxdtw (dTljxaS-, i-cl., H.
398; G. 584, 585, 587),
(XTiji,dcra>, T)Tt(j.acra. T|
TjTtfJLaCT|JiaL. T|TlJJ,d
JJLOS], disgrace, dishonor.
aTijios, -ov [a priv., Tijt^j], without honor, unhonored.
av, postpos. adv., again, in turn.
avXo's, -ov, 6, pipe.
avTOfxaTOS- -T], -ov, [ttVTo's, root (ia- will], self-acting; diro (or CK) TOV avTojidTov, volun- tarily, of one's own accord.
avTo's, -^, -o', self, myself, him- self, etc. (l)Lat.ipse. This is always the meaning of the word when in the pred. posi- tion with a substantive, and when standing alone in the nom. (2) When preceded by the article, Lat. idem. (3) Standing alone in any case but the nom. it serves as the personal pron. of the 3d pers., him, her, it, etc.
avTov, adv., here.
avTov, -fjs, contracted from cavrov, etc.
d,4>cup€'co (euro + alpc-, 4X-), take away from, deprive, often in indir. mid.
d<f>tT]|xi (diro + 4-), send away, let go.
doJuKV€O|icu (airo + iK-, nas. cl., H. 402, d; G. 607), do>C£o- fiat. d<{)lKO}j.T|v, d<))iYH.at, ar- rive, come.
324
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
(diro + <rra-) , diro-
d<j>€o-ri]Ka, dirco-TdOTjv, set off, cause to revolt; dir. mid., ju-aor., and perf. act., revolt.
o's, -a, -o'v, Achaian.
(dX0-, dX0€-), dX0€- i, TjX0€a-0T]v, [cf. TO aX- 0os burden], be burdened, troubled.
paCva> (Pav-, Pa-, i-cl., H. 400; G. 594, 610), p^jo-o- ficu, €'p-.]v. pep^Ka. -P^pajxai in comp., -4pd0T)v in comp., go.
pdXXco (paX-, pXrj-, t-cl., H. 399; G. 593), paXw, e'pa- Xov, p^pXtjKa, p^pXT]|xai,4pXTJ- 0i]v, throw, throw at.
pappapiKo's. -V|, -o'v, [pdppa- pos], connected with foreign- ers j TO pappapiKo'v, foreign or Persian force.
Pdppapos, -ov, 6, foreigner, barbarian.
pdpos, -cos, TO', weight.
pcuriXetd, -ds, r\, [pao-iXevo>], act of ruling, royal power, kingdom, throne.
pcurCXcios, -d, -ov, [ {3curi\€vs] ? l) kingly ; subst. in the
neut. pi., fortified palace,
castle.
pcuriXcvs, -^ws, 6, king. pacriAevw (paonXeij- ), pacru-
Xcvo'w, etc., [pao-iXevs], be
king, reign. PC'XTIO-TOS, -TJ, -ov, sup. of crya-
0o's. ptdtofiat (Pia8-, i-cl., H. 398 ;
G. 587), pido-oncu,
|JLT]V, p€pCao-|j.ai,
[pid/orce], compel, force. pipXCov, -ov, TO', book. pipXioircoXTjs, -ov, 6,
ira)X€(o], bookseller. P£OS, -ov, 6, life. , -as,
succor.
, etc.,
[poT)0o's helper], help, suc-
cor.
BOUOTIOS, -a, -ov, Boeotian. BOIWTO'S, -ov, 6, Boeotian. pop€as, -ov, 6, north-wind. poTavt], -TJS, TJ, grass, herb. povXevco (povXev-), povXevo*a),
etc., [povX-tfj], plan; indir.
mid., plan for or with one's
self, deliberate, consider. povX^j, -fis, T), [povXojxai], will,
wish ; commonly plan, coun-
sel; also council. povXofxcu (povX-, povXt)-), POV-
X^o-O)iai, pcpovXt^fxai, epov-
, wish, desire. O'S, -ov, 6, altar.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
325
r.
s, -ov, 6, marriage. •yap, postpos. conj., for. •yc, enclitic particle, emphasiz- ing the preceding word by restriction, at least; often not to be rendered by a sep- arate word.
s, -WTOS, 6, laughter. €d, -as, f|, [/yfyvojiat,], fam-
•y€V€<ris, -€«s, T|,
birth, origin, genesis.
•y€*vos, -cos, TO, [-yC-yvojxai], race.
•ye<j>vpa, -as, TJ, bridge.
YH> "VHS, T|, earth, land.
'ytyvoncu (?€v-, <y€vr|-, -yov-), •y€vf}cro|j.ai, ryevofujv, -yfyova, •ye-ye'vTjuai, become, be born, (of events) take place.
•yi-yvwa'Ktt ("yvo-, incep. cl., H. 403; G. 613), <yv(&<ronai, 2^- vwv, €-yvcuKa. c-yvoxr^Jtai, €-yv<o- o-0T]v,come ^o know, perceive, become aware, recognize, come to hold an opinion; the aor. and perf. may sometimes be rendered know, but the ordinary words for know are ot8a and
•y\v<|>a>, carve.
•yXwcnra or •yXw-rra, -t^s, TJ, tongue, language. -TJS, T|,
judgment, thought, mind, consent ; also proverb. pdjxpia, -aros, TO, [Ypd<|>Ci>], writing, letter (of the alpha- bet).
w (-yvp-vaS-, i-cl., H. 398; G. 584, 585, 587), •yv|i,vdo-cD, €<yv|j,vao-a, vaKa, <y€<yvfi.vao-|xai, o-6r|v, [-yvjivo's], exercise. •yvfjivdo-iov, -ov, TO', gymnasium.
^V|lVf^S, -f|TOS, 6,
light-armed soldier. •yvjxvo's, -f^, -o'v, naked, bare. •ywf}, -ywaiKo's, TJ, woman,
wife. •ywvCd, -as, TJ, corner, angle.
A.
SaCpcov, -ovos, 6, divinity, spirit. SaKpva> (SaKpv-), SaKpvo-a>,
ISaKpvo-a, ScSaKpvKa, weep. Sairavdo) (Sairava-), Sairavtfj-
o-w, etc., [8airdvT| expense],
expend. SapeiKo's, -ov, 6, [Aapctos],
daric, a Persian gold coin,
worth $5.40 in our gold. Aapctos, -ov, 6, Dareios or Da-
rius. Sao-|xo's, -ov, 6, tribute.
326
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
&, postpos. conj., indicating a slight contrast with some- thing preceding ; but, and, often correl. with JJL^V.
ScSuos, pple. of 2d perf. S&ta (H. 490, 5; G. 804 SeCSw), fearing.
ScCicvv|u (8€iK-, nas. cl., H. 402, e; G. 608), S€C£a>,
point out, show. 8€*ica, indecl., ten. ScKas, -dSos, fj, company of
ten, decad. AeX4>ou -tov, ol, Delphi. SlvSpov, -ov, TO, tree. Scfjio's, -d, -ov, right (opp. to
left). S&v, SC'OVTOS, TO', neut. pple.
of Set, £fta£ which is need-
ful: €ls TO S&v satisfac-
torily.
-TOS, TO', [84pw],
-, Sap-),
, 48dpT|v, flay. S, -ov, 6, master. 8€vpo, adv., hither. 8&i> (Se-, Set]-),
SeSe'TjKo,, lack, want; impers., Set, 8eT)creu ISc^tre. SeSe'i^Ke. i/iere ^s nee^ o/, ^ is neces- sary, must, ought, Lat. est ; mid., Seo fj.au
-fj, postpos. particle. Its mean- ings are very elusive ; they may be grouped under two heads, which cannot always be clearly distinguished. (1) Its force falls on a sin- gle word or. phrase, marking the idea as being immedi- ately present to the mind, giving greater definiteness or positiveness. The word thus made prominent is the one immediately preceding 8-fj (yet another particle, as jx^v, may intervene). The effect can sometimes be ren- dered in English by the tone of the voice only, sometimes indeed, clearly, may be used. TO'TC 8ij, then indeed. Some- times it has an ironical force, of course ! (2) It belongs to the entire clause. It then stands near the beginning,, and often marks the state- ment as obvious, or to be expected under the known circumstances. This effect may be given by of course, plainly, obviously. When inferential, like ovv, it may be rendered accordingly, un- emphatic now or so. jiev Srj is a frequent combination; each particle usually has its full separate force.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
327
SfjXos, -tj, -ov, plain, evident.
STjpoicpaTid, -as, TJ, [S-qptos, KpaT€w]. democracy.
Sfifjios, -ov, 6, people ; often the democratic party as opposed to the oligarchical faction.
8id, prep., (1) w. gen., through ; (2) w. ace., on account of, because of; Sid iroXXd for many reasons.
Siapai vw (Sia + |3av-, pa-) , go through, cross.
8iapdXXa> (6ia - (3aX-. pXt]-), attack the character of, slan- der, accuse falsely.
Sid-yco (8ia+d-y-) , lead through ; pass one's time, and so con- tinue. Xe-ywv 8if)-yc, contin- ued to speak, kept speaking.
Siaipew, divide.
Siaira, -TJS, TJ, mode of life.
810x60-101, -ai, -a, two hundred.
SiaX^yopai, converse.
Siapird£a> (8ia + dpira8-) , plun- der, sack.
8iaT(0Tjju (8ia + 0€-, root cl., H. 404; G. 619), 8ia0rfj<r«, 8ie'9r|Ka. 8iar46T]Ka or 8iar€-
0€LKa. 8iaT€0€lp,ai, 8l€T€0t]V
(for 8t€0€0Ti v) , dispose, bring into a certain disposition, treat.
Si8duric<i>, teach.
8£8«|u (80-, root cl., H. 404; G. 619), ScGa-w, €'8a)Ka, Se'Sw- Ka, SeSojxai, 4860T)v, give.
s, -a, -ov, [8iKt]], just, right.
j, -TJS, T|, decision of a judge; sentence, penalty ; right, jus- tice.
816 (for Sid 8), on account of which, wherefore, there- fore.
8Cs, twice.
SurxtXioi, -at. -a, (S($, \tXioi), two thousand.
867^, -aros, r6, opinion.
8oK€'w (8oK€-, SOK-), 86$a>,^So$a, Se'So-yjiaL, 4S6\0T]v, think, seem; 3d sing, impers., seems, seems best ; of a pro- posal in an assembly, be adopted, pass.
AoXoircs, -wv, ol, Dolopes, tribe on the southwest borders of Thessaly.
8o£a, -TJS, T|, opinion.
SoOXos. -ov, 6, slave.
8ovX6a> (SovXo-), 8ovXw(rw,etc., [8ovXos], enslave.
Spdfia. -TOS, r6, deed ; drama.
Spdco, do, accomplish.
Spo^os, -ov, 6, [Spajxciv run], running, race.
Svvajxat (Svva-, root cl., H. 404; G. 619), 8vv^<ro|jLai, SeSvvtifjiai, ISw^O-qv, can, be able ; of words, signify.
Svvafus, -€o>s, T|, [Svvafxai], force, power; also signifi- cance, meaning.
328
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
Svvdo-Ttjs, -ov, 6, powerful
man, nobleman. 8 wards. -TJ, -6v, [Svvajxai],
able ; of things, possible. 8vo, SVCHV. two. Siiw (8v-, 8x>-), Sticrco, €8vo~a,
cSvv, Sc'Svica. ScSvfiai, cSvO^v,
cause to sink, also enter;
dir. mid., with jii-aor. and
perf. act., sink, intrans. 8<68€Ka, indecl., [8vo, Se'ica],
twelve. Swpov, -ov, TO, [SiStoju], gift.
E.
lav, [cl, av], if, with the subjv.
Also written av and fjv. cavrov, -f]s, -ov, [stem !-, av- r6s], reflex, pron., one"1 s self, himself, herself, itself. Also written avrov, etc. s, -dSos, TJ, wee^. , -ij, -ov, seventh.
S, -OV, [€V, K€\€Va>],
bidden, incited. (0, CJJLOV, or jjiov, /.
e will-
ing, in Attic prose almost always implying less distinct choice and desire than 0ov- Xopai wish. (In poetry this difference is not made. ) cl, proclit. conj., if; sometimes whether,
ctSlvai, €l8f]T€, see otSa.
€t8ov. see 6pda>.
ctSos, -cos, TO', shape, figure.
€\Ir](rav, see elfiC.
€\IKOCTI, indecl., twenty.
€lK<&v, -ovos, T|, image, statue.
elfxC (!>., root cl.,H. 404, 478;
G. 619, 806), carofiai, am, be. €t|ii (1-, root cl., H. 477; G.
808, 1-3), go, often future
in meaning. etvai, see eljjit.
ellTOV, See <|>T]|At.
€tpT]Ka, €LpT]|jiai, see 4>-q(Ai. els, proclitic prep. w. ace., into,
in with verbs of motion ;
for (denoting purpose) , with
reference to, bearing upon;
with numbers, about. els, pta, ev, one. €io-pd\Xw (els+paX-, PXt)-),
^roio m^o; 7?iaA;e entrance
into, enter. €tcrpoX^, -fjs, ^, [€lo-pdXXa>],
pass into a region, entrance. cto-eXavvo) (els + cXa-), n'^e or
march into.
(els + i*px-, IX0-,
€to-C(v), (they) are; see el^C.
or €o-w, adv. w. gen., [els], within, inside.
adv., afterwards, then, secondly. CK, see 4£. f€KacrTos, -1], -ov,
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
329
Ifcaro'v, indecl., one hundred.
€icpdXXa> (cJ + paX-, pXrj-), cast out, expel, banish.
€K&pa> (€K + 8€P-, Sap-), flay, skin.
€K€i, adv., yonder, there.
€K€ivos, -TJ, -o, dem. pron., [€K€i], he (the more re- mote), Lat. ille.
iKKoXlw (Ifj + KaXc-, K\T]-), call out.
€KKaXvTTTO> (4J; + KttXvp-), UU-
cover.
€KK\T]<rCd, -as, f|, [eKKtxXcw], assembly.
CKXeCirco (IJ+Xiir-, XCIIT-, XOIIT-), leave by going out, aban- don.
CK-irtlTTtt (4£ + 1T€T-, ir€CT-, IPTO)-),
fall out, be banished, used as pass, of £icf3aXXa>.
"EKTO>P, -opos, 6, Hektor or Hector.
4K<t>€v?a> (^ + 4>v^-, <t>€vY-). es- cape.
IKWV, -ovora, -6v, decl. like an aor. pple., willing, volun- tarily.
IXavvco (4Xa-, nas. cl. , H. 402, e ; G. 603, 612), 4X«, (H. 424; G. 665, 1 and 2), -fjXao-a, IX^Xaica, cX^Xapai, TjXa0T]v, drive. (IXavvco is prob. for cXa-w-w.)
IX&rOai, see alp^w.
s, -a, -ov, free.
, see epxofJtaL. 'EXXds, -d8os, TI, Greece, Hellas. "EXXrjv, -os, 6, Greek, Hellene. 'EXXTjviico's, -^j, -ov, ["EXXr]v],
Grecian, Greek; TO 'EXXi]-
VIKO'V, Greek force. 'EXX-qo-irovTiaKo's, -i\, -o'v, ['EX-
X^O-ITOVTOS], Hellespontic,
on the Hellespont. cEXX^orirovTOs, -ov, 6, ["EXXtj,
ITOVTOS sea], Hellespont, or
sea of Helle, who was said
to have been drowned there ;
now the Dardanelles. iXirCs, C8os, -TJ, hope. €|iavTov, [4jx^, avrds], reflex.
pron., not used in nom., of
myself. €npa£va> (4v+pav-, fa-), go on
board, embark. IfipdXXca (4v+paX-, pXt]-),
throw in; of rivers, empty
into.
4v, proclitic prep. w. dat. , in. €v6a, adv., [4v], dem., there;
rel., where. €voiK€&> (4v + olK€-), dwell in ; oi
CVOIKOVVTCS, the inhabitants. Ivopdco (4v + opa-), see in some- thing, see therein. cvraOOa, adv., [4v], there, here;
thereupon, then. €VT6v9€v, adv., [4v], thence. Ivrvyxdvo) (4v + TV\-, TVX.T]-,
T€V\-), chance upon, fall in
with, meet,
330
GBEEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
4J, before consonants IK, pro- clitic prep. w. gen., out of, from.
!£, indecl., six.
4£aiT€« (€Jj + atT€-), ask from ; indir. mid., beg out, ob- tain the release of by en- treaty.
4$€\avva> (cfj + IXa-), drive out, drive forth; intrans. (IV- irov omitted), march forth, march.
IgeXOiiv, see
come out. IjjcTcuris, -€«s, T), [e£-€Ta£« scru-
tinize, inspect}, inspection,
review. <[Ja>, outside. errayy4XX.a> (liri + dyycX-) , pro-
claim; subjective mid., an-
nounce from one's self, offer,
promise.
eiraOov, see <rrdo*x<«>. €ircuv€co (lirt + alvc-),
croficu, eTrrfvco-a,
[alve'co is from at vos praise},
praise, commend, applaud. 4-ireC, conj., temporal, when,
after ; causal, since. €TT€iSTj [eireC, 8^], conj., when,
after. €ir€i|u (lirt + ccr-, see €l|iC), be
upon or over. Iimpi («irt + l-, see etju), ad-
vance, attach
€TT€ira, adv., [4irC, clra], there- upon, next, secondly.
4ir£, prep., on, upon. (1) W. gen., on, upon. (2) W. dat., on, upon ; in dependence on, in the power of, for. (3) W. ace., to, towards, against. In comj)., upon, against, in addition; eirl Terrapwv, by fours, four deep.
plot, or scheme against.
plot, design against one. lm8e(Kvv|u (liri+.SciK-), show
to, exhibit, display; point
out. 4iriK(v8vvos, -ov, [eirt, KivSv-
vos] , dangerous. Comp. 4-irt-
Klv8vVOT€pOS, SUp. CTTlKlvSli- VOTttTOS.
4-iriKpvirTa) (iiri + Kpv<|>-) , cover
over, conceal. €7ri|ieX€0|Jiai (eiri + jxcXe-) , lirijic-
irifX€)JL€XT])Xai, €1T€-
, take care of, attend
to, give attention to. cirCirovos, -ov, [en-C, irovos],
laborious, toilsome. Comp.
€irnrovc&T€pos, sup. liriirovw-
TCITOS. cirCppvros, -ov, [verbal of €irip-
p€w flow upon], well wat-
ered. lirCo-Koiros, -ov, 6, overseer,
guardian.
GREEK-EN GL1SS VOCABULARY.
331
lirCorrafxai (lirurra-), errurnr]- crojxaL, TjirwrTTJOTjv, know, un- derstand.
emo-ToXTJ, -f]s, TJ, letter, epistle.
ImT^jSeios, -a, -ov, suitable, fit j TO, &nvrtfjScia, supplies, provi-
eiriT£0T]ju (eiri + 0€-), put upon ; StKTjv €iriTi0ii)u, inflict pun- ishment on.
€iriTp€ira> (4-iri + rpcir-, rpo<|>-, Tpair-), turn over to, give up to.
€irtx»p&«> (4iri + x«p«-)) ad- vance.
)ir-, €ir-), €\|/o|iai, (for €<r(€)'irojit]v, rough breathing irregularly taken from pres. ; synopsis, orircofxai, <riroCjiT]v, o-irov, o-ir^- o-0ai, criro|X€vos) , follow.
€irra, indecl., seven.
'Eirvaja, -TJS, TJ, Epyaxa.
ep'yov, -ov, TO, work.
€pTj[ios, -tj, -ov, lonely, solitary, bereft.
IpCItt (4pt8-, i-cl., H. 398; G. 584, 585), tjpura, [€pis, -1805, strife"] i contend.
€pjJLT]V€VS, -^0>S, 6, ['EpH-fjS
Hermes, messenger of Zeus] ,
interpreter. Ipvjxvo's, -i\, -o'v, fortified,
strong. <fpXon<u (4PX-, 4X6-, 4\v6-, H.
539, 2 and a ; G. 621), ^
4\T|Xv0a, come, go. The fut. is supplied generally by
€t|JLt.
€pw, see 4>iuiC.
epcordw (Ipcora-, cp-), €pcoTT|(ra>, etc. ; also 2d aor. TJpo'iiTjv, ask, inquire.
€OTCU, see d\iL
€O-T£(V), is; see clpC.
€o-xo.Tos, -i\, -ov, last, farthest, extreme.
€<rci>, see ci'o-co.
€T€pos, -d, -ov, o^er (generally, one of ^o).
CTI, adv. Of time, referring to the pres. or past, still, yet, longer; referring to the fat., further, longer, again. Of degree, yet, still.
€Tvjios, -tj, -ov, true, real, genuine.
cv, adv., well.
€vSaC|i,o>v, -ov, [cv, 8a.ip.wv], fortunate, happy, prosper- ous.
€v^j0€ia, -as, -T|, [€v^0T]s], sim- plicity, folly.
€^0^5, €«T!0€S, [€«, TJ00S], Of
good character; then sim- ple-hearted, silly, foolish.
CVVOIKO'S, -i\, -o'v, [€$, vovs mind} , kindly, friendly.
€vvotK«s, adv., [evvoiKo's], in a kindly way ; €VVOIKWS €'x«, be kindly disposed or loyal.
332
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
€vpio-Ko) (€vp-, €vp€-, inceptive cl., H. 403; G. 613), €vp*jo-«,
pe'0T]v, find. (2d aor. impv.
€vp*, H. 387, b ; G. 131, 2.) cvpos, -ovs, TO, width. Ev4>pdrr]s, -ov, 6, Euphrates. evwvv^os, -ov, [€v, ovvfxa], of
good name; left, used for
dpicrrepos left to avoid a
word of bad omen. 4x0pos, -a, -ov, [>'x0a> hate],
hateful, hostile ; subst.,
enemy.
*]-, see 239), l£a> or
, €<rxov, €<rxT]Ka, €o-XTl|Jiat,
e. The pres. pple. may often be translated having under one's command^ and so with. Accompanied by an adv. €'xo> often means be in a certain state, which the adv. denotes ; the phrase is then nearly equivalent to €l|i( with the adj. to which the adv. corresponds ; €vvo'i- KO>S ^x40' oe weM disposed. 5(a>s, conj., while, until.
Z.
t€v<Y'^ nas- cl-» H. 402, e\ G. 608), trffu, ct€v|a, ^vyjjLat, etv^v, join, yoke.
v, -ov, r
, -ov, TO', animal.
•fj, conj., or; afteracomp.,£ftem. tlpT], -TJS, 4|, yoM^.
TJ^HIWV, -OVOS, 6, [T|-y€'0|UU],
leader, guide.
i, [a-yw], ? think, believe, consider.
s, adv., [rjSvs], f/Za^??/. •fjST], adv., now, already. t]So|iai (T|8-), 1JO-0TJV, be pleased. TjSviraOeo) (Tj8vira0€-) , rjSvira- 0^0-w, etc., [Tj8vira0^s having pleasant sensations, enjoying one's self, TjSvs, ira0os], live
•fjSvs, -€ia, -v, pleasant, deli- cious, (figuratively) sweet.
TJ00S, -€os, TO', character.
fj, adv., dat. sing. fern, of os, in what way, as.
•fJKtt (T|K-), TJ|<«), come, return; pres. generally perf . in mean- ing, am come.
T]Xios, -ov, 6, sun. -as, t|, day. , -a, -ov, [T)|i€ts], our.
T)(jtiSap€iKo'v, -ov, TO', [TJJJLI- half, SdpeiKo's], half-daric.
Tjjxio'Xios, -a, -ov, [TJJII- half, <JXos], containing one and a half, half as much more.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
333
TJV, see clfiC. T)£IOV. see d£io'a>. •qo-av, see etjxC.
(r|TTa-), fj-rHjo-ouai, •qTTT|(iai, f|TT-i]0T]v, [ifrra de- feat, TJTTWV inferior'], be de- feated, used as pass, of
VIKCUO.
0.
OdXarra, -TJS, f|, sea.
Bavaros, -ov, 6, death.
Oappcw (9app€-), 0apprj<rci>, etc., [0dpo-os, Bdppos courage], be of good courage.
0a,TTOv, adv., comp. of Ta\^o>s.
0av|idta> (0avfia8-, i-cl.,H.398 ; G. 584, 585, 587), 0av|id<ra>, €0avfJLa<ra, TeOavpaica, rcOav- p.ao-(a.at. €0av|id(r0T]v, won- der, wonder at, admire.
0^d, -as, T|, sight, show.
0€arpov, -ov, TO, theatre.
0€o's, -ov, 6, a god, God.
0€pair€v<i> (0€pair€v-). 0€pair€v- o-w, etc., serve, worship.
0epp.ov. -ov, TO', heat.
OcVis, -€<«)§, TJ, position, putting.
0«TTaX£d, -as, TJ, Thessaly.
06TTaXo's, -ov, 6, Thessalian.
0ewpta), (0€0>p€-), 0ecopT|cra>. etc., [0€wpo's spectator, from 04d], view, witness, review an army.
0T|p€lJW (0«qp€V-
beast], hunt.
0T]p(ov, -ov, TO', [0-fjp beast], beast.
0o'ava, -wv, Ta, Thoana.
0pa|, 0pdKo's, 6, Thracian.
0vfi(3piov, -ov, TO', Thymbrion.
0vpd, -as, T|, gate, door, at 0vpai, residence, quarters, especially of the Persian king.
0v« (0v-, 0v-), 0vo-o), €0vo-a, T€0vKa, T€0v(iai, 4Tv0T]v, sac- rifice.
t8ios, -a,, -ov, one' sown, private.
tSi(o-rr|s, -ov, 6, [t8ios] , private person, private soldier.
tSovo-a, see opduo.
Up€vs, -&DS, o, priest. , -a, -o'v, sacred. (c-, root cl., H. 476; G. 810), tjcrco, T]Ka, ctKa, clfxai, €i0T]v, set in motion, send.
licavo's, --fj, -o'v, [root IK- seen ind<|)tKv^oji,ai], capable, com- petent, sufficient, enough.
"Iico'viov, -ov, TO', Ikonion or Iconium.
tXt), --qs, T|, troop, squadron.
iva, conj., where; in order that, that denoting purpose.
l*irir€vs, -€<os, 6, [i'lnros], horse- man, cavalryman.
liririKo's, -"f\, -o'v, [tinros], per- taining to horses; 8vva|xis liririK^i, cavalry.
334
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
firiros, -ov, 6, horse. i'cros, -T], -ov, equal. 'lo-o-oC, -«v, ol, or 'Lro-o's, -ov,
Issos or /ssws.
to-rrjju (o-ra-, root cl., H. 404 ; G. 619), <TT^<ra>, £<rn)<ra, co-njv, &rTi]Ka, (-2(TTa|iai in a few compounds), lo-TaOrjv, se£, station, cause to stand; dir. mid. and ju-aor., station one's self, take one's stand; perf. and fut. perf. act., stand.
l<rropCd, -ds, f|, history, story.
lo-xvpo's, -a, -ov, [lo-xvs strength], strong.
t<rxvp«s, adv., [lo-xvfxS], ex- tremely.
"lams, -cov, ol, lonians.
'IcovCd, -ds, T|, [Alcoves], Ionia, the central part of the west- ern coast-region of Asia Minor.
•*), -o'v,["Ia>v€s],/om'c.
(icara + cvS-, €-uST|-), impf. 4Ka0€v8ov (H. 361 ; G. 544), or Ka0T)vSov,
squander in luxury, revel away.
Kd9T]jj,ai (Kara + TJO--, root cl., H. 483, 484; G. 814, 816,
816), sit, be seated; be en- camped.
Ka6t<rrT]|u (Kara + o-ra-) , Kara- <rr/j<ra>, KaT&mjo-a, Kar^- OTT]V, KaOcVr^Ka, Ka0€<rra- jjiat, KaT€o-Ta0T]v, set down, station, establish, appoint; dir. mid., with the ju-aor. and perf. act., take one's place, become or be established.
KaC, (1) conj., and; icaC . . . icaf, both . . . and; (2) adv., also, too, even, throwing its force upon the next following word or phrase.
KCIKO'S, -tf\, -ov, bad, cowardly. Comp. KttKiwv, sup. Kcuao-ros.
KaXlco (icaXc-, K\t]- (H. 423; G. 665),
K€K\T)Ka, K€K\T)fiaU
call, summon.
KaXXos, -€os, TO, beauty.
KaXo's, -i\, -ov, beautiful; also of character, noble, honora- ble. Comp. KdXXfwv, sup.
KoXXlO-TOS-
KaXvirrw (KaXvp-, r-cl., H.395; G. 576), KaXv+w, ^KaXv^a, KCKaXvfifxai, €KaXv(f>0T]v, cover.
KaXws, adv., [KaXo's], well, suc- cessfully.
Kavwv, -o'vos, 6, measuring-rod.
KairT)X€iov, -ov, TO. [ Ka-rrTjXos
retail dealer], shop for retail trade, especially for provis-
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
335
KairiraSoicCd, -as, fj, Kappado- kia or Cappadocia.
Kao-TwXo's, -ov, o, Kastolos or Castolus.
Kara, prep., down. (1) W. gen. down from, down un- der, down upon ; (2) w. ace., down along, according to, opposite. Kara yf\v, Kara edXarrav, by land, by sea. Kara ¥Xds, by troops. In comp., down, home.
Karapcuvw (Kara+pav-, fa-), go down, descend.
K arcry w ( Kara + d-y-) , lead down , lead home, restore an exile.
KaraSvo) ((cara + Sv-), sink.
KaraKoirra) (Kara + KOir-), cut down.
(Kara + Xaf-, seize.
(Kara + XMT-, Xciir-, Xoitr-), leave in place, leave behind.
KaraXva) (Kara + Xv-, Xv-), bring to an end, destroy ; in- dir. mid., bring a war or quarrel to an end, come to terms, become reconciled.
Karavoe'w (Kara + vo€-), notice, observe.
KcrraTreTpcKo (Kara + ircrpo-) ,
KaTaTT€TpW(TC«). CtC., [iTCTpOS
stone'], stone to death. KarairpaTTO) (Kara + irpdy-) , do thoroughly, accomplish.
Ko,TCLTi0r)fju (Kara + 0€-) , de- posit, lay up.
KavoTTtKos, -i\, -ov, burning.
Kavo-rpos, -ov, 6, Kaystros or Cayster.
KavVrpov ireSCov, Kaystros Plain.
•caw, burn.
K€-yxP°S) -°v> o? a ^in(i of mil- let.
KeXcuvcu, -wv, at, Kelainai or Celaenae.
K€\€VW (K€X€V-),
Xevcra.
o-|iai, cKcXcvVO^v, bid, urge. K€vo's. -1\, ov, empty. Kcpajiwv d-ypopa, Keramoi- or
Cer 'ami-market. K€pavvvp,i (K€pa-, Kpd-, nas. cl.,
H. 402, e; G. 608),
K€Kpd|iai, €Kpaj9r]v or
o-0T]v, mix. Kcpas, K^pdros, TO', horn ; wing
of an army. K€cj>aXT|. -i\s, T|, head. KiXiKCd, -ds, T|, Kilikia or Cili-
cia. KCXif, -IKOS, 6, Kilikian or
Cilician. KiXto-ora, -t]s, T|, Kilikian or
Cilician (woman, queen).
KlvSvV€VO> (Klv8i>V€V-), KlvSv-
V€VO*<D, etc., [KivSvvos], be in or encounter danger.
KtvSvvos, -ov, 6, danger.
K\au>. break.
336
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
. -ov, 6, Klearchos or Clearchus.
K\i|xa|, -KOS, fj, ladder.
KVT](jtts, -1805, fj, [Kvrfjfu] leg'], greave.
KOIVO'S, ->f\, -ov, common, pub- lic,
KoXoo-o-aC, -«v, al, Kolossai or Colossae.
Ko'irrtt (KO-JT-, T-cl., H. 395 ; G.
576), KOX|/W, €KO\|/a, K€KOCJ>a.
K€KOfip,ai. liroVijv, c?^.
Koo-fjL€w, adorn.
KoVpos, -ov, 6, order; orna- ment; the universe, world.
Kpavos, -ovs, TO', helmet.
Kpareco, rwZe.
KpdTTjp, -fjpos, 6, mixing-bowl.
Kparos, -cos, TO, strength.
KpavyTJ, -f]s, T|, shout.
Kp€iTTwv, KpeiTTOv, [root seen in KpaTos] , comp. of d'yaOos, better, stronger, more pow- erful.
Kp€|xdvvv|u (Kp€|xa-, nas. cl., 402, e; G. 608), €Kp€>a<ra, €Kp€fiacr0T]v, hang. T], -T]S, T|, spring. s, KPTJTO'S, o', Cretan.
Kpi0-/i, -fjs, T|, mostly in pi., barley.
Kptvo) (Kpiv-, Kpi-, i-cl., H. 400 ; G. 596), Kptvw, c'Kpiva, K^-
KplKa, K^KplfXai, €KpL0T]V. tilS-
cern, distinguish, judge. , -ov, 6, judge, umpire.
Kpvirra) (icpv<|>-, r-cl., H. 395 and a ; G. 576), Kpv\|/<o, €Kpv-
conceal, hide. Kpvo*TaX\os, -ov, 6, ice.
KTtlVW (KT€V-, KTOV-, l-Cl., H.
400; G. 596),KT€va>,€KT€iva,
-€KTova, kill. KvSvos, -ov, 6, Kydnos or
Cydnus.
KVK\OS, -ov, 6, circle. Kvpos, -ov, 6, Cyrus. KwXvco (KO)\V-, KO)Xv-),Ko)Xvo-a),
€K<oXv<ra, K€KcoXvKa, K€K<oXv-
l&at, €Ka)Xv9i]v, hinder, pre-
vent.
A.
XaOpa, adv., [XavOdvw], se-
cretly, without the knowl-
edge of. AaKcSaijxovios, -a, -ov, Lace-
daemonian, Spartan.
(Xap-, X^P-, nas. cl.,
H. 402, c; G. 605, 6), X^o-
jxai, 4X^4>OT)v, take, receive,
capture. Xajjnrpo'TTjs, -T]TOS, T), [Xajjurpo's
splendid], splendor, bril-
liancy. XavOdvo) (Xa9-, Xt]9-, nas. cl.,
H. 402, c; G. 605, 6), X4)<r«!
cXaOov, XtX-qOa, XeX^o-fJiai,
lie hid, escape the notice of,
be concealed.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULAEY. 337
M.
Xopvyg, -yyos, o, throat, lar- ynx.
Xfyco (Xry-)> k€'i Ka) , \€\€-y [xai, say, tell.
XcCirco (Xiir-, Xeiir-, XOITT-, strong-vow, cl., H. 394; G.
572), X€tya>, &11TOV, X€'-
Xoiira,
XCOos, -ov, 6, stone.
Xo'-yos, -ov, 6, word, talk, ac-
count, description. Xo\os, -ov, 6, company of sol-
diers.
AvSCa, -as, TJ, Lydia. Avicaia, -wv, ra, ^e Lykaia or
Lycaean festival, celebrated
by Arcadians in honor of
Zevs AVKCUOS. or AvKaios. AvKctovCol, -as, TI, Lykaonia or
Lycaonia. XvfjLatvofAaL (Xvpav-, i-cl., H.
400; G. 594),
€Xvp.av0T]v, [XvjjiT] outrage], maltreat, damage.
(Xtnre-), Xvir^crw, etc., ], distress, grieve.
Xv<ris, -€a>s, T|, a loosing, set- ting free.
Xva> (Xv-, Xv-), Xvo-co, eXvcra, XcXvKa, Xc'Xvpai, 4Xv0T]v, loose, set free ; indir. mid., set free for one's self, get release^ ransom, deliver.
|ia9r||jLa, -TOS, TO, lesson. Mai'avSpos, -ov, 6, Maiandros
or Maeander.
jxaKpo's, -a, -o'v, long, large. (xaXa, very, much ; comp. |wLX-
Xov, more, rather, sup. na-
Xto-ra, most. |iav0ava>, learn. jiavTis, -c«s, 6, soothsayer,
prophet.
MapaOwv, -wvos, 6, Marathon. Mapcrvas, -ov, 6, Marsyas.
, -TJS, T|, tle, fight.
» bat-
s, 6,
Megarian.
fxc'-ya, large,
great, big. Comp. luC^wv,
sup. ^•y'-o'TOs. Mc-ya<)>^pvT|s, -ov, 6, Megapher-
nes.
jU-yio-ros, -T|, -ov, see jUyas. p.€^wv, see fU'yas. |ieXCvT|, -T|S, T|, millet, a kind of
grain. jjAXco (pcXX-, ixcXX-q-), jjieX-
X.TJO-CO, €|i€'XXT]cra, be about to
do something, intend, be go-
ing to do ; also delay. lUXos, -cos, TO', song, strain of
music. |i€v*, postpos. particle, indicat-
ing that something not yet
mentioned is thought of as
338
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
contrasted with the word be- fore ji^v, or with the phrase in which ji^v stands ; usually translated by the tone of voice only, sometimes by on the one hand, in the first place, indeed. jjL€VToi, conj., however, yet.
fJLCVCO (|1€V-, |1€VT]-), |X€VW, €fX€lva,
remain. v, -os, 6, Menon.
|x€<ros, -T], -ov, in the pred. posi- tion, the middle part of, the midst of (H. 671 ; G. 978) ; TO jx&rov, the midst, centre.
JWTOL, prep., w. gen., with; w. ace., after.
}j,€Tair€|j.ira> (fiera + ircixir-, ITOJI,<|>-) , send after; indir. mid., send for, summon.
fierpov, -ov, TO', measure.
jx-fj, adv., not, marking the ne- gation as willed or aimed at, or as merely conceived. Also conj., to denote neg. pur- pose, that not ; after expres- sion of fear, lest, that.
|iT|Sl, conj. and adv., used for ov8€ in all senses, to marl the negation as willed or aimed at, or as merely thought of.
|iT)Sc£s, |iT)8€|iCa, fiTjSc'v, indef. pron., no one, used instead of ovScCs to mark the nega- tion as willed or aimed at, or as merely thought of.
Mf)8os, -ov, 6, Mede.
JJIT]K€TI, adv., Qjdj, €Tl, K Hl-
serted from analogy with OVK€TI], no longer, used hi- st ead of ovjceVi to mark the negation as willed or aimed at, or as merely thought of. jx-fjv, -o's, 6, month.
, never, used instead of oviroT€ to mark the negation as willed or aimed at, or as merely thought of.
C, conj., used for OVT€ to mark the negation as willed or aimed at, or as merely thought of.
, -Tpo's, T), mother. j, -fjs, TJ, machine. MCSds, -ov, 6, Midas. jxiKpo's, -d, -o'v, small, little; neut. fjuKpo'v as adv., barely. MlX^o-tos, -d, -ov, Milesian.
, -ov, T|, Miletos. i, imitate. , -ov, 6, imitator.
, -OV, 6,
SoV-qs giver, fr. SCScofxi], pay- master. fuo-Oo's, -ov, o, pay, wages.
( |ito-6o-) , |iur0<6cra>, etc., [jiicrObs], let for hire; mid., make another let to one's self, hire ; pass., be hired. , -cos, TO', hatred. J, -TJS, TJ, memory.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
339
o'vos, -TJ, -ov, alone, only, only one.
, -fis, f|, form. . -TJS, f), muse. |Aovo-€lov, -ov, TO, house of the
muses, museum. JJLOVO-IK^, -i]s, f|, music. HV00S, -ov, 6, tale, legend. tivpuu, -ai, -a, ten thousand. Mvo-ios, -a, -ov, Mysian. jivo-T^piov, -ov, r6, secret doc- trine, mystery. PVO-TIKOS, -f\, -ov, secret, mys- tic.
N.
vavs, v€<&s, f|, ship. H. 206; G. 268, 269.
vavTT|s, -ov, 6, sailor.
vavriKos, -"f\, -6v, [vavs], naval.
v€icp6s, -d, -6v. dead.
v€|ia>, deal out, distribute.
ve'os, -d,-ov, new, young ; comp. veampos. sup. vcwraros.
(viKa-), viK^cro), etc., ], conquer, defeat, sur- pass, be victorious.
viKt], --qs, TJ, victory.
vo€a> (vo€-) , vo-fyrco, etc., [vdos] , observe.
vo|i£ta> (vojiiS-, i-cl., H. 398; G. 584, 585), vojuw (H. 425; G. 665, 3), Iv6[iura, vcvofiiKa, v€vo'|j.icr[iaL. €vop.icr0T]v. [vo'-
j*os], hold as custom; com-
monly consider, think, be-
lieve. vojios, -ov, 6, [vejtco], custom,
laic. vo'os, contracted vovs, vov, 6,
mind.
jEfcvids, -ov, 6, Xenias.
|€VLKO'S, -i\, -ov, [J^vos], CCM-
nected with Jcvoi; TO gcvt- KO'V, mercenary force.
{cvos, -ov, 6, foreigner; one connected by a tie of hospi- tality, guest-friend; merce- nary soldier.
Q€VO<|)WV, -WVTOS, 6, Xeno- phon.
, -ov, 6, JEerxes.
O.
6, TJ, TO', the. Often translated his, her, its, their. Some- times retains its earlier force as dem. pron., he, she, it; as 6 8^, but he ; TO, |i^v . . . Td 8c, some things . . . other things ; 6 jiev . . . 6 8e, this . . . that, the one . . . the other.
o8€, rj8€, TO'S€, dem. pron., [o, enclit. -Be], this (Lat. hie).
68os, -ov, TJ, road, way.
o0€v, rel. adv., [os], whence.
340
GEEEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
ot8a, perf. in form, pres. in meaning (see H. 491; G. 820), cto-ofxai, know.
oticaSc, adv., [olicos], home- ward, home.
olK€w (OIKC-). olKTJcro), ipKTjcra,
etc., [O!KOS], inhabit; also intrans., dwell, live. olKoSop.€co (olico8o|j.e-), olicoSo-
|J,T]0-CO. U)Ko8o'[JLT|0-a, I'll'., [ol-
KoSo'jxos house-builder; ot- KOS, 8€jj,a> build}, build. i, adv., [olicos], at home. s, -ov, 6, house, home.
otvos, -ov, 6, wine.
ofopcu or otjxai (ol-, olij-), ol-fj- (rojjiai, cp^0T]v, think, sup- pose, deem.
olos, -a, -ov, rel. pron. of qual- ity, of what sort.
oloVircp, oia/rrep, olo'vircp, strengthened form of olos.
OKV€CO (OKV6-), OKVTJCTtt, 6tC.,
[OKVOS hesitation], hesitate, shrink from.
OKTaKo'criOL, -ai, -a, [OKTW], eight hundred.
OKTW, indecl., eight.
6\€0pos, -ov, 6, [o'XXvjjLi], de- struction, death.
6\i-yapx(a, -as, T|, [oXC-yot, apx«], oligarchy.
6Xi-yot, -ai, -a, few.
8Xos, -TJ, -ov, whole.
'OXvvOios, -a, -ov, Olynthian.
ojiaXo's, -Vj, -o'v, even, level.
ofioios, -a, -ov, [cf. ajxa, ojiov], like, similar.
6|io(ws, adv., [ofjiotos], in like manner, alike.
OfioXo'y^CD (6fj.o\o*y€-), bpoXoy-f]- o-w, etc., [ojxo'-Xo-yos agree- ing], agree.
6[*ov, adv., [cf. apa], together.
OJJLWS, adv., [cf. afxa], neverthe- less, yet.
ovofia, -TOS, TO', name.
ovvfxa, dialectic form of 6Vo|ia.
oTqj, indef. rel. adv. and conj., in what way, wherever.
oirXtnjs, -ov, 6, [oirXa], heavy- armed soldier, hoplite.
frn-Xov, -ov, TO', implement; pi. arms.
oirocros, -t|, -ov, indef. rel. pron., how much, as much as; pi. how many, as many as.
OTTO'TC, indef. rel. conj., when- ever.
8irov, indef. rel. adv. and conj., where.
oirws, indef. rel. adv. and conj., originally denoting manner, in what way, how ; in order that, that.
opdw (opa-, oir-, 18-), impf. iwpwv (H. 359 and 6; G. 638), 6\|/ofjiat, elSov (synop. ¥8<o, ¥80411, 184, ISciv, t8(Gv),
eo'paKa or IcopciKa, € cap ap.au
see.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
341
6'p-yavov, -ov, TO, instrument.
op-yCtofxai (6><yi8-, i-cl., H. 398 ; G. 584, 585, 587), opYiov^at, wp'yaa-fj.cu, cup^(cr0r|v. [opyfj temper, anger~\, be angry.
opOios, -a, -ov, [6p0o's], steep.
opOo's, -4\, -ov, straight, up- right, right.
6p|ia.a> (opjia-), 6pfiT)<rco, etc., [6pp.TJ impulse~\, set in mo- tion ; dir. mid., put one's self in motion, set out.
opvls, -i0os, 6, t|, bird.
opos, -ovs, TO', mountain.
os, -q, o, rel. pron., who, which, that, what.
ooros, -yj, -ov, rel. pron., how much, as much as; pi. how many, as many as; who or which referring to quantity or number.
OO-TIS, TJTIS, <> TI, indef. rel. pron., [os, rls], whoever, whatever.
OTC, rel. conj., when, while.
OTI, conj., originally the same as o TI, neut. sing, of OO-TIS. (1) Declarative, introducing a substantive clause of which the verb is in a finite mode (as the article TO' introduces a substantive clause of which the verb is in the inf.), that. (2) Causal (showing the same change of mean- ing as that and Lat. quod),
because. (3) Strengthening a superl. (like o>s and Lat. quam) as, OTI irXcurToi as many as possible, quam plurimi.
ov, OVK, ov\, not.
ov, rel. adv., [os], where.
ov, ol, g, reflex, pron., of him- self, etc.
ov8€, conj. and adv. [ov, 84]. Conj., (1) but not, more often (2) and not, nor, continuing a preceding ov. Adv., neg. of adverbial K<xC, calling special attention to what follows, (1) also not, not . . . either ; (2) not even. As transition from conj. to adv. we find some cases where ov84 is still a conj., yet lays stress upon what follows, like an adv. ; neither will usually render these cases.
ovSeis. ovSe^La, ov8ev, [ov8€, els], no one.
ovv, post-pos. conj., therefore, accordingly. (X€v ovv, un- emphatic now. 8* ovv, but at any rate.
oviroT€, adv., [ov, TTOT^], never.
OVT€, conj., [ov, T€], generally repeated, ovVc . . . OVT€, nei- ther ... nor.
OVTOS, avTt], TOVTO, dem. pron., this, that (Lat. is).
342
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
ovTft>s,bef ore a cons. OVTO>, dem.
adv. of manner, thus, so. 6<f>€tXo> (6<|>€X-, i-cl., H. 399, a •;
G. 598; also 6<|>eiX€-), o<|>€i-
XTJO-CO. co4>€i\T]o-a and w<j>€\ov. a><j>€i\T)Ka, co<))€i\T|9t]v, owe.
o<(>€\o9. r6 (only nom. and ace.), advantage, good, ben- efit.
oxvpds, -a, -6v, [ix«], strong, secure.
ovj/ofiai, see 6pda>.
n.
wdOos, -€os, r6, feeling, passion. wai8a-y«-y6s, -ov, 6, child-leader,
teacher, pedagogue. iraiScvco (waiScv-), waiSevcra),
etc., [wais], educate. irais, waiSos, 6, fj, child (son
or daughter) . wdXiv, again, back. wavrdwdonv, adv. , [wdvra,
wdori], altogether. wavraxov, adv., [was], every- where. iravrrj, adv., [was], in every
way, on every side. wavro8aw6s, -^, -6v, [was, -8a-
wos being an adj. ending],
of every kind. wapd, prep., (1) w. gen., from
beside, from; (2) w. dat.
beside, near, with; (3) w.
ace., to the side of, to (with
a word denoting a person) , alongside of, along (with the name of an extended object, as a river) ; wapd TOV vopov, contrary to the law; wapd pa<rt\€cos, from the king; wapd pao-iXct, beside the king, at his court ; wapd pao-iXcd, to the king. In comp., be- side, along.
•n-apapdXXw, compare.
wapapoX^, -f]s, T), comparison, illustration, parable.
wapa-yyeXXco (wapa + d-y Y^X-) , send word along, command, give orders.
wapaYfyvoixai (wapa- + "yev-, •y€vr]-, yov-), come to, arrive.
wapaScuros, -ov, 6, park.
wapawX^crtos, -a, -ov, [wapd, wX-qo-Cos near~\, resembling, similar.
wapao-o/yyTjs, -ov, 6, parasang, Persian measure of distance, something over three miles.
wapa<TK€vd£o> (wapa + o-KcvaS-, i-cl., H. 398; G. 584, 585, 587), wapao~K€vdo-a>, wape- o-KCvao-a, wap€o-K€vaKa, wa-
o-0-qv, [wapao-Kcv/j], prepare. wapao-K€v^, -i]s, TJ, [wapd,
O-KCVOS], preparation. wdp€i|u (wapa + 4<r-, see clfiC) ,
wap^o-o^ai, be near or pres-
ent or at hand.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
343
irapcXavvco (irapa + €\a-) , drive or ride past or along, march
by.
irap^xw (irapa + <T€X-, €\-, i\-, °"X~» ^X1!')) hold beside, of- fer; irpd^ixara irap^xa), make trouble.
Ilappdo-tos. -a, -ov, Parrha- sian.
napvo-aris, -1805, TJ, Pary satis.
TTCIS, irdcra, irav, all, every.
IIa<rCa>v, -os, 6, Pasion.
irdxr\<D (ira0-, ir€v0-, irov0-, in- ceptive cl., H. 403, c; G. 613, 617), ir€£<ron<u (for ir€v0- <rop,ai) , ciraOov, ir^irovOa, ex- perience, be treated; cv (Ka- K«S) ircurx€tv serve as pas- sives tO 6V (KttKWS) TTOWIV.
irar^p, irarpos, 6, father. irarpCs, -C8os, TJ, [irar^p],
fatherland. iravo> (irav-), irav<ra>, etc., stop
(trans.) ; dir. mid., stop (in-
trans.), cease. ircSCov, -ov, TO, [ir^Sov ground] ,
plain. irc^s, --f\, -6v, [cf. ire'Sov and
TTOVS], on foot ; Svyajjus-ire^,
infantry. ir€t0a> (-IT10-, strong-vow, cl., H.
394 ; G. 572), ircCo-w, €ir€ura,
ir^irciKa, ir^ir€io-}j.ai, cireC-
o-0T]v, persuade; dir. mid.,
believe, obey. irctpa, -as, TJ, attempt, trial.
impa/nrjs, -ov, 6, pirate. ireipdo) (impa-) , ircipdura), etc.,
more commonly pass, dep.,
[ir€ipa], attempt, try. XleXoirovv^o-ios, -a, -ov, [IIcXo-
ITOVVTJO-OS], Peloponnesian. IleXoirdvvqo-os, -ov, TJ, [Il€Xo\|/
Pelops, vfjo-os island], Pelo-
ponnesus. irt\TO,l<a, [TT^XTT)], serve as
peltast.
mXrai, -wv, at, Peltai. ircXraa-Tf^s, -ov, 6, [ircXTa^a)],
peltast, targeteer, carrying
the IT&.TTI, a light, crescent-
shaped shield. ir€|JLira> (irejJLir-, -iro(i
circfji^a, ir^irofjL<|>a,
€ir^<|>0T|v, send, conduct. irevTaKoorioi, -ai, -a, Jive hun-
dred.
€, indecl. , five. i), digest. C, prep., (1) w. gen., about,
concerning; sometimes re-
tains the meaning beyond;
(2) w. ace., around. In
comp. beyond, around. cpi'yC'yvoixai (ir€pi+<y€v-, *Y€VT|-,
•yov-), become superior to,
get the better of.
o^x-, <TXTJ-), surround, en- close.
epiirX^a) (ir€pi + irXv-, sail around.
344
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
s, -ov, 6, Persian. s. -1], -6v,
Persian.
tn\yf\, -fjs, T), spring, source. nc-ypiis, -TITOS, 6, Pigres. im'to) (iricS-, t-cl., H. 398; G.
584, 585), irUcro), 4irt€<ra, liri-
&r6T|v, squeeze, pinch, press,
push hard. irtirrw (TTCT-, TOO--, TTTW-), ir€-
o-ovjjiai (H. 426 ; G. 666), ihre-
<rov, ir£irTa>Ka, fall, (irtirra)
is for iriir(c)ra>, with irreg.
lengthening of the redupli-
cation syllable.) IlurtScu, -wv, ol, Pisidians. mo~T€va> (irio~T€v-) , irKTrcvo-o),
etc., [irurrds], trust. irCo-Tis, -€«s, TJ, [ircCOw], faith,
trust ; token of faith, pledge. •jrurT6s, --fj, -6v, [ireCOw], trusted,
faithful. orXavouo (irXava-), irXav^jo-w,
etc., [irXdvTj wandering] ,
mislead; pass., wander. •rrXcuro-o), /orm, mould. irX€0pov, -ov, r6, plethron, =
100 Greek feet, =i of a o-rd-
Siov.
irXcto-Tos, --q, -ov, see iroXvs. irX^ov, see iroXvs. irXcw (irXv-, irXev-, strong-vow.
cl., H.394,a; G. 574), irXetf-
(rojxai,
improp. prep. w. gen.,
except; also as conj., except
that. irX^jptis, -€S, [irCji-TrXT^xi, fill],
full.
irXotov, -ov, r6, [irX^w], boat. irvcvjia, -TOS, r6, wind, breath. irvcvjicDv, -ovos, 6, lung. iroi€0) (iroi€-), iroi^o-ca, etc.,
make, do ; indir. mid., make
for one's self, consider, re-
irotTjT€os, -a, -ov, verbal of
, -ov, 6, poet. iroXe)X€ci> (iroXcixe-
etc., [ir6X€|xos], make war,
fight. iroX^uos, -d, -ov, [iroXcjtos] ,
hostile ; as subst., enemy. 7ro\€|jios. -ov, 6, war. iroXiopK€0) (iroXiopK€-) , iro-
XiopK'/jcrcD, etc., [iro'Xis, k'pKos
fence], besiege. iroXis, -€<os, T), city, state. iroXtTT]s, -ov, 6, [iro'Xis] , citizen. iroXXaKis, adv., [iroXvs], many
times, often, again and again. iroXvs, iroXX^j, iroXv, much, pi.
many. Comp. irXeCuv or
irXc'wv, neut. irX^ov ; sup.
irX€l0-TOS, -TJ, -OV. Ol TTOX-
XoC, the many, the mass of men, most people; iroXv, of- ten used as an adv. (comp. irX^ov), much, very. iroXvv \po'vov, a long time.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
345
iro'vos, -ov, 6, [ir^vojxai work], toil, labor, work.
iropeva) (irop€v-), irop€vo~a>, etc., [iropos], make go, convey ; commonly pass, dep., pro- ceed, march.
iropos, -ov, d, passage, (pore is one application under this head) ; means, resources (cf . our ways and means) .
iro'ppco, adv., far.
iroTajjio's, -ov, 6, river.
ITO'TC, interrog. adv., when?
ITOT^, enclitic, indef. adv., at some time, ever, once.
irov, adv., enclitic, somewhere, anywhere.
ITOVS, IToSo's, O, fOOt.
irpd^fAa, -TOS, TO', [irpaTTa>], deed, affair ; irpa-yixara irap- t\a>, make trouble.
irpcU-is, -€«s, f|, [irpd-rra)], ac- tion, enterprise.
irpcurora), earlier form of irpd-TTO).
irpdrTO), earlier irpao-o-w (irpd'y-, i-cl., H. 397; G. 580), irpajw, €irpd|a, ireirpd-ya or ir€irpa\a, ir^irpd*yp,ai, tTrpd\Qr\v, do, ac- complish.
irp€o-pvT€pos, -a, -ov, comp. of irp€o-pvs, older, elder.
npiap-os. -ov, d, Priam.
irptv, conj., before.
irpd, prep. w. gen., before.
(irpo + d-yopcv-, see
<|>T](x(), irpoepca, irpoeiirov,
pT|6T]v, speak before, proclaim
publicly. TrpoaurOavopai (irpo + atorO-) ,
perceive beforehand. Trpo|3dXXa> (irpo + paX-, pXt]-),
throw before; indir. mid.,
throw before one's self, irpo-
paXeVOat TO, oirXa, put spear
and shield in position for
attack. irpoS(Sa>|Ai (irpo + 80-), betray,
give up, be false to. irpo'eifu (irpo+l-, see ctju), go
forward.
irpoeiirov, see irpoa-yopevw. 77po'0v}JLOs. -ov, [irpo', OVJJLO'S
spirit, mind~\, eager, zealous. irpourn]|u (irpo + o-ra-) , set or
station before; perf. act.,
stand before, command. irpoKO,TaXa|j,pdv<i> (irpo + Kara +
Xap-, X-qp-), seize 'before-
hand. Hpofcvos, -ov, oe, [irpo', ^vos],
Proxenos. irpo's,prep., (1) w. &cc.,towards,
to, against, in the presence
of; irpos ravra, in regard
to this, sometimes in reply ;
(2) w. gen., irpos TOV rpo'irov, in accord with the character ;
(3) w. dat., near, at, in addi- tion to. In comp., in addi- tion, further.
346
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
Trpo<raiT^oD (irpos + alr€-, see O.IT&O) , demand further, ask in addition.
•jrpoo-cpxojACU (irpos + €px-, €\0-, 4\v0-), come or go to, come over to.
irpdo-Bev, adv., [irpos], before- hand, before, formerly.
irpocriroi€O|j,ai (irpos + -iroi€-) , take to one's self, claim, pre- tend.
•n-poVw, adv., [irpos], forward.
irpoTcpos, -d, -ov, [irpo'], ear- lier / neut. irpoT€pov as adv., before.
7rpo'cj>acris. -CCDS, T|, [irpo<|>a(va> show before'] , pretext, excuse.
irpwTOs, -TJ, -ov, [irpo], first. irpwrov jiev, in the first place,
iri)p, irvpo's, TO', fire. •jrvpo's, -ov, d, wheat. irco, adv., enclitic, hitherto, yet,
after a neg. ircoXco) (irwXe-), ircoX^o-o), etc.,
sell.
P.
pco> (pv-, p€v-, pvt]-, strong-vow, cl., H. 394, a; G. 574), fcv- crojiai, €ppvt]Ka, 4ppvt]V (as act.), ^010.
pTJrcop, -opos, o', orator.
pts, plvo's, -f), nose.
po'Sov, -ov, TO', rose.
2.
ordXiriyg, -tvyos, TJ, trumpet.
o-aXirC^w (o-aXiri-yy-, i-cl., H. 398,6; G. 584, 588), €o-dX- irt-yla, [o-dXiri-yJ] , sound the trumpet.
Sap6eis, -€(ov, al, Sardeis or
o-dp^, -KO'S, TJ, flesh. o-aTpdirrjs, -ov, oc, satrap, Per-
sian governor of a prov- ince.
2dTvpos, -ov, o', satyr. The satyrs were supposed to have flat noses, pointed ears, and tails of horses, and to be very fond of wine.
cnf]o~a|xov, -ov, TO', sesame, a kind of grain.
o-iyfj, -f]s, T), silence.
cr twTrdco (crieoTra-) , a
silence'], be silent. o-K€irT€os, -d, -ov, verbal of
(O-KCIT-, T-C!., H. 395; G. 576), o-K^ofiat, eo-K€\|/dfXT|v, €o-K€jj.fjiai, view, examine, consider. In the pres., Attic generally uses
(o-K€va8-, i-cl., H. 398; G. 584, 585, 587), , earK€vao-a, eo-Kcva- [o-K€vos] , prepare.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
347
crK€vos, -ovs, TO, utensil, espe- cially in pi. military equip- ments, baggage.
<TK€VO(f>o'pOS, -OV, [o-KCVOS, 4>O-
pos bearing, fr. <f>€pw], bag- gage-carrying ; rd O-KCVO- 4>o'pa, baggage-train.
o-KTjv-fj, -ijs, TJ, tewZ, made of hides.
o-K-nirrpov, -ov, TO', staff, scep- tre.
o-Koiro's, -ov, 6, watcher, look- out.
So'Xoi, -«v, ol, Soli.
2o<t>aiv€Tos,-ov, 6,Sophainetos.
o~o<|>id, -as, TJ, [o-o<|>o's] , wisdom, skill (as in music).
a-o<t>£$o(iai, be clever or wise.
o-o<j>o's, -^j, -o'v, wise.
o"ir€v8« (o-ircvS-), O"ir€vo-a>, €o-ir€vo-a, hasten.
0-Ttt0}JLo's, -OV, O, [i'o-T1]JJLl], StOp-
ping-place, station; day's journey.
O-TC'XXO) (0"T6\-, O-TdX-, l-Cl., H.
399; G. 593), o-TcXw, €o-T€i\a, -€O-TaXKa, ca-TaX^xai, €CTTCI- \t\v, send, (originally equip).
o-T€p€o's, -d, -o'v, firm, solid.
OTTIXOS, -ov, o', line (as of writ- ing).
o-TX€yy£s,-C8os,TJ,/esft- scraper, Lat. strigilis.
o-ToXVj, -fjs, T], [o-T€XX«], robe.
o-T6Xos, -ov, 6, [o-T€'XX<o] , equip- ment, expedition.
arpaT€Vfia, -aTOs, TO, [orrpa-
T€VW], army. o-TpaTCvw (o-TpaT€v-) , o-Tpa-
T€vo-a>, €o-TpaT€vo-a, lorrpa- €o-TpaT€V)jiai, [o-Tpa- , take the field, serve as
a soldier, make an expedi-
tion ; often dep. o-TpaTT]-y&o (o-TpaTTj-ye-) , o-Tpa-
TTI^O-W, etc., [o-TpaTT^^ds],
act as general, command. o-Tparq-yid, -as, TJ, [o-TpaTT]-
•yds], office or act of a gen-
eral, command. crTpaTTj'yds, -ov, 6, [o-TpaT6s,
a-yw], general. o-TpaTtd, -as, rj, [cf. o-TpaT6s],
army. o-TpaTtwTT]s, -ov, 6, [o-TpaTid],
soldier.
etc., [o-TpaToireSov] , encamp. o-TpaToircSov, -ov, TO, [o"Tpa- TOS, irc'Sov ground], camp. , -ov, 6, army.
, -OV, 6, [<TTpe'4>W
twist], collar of twisted or linked metal. Lat. torques.
ZTU|A<J>CiLXlOS. -d, -OV,
Xos], Stymphalian. o-v, o-ov, thou, you. o-vyyC-yvojxat (o-vv + ^v-,
•yov-) , become acquainted
with, associate with; have
intercourse with.
348
QUEER-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
HWvvccns, -ios, 6,
crvXXafxpavco (<rvv + Xap-,
), arrest. y a) (<rvv + X€-y-, Xox-) ?
Xo\a,
•yt]v, gather, collect, levy.
s, ij, [crvXX£y«], ?/, gathering of troops.
(crvv + paX-, pXrj-), together; subjective mid., contribute.
vto (<rvv + povXev-), oiY/i, advise; indir. mid., pZa/i toftft another for one's self, ask advice, con- sult with.
s, -ov, 6, [<rvv, jia\o- ], ally.
s, --n-cura, -irav, [<rvv, was], all together.
(<rvv + ) , send with. s, -cov, [<rvv, full~\, quite full. v)JLiroXe|JL4a> (<rvv + make war with. v|ATropex>o}jLcu (<rvv + proceed or march with. vnirpaTTO) (<rvv + irpaY-) , c?o or accomplish with, aid in
o-vv, prep. w. dat., with, with the help of. In comp., with.
crvvayw (<rvv + d-y-), bring to- gether, convene.
orvvaXXaTTw (<rvv + dXXa-y-), reconcile ; pass., become rec- onciled with.
(rvvavapaCvo) (<rvv + dva + Pav-. pa-), go up with.
o-vvcTTOfxai (<rvv + <r(€)ir-, cir-), accompany, follow.
<rvv€p-y6s, -ov, 6, [<rvv, cp-yov], fellow-worker, helper.
<rvv0€o-is, -€ws, T]C, a putting to- gether, composition.
<rvvoiSa, [crvv, olSa], know with, be conscious of.
<rvvTa,TTCD (<rvv + ra-y-), ar- range together, array, draw up. .
<rvvTt0Tjiu, put together.
2vpaKoo-ios, -a, -ov, [2vpdtKOv- o-at Syracuse'], Syracusan.
O*V(rK€Va^<i> (o-VV + O-K6VO.8-),
put baggage together, pack up.
crvo-TpaT€vojxai (o-vv + o-rpa- T€V-), make an expedition with, join an expedition. <rvo-TpaTi<oTT)s, -ov, 6, [crvv, o-TpaTicoTTjs], fellow-soldier. o-<j>aipa, -as, rj, ball, sphere. >, split.
Jw, have leisure. j, -fjs, TJ, leisure, school. 2a>KpaTT)s, -ovs, 6, [o-ws safe, Kparos], Sokrates or So- crates.
a-cojia. -aros, r6, body. s, -ios, 6,
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
349
T.
s, -«, o, Tamos. rajts, -€«s, ij, [T<£TT«], ar-
rangement, order; division,
company. Tapo-oi, -a>v, ot, Tarsoi or
TCUTO-O), older form of TCITTW. TCLTTW (ra-y-, i-cl., H. 398; G.
588), TO£O>, €Ta£a, T€Ta\a,
T^Ta-yjicu, 4T<£xOt]v, arrange. rctyos, -ov, 6, grave, tomb. Tax&>s, adv., [TO.XVS], quickly.
Comp. 0&TTOV, sup. Tax«-0"Ta.
-TJ, -ov, see TO-X^S. S, rax€ia, raxv, swift,
quick, speedy. Comp. 6dr-
TWV, SUp. TaXKTTOS.
T«, postpos. enclitic conj., and ; rt . . . ri or T^ . . . KaC, both . . . and.
<ra>, etc., [T€\€VT^], end; die. TeXcvTfj, -fjs, tj, [r^Xos end~], end; death.
T6JJLVO), CUt.
T€Tpaias, [r^TTap€s],/owr times. T€TpaKt<rxtXioi, -at, -a, four thousand.
s, r^rrapa, four. I, -T]S, TJ, art, skill. TT|\€, at a distance, afar. TCe^i (0€-, root cl., H. 404; G. 619), 0^<rw, ^Ka, r&i\- Ka or T€0€iKa, rc'Ocipai, tri-
0-qv, put, place; vdjxovs rC- 0t]|ii, /ay ^O^TI or make laws.
(rljia-), Tijjtfjo-a), etc.,
], honor.
rtjitos, -a, -ov, [Ti|i-#i], precious, honored, honorable.
etc., [rtjxwpos avenger], be an avenger, avenge; mid., take vengeance on, punish.
rCs, T(, interrog. pron., who f what ? T£ is often used as adv., why ?
rls, rl, indef. pron., anyone or -thing, a certain onet some- body or -thing.
Tio-o-a<|>€pvT]s, -ovs, 6, Tissa- phernes.
roioV$€, roidSc, roio'v8€, indef. dem. pron., such, differing from TOIOVTOS as o8c from OVTOS ; roioiSc as follows.
TOIOVTOS, TOiaVTT], TOlOVTo(v),
indef. dem. pron., such; differs from ToioVSc as OVTOS from 88€.
etc., [To'Xjia boldness'], dare. Tofo'TT|s, -ov, 6, [TO'JOV 6010],
archer, bowman. TO'TTOS, -ov, 6, place. TOO-OVTOS, Tocravrq, TOO-OV-
TO(V), indef. dem. pron., so
great, so much, pi., so many.
350
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
TO'TC, adv., at that time, then. s, TpCa, three.
(Tp€7r-, Tpo<|>-, Tpair-),
J'W. €Tp€\|/d,
rp€<|>-, Tpa<J>-), 0p€v}/co (H. 74, c; G. 95 and 5), €0p€v|/a, T€0pafj.p.cu. 4rpd<|>T)v, nourish, support.
TpiaKovra, indecl., thirty.
TpiaKo'crioi, -ai, -a, three hun- dred.
Tpi^jprjs, -ovs, -€i, -tj; du. -tj, -otv ; pi. -€is, -wv, -€<rt, -€is, [rp€is, root 4p- roi^], tri- reme, ship of war with three banks of oars.
Tpoiros, -ov, 6, [TP£JTG>], turnt way, manner ; character. ^, -fjs, ij, e, support. (TVX-,
nas. cl., H. 402, c; G. 603, 605 and 6) , T€V£O(I<U, Irvxov, rervx^Ka, T€T€vxa, happen, chance.
TVTTOS, -ov, 6, type.
TvirT<i>, strike.
Tvpavvcvw (rvpavvcv-), rvpav- v€vcra>, etc., [rvpavvos], ac^ «s tyrant, tyrannize.
rvpavvos, -ov, ol, absolute ruler, tyrant.
Tvpiociov, -ov, TO, Tyria- eion.
Y.
-as, T|, health. , vSaros, TO', water. H.
182, a ; G. 291, 34. vfuts, see o*v. virapxos, -ov, o, [viro, apxos
ruler, fr. apxw], lieutenant,
subordinate commander. virapx« (viro + dpx-), begin;
exist; virapx^v TivC, be on
one's side, favor, support. vir^p, prep., (1) w. gen., over,
above, in behalf of; (2) w.
ace., beyond. v-rreppaXXw, outdo, excel. vircppoXV), --qs, f|, [vircppaXXw] ,
excess, extravagance ; also
passage over mountains.
(viro + <T(€)X-, . cl., H. 402, d\
G.607,Urx-for(o-)ur(f)x-)»
i, promise (hold one's self under).
viro, prep., (1) w. gen., under; denoting the agent with pass, verbs, by ; (2) w. dat., under, at the foot of. In comp., under, somewhat.
viro^v-yiov, -ov, TO', [VITO, £v- •yov], draught animal, beast of burden.
viroKptvofxai, answer; play a part on the stage.
, -ov, 6, actor.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
351
(viro + Xa(3-. ), take under one^s pro-
tection. viroXct'ira) (viro + Xtir-, Xctir-,
XOITT-), leave behind. viroirrevco (viro + oinrcv-), viro-Tr-
T6v<ra>, v-irwirrevo-a, etc.,
[viro'irrr]s suspicious], sus-
pect, apprehend. viro\|/£d, -as, T), [viro, root 6ir-],
suspicion. •6<rT€patos, -a, -ov, [v<TT€pos],
belonging to the next day ;
TQ vo-T€paia (fijic'pq;), on the
next day. vcrrepos, -a, -ov, late / vorepov,
adv., afterwards. v^/TjXos, -rfj, -ov, [cf. v\|ros
height], high, lofty.
(^a-yeiv, inf., to eat.
<(>a£va> (<|)av-, i-cl., H. 400 ; G.
594), 4>ava>, €<|>T|va,
(H. 55, 6; G. 78),
7r€'4>aor^ai, 4<j>av0T]v or
vi]v, show, cause to appear /
dir. mid. (and pass.) with
the 2d perf., appear. <|>aXa-yg, -a-y-yos, TJ, battle-line,
army in battle order, Lat.
acies. <|>av€po's, -a, -o'v, [<j>a£vw],
plain, evident; 4v TW <j>a-
v€p«p, in public.
4>ap|j.aKov, -ov, TO', drug.
<(>€>« (<)>€p-, ol-, 4v€K-,
Ivc-yK-), oi'cra), T]V€<yKa (H. 438), TJvc-yicov, cvifvoxa, €VT)V€-y}xai, "nvexOilv, bear, carry.
(J^v-yw (<|>vy-, <|>€vy-, strong- vow, cl., H. 394; G. 572), 4>€v^ofiau e(|>vyov, tr€<|>€vya, flee ; go into exile, be in ex- ile.
<|>T]|iC (<|>a-, root cl., H. 404 ; G. 619), <j>T|crw or 6pw. c(|>T]o-a or ctirov, €l'pT)Ka. 6\IpT]|Aai, Ipp^j- 0t]v, sa?/, declare, speak. 0(1 <j>Tl|it, say • • • n°ti refuse, deny. The root of €pw was originally F€p- ; €tpT]Ka is for F€Fpt]Ka (Fpil-)^ €^pr)|jiat for FtFpT][j.cu. eppTjO-qv for cFpi]- 6t]v. The root of ctirov was originally petr- ; synopsis
€Lirca. €IUOL}1L. €llT€, cllTClV,
clircov. In compounds the pres. syst. is usually supplied by d'yopcvo).
<(>0av<o (4>8a-, nas. cl., H0 402, a ; G. 603), ^Grfo-ojiai, «|>8a- o-a or €<)>0T)v, e<)>6aKa, get the start of, anticipate.
(jnXc'a) (4>iX€-), 4>tXT](rw, etc., [<(>£Xos], love.
<|>iX£d, -as, T|, [<|)CXos], friend- ship.
<|>£Xu>s, -a, -ov, [<J>fXos], friendly.
352
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
4>(Xos, -TJ, -ov, friendly, dear. As subst., friend.
<jnXo'<ro<|>os, -ov, d, [<|>CXos, <ro- <|>o's] , lover of wisdom, phi- losopher.
4>XvdpC6L, -ds, TJ, nonsense, folly.
<f>op€w (4>ope-), 4>opTJcrco, etc., [<(>6pos], frighten; pass., to be afraid, fear.
4>6pos, -ov, o', fear.
4>OlVLKLOrTTJS, -OV, O, [<j>OtVlKl£w
fr. <j>oivi|], purple-wearer; <|>. Pao-(\€ios, wearer of the royal purple, a nobleman allowed by the king to wear the royal color. (JXHVIKOVS, -fj, -ovv, contracted
fr. <|>OlvtK€OS, -61, -OV, [<j>OL-
vij purple-red dye~\, purple- red, red.
<|>pa£tt, make known, tell.
4>povpapxos, -ov, o, [(jjpovpd garrison, apx«] , comman- der of a garrison, comman- dant.
$pvy£d, -ds, fj, Phrygia.
^>pvf, <£pvyo's, oc, Phrygian.
<j>vycxs, -oSos, oc, [4>€v-Y<«>], ban- ished man, exile.
<|>vXaKT]', -f]s, TI, [<j>vXaTTw], the act of guarding / garrison, guard.
4>vXa|, -aKos, oe, guard.
<J>vXciTT<i) (<)>vXaK-, i-cl., H. 397 ; G. 580), <|>vXa£<o, «<|>v'Xa|a,
axri v, [^v'Xag] , guard ;
dir. mid., guard one's self
against.
4>vVis, -€ws, TJ, nature. <|)vToV, -ov, TO', plant. <|>ijci), make grow. 4>covT), -f|s, TJ, sound, voice. <j>a>s, <|)WTO'S, TO', light.
, -TJ, -o'v, difficult, hard ;
of persons, harsh, bitter,
dangerous. XaXcirws, adv., [xaXciro's] ,
with difficulty, hardly ; \o,-
Xcirws <|>€pw» bear hardly, be
sorrowful. XaXKovs, -fj, -ovv, contracted
from XO^XKCOS, -d, -ov, [xa^-
KO'S bronze], brazen, of
bronze.
XapaKTTjp, -fjpos, of, mark. Xapcuro-o), scratch. X€ip, -o's, Tj, (but Du. G. D.
X«potv, PI. dat. x€po*C), hand.
XcppOVTJO-OS, -OV, TJ, [X^PPOS,
earlier x^po"°s ^y land, vfj- o-os island], peninsula, es- pecially the Thracian Cher- sonesos.
xtXtot, -at, -a, a thousand. pa, -as, TJ, she-goat. , -wvos, o, garment worn next the skin, tunic.
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
353
Xpoo|A<u
v, use, enjoy (primarily serve one's self, hence taking the dat. of means). In the pres. syst. a-€ contracts to tj, H. 412 ; G. 496. prj, impers. verb, Lat. oportet, one ought, must, it is neces-
XPrit« (XPflS-, i-cl., H. 398; G. 584, 585), want, desire.
XP%a» -TOS, T0'> [XP^F""]* in
the pi. property, money. Xpo'vos, -ov, o, time. Xpvo-Cov, -ov, TO, [xpvo-os],
gold coin, money. Xpvo-ovs, -fj, -ovv, contr. fr.
XpvVeos, -a, -ov, [xpva-os],
golden.
Xpvo-o's, -ov, of, gold. Xpvo-oxaXivos, -ov, [xpv<ro's,
XaXivds bridle], with gold-
mounted bridle. Xpa>|ia, -TOS, TO', color. X»pa, -as, T|, land.
X«P11»'»» etc-> place], make place, withdraw, go.
X»p£ov -ov, T6, [x«pos place], place, stronghold.
t|/&iov, -ov, TO', bracelet, arm- let.
\|/€vSos, -€os, TO', falsehood.
\|f€v'Sa> (t|/6v8-), xj/evVw, €\|/€vo-a. €\|/€vo-fxat, €\|/€vV6T]v, deceive by falsehood, prove false to ; often dep. TJ, --qs, TJ,
n.
wSe, adv., [88c], thus, as fol- lows.
<p8t|, -fjs, T|, sow^, ode. wv, ovo-a, 6v, pres. pple. of
€1(XC.
oivios, -a, -ov, [wvos price] , for sale. Td wvia, wares, goods for sale.
«pd, -as, T|, season, time.
u>s, proclitic, originally a rel. adv. of manner, [8s], in which way, as, how; then a conj. with many derived meanings. (1) Comparative, as, how; special uses are, (a) to strengthen a super!., o>s Taxio-Ta, as quickly as possible ; (&) to denote that a participle states the idea of some one else than the writer, where we use various phrases, as saying that, pre- tending that, supposing that, as he claimed, etc. (2) Tem- poral = 8T€, as, when. (3) Causal = cireiS-if, as, since.
354
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY.
(4) Declarative = 8™, how, that. (5) Final = i'va, in order that. (6) Prep. w. ace. of a word referring to a per- son = irapd, to. wo-ir€p, rel. adv. of manner,
strengthened from «s, just as.
WO-T€, conj., [o>s, T£], so as, so that.
(U(f>eXeCi) (0)4>€\€-), 0)4>€\T]0-CO.
etc., [^><|>€Xos], benefit, help.
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
A.
Able, am About, 7rf.pi w. gen. Accomplish, opda>. According to, Kara w. ace. Account, Aoyos, -ov, 6. Acropolis, aKpoVoAts, -eo>s, 17. Act like a tyrant, Tvpai/vcvw.
Actor, VTTOKplTyS, -OV, 6.
Adorn, Kooy/,€(o.
Advise, o-v//,/2ovAeva).
Afar, TiJAe.
Affair, 7rpay//.a, -ros, TO.
Affirm, <£r7/xi.
After, prep., /xcra w. ace. ;
COnj., eVei.
Again, TroAiv.
Against, cm or Trpos w. ace.
Agree, 6//,oAoyea>.
Air, a?/p, a epos, 6.
All, ?ras, Trao'a, Trav.
Alone, /xoVos, -7y, -ov.
Already, ^8?;.
Also, /cat.
Ambassador, aTrooroAos, -ov,
6.
Analysis, dVoAvo'is, -ews, ^. Analyze,
Ancient, dpxa'°?) •«, -ov.
And, /cat.
Angle, ytovta, -as, 17.
Animal, f<oov, -ov, TO.
Announce, dyyeAAco.
Answer, aTTOKptvo/xat.
Antagonist,
<•« c
-ov, o.
Any one, Tts, Tt. Apollo, ATroAAan/, -os, 6. Appear, Appoint,
Are, they - , cto-t(v). Around, Trept w. ace. Arrange, Touro-a). Arrangement, Ta^ts, -ews, ^. Art, Ttxvrj, ^ %- Artaxerxes, 'ApTa^epf^s, -ov,
c O.
As, ojs.
Asia, 'Aat'a, -as, 17.
Ask, atT€(o, epcoTaa).
As much as we could, lit. as
we most could. Assembly, dyopa, -as, 17. At, cv.
At a distance, T^Ac. Athenians, 'A^vaiot, -a)v, ot. 355
356
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
Athlete, aOXrjTys, -ov, 6. Athletic game, a#Xos, -ov, 6. Attempt, noun, Treipa, -as, 77 ;
verb, Tretpaofuu. At the side of, Trapa w. dat. Aware, become - , ytyvco-
Away from, dbrd w. gen.
B.
Back, TroXiv.
Bad, KaKos, -77, -dv.
Ball, o~<£atpa, -as, 77.
Barbarian, fidpflapos, -ov, 6.
Bare, yv//,vos, -77, -ov.
Battle, /Aax77, -77$, rj-
Be about (to), /xeXXto.
Bear, <£epeo.
Beautiful, KoXos, -97, -ov.
Beauty, KoXXos, -eos, TO.
Because, on; 8ta w. article and inf. in the ace.
Become, yiyvofuu.
Before, irpo w. gen.
Begin, apx<*>- Often ex- pressed by the inceptive aor.
Beginning, apxfj, -fc, ^-
Beside, Trapa w. dat.
Best, aptoros, -77, -ov; O~TOS, -77, -ov.
Better, /^eXrfwv,
Beyond, iro-cp w. ace.
Bird, opvls, -0os, 6 or 77.
Birth, yeveo-ts, -eo>s, */.
Blame, atrtao/xoi.
, -ov,
Book, yStjSXt'ov, -ov, TO. Bookseller, ySt^XtoTrwX
c O.
Born, be - , ycyvopxu.
Boy, Trats, TratSos, 6.
Break, KXao> ; break down,
Breath, Trvev/xa, -TOS, TO. Brother, d8eA</>os, -ov, 6. Burn, /caw.
Burning, Kavo-TtKOs, ->;, -o'v. But, dAAa, 8e.
By, denoting agency, VTTO w. gen.
C.
Can, Carry, Carve,
Cause to revolt, d Cause to stop, Travco. Caustic, Kavo~TtKos, -77, -ov. Certain, a - , TIS, Tt. Character, ?^0os, -eos, TO. Child, Trats, TraiSos, 6 or 77. Choose, mid. of atpe'co. Circle, KVAcXos, -ov, 6. Citadel, d/cpoVoXts, -eos, 77. Citizen, 7roXtTr7S, -ov, 6. City, TroXts, -ccos, 77. Color, xpco/xa, -TOS, TO. Common, KOIVOS, -77, -ov. Compare, Trapa^oXXo). Comparison, Trapa/BoXy, -775, 77. Composition, o-vv0eo-is, -ccos,
^
Conceal,
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
357
Concerning, Trepi w. gen. Conquer, viKaa>. Consult, mid. of o-v//,/?ovAevo>. Contest, dyoiv, dytovos, 6. Converse, StoAeyo/Aat. Corner, ytovtd, -as, y. Counsel, take counsel with,
mid. of o-v/A/SovAevw. Count, dpi0/Aeo>.
Cut, T€jUVa>.
Cyrus, Kvpos, -ov, 6. D.
Dare,
Dead, ve/cpds, -a, -ov. Decad, Se/<as, -8os> 17. Declare, <£r;/u. Deed, Spdfux, -ros, TO. Defeat, vZ/cdo), Kparcw. Deliberate, mid. of /SovAevco. Delphi, AeA<£ot, -tov, ot. Depose, Travw r^s dpx^5. Description, Xdyos, -ov, 6. Destroy, KaraXvw. Digest, 7T€7rra). Discourse, A.oyos, -ov, 6. Distance, at a - , TTJ\€. Distribute, ve/^o). Divide, 8tatpea>. Divinity, Sat/xwv, -ovos, 6. Do, Trotea), Spaa). Do good to, cv Trotea) w. ace. Drama, 8pajw,a, -ros, TO. Drug, <£dpjnaKov, -ov, TO. Dwell in, otKeo). Dynast, Svvdo-T^s, -ov, 6.
E.
Earth, y^, y^s, 17.
Eat, to - , inf., <£ayetv.
Educate, TratSevto.
Elder, 7rpeo-/3vrepos, -a, -ov.
Empty, KCVOS, -rj, -ov.
Enemy, 7roXep,tos, -ov, 6.
Enough, t/cavds, -77, -ov; to
avoid ambiguity apiOpov
may be added. Enslave, SovAdo). Envoy, aTrocrroAos, -ov, 6. Epistle, eTrto-ToATy, -T)S, ^. Equal, to-os, -ry, -ov. Establish, KaOca-TrjfJU.. Even, adj., 6/xaAds, -17, ov;
adv., /cat.
Ever, 7TOT6 enclitic. Everything = all things,
Evident, c^avepds, -a, -ov. Examine, o-KeVTo/xat. Excel, VTrep/3dAAo). Excess, vTrepjSoAr/, -^5, 17. Exercise, yv/wi£<o. Expedition, make an - ,
orpaTevo), usually mid. Extravagance, vT
F.
Faithful, TTICTTOS, -17, -ov. Falsehood, i/^vSos, -eos, TO. Family, yevea, -as, 17. Far, T^Ae. Fear, ^o/Sos, -ov, 6.
358
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
Feeling, Traces, -eos, TO. Few, oXtyot, -at, -a. Figure, ctSos, -eos, TO. Fire, Trvp, Trvpds, TO. Firm, o~Tepeds, -a, -ov. First, 7rpu>Tos, -77, -ov.
Fitting, think , dfioto.
Flesh, o-dp£, o-apKos, 17. Flower, dv#os, -eos, TO.
Foot, 7TOVS, TToSds, 6.
For, conj., yap.
For many months, ace. of
extent.
Force, Svva^is, -ea>s, 17. Form, noun, pop<j>y, -77$, 17;
verb, 7rXao"o~a). Free, eXev0epos, -a, -ov. Friend, <£i'Xos, -ov, 6. From, aTTO w. gen., or ef w.
gen.
G.
Game, a0Xos, -ov, 6. Genuine, ITV/AOS, -77, -ov. Get into, sometimes KaOi-
O-TrjfU €15.
Get to revolt, Give, oY8a>/Ai. Go, Ip^o/xat, et/xt. God, 0eos, -ov, 6. Gold, xp^o"05> -<™> o. Good, dya^o?, -^, -ov. Good health, vytcta, -a?, T). Government, dp^, ->7S, 17. Grasp, atpcco. Grass, flordvrj, -775, T). Grave, Ta<^os, -ov, 6.
Greek, "EXX^v, -os, 6.
Grow, make , <£vo>.
Guardian, CTmrKOTros, -ov, 6. Guide, dywyos, -ov, 6. Gymnasium, yv/xvdo-tov, -ov, TO.
H.
Hand, x^tp, -os, >;. Hatred, /x,to;os, TO.
Have, l^^j c^/xt/ w< ^a^' °^ possessor.
Have leisure, o-xoXd£a>.
He, she, it, as subj., not ex- pressed unless emphatic ; when emphatic, OVTOS, €Ket- vos. But he, 6 8c. His, her, its, their, often ex- pressed by the article only, sometimes by the gen. of avTOs. Him, her, it, them, as obj., ace. of avTos.
Head, Ke^aXry, -775, 7).
Health, vyteta, -as, 7;.
Hear, d/<ovo).
Heat, OepjjLov, -ov, TO.
Help, fioYJOeta, -as, 77.
Helper, orvvepyds, -ov, 6.
Her, poss., translated by the article.
Herb, Pordvr), -779, 77.
Hide, Sep/xa, -TOS, TO.
Himself, herself, etc., avro?, -77, -d; when reflexive, cav- TOV, -^s, -ov.
Hippopotamus, t7T7ro7r6Va//,os, -ov, 6.
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
359
His, see He. History, toroptd, -as, 17. Honor, Tt//,aa>. Honorable, /coAos, -17, -ov. Horn, /cepas, /ceparo>, TO. Horse, TTTTTOS, -ov, 6. House, OIKOS, -ov, 6. House of the muses, crciov, -ov, TO.
I.
I, eyw, e//,ov or p&v.
Ice, KpvoTaAA,os, -ov, 6.
If, el, lav.
Illustration, irapa/3oXfy -^s, 17.
Image, CIKUJV, -ovos, 17.
Imitate, /xi/x€o/>uu.
Imitator, JUU/AOS, -ov, 6.
In, cv w. dat.
Inhabit, ot/cew.
Inquire, cptoraw.
Inside, Icrw.
Instead of, avTt w. gen.
Instrument, opyavov, -ov, TO.
Into, cts w. ace.
Ionian s, *Io>ves, -vo>v, ot.
Is, ccm'(V).
It, see jfiTe.
Its, translated by the article.
Itself, avros, -17, -o.
J.
Judge, verb, /cpfvw; noun, , -ov, 6.
K.
Kept trying, imperf . of verb
for try.
Kind, yevos, -cos, TO. King, /3ao~iAevs, -e<os, 6. Know, ot8a, inf.
sometimes inf. and perf.
of yiyvwo-Kco. Learn to
know, ytyv(oo"/co). Known, make
L.
Ladder, KA.i)ua£, -KOS, 17. Land, y^, y>/s, 17- Language, yAwo-o-a, -i;s, 17. Large, /Aa/cpos, -a, -ov. Laughter, yeA.o>s, -WTOS, 6. Law, VO/AOS, -ov, 6. Lead, ayw.
Leader, dywyds, -ov, 6. Learn, jjuavOdvo). Learn to know, ytyv<oo-/«o. Legend, //,v0os, -ov, 6. Leisure, o*^oA?7, -^s, 17 ; have
leisure, o~xoAa£a>. Lesson, /xa^^/xa, -ros, TO. Letter (of the alphabet),
ypa//yxa, -ros, TO. Letter (epistle),
Level, 6/xaA.os, -17, -ov.
Life, yStos, -ov, 6.
Life, mode of - , oYan-a,
Light, <^>cos,
Like, o/Aotos, -a, -ov.
360
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
Line, crrt^os, -ov, 6. Little, /u/cpds, -a, -ov. Live, oiAcea). Lonely, e/jTy/xos, -77, -ov. Long, ^a/epos, -a, -ov ; a long
time, TroAvv \povov. Loose, Avo>. Loosing, Averts, -ecus, 77.
Lung, TTVCV/ACOV, -OV09, 6.
M.
Machine, Make, 7roteo>. Make grow, <£ Make known, Man, av0po)7ros, -ov, 6. Many, TroAAoi, TroAAat, ?roAAa. Marathon, Mapafltov, -coves, 6. Mariner, vavr^s, -or, 6. Mark, ^apa/crT/p, -^pos, 6. Marriage, ya^os, -ov, 6. Master, SecrTroV^s, -ov, 6. Matter, ?rpay/xa, -ros, TO. Measure, ^terpov, -ov, TO. Measuring-rod, Kavwv, -dvos,
6.
Memory, fwrjprj, -779, ?;. Messenger, ayyeAos, -ov, 6. Mix, K€pavvv/xt. Mixing-bowl, /cpaT^p, -^pos,
6.
Mode of life, oYaiTa, -175, T). Month, /U.T/V, /xryvds, 6. Most, adv., fjLaAi<rTa. Mould, TrAao^o-o). Much, iroAvs, TroAA^, TroAv.
Muse, /xovo-a, -779, ?). Museum, /xovo-etov, -ov, TO. Music, fjiovo-LKrjj -i}s, T).
N.
Naked, yvjiu/ds, -97, -ov. Name, ovv/xa, -TOS, TO. Nature, <£vVis, -€<os, 77. Neither . . . nor, OVTC .
OVT€.
Never, OVTTOTC, /AT^TTOTC. New, veos, -a, -ov. North-wind, /3opeds, -ov, Nose, pfs, ptvds, 77. Not, ov, OVK, ov^, ^77. Not yet, OVTTO). Now, vvv. Number, ap^ftds, -ov, 6.
O.
Ode, (0877, -779, 77. Often, TToAAaKts. Older, Trpeo-ySvTcpos, -a, -ov. Oligarchy, oAtyapxtd, -as, 77. On, €7Ti w. dat. Once, ?roT€, enclitic. One's self, lavTov, -775, -ov. Only, only one, /xdvos, -77, -ov. Opinion, Sofa, -775, rj ; Soyyma,
-TOS, TO.
Orator, p77Ta>p, -opos, 6. Origin, yev€0"ts, -ecus, 17. Other, aAAos, -77, -ov ; erepos,
-a, -ov. Ought, xp77, impers., w. inf.
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
361
Outdo, v?
Out of, c£, €/c, w. gen.
Outside, cf <o.
Overseer, eTria-Korros, -ov, 6.
Own, one's own, i&os, -a, -ov.
P.
Pain, oAyos, -eos, TO. Park, TrapaSeto-os, -ov, 6. Passion, 7ra0os, -cos, TO. Pedagogue, TraiSaytoyos, -ov,
6.
People, &7/xos, -ov, 6. Perceive, aicr0avo/xai, yiyvco-
O7CO).
Persian, Ilepo-T/s, -ov, 6. Philosopher, <£iAoo-o</>os, -ov,
6.
Pipe, avAos, -ov, 6. Pirate, TreipaTiys, -ov, 6. Place, noun, TOTTOS, -ov, 6;
verb, riOrjfu.
Place, take , yiyvojLuu.
Plan, )8ovAcvo). Plant, <£VTOV, -ov, TO. Plot against, cVi/itovAcva). Poet, TTOI^T^S, -ov, 6. Position, 0«ns, -cws, 17. Power, 8vva/us, -ca>s, ^. Prevent, /ccoAvo). Priest, tcpevs, -ccos, 6. Prime, aK/xrJ, -i}s, ^. Private, tStos, -a, -ov. Prize, a^Aov, -ov, TO. Procure the release of, mid.
of Avw,
Prophet, /xavTts, -ea>s, 6. Put, TiOrjfU.
Put together, owrt'0i?/u. Putting together, o-v -€(os, 17.
R.
Race, kind, yei/os, -eos, TO. Race, running, Spo/ios, -ov, 6. Ransom, mid. of Avo>. Read, dvaytyv(oo*K(o. Real, ITV/XOS, -17, -ov. Recognize, ytyvwo-Kto. Reign, reign over, /?ao-iAevo>. Release, Avo>. Reply, aTTOKptvo/xat. Report, ayyeAAo). Revolt, mid. (with /u-aor. and
perf. act.) of <l<£icrn7/Ai. Right, op#os, -ry, -ov. River, TroTa/xos, -ov, 6. Road, 6805, -ov, 17. Rose, poSov, -ov, TO. Rule, noun, /cavcov, -ovos, 6;
verb, apx«>'
Ruler, Svvao-Tr/s, -ov, 6. Running, 8po/xos, -ov, 6.
S.
Sacred, tepos, -a, -ov. Sailor, vavT^s, -ov, 6. Same, 6 avros, ^ avTiy, TO
avTo.
Satrap, o-aTpctTr^s, -ov, 6. Say, <f>r]iAL, Acyco. Sceptre, cnaJTrrpov, -ov? TO.
362
ENGLISH-GEEEE: VOCABULABY.
Scheme against, €7ri/:tovA.ei;'(o. School, o~xoA.T7, -775, 77. Scratch, xapacroxo. Season, copa, -as, 77. Secret, /AVOTIKOS, -77, -ov. Secret doctrine, //.vor^piov,
-OV, TO.
See, 6paa> ; fut. ctyo/xai.
Seize, aipeco.
Sell, 7ra)A.€O).
Send, aWAAo).
Send away, aTrooreAAci).
Set up, fcrrr//^.
Seven, CTTTOI.
Seventh, c/3So/xos, -77, -ov.
Shape, cISos, -eos, TO.
She-goat, ^t/iatpa, -as, 77.
Ship, vavs, vews, 77.
Show, noun, fled, -as, 77 ; verb,
</>atVto. Side, at the side of, 7ra/oa w.
dat.
Sight, ^ea, -as, 17. Skill, TexvT?, -775, ^. Skin, 8ep/u.a, -ros, TO. Slave, SovXos, -ov, 6. Small, /xt/cpos, -d, -ov. So, OVTO>(S).
Sokrates, 5a>KpaT?7S, -ovs, 6. Soldier, o"TpaTta)T77S, -ov, 6. Solid, orepeos, -a, -ov. Solitary, €p77/x,os, -17, -ov. Something, TI, enclitic. Sometime, -TTOTC, enclitic. Son, Trats, 7rat8os, 6. Song, ode, 0)877, "^? ^ 5 strain
of music, ^c'Aos, -eos, TO.
Soothsayer, /AavTts, -ca>s, 6. Sort, what - of a, otos, -a, -ov.
Soul, \fixn) -fa ft-
Sound, noun, ^>a)v>7, -775, 17 ;
verb, <^a)V€a>. Spartans, Aa/ceSat/Aovtot, -a>v,
c 01.
Speak, Xcyo).
Sphere, o"^)arpa, -as, 77.
Spirit, 8at/>ta)v, -ovos, 6.
Split, o-xt'£a>.
Staff, cr/c^TTTpov, -ov, TO.
Stand, perf., plup., and fut.
perf. act. of io-Trjfu. Star, ao-Tpov, -ov, TO. Statue, ctkwv, -ovos, 77. Stone, At^os, -ov, 6.
Stop, TTttVO).
Story, lo~Topt'a, -as, 77. Straight, op^os, -77, -ov. Street, 68os, -ov, 77. Strength, /cpaTos, -eos, TO. Strike, TVTTTO). Struggle, dycovt^o/xat. Summit, 0,^77, -775, »). Sun, 77X105, -ov, 6. Suppose, oto/Aat. Surpass, vtKaa>.
T.
Take, .
Take apart, dvoAvo).
Take counsel with, mid. of
<TVjJi/3oV\€V<l).
Take place, ytyvo/xat.
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
363
Taking apart, dvoAvo-is, -eo>s,
*
Tale, jjivOos, -ov, 6.
Talk, Aoyos, -ov, 6.
Teach, StScurjcco.
Teacher, SiSao-KoAos, -ov, 6.
Tell, <£pa£<o, Ae'yw.
Ten, SeKa.
Than, 77, or the gen. case.
That, conj., on; after ^TJ/U and some other verbs, ex- pressed by the inf. mode.
That, rel. pron., os, 77, o.
The, 6, 77, TO.
Theatre, ^earpov, -ov, TO.
Their, see JETe.
Them, see He.
Themselves, see Himself.
Then, TOTC.
There, often not translated at the beginning of a sent.
They, see He.
Thing, often omitted, some- times Trpayfta, -ros, TO.
Think, oto/xat.
Thirty, TptaKovra.
Three, Tpets.
Throat, Aapuy£, -7705, 6.
Through, 8ta w. gen.
Throw, /?aXXa>.
Time, ^povos, -ov, 6 ; season, wpd, -a?, 17.
To, with verbs of motion, €TU or €ts w. ace.
Together, 6/xov.
Tomb, Ta^)os, -or, 6.
Tongue, yXwo-o-a, -779, ^.
Top, aKpov, -ov, TO.
Tree, SevSpov, -ov, TO.
True, 6TV/X05, -77, -ov.
Try, Tretpaojitat.
Turn, verb, TpeVw; noun,
TpO7TO9, -OV, 6.
Type, TVTTOS, -ov, 6. Tyrant, Tvpawos, -ov, 6.
U.
Unable, be , ov SvVa/juit.
Under, VTTO w. dat. Undo, X'jw. Unloose, dvoAvo). Upon, €7rt w. dat. Upright, op0os, -77, -ov. Used to, expressed by the imperf. tense.
V.
Vanquish, vt/ccuo.
Victorious, be , vt/caw.
View, o~K€7TTo/xat. Voice, <^a>vi7, -779, 77.
W.
War, TroXc/Aos, -ov, 6. Was, T^V.
Water, vSwp, V&ITOS, TO. Way, 6809, -ov, 17. Week, I^So/xcis, -01805, r). Weight, /3apos, -€05, TO. Well, cv. Were,
364
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY.
What? TL.
When, ore, CTTCI, see note on
140, I., 3. When ? TroVe. Which, see Who. While, ore. Who, which, that, what, rel.
pron., os, 17, o. Who? TI'S. Whole, oAos, -r;, -ov. Why? TI'.
Wind, Trvev/xa, -ros, TO. Wisdom, oxx^ia, -as, 17. Wise, oxx^os, -•>/, -ov. Wish, /3ov\ofjjai. With, /xcra w. gen., cruv w.
dat., or sometimes the
simple dat.
Within, ccro). Word, Xoyos, -ov, 6. Work, €pyov, -ov, TO. World, Koo-ftos, -ov, 6. W'orship, 0epa7rev(i>. Write, ypa<#)w. Writing, ypa/x^na, -TOS, TO.
X.
Xenophon, Hcvo^wv, -WVTOS,
Xerxes,
, -ov, 6.
Y.
Young, veos, -a, -ov. Younger, vecoTcpos, -a, -ov. Youth, 17)817, -^s, ^.
INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES.
A-, an- (privative) 60, 3, b. Acephalous 31, 5. Acme 29; 31, 1. Acoustic 34 ; 36, 1. Acoustics 36, 1 ; 36, 6. Acropolis 94. Acrostic 94; 96, 1. Adelphi 58 ; 59, I, 9. Aerate 86, 2. Aerial 86, 2. Aeriform 86, 2. Aerolite 86, 2. Aeronaut 86, 2. Aesthetic 78, 1 ; 78, 11. Aesthetics 78, 1. Agatha 66. Agnostic 60, 3, b. Agonize 84. Agony 84 ; 86, 1. Air 84 ; 86, 2. Albuminoid 91, 5. Allopathy 89 ; 91, 1. Alpha and Omega 2, a. Alphabet 2. Amnesty 100, 9. Amorphous 60, 3, b. Amphibious 57, 6. Amphitheatre 57, 6.
Anabaptist 51, 5, b. Anachronism 51, 5, b. Anaesthesia 78, 1. Anaesthetic 78, 1. Anagram 51, 5, b. Analogon 51, 5, b. Analogous 51, 5, b. Analogue 51, 5, b. Analogy 51, 5, b. Analysis 94; 96, 7; 100, 10, a. Analytic 96, 7. Analyze 94. Anarchy 82, 1, b. Anathema 100, 10, c. Anathematize 100, 10, c. Anatomy 105, 10. Anchor 6, a. Anecdote 100, 3. Angel 58.
Anhydrous 60, 3, b. Annapolis 96, 11. Anomalous 103 ; 105, 7. Anomaly 105, 7. Anonymous 91, 9. Antagonist 84. Antagonize 84. Anthem 68, 1. Anther 98.
366 INDEX OF ENGLISH JDEBIVATIVES.
Anthology 100, 1. Anthropoid 91, 5. Anthropology 49. Anthropomorphic 59, I, 12. Anthropomorphism 60, 6. Anthropophagi 77, 1, 2. Anthropophagous 77, I, 2. Anti- 68, 1. Antidote 100, 3. Antinomian 68, 1. Antinomy 68, 1. Antipathy 91, 10. Antiperiodic 68, 1. Antiphone 68, 1. Antipode 82, 7. Antipodes 80 ; 82, 7. Antislavery 68, 1. Antithesis 100, 10, a. Antithetic 100, 10, a. Apathetic 91, 10. Apathy 91, 10. Aphelion 56, II, 4. Apocrypha 110, 7. Apogee 31, 3; 57, 1. Apologetic 57, 1. Apologize 57, 1. Apologue 57, 1. Apology 54 ; 57, 1. Apostasy 105, 5. Apostate 105, 5. Apostle 58 ; 60, 7. Apostolic 60, 7. Apothecary 100, 10, b. Apotheosis 60, 3, c. Arch- 82, 1, b. Archaeology 80 ; 82, 1, a.
Archaic 82, 1, a. Archaism 82, 1, a. Archangel 82, 1, b. Archbishop 82, 1, b ; 74, 9. Archduke 82, 1, b. Archetype 82, 1, a. Archi- 82, 1, b. Archiepiscopal 82, 1, b ; 74, 9. Architect 82, 1, b. Archives 82, 1, b. Archthief 82, 1, b. Aristocracy 90, 1, 1 ; 91, 7. Aristocrat 89; 90, 1, 1; 91, 7. Arithmetic 76. Aster 68, 2. Asterisk 68, 2. Asteroid 91, 5. Astral 66. Astrology 68, 2. Astronomy 67, II, 9 ; 68, 2. Atheist 60, 3, b. Athlete 84. Atom 105, 10.
Autobiography 66 ; 67, 1, 2. Autocrat 91, 7. Autograph 67, I, 2. Automatic 68, 3, a. Automaton 68, 3, a. Autonomous 67, 1, 3 ; 68, 3, a. Autonomy 68, 3, a. Autopsy 78, 5. Autotype 78, 9.
Baptize 51, 5, b. Baritone 110, 3. Barometer 108.
INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 367
Barytone 110, 3. Basil 96, 2. Basilica 96, 2. Basilisk 96, 2. Bible 66.
Bibliography 68, 4. Bibliomancy 100, 7. Bibliomania 68, 4. Bibliophile 68, 4. Bibliopole 66. Bibliotheke 100, 10, b. Bicycle 60, 5. Bigamy 91, 2. Bimetallist 68, 9. Biography 49; 50,1,2; 51,1. Biology 50, II, 5; 51, 1. Bishop 74, 9. Boreas 44. Botanic 31, 2. Botanist 31, 2. Botany 29; 31, 2. Bureaucracy 91 , 7. Bureaucrat 91, 7.
Cacodoxy 68, 7. Cacography 68, 7. Cacophony 66 ; 68, 7. Calligraphy 91, 6. Callisthenics 91, 6. Canon 84 ; 86, 6. Canonical 86, 6. Canonize 86, 6. Catacomb 51, 5, c. Catalogue 51, 5, c. Catarrh 7. Catholic 110, 10.
Caustic 108. Cauterize 110, 6. Cautery 110, 6. Cenotaph 98 ; 99, I, 3. Cephalalgia 31, 5; 110,2. Cephalic 29; 31,5. Cephalopod 82, 7. Character 84; 86, 10. Characteristic 86, 10. Characterize 86, 10. Chimaera, or Chimera 39 ; 41,
5.
Chimerical 41, 5. Chirography 34 ; 35, 1,3. Chiromancy 100, 7. Chiropodist 82, 7. Chord 110, 11. Chromatic 91, 14. Chrome 89. Chromo91, 14. Chromolithograph 91 , 14. Chronic 51, 7. Chronicle 51, 7. Chronology 49 ; 50, II, 1 ; 51, 1. Chronometer 56, II, 1. Chrysalis 76; 78, 10. Chrysanthemum 78, 10. Chryselephantine 78, 10. Chrysolite 78, 10. Climacteric 78, 3. Climax 76. Comedy 31, 7. Constantinople 96, 11. Cosmetic 49 ; 51, 4. Cosmic 51, 4. Cosmical 51, 4.
368 INDEX OF ENGLISH LEEIVATIVES.
Cosmogony 91, 3; 95, I, 2. Cosmopolitan 51, 4. Cosmopolite 50, II, 1 ; 51, 1 ;
51,4.
Cosmorama 49 ; 51, 4. Cosmos 49; 51, 4. -cracy 91, 7. -crat 91, 7. Crater 103; 105, 6. Crisis 46, 1. Criterion 46, 1. Critic 44 ; 46, 1. Critical 46, 1. Criticism 46, 1. Criticise 46, 1. Crypt 108. Crystal 58. Cycle 58. Cyclone 58. Cyclopaedia 82, 6.
Daemon 86, 3. Daemonic 86, 3. Daimon 86, 3. Daimonic 86, 3. Decad 68, 9 ; 80. Decade 80.
Decagon 80; 81, II, 1. Decagram 82, 3; 91, 4. Decalogue 82, 3. Decameter 82, 3. Decarchy 82, 1, b. Delta 2, a. Deltoid 91, 5. Demagogue 72 ; 73, I, 1. Democracy 90, 1, 2 ; 91, 7.
Democrat 91, 7. Demon 84 ; 86, 3. Demonic 86, 3. Demonology 86, 3. Demotic 74, 1. Derm 98. Despot 44. Devil 46, 3; 60,7. Di- 96, 1. Dia- 78, 8.
Diabolical 46, 3 ; 60, 7. Diacritical 78, 8. Diaeresis 105, 1. Diagnosis 78, 8. Diagonal 82, 2. DialectlOS; 105,2. Dialectics 105, 2. Dialogue 105, 2. Diameter 54; 56, 1, 3. Diapason 110, 11. Diaphanous 72; 74, 11. Diastole 78, 8. Didactic 108 ; 110, 4. DieresislOS; 105, 1. Diet 39; 41, 3; 41,5. Digraph 96, 1. Dilemma 110, 8. Dimorphic, -ous 96, 1. Diorama 57, 2. Diphthong 5; 68, 9; 96, 1. Dissyllable 110, 8. Distich 96, 1. Dogma 108 ; 110, 5. Dogmatic 110, 5. Dogmatize 110, 5. Dose 98 ; 100, 3,
INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 369
Doxology 68, 5. Drama 98. Dramatic 100, 4. Dramatist 100, 4. Dramaturgy 100, 4. Drastic 100, 4. Dromedary 51, 3. Dynamic 96, 5. Dynamite 94. Dynamo 96, 5. Dynamo-electric 96, 5. Dynast 94. Dynasty 94. Dyspepsia 103 ; 105, 8. Dyspeptic 105, 8.
Eclectic 100, 1. Economy 74, 6. Ecstasy 105, 5. Ecstatic 105, 5. Electricity 96, 5. Elephant 78, 10. Emphasis 74, 11. Emphatic 74, 11. Empiric 108 ; 110, 12. Empyrean 86, 8. Encephalon 30, II, 5 ; 31, 5. Encyclical 59, I, 5. Encyclopaedia 82, 6. Energy 54; 56, II, 5. Entomology 105, 10. Eph- 68, 6. Ephemeral 68, 6. Ephemeris 68, 6. Epi- 68, 6. Epidemic 74, 1 ; 105, 3.
Epidermis 100, 2. Epiglottis 68, 6. Epigram 68, 6; 91, 4. Epigraphy 68, 6. Epilepsy 110, 8. Epilogue 68, 6. Epiphany 74, 11. Epiphyte 96, 14. Episcopacy, 74, 9. Episcopal 72 ; 74, 9. Epistle 58 ; 60, 7. Epistolary 60, 7. Epitaph 99, 1, 2. Epithet 100, 10, a. Epitome 105, 10. Epizootic 105, 3. Epode 68, 6. Eponym, 91, 9. Eponymous 91, 9. Eremite 84 ; 86, 5. Esoteric 80; 82, 5. Ethic 100, 5. Ethical 100, 5. Ethics 98; 100,5. Etymology 72 ; 74, 2. Etymon 74, 2. Eugene 91, 3. Eugenia 91, 3. Eugenie 91, 3. Eulogium 51, 5, a. Eulogize 51, 5, a. Eulogy 51, 5, a. Eupepsia 105, 8. Eupeptic 104, I, 8; 105,8. Euphemism 108 ; 110, 15. Euphemistic 110, 15,
370 INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES.
Euphony 34 ; 35, I, 5 ; 36, 2 ;
68, 7.
Evangel 60, 1. Evangelical 60, 1. Evangelize 60, 1. Exodus 57, 3. Exoteric 82, 5. Exotic 80 ; 82, 5.
Fancy 74, 11. Fantastic 74, 11. Fantasy 74, 11.
Genealogy 89.
Genesis 94 ; 96, 3.
Genetic 96, 3.
Geography 29; 30,1,8; 31,3.
Geology 31, 3; 50, 11,5.
Geometry 31, 3; 57, 4.
George 57, 4.
Gloss 41, 1.
Glossary 39 ; 41, 1.
Glottis 41, 1.
Gnome 51, 2.
Gnostic 49; 51, 2; 60, 3, b.
Goniometer 82, 2.
Grammar 91, 4.
Grammatical 91, 4.
Graphic 31, 4; 82, 10.
Graphite 31, 4.
Gymnasium 76.
Gymnast 78, 2.
Gymnastic '78, 2.
Gymnic 78, 2.
Hades 7, a.
Harmony 51, 7. Hebdomadal 80 ; 82, 4. Hebe 29. Heliacal 57, 5. Helianthus 100, 1. Heliometer 57, 5. Heliotrope 54 ; 56, II, 9. Heliotype 78, 9. Hemi- 41, 3. Hemisphere 41, 3. Heptarchy 80; 82, 1, b. Heresy 105, 1. Heretic 103; 105, 1. Hermit 86, 5. Heterodox 66 ; 68, 5. Heterogeneous 91, 3. Heterophemy 110, 15. Hexagon 82, 2. Hierarchy 94; 95,11, 1. Hieratic 74, 1; 96, 6. Hieroglyphic 94. Hieroglyphics 96, 6. Hieronymus 96, 6. Hierophant 96, 6. Hippodrome 58 ; 60, 4. Hippopotamus 58 ; 59, 1, 2. Historiographer 35, II, 5. History 34 ; 36, 3. Holocaust 108 ; 110, 10. Homer 7. Homoeopathy 89 ; 90, II, 10 ;
91, 1.
Homogeneous 91, 3; 91, 8. Homonym 91, 8; 91, 9. Homonymous 91, 8. Holography 30, 1, 9 ; 31, 3.
INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 371
Horologe 31, 8; 51, 5, a. Horometer 31, 8; 57, 4. Horoscope 31, 8 ; 74, 9. Hour 29 ; 31, 8. Hydra 60, 9. Hydrant 60, 9. Hydraulic 58; 59,1, 1. Hydraulics 58; 59, I, 1. Hydrography 60, 9. Hydrometer 60, 9. Hydropathy 91, 10. Hydrophobia 58 ; 60, 9. Hydrostatics 105, 5. Hygeia39; 41, 4. Hygiene 41, 4. Hygienic 41, 4. Hyper- 46, 6. Hyperbole 45.
Hyperborean 45, I, 8 ; 46, 6. Hypercritical 44 ; 46, 6. Hypo- 100, 2. Hypocrisy 76. Hypocrite 76. Hypodermis 100, 2. Hypodermic 100, 2. Hypothecate 100, 10, b. Hypothesis 100, 10, a.
-ic 78, 11.
Iconoclasm 84 ; 86, 4. Iconoclast 85, I, 10; 86, 4. Iconography 86, 4. -ide 91, 5. Idiocrasy 105, 5. Idiom 103 ; 105, 4. Idiomatic 105, 4.
Idiopathic 104, II, 1.
Idiosyncrasy 105, 6.
Idiot 105, 4.
Indianapolis 96, 11.
Iota 2, a.
-ise 86, 11.
-ism 86, 11.
Isochronous 74, 3.
Isometric 74, 3.
Isosceles 74, 3.
Isothermal 72 ; 73, 1, 12 ; 74, 3.
-ist 78, 11; 86, 11.
-He 31, 4. f
-ize 86, 11.'
Jerome 96, 6. Jot 2, a.
Kaleidoscopic 89; 90, I, 10.
Laryngoscope 77, 1, 5. Larynx 76.
Lithograph 66 ; 67, 1,4. Lithology 68, 8. Logic 51, 5, a.
Machine 34; 36,4. Macrocephalous 74, 4. Macrocosm 73, 1, 5. Macrometer 74, 4. Macron 72 ; 74, 4. Macroscopic 74, 4. Mantic 100, 7. Mathematics 108 ; 110, 9. Mechanic 34 ; 36, 4. Mechanism 36, 4,
372 INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES.
Melodrama 100, 8. Melody 98, 100, 8; 31,7. Metal 68, 9. Metamorphosis 60, 6. Metaphor 82, 9. Metaphysics 96, 13. Metempsychosis 60, 6. Meter 54. Method 57, 3. Metonymy 91, 9. Metric 54.
Metronome 66; 68, 10. Metropolis 96, 11.. Metropolitan 96, 11. Microcephalous 74, 5. Microcosm 73, 1, 5 ; 95, II, 9. Micrometer 74, 5. Micronesia 74, 5. Microscope 72; 74, 5; 74, 9. Mime 76; 78, 4. Mimetic 78, 4. Mimic 78, 4. Misanthrope 94. Misanthropy 95, I, 8. Misogamist 96, 10. Misogynist 96, 10. Mnemonic 98 ; 100, 9. Mnemonics 100, 9. Mobocracy 91, 7. Monachism 68, 9. Monad 68, 9. Monarch 81, I, 9. Monarchy 82, 1, b. Monastery 68, 9. Monastic 68, 9. Monk 68, 9,
Monoceros 100, 6. Monochrome 91, 14. Monody 68, 9. Monogamy 91, 2. Monogram 66; 68, 9; 91, 4. Monograph 68, 9. Monolith 68, 9. Monologue 68, 9. Monomania 68, 9. Monometallist 68, 9. Monophthong 68, 9. Monopoly 67, II, 1. Monosyllable 68, 9. Monotheism 68, 9. Monotone 68, 9. Morpheus 60, 6. Morphine 60, 6. Morphology 58. Muse 39; 41,2. Museum 58. Music 39; 41, 2. Mystery 108. Mystic 108. Myth 49. Mythology 50, I, 3.
Naples 95, I, 5. Nausea 84; 86, 7. Nautical 84. Nautilus 86, 7. Neapolis95, I, 5; 96, 11. Necrology 96, 8. Necromancy 98 ; 100, 7. Necromantic 100, 7. Necropolis 94; 95, I, 6. Nemesis 66 1 68, 10,
INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 373
Neo- 96, 9. Neologism 96, 9. Neology 96, 9. Neophyte 94 ; 96, 9. Neoplatonism 96, 9. Neuralgia 108 ; 110, 2. Nomad 68, 10.
Ochlocracy 91, 7. Ode 29. Odometer 49. Oeconomy 72; 74, 6. Oecumenical 74, 7. -oid91,5.
Oligarchy 80; 81, I, 1. Ology 51, 5, a. Omega 2, a. Optic 78, 5; 78, 11. Optics 78, 5. * * Organ 54.
Ornithology 80. Orthodox 66 ; 67, II, 2 ; 68, 5. Orthodoxy 68, 7. Orthoepy 68, 11. Orthography 68, 11. Orthopedy 82, 6. Ovoid 91, 5.
Pachyderm 99, II, 6. Pachydermatous 100, 2. Paedagogue 80. Palimpsest 31, 6. Palindrome 31,6; 49; 51, 3. Palingenesis 31, 6; 96, 3. Palinode 29 ; 30, II, 4. Palsy 96, 7.
Pan- 110, 11. Panacea 110, 11. Pandemonium 110, 11. Panegyric 110, 11. Panevangelical 110, 11. Panoply 110, 11. Panorama 57, 2 ; 108; 110,11. Pan-Slavism 110, 11. Pantheism 110, 11. Pantheon 110, 11. Pantomime 78, 4; 110, 11. Pantophagous 110, 11. Para- 46, 5.
Parable 44; 46, 3; 60, 7. Parabolical 46, 3 ; 60, 7. Paradise 58. Paradox 68, 5.
Paragraph 44 ; 45, 1, 2 ; 46, 5. Paralysis 96, 7. Paralytic 96, 7. Paraphrase 105, 11. Parenthesis 100, 10, a. Parenthetic 100, 10, a. Parody 31, 7; 46,5. Pathetic 91, 10. Pathology 91, 10. Pathos 89. Patriarch 82, 1, b. Patronymic 91, 9. Pedagogue 80. Pedobaptist 82, 6. Perigee 56, II, 3. Perihelion 56, I, 3. Perimeter 54. Period 56, 1, 3. Periphery 82, 9,
374 INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES.
Periphrasis 105, 11. Periphrastic 105, 11. Phaenomenon 74, 11. Phantasm 74, 11. Phantasmagoria 108; 110, 1. Phantastic 74, 11. Phantasy 74, 11. Phantom 74, 11. Pharmacist 99, I, 6. Pharmacopoeia 100, 11. Pharmacy 98. Phase 74, 11. Phenomenon 72; 74, 11. Phil-, philo-, -phileSl, 6. Philadelphia 59, I, 3 ; 60, 2. Philanthropist 50, I, 4. Philanthropy 49 ; 51,6. Philharmonic 51, 6. Philhellenic 51, 6. . Philip 59, I, 4. Philology 51, 6. Philomath 108 ; 110, 9. Philosopher 67, II, 4. Philo-Turkish 51, 6. Philter 51, 6. Phonetic 36, 6. Phonetics 36, 6. Phonograph 34; 35, I, 2. Phonography 35, II, 7. Phonology 50, I, 3. Phonotype 78, 9. Phosphorus 82, 10. Photograph 80 ; 82, 10. Photolithograph 82, 10. Photometer 82, 10. Photosphere 82, 10.
Phrase 103; 105, 11.
Phraseology 105, 11.
Physic 96, 13.
Physical 94; 96, 13.
Physician 96, 13.
Physics 96, 13.
Physiognomy 96, 13.
Physiology 96, 13.
Piracy 110, 12.
Pirate 108 ; 110, 12.
Plaster 105, 9.
Plastic 105, 9.
Plutocracy 91 , 7.
Plutocrat 91, 7.
Pneumatic 91, 11.
Pneumonia 89.
Poem 50, II, 7.
Poesy 46, 4.
Poet 39; 44; 46, 4.
Poetry 46, 4.
Polemic-s 58.
Police 46, 2.
Policy 46, 2.
Politic 46, 2.
Political 46, 2.
Politics 44 ; 46, 2.
Polity 46, 2.
Poly- 91, 12.
Polychrome 90, I, 11 ; 91, 14.
Polygamy 89 ; 91, 2.
Polyglot 41, 1.
Polygon 82, 2.
Polyp 82, 7.
Polypus 82, 7.
Polytechnic 60, 8.
Polytheism 60, 3, c.
INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 375
Practical 108; 110, 13. Practice 110, 13. Pragmatic 108 ; 110, 13. Praxis 110, 13. Presbyter 72; 74,8. Prester 74, 8. Priest 74, 8. Prognosis 91, 13. Prognostic 91, 13. Prognosticate 91, 13. Program 89; 91, 4. Prologue 51, 5, a; 68,6. Prophecy 110, 16. Prophesy 110, 15. Prophet 110, 15. Prophetic 110, 15. Prosody 31, 7. Protagonist 86, 1. Prototype 76; 78, 9. Pseudonym 89; 91, 9. Psyche 49. Psychic 51, 8. Psychology 50, I, 6; 51, 8;
96, 13. Pyre 86, 8. Pyromancy 100, 7. Pyrotechnics 84; 86, 8.
Rehypothecate 100, 10, b.
Rhapsody 31, 7.
Rhetor 84.
Rhetoric 86, 9.
Rhinoceros 98 ; 99, 1, 5 ; 100, 6.
Rhododendron 54 ; 56, 1, 1.
Sarcasm 78, 6.
Sarcophagus 76; 78, 6. Sceptic 74, 9. Sceptre 54. Schism 108; 110, 14. Schismatic 110, 14. Scholar 36, 5. Scholastic 36, 5. Scholiast 36, 5. Scholium 36, 5. School 34; 36, 5. Scope 74, 9. Skeptic 72 ; 74, 9. Slavophile 51, 6. Sophia 66. Sophism 74, 10. Sophist 72; 74, 10. Sophistical 74, 10. Sophisticate 74, 10. Sophisticated 74, 10. Sophistry 74, 10. Spectroscope 74, 9. Sphere 39; 41, 3. Spheroid 91, 5. Static 103 ; 105, 5. Statics 105, 5. Stereopticon 78, 7. Stereoscope 78, 7. Stereotype 76 ; 77, II, 6 ; 78, 7. Story 34; 36, 3. Syllable 108 ; 110, 8. Syllabus 110, 8. Syllogism 78, 8. Symmetry 78, 8. Sympathy 91, 10. Symphony 78, 8. Synagogue 78, 8.
376 INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES.
|
Synchronism 78, 8. |
Theogony 91, 3. |
|
Synchronous 78, 8. |
Theology 58; 60, 3, a. |
|
Synod 78, 8. |
Theosoph66; 68, 12. |
|
Synonym 89; 91, 9. |
theosophist 68, 12. |
|
Synopsis 76 ; 78, 8. |
Theosophy 68, 12. |
|
Synoptic 78, 8. |
Thermal 54. |
|
Syntactic 96, 12. |
Thermometer 56, I, 4. |
|
Syntax 94; 96, 12. |
Thesis 98; 100, 10, a. |
|
Synthesis 98 ; 100, 10, a. |
Tome 103; 105, 10. |
|
System 105, 5. |
Tone 68, 9. |
|
Systematic 105, 5. |
Topography 58 ; 59, I, 4 |
|
Systematize 105, 5. |
Tragedy 31, 7. |
|
Systole 78, 8. |
Tricycle 80; 82, 8. |
|
Triglyph 96, 4. |
|
|
Tactic 96, 12. |
Trigonometry 82, 2. |
|
Tactics 94; 96, 12. |
Trilogy 82, 8. |
|
Tautology 67, I, 10; 68, 3, b. |
Tripod 82, 7. |
|
Taxidermy 100, 2. |
Trisyllable 110, 8. |
|
Technical 60, 8. |
Trope 54. |
|
Technique 60, 8. |
Trophy 57, 7. |
|
Technology 58 ; 59, II, 6 ; 60, 8. |
Tropic 57, 7. |
|
Telegram 89. |
Turcophile 51, 6. |
|
Telegraph 35, II, 1. |
Type 76; 78,9. |
|
Telephone 34; 35,1, 1. |
Typical 78, 9. |
|
Telescope 74, 9. |
Typography 77, II, 3. |
|
Theatre 29; 54; 57,6. |
|
|
Theism 60, 3, a. |
Unsophisticated 74, 10. |
|
Theist 60, 3, a. |
|
|
Thematic 100, 10, c. |
Zodiac 105, 3. |
|
Theme 100, 10, c. |
Zoology 103. |
|
Theocracy 91, 7. |
Zoophyte 105, 3. |
|
Theodore 60, 3, c. |
Zootomy 105, 10. |
GREEK AND LATIN.
THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. First Lessons in Greek, with special reference to the etymology of English words of Greek origin. By T. D. GOODELL, Ph.D. i6mo.
This book attempts to teach that limited portion of Greek which col- lege men remember after they have forgotten vastly more. That is the portion which even those who wish to banish the study of Greek from our schools would admit can least easily be spared, and that portion is essential to a ready command of the English tongue.
The first idea of the book arose from hearing a woman of unusual in- telligence and considerable reading, talking about altruists, when she meant agnostics. Similar confusions — confusing, ultimately, to the speaker, and constantly to the listener — are of not infrequent occurrence in conversation on topics interesting only to the 4 1 educated. " Moreover, much as the Greek element of English appears in conversation, it ap- pears much more in literature, and carries many of the key-words to the thought. He to whom these key-words are not alive with meaning is at great disadvantage. Many a man who thinks he has retained nothing whatever from his Greek, except a lively sense of the exact meaning of such words as metaphysics, agnostic, synthetic, anarchy, Russophobe, nevertheless regards that sense as an intellectual acquisition worth all it cost. But after all, how great the cost of this one acquisition has been ! Surely this one result of the study of Greek can be reached without de- voting to it years of time. And yet mere dictionaries or etymological handbooks alone cannot give what is wanted. It is not enough to read or be told, even repeatedly, that synthetic is derived from such and such Greek words, and therefore has such and such a meaning. The words in their Greek form, and with some fragment of their Greek associations, must become somewhat familiar before one can be sensible of that grasp of their English derivatives which will enable one to use those derivatives correctly and fearlessly.
The Greek vocabulary surviving in English can be so presented in a sort of Greek primer, with its relations to English so pointed out, that even young pupils will find the study far from dull ; and thus, of just that part of Greek which they will always use in reading current litera- ture, they will be apt to remember more than the much-abused " average college graduate."
This book tries to accomplish these results without waste of time and brain-tissue in * * mental discipline" of doubtful value. But the writer has no faith in royal roads to learning, does not profess to have compounded an educational nostrum which will, in a few weeks' time, electrify a boy or girl into the mastery of a difficult tongue, and does believe heartily in giving an important place in our educational system, for some genera- tions yet, to the patient and thorough study of the Greek language and literature. This book is not intended to lessen the number of those who shall enter upon such a course of study, but it is hoped that it may increase that number. Yet it is not a sufficient introduction to the reading of a classic author, and hence is not a rival of the various ex- cellent " First Lessons " in use. In putting these ideas into practice the material has been grouped about a grammatical outline, because the thorough memorizing of a few inflections will save time and labor in the end, by enabling the pupil from the outset to make a certain limited use of the language on rational principles. In no other way can the re- quisite familiarity with the Greek words be as easily gained. Besides,
GREEK AND LA TIN.
while the book is intended primarily for those who without it would never study Greek at all, those have also been kept in mind who will afterwards continue the study. Yet with the possible exception of the dual number, the memorizing of which is but a trifle, no feature what- ever has been introduced which could involve labor outside of the main purpose, as set forth above.
AN INTRODUCTION TO ATTIC GREEK. By JABEZ BROOKS, Professor in the University of Minnesota. I2mo.
Presents essentials in such manner that the learner may enter without needless detention upon an intelligent and successful reading of Attic Greek.
The fundamental idea — that nine years' experience in applying has shown to be practicable — is to begin the study of Greek with a con- nected text, and to so work this text over as to derive from it all the grammar involved, and then to attach to the framework thus formed whatever further grammatical apparatus is necessary. In this way the learner's activities are incited to discover for himself the laws of con- struction, and the author studied is made to appear as their true source.
The first chapter of the Anabasis has been found to contain a stock of words sufficiently varied to illustrate all the essential forms of the accidence, and is accordingly taken as a basis for work.
Conversation and dictation exercises, appealing to the learner's powers of imitation, form an integral part of the plan, and, it has been found, give him a natural and unconscious grip of the language exceeding that obtained by any other exercise.
GREEK LITERATURE. By THOMAS SARGENT PERRY. 8vo.
A compendious philosophical account of the growth of Greek litera- ture and of its relations to the physical surroundings and political and social history of the people. In this setting appear the outlines of the great masterpieces, with English translations of their more interesting or representative passages. The comparative method is followed, the English reader's familiarity with his own literature being made to help along his acquaintance with Greek authors. It is believed that the college-bred man who got from his study of these classics in the origi- nal but faint and distorted views of their beauties will here find assist- ance in extending and organizing his knowledge ; and also that the man who knows little or no Greek may by this book put himself in closer contact with the spirit of Greek literature than most students of the language have attained.
PREPARATORY LATIN AND GREEK TEXTS. Re-
quired for Admission to American Colleges. i6mo. pp. 767. Latin and Greek parts can also be had separately.
The Latin part contains five books of Caesar, seven of Cicero's Ora- tions, 177 pages of selections from Ovid's Metamorphoses, and six books of the JEneid and the Bucolics. The Greek part contains three books of the Anabasis and the same number of the Iliad.
GREEK AND LATIN.
SCRIVENER'S (F. H. A.) GREEK TESTAMENT.—
(H KAINH 4IA&HKH.) Novum Testamentum. Textfts
Stephanici A.D. 1550, cum Variis Lectionibus Editionum
Bezae, Elzeviri, Lachmanni, Tischendorfii, Tregellesii,
Westcott-Hortii, Versionis Anglicanae emendatorum, Cu-
rante, F. H. A. SCRIVENER, A.M., D.C.L., LL.D. Accedunt
Parallela S. Scripturae Loca. i6mo. 598 pp. Cloth.
The text is that of the Authorized Version (Stephens, 1550), with the
various readings approved by Westcott and Hort, and those finally
adopted by the Revisers. Dr. Scrivener has added the Eurelian Canons
and Capitula, and references specially bearing on usage of words. The
passages in which variations occur are printed in black type so that the
eye can readily distinguish them.
SUETONIUS'S LIVES OF THE C>ESARS.— GAI SVE- TONI TRANQVILLI DE VITA CAESARVM. LIBRI Dvo. Edited, with an Introduction and Commentary, by HARRY THURSTON PECK, Ph.D., Professor of the Latin Language and Literature in Columbia College. I2mo, pp. xxxv, 215. It is difficult to ascertain the reason why the Lives of Suetonius have been suffered to remain so long unedited by English-speaking scholars. No work of equal size that has come down to us from classical antiquity possesses a more real interest or a more enduring value. In the his- torical significance of the period that it covers, in the light it throws upon so many points of Roman custom, and in the impartiality, thoroughness, and conscientious accuracy of its author, it has always been regarded as a most important source of information concerning the men and measures of the Early Empire. It is also a rich mine of personal anecdote, giving innumerable glimpses of many famous Ro- mans, divested of the stage properties with which we almost always find them in the pages of the professional historians.
It is, then, with the hope of gaining for the Roman Plutarch a wider circle of appreciative readers that the present volume is given to the public. The first two books of the Lives have been selected because they have to do with that period of transition which, with its tremendous moral, social, and political revolution, forms perhaps the most remark- able era of Roman history ; and also because their subject is the per- sonality of the two great Caesars who laid the foundation of an empire whose influence is still moulding the development of modern Europe, as its grandeur is still potent in the realm of imagination.
The text of the present edition is based upon the text of C. L. Roth (Leipzig, 1886). Some variations from his readings have been noted and defended in the Commentary. To obviate any reasonable ob- jections to Suetonius's plainness of speech, a few sentences have been relegated to the notes, but without any alteration in the original num- bering of the sections. These textual omissions have been made with a sparing hand ; for experience has only served to strengthen the con- viction of the editor, that the application to a classic author of any ex- tended system of expurgation is at once a moral blunder and a literary crime.
HENRY HOLT & CO., PUBLISHERS, N. Y.
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW
AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS
WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN ^ ^ THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY
WILL INCREASE TO SO CENTS ON THE FOURTH
|
DAY AND TO $1.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. |
|
|
MAR 131935 |
|
|
4K. 14 fo-r |
|
|
>- AJ/ • r"r*i% i*f ^nc*c |
|
|
p| FEB 71955 ^H \ it |
§ |
|
t\95S^ |
|
|
REC^D LD |
|
|
AUG 1 1 wfin |
|
|
*•* W U 1 I */l AV A ^ 9flfijl |
|
|
KHT 0 AI ^uu^ |
|
|
^ *v^ |
|
|
i |
|
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY